Home

MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual ANRITSU

1. OTDR Standard AUTO13100006 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 9 00h_ 80 Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 1 5 8357km Bw 0 163 3k kk 0 335 1 956 2 12 1517km 1 682 39 133 0 347 4 314 3 32 2545km 1 269 51 180 0 365 13 343 Analyze 4 52 4852km Em Fiber End 33 351 0 358 21 845 Cursor Event Auto Zoom off Cale ORL Analysis o 25 50 75 100km On A 12 1517 km Total Events B 55 8515 km 30 558 Fiber Length 52 4852 km More gt gt A gt B 43 6998 km Refi 39 143 Total Loss 21 845 dB Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event An ORL value with a lt before the reading and an S following the reading indicates that saturation was encountered for the selected area of the trace This implies that the actual ORL value is at most the displayed value but is probably less An ORL value with a lt but without an S indicates that there were insufficient points per pulsewidth to obtain an accurate ORL value 2 Point amp dB km Loss 7 16 The combined 2 Point amp dB km loss mode displays both loss values at the same time The loss values separated by a are displayed in the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 See 2 Point Loss on page 7 5 and dB km Loss on page 7 6 for details on the individual loss modes To perform a 2 Pt amp dB km loss measurement 1 Select Display From Ori
2. Fiber Visualizer 2013 Apr 19 13 03 ae WL nm DR km PWR US i AVG Sec starts E kE KM ooer ndar soft Events HR Distance Range Resolution Pulse width Average Time gt 15 Sec High Density 200 ns 30 Sec 500 ns 1 Min Reflect dB dB km Enhanced Range ER PON High Dynamic Range Standard HR High Resolution Short dead zone If f1 is grayed out only Standard HR is available for the selected PW epo Figure 5 21 Dead zone Mode Selecting screen Setting the Enhanced Range Mode To Set the Enhanced Range Mode 1 Pressing Test Parameters f4 brings up Dead zone f1 Press Dead zone f1 and set Enhanced Range ER 3 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the red legend on the Range Pulse Width softkey displays the newly selected Dead zone mode e HR Standard mode e ER Enhanced Range mode Note e The Enhanced Range mode is only available if an SM unit is fitted The Dead zone f1 key becomes unavailable if an MM unit is fitted e Ifthe range of the selected pulse width does not fall between 50 ns to 2000 ns the f1 key is grayed out and set to Standard HR MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Setting the IOR and BSC Use the IOR BSC dialog box to select one of the pre set Fiber Types which automatically sets the IOR Index of Refraction and BSC Backscatter Coefficient for the selected fiber type
3. Se Fiber Visualizer 2013 Apr 14 11 18 g amp QH WL 1310 nm SM DR 5km PW 100 ns ER AVG 60 Sec y H Baa m 42039 km Test Mode Events 3 Marker 0 0000 2 0001 km A Wavelength GBH 1310 start 13 141 29 Fiber End dB Test EET TE 0 5 km 3 ns HR Reflect dB dB km ek kk 0 652 I0R BSC C 1 467700 E nm Pass Fail 78 50 aH Total Loss dB 24 224 FAIL ORL dB 35 441 E 6H Fiber Visualizer Trace Thresholds Figure 5 9 Fiber Visualizer screen Measurement Conditions Overview of the fiber under test Trace events Test results Softkeys NA wR WO N e Over view of the fiber under test The total length of the measured fiber a count of events the position of the displayed event and the event point on the fiber are displayed 5 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Trace events The automatically detected points such as connection point splice points or splitter are indicated by the icons Event point is displayed above the icon loss is displayed under the icon The icon in red indicates the loss exceeds the threshold level Test Results The total loss ORL the reflection of the selected event and the trace are displayed at each wavelength Pass Fail Thresholds Events whose loss exceeds the Pass Fail Thresholds are highlighted in red Fiber Visualizer 2013 Apr 18 16 08 g WL 1310nmsSM_ DR 5km i P
4. 13 0 26 0 39 0 52 0 A 0 0000 km 2 Pt Loss fe etfs Fst B 40 335Lkm 28 148 WL 4310 nm 5M DR 100 1 km A gt B 40 3351 km Refi PW 4us HR AVG 8 15 Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 6 18 Test in Progress screen OTDR Construction mode 1 Laser On icon 2 Softkeys Laser On Icon The flashing Laser On icon item 1 in Figure 6 18 appears whenever a laser is firing In OTDR Construction mode the Laser On icon appears on the Test in Progress screen only MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 49 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Test in Progress Softkeys The following two softkeys are active on the Test in Progress screen Cancel f2 cancels the pending test and advances both the Connect Fiber number and the filename auto increment number by one each time Cancel is pressed Note If the Number of Fibers field see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 is set to 1 pressing Cancel returns you to the OTDR Construction Setup screen Press Preview 3 to set the Preview mode to On or Off e When the Preview is set to On once a test is completed the Trace screen remains static permitting review of the Trace and Event Table e When the Preview is set to Off Construction mode does not display the Event Table Instead it automatically saves the test data and starts the next test 6 50 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operati
5. 00000008 12 1 Performance Test ccececceeeceeneceeeeaeeeeeaeenaeseeeeaeeeeseaeeeeeeaaeseeseaeeaeeeateas 12 1 Optical Output and Wavelength of OTDR cccceeeteeeseeeeteeeeees 12 14 ARAO k a ARTA TTT A T 12 16 Dynamic Range one way back scattered light dynamic range test 12 18 Distance Measurement ACCULaCy cceeeeeneceeeeeeneeeeeeeenaaeeeseeeaeeeeeeenaees 12 20 Loss Measurement Accuracy Linearity ccccccccesseeceeeeseneeeeeessnaees 12 22 Optical Output Level and Wavelength of Visual Fault Locator VLD option OO2 OF 102 cas cceksdescccaseeh AE EA eustantieleaaaete 12 24 Optical Output and Wavelength of Optical Light Source for Fiber Identifi COLON shia A E ee eee Aare ee 12 25 Measurement Accuracy of the Optical Power Meter cseee 12 26 Calibrations e i 5 aeria aie aa eE weicths anana arnasia Taa Ploeg rai a aiana ate 12 28 Backscatter Coefficient Level Calibration ccccccseessesseeeeeeeeeeees 12 28 Optical Power Meter Measurement Accuracy Calibration 12 29 Performance Test Result Sheet c ccccsecccecececeeeeeeseeeeaeeseeeees 12 30 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual XVII Chapter 13 Maintenance 22 ccceseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeseees 13 1 Optical Connector Optical Adapter Cleaning 0 nenene 13 1 Cleaning the MT9083 Series Connector Ferrule End Surface 13 1 Cleaning the Optical Adapt
6. Note This softkey is only active when the loss mode is set to ORL Press f5 to toggle the Analysis function On and Off The Event Table for the current trace is displayed when the red legend on the softkey reads On and the table is hidden when the legend reads Off Press 6 to return to the Level One softkeys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Level Four Softkeys The Level Four softkeys provide trace editing functions and are only available when the current trace displays an Event Table Press f1 to add a new event to the current event table See Adding an Event on page 4 43 Note The Add Event softkey is only active in Splice Loss mode Press f2 to edit an event in the current event table See Editing an Event on page 4 45 Note The Edit Event softkey is only active in Splice Loss mode Press 3 to delete an event from the current event table See Deleting an Event on page 4 49 Press 6 to return to the Level One softkeys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 33 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Cursor Softkeys The Cursor softkeys are accessed from the Level Three softkeys by pressing Cursors f4 Toggle f1 so that the red legend on the softkey reads Locked The distance between Cursor A and Cursor B will remain fixed when Cursor B is moved See Locking and Unlocking Cursors on page 5 36 for
7. 37 FC Option number for 037 038 039 38 ST 040 043 39 DIN 40 SC Option 007 Connector adapter LP 43 HMS 10 A Connector name for FC ST SC DIN Option 004 Max 75 g Option 005 Max 210 g Option 007 Max 65 g Operating temperature 0 to 50 C lt 80 No condensation humidity MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 19 Appendix A Specifications Visual Fault Locate Option 002 tem Specifications Remake Ore o Duomen pere se Optical safety IEC Pub 60825 1 2007 Class 3R THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO 50 DATED JUNE 24 2007 Operating temperature humidity 0 to 50 C lt 80 no condensation o A 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications Parts and accessories MT9083 Series Operation Manual CD version Specifications W 2838 AE Note 1 MT9083 Series Operation Manual W 2839 AE Printed Version MT9083 Series Quick User s Guide Printed Version MT9083 Series Remote Control W 3272AE Operation Manual W 3312AE Printed Version MxX900021A Remote Screen W 3327AE Software Operation Manual Printed Version FC type adapter J0057 Optical fiber cable with FC PC at J0635 O Note 2 both ends for SM fiber Replaceable optical FC connector J0617B Replaceable optical ST connector 0618D Replaceable optical DIN connector conne
8. 6 13 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 51 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Events whose loss equals or exceeds the Pass Fail Thresholds see pages 6 14 6 17 are highlighted in red in the Event Table No Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 5 7763km a kkk 0 222 12 1502km 39 901 0 219 32 2370km 0 759 49 072 0 209 52 4770km Fiber End 31 751 0 216 Figure 6 20 Event Table The Event Table displays the following Event number e Distance to the event e Type of event e dB loss for the event Reflectance if the event is a reflective event e dB km e Cumulative loss dB If the measured value cannot be obtained for example because a fault point is being approximated this is displayed as Distance to Event The Distance field Dist km on the Event Table represents the distance from the start of the trace to the start of the feature This value is reported in the Distance Display Units selected on the setups Preferences screen for example km Types of Events Reported Reflective Event Reflection from an splice point such as a Fresnel reflection caused by a mechanical splice or connector Non Reflective Event EM Non reflective events include such low loss events as fusion splices and macro bends 6 52 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Grouped Event Events spaced too close to each other
9. A 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications MT9083B2 ACCESS Master Dead zone Temperature 25 C Back scattered light Deviation 0 5 dB IOR 1 500000 Opt 053 055 1 31 pm lt 7 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 55 pm lt 8 0 m Return loss 40 dB 1 65 pm lt 11 0 m Opt 055 only 1 31 um lt 5 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 55 pm lt 5 5 m Return loss 55 dB 1 65 um lt 6 5 m Opt 055 only Opt 056 Pulse width 10 ns Return loss 40 dB Pulse width 10 ns Return loss 55 dB Opt 057 1 31 pm lt 8 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 55 pm lt 9 0 m Return loss 40 dB 1 625 pm lt 12 0 m 1 31 pm lt 6 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 55 pm lt 6 5 m Return loss 55 dB 1 625 pm lt 7 5 m Opt 058 1 31 pm lt 9 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 49 um lt 10 0 m Return loss 40 dB 1 55 pm lt 10 0 m 1 625 pm lt 13 0 m 1 31 pm lt 7 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 49 pm lt 7 5 m Return loss 55 dB 1 55 um lt 7 5 m 1 625 um lt 8 5 m MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 5 Appendix A Specifications MT9083B2 ACCESS Master item Specifications Remark Dead zone 1 31 pm lt 7 0 m Pulse width 10 ns Back scattered light IOR 1 500000 1 31 pm lt 5 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 0 85 pm lt 4 0 m Pulse width 3 ns Typ 3 0 m Return loss 40 dB 1 3 pm lt 5 0 m Typ 4 0 m Dead zone lt 1 0 m Typ 0 8 m The width for 1 5 dB lower than the peak value of the reflec
10. cccccccccceeeccceeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeaaeesneeeeeeaaeeneaees 3 27 Loading Firmware Data cccccccsseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 3 27 Updating Firmware Data ccccceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeneeeeee 3 27 Restore Defaults tit aaen i ainsate a parana Na E aE ai aisis 3 28 Formatting Internal Memory cccccsseccecesssseneeeeeeseeeeeesesseeeeeeesseeaeeess 3 28 Erase Internal Memory ccccsssscceccsssseeeeecsssneeeecseccaeeeeseeenaeeeeesssseeeeeess 3 29 Saving a Screen Image to a File ccccccceesseeceseeeeeeeeseneeeeesssseneeees 3 31 Renaming a File 0a edie ried eli wuaintienesdeseianant ae 3 32 Clearing Word Buttons cccccccessssseeceeseeneeeeeeeseeaeeeesseaaaeeeesseaaeeeeesenaees 3 40 New e Le L T aE E EE E EEE E 3 40 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode c1 scsssceesseeeseesseeenseeeeeenes 4 1 et T VOW EEE EEE AE EE EEEE EEEE E E T 4 1 Starting OTDR Standard Mode ccccccscccccessseeeeeeessneeeeeseneeeeeees 4 1 Setups OTDR Standard Mode 0 ccccccscceccesseeeeeesssneeeeessneeeeenes 4 2 Entering OTDR Standard SCtupS ccccccssssseeecesssseeeeeesesseeeeessesteeeeesees 4 2 General SQtUPS siasi oan teenie ier aa a A e hs eee ennsdiedd 4 2 Preferences 1 2 ccccccccccccccccccccccsccseecesesseseceseeececusueeueuseesueeeseceeeseesaeeueeueess 4 3 Distance Display Units nsii apean at aan 4 4 elna oE E A A E 4 4
11. 0 ccccccceece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeeaes 8 34 Saving Loss Test Set Files eccceecceeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeaaeeea 8 34 SOMtING FILES were et eevee iis ave a 8 35 Deleting E EE RTEA 8 35 Copying Files ns ctkoniiie eect ea ath aie eave eee 8 37 Loading a Loss Table from Mass Storage csceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 8 39 Printing Loss Tables rnai eel iene E e N 8 40 Connecting the Printer cccccecsseeeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeenee 8 40 Printing a Loss Table sasining eepe hai anaes 8 40 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source COU cscs o sic Sees sas oa ae a teed O E Rees aeedee lees 9 1 Optical Power Meter OPM Overview 0 cccccscccccsssseeeeessstneeesees 9 1 Accessing the Optical Power Meter ccccccccesceeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeees 9 1 Power Meter Screen i i esiet naa eaaa Naaa aaa daai 9 2 Wavelength Indicator ssssseeesseesssesssieesrissrirsssrnssrnnesnnsrsnnnrnnnsrnnnrnnns 9 2 Power REadiNG inie epaia aaea ee aana dec eebideeneeeiviteess 9 3 Range Indicator ssssssssssssseessrsessressssssssssrnnsrnnsstnsssnnnesnnenennnsnnnnnnnntenae 9 3 Reference Field v 26 iiad heey a ena 9 3 Threshold Field ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeaaeesnaeeeeenaeeeee 9 3 LOSS RAGING reai cei seta hny aaaea aia deat nE eerie tees 9 4 Port Connection INGICATOM eect ee eeeeeeeeee teeta eee eeaeeeeeeeetecaeee
12. Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 9 8 on page 9 20 or the Load screen see Figure 9 9 on page 9 25 2 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the file to be deleted 3 Press the Down Arrow key to open the selected folder directory 4 Press More f6 5 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off 6 Press More f6 7 Press Delete f5 The following message appears 8 Press Yes f1 to delete all files in the selected directory or press No f2 Copying Files to cancel without deleting the files Use either the Save screen see Figure 9 8 on page 9 20 or the Load screen see Figure 9 9 on page 9 25 to copy data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can copy a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To copy a file l Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 9 8 on page 9 20 or the Load screen see Figure 9 9 on page 9 25 Press More gt gt f6 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste
13. Sorting Files The Sort function allows you to change the order in which files are listed in mass storage files saved to the MT9083 Series internal memory or to a USB memory stick Files can be sorted by type Name or Time Date in ascending or descending order To set the Sort type 1 At the completion of a Construction mode test the Save screen appears see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 Note You can only access the Save screen in OTDR Construction mode when File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 23 on page 6 61 2 Press Sort f3 The Sort By dialog appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 G 99 00h 80 File Name Medium Internal Memory 11 Files 1150 MB Free Save Trace Folder File Name ore zk Date Time Name aj Header NearFar13100ther 001 9 APEI Date Time 12 11 22 12 04 AUTO15500002 SOR 12 11 22 11 48 AUTO16250001 SOR 12 44 22 11 47 ayn AUTO16250000 S0R 12 44 22 11 37 AUTO13100000 SOR 12 11 22 11 37 AUTO15500001 SOR 12 11 22 11 33 AUTO15500000 SOR 12 11 22 11 28 ABE AUTO15500004 SOR 12 11 22 11 18 AUTO15500003 SOR 12 11 22 11 03 AUTO13100002 S0R 12 11 22 10 55 Delete AUTO13100001 SOR 12 11 22 10 51 More gt gt z Selected File Size Figure 6 29 Sort By Dialog 3 Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the white arrow so that it is positioned to the left of the first selection in the desired pane of the dialog Sort
14. ccccscceeseeeseeeees 6 36 He derSiern a aavaddvevanwedustoacaca A 6 37 Template i rearen aaa sect lactis aanre e aeaa Eea aariaa eRe eee 6 39 Selecting Template File cceecsceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeensaees 6 40 Event Determination ccccsssesccecessssseeeeeseenseseeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeuseseeeeees 6 41 Trace Priori naaa lila ee Shee eee 6 41 Distance and Absolute Distance csssseeeceeeeeeseseeeneeeeeeeeaeanaes 6 43 Distance Helix F tt naa na fon tusvasddvavaveadectavsutuacdrsiwseadeens 6 43 Template Settings Screen softkey ccecceccseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeaes 6 46 OTDR Construction Connect Fiber Screenn 0 eeseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 47 OTDR Construction Connect Fiber Screen SoftkeyS ccccscsesseeeees 6 47 Changing the Connect Fiber Number cccceeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 48 Test In Progress Screen ee ceececccecee eee eeeeeeeeeaeneeeeeeeeeseesseeeeeeaneaeeeeneeess 6 49 Laser Onl ICON pereira onasan aeie aoe araia EA a Eei araa aidaa retia ar ienis 6 49 Test in Progress SOftKCYS siisii iernare inana iia diuran tid eain iaa aaun a a 6 50 Test Results Screen OTDR Construction cccceseeeeeeees 6 51 Ev nt Tales orainera narea aeaaaee ea taa Eiaa aa 6 51 Distance t Event irpta ontrei aiaa a iaa poa aiaia piai ieaiai 6 52 Types of Events Reported c cceccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeteeeeeeeeteaeees 6 52 K
15. s4 Connect to the USB Down port Figure 4 42 Connecting the BL 80RII Printer Printing a Trace File Make sure that the Printer setup parameters are set as desired on the setups General screen See Printer and Paper Feed on page 3 9 for details To print trace files 1 Connect the BL 80RII or SD1 31 printers to the MT9083 Series as shown in Figure 4 42 and then power up the printer 2 Perform the desired test or recall the desired trace file from mass storage 3 Press the Print key The following message appears Output screen image to a printer or as an image file Please select output type using the function keys 4 Press Printer f1 The message changes to Please wait Printing The MT9083 Series returns to the Trace grid when the printout is completed Saving a Trace File as an Image File See Saving a Screen Image to a File on page 3 31 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 105 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 106 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Overview Fiber Visualizer mode provides a one button test to determine the end fault location of a fiber Press the Start key to start a test The test proceeds through the following e Performs a connection check e Selects the test parameters e Runs the test e Reports the test results in both summary form and in an event table
16. with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessories and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or
17. 1 The remaining battery charge and estimated available time values cannot be guaranteed The estimated available time may differ from the actual available time depending on the battery pack or the condition of the MT9083 Series Remember that these values should be considered as guidelines only If you attempt to update the unit s firmware when the remaining battery charge is less than 10 the following message appears Battery is running low immediately connect the AC charger Connect the AC charger adapter as instructed by the message Charging the battery pack starts when you plug in the AC charger adapter If the power to the MT9083 Series is left on the pack will not be charged fully charging will stop after about 6 hours For further details on the screen display refer to Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Important Information about the Battery Pack If you use a battery pack that has not been charged a sufficient number of times the charging rate may not reach 100 even after completion of charging The battery pack must not be charged for more than 24 hours Overcharging the battery pack may shorten its life The AC charger adapter must not be left connected for a long time with the battery pack plugged into the MT 9083 Series The battery pack is a consumable item although it can be charged discharged about 300 to 500 times If the actual available time shortens suddenly even after the battery p
18. 1 Wavelength Distance measurement accuracy Loss measurement accuracy Linearity ion Light Source output 1310 nm 1550 nm OLS OPM Measurement accuracy OPM Option Option 007 VLD L P Option 004 Option 005 Center wavelength Optical output power Note Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 1m 3x measurement distance x 10 marker resolution 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is greater 5 1 5 dBm 1310 30 nm 1550 30 nm 6 5 5 5 5 650 nm 15 nm 0 3 dBm OLS Optical light source for fiber identification Pulse width 1 ps Indicative Pee Pulse width 20 ps Distance range 100 km Average time 180 seconds 1550 nm CW 20 dBm 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 25 C When Option 002 installed OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 31 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083A2 Option 055 Specification Results Remarks Wavelength 1310 nm 25 nm fe al Pulse width 1 ps 550m 1550m 250m 1 1650 nm 1645 to 1655 nm Pulse width 1 ps Wavelength range of 20 dB less than peak value Peak value 1650 nm 15 dBm or less Optical output Pubewiak Om fides S E E CC S E E a Bom ses wow fos o S pods e A C e a Dynamic range Wavelength um 1 55 1 65 Pulse width 20 ps S N 1
19. 1 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight Password Lifespan 2 Press the Enter key to display the Password Lifespan dialog box 3 Press Reset Expiration Date f2 to reset the expiration date The new expiration date is displayed at Expiration Date 3 24 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Viewing the access log file An access log file is created automatically if Password Protect is On The log format is as follows 12 Sep 2012 17 30 30 POWER ON User 12 Sep 2012 17 33 40 OTDR TEST 12 Sep 2012 17 40 40 OTDR TEST 12 Sep 2012 17 50 20 OTDR TEST 12 Sep 2012 18 00 30 POWER OFF Figure 3 12 Access log entry formats Note The system capacity is 1 000 log entries Once this limit is reached newer entries will overwrite entries starting with the oldest To access the access log file ie p SN e Login with the Administrator Password Press the File key on the Top Menu screen to display the Load screen Set Internal Memory to Medium Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the file named MT9083_Access_Log txt Press More f6 then press Copy f1 Connect the USB memory stick to the unit Set USB Memory to Medium Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to select highlight the copy destination folder Press Paste f2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 25 Chapter 3 General Opera
20. Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Distance Measurement Accuracy Measure the optical fiber whose length and refraction index are known then perform a horizontal axis i e measurement distance accuracy test This is not required for other ranges when this test is performed at a certain distance range Connect the devices as shown in the following figure MT9083 Series SM Optical Fiber 2 km or GI Fiber 2 km 4 Fresnel Reflection Figure 12 8 Distance Measurement Accuracy Test Connection Diagram Test Procedure 1 At the Top Menu screen select OTDR Standard and then press the Enter key the OTDR Standard Trace screen appears 2 With the Level One softkeys displayed press the following softkeys a Wavelength f3 and set the desired wavelength See Setting the Source Wavelength on page 4 68 b Range Pulse width f4 and set the Distance Range to 5 km and then select the desired Pulse Width See Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width on page 4 68 3 Press More f6 to display the Level Two softkeys and then press the following softkeys a Average Time f1 to set the desired averaging time See Setting the Average Time Average Count on page 4 71 b IOR BSC f2 to set the IOR Index of Refraction to the known IOR of the test fiber See Setting the IOR and BSC on page 4 73 4 Press More f6 twice to return to the Level One softkeys and then press Test f1
21. Connect to the USB Down port Figure 8 15 Connecting the BL 80RII Printer Printing a Loss Table Make sure that the Printer setup parameters are set as desired on the setups General screen See Printer and Paper Feed on page 3 9 for details To print a Loss Table 1 Connect the BL 80RII printer to the MT9083 Series as shown in Figure 8 15 and then power up the printer 2 Perform the desired test or recall the desired Loss Table from mass storage 3 Press the Print key The following message is displayed Output screen image to a printer or as an image file Please select output type using the function keys Press Printer f1 The message changes to Please wait Printing The MT9083 Series returns to the Loss Table screen when the printout is completed 8 40 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS In addition to its OTDR functions the MT9083 Series also provides an optical power meter OPM function which allows checking of optical power levels and an optical light source OLS function required for fiber identification measurement Optical Power Meter OPM Overview The optical communications power level from a station can be measured using the optical power meter function Breakage loss increases and other optical fiber conditions can be checked by measuring the optical communications power level Accessing the Opti
22. Figure 6 15 Header screen Note When the lt AUTO gt designator is displayed see Figure 6 15 the Fiber ID field is auto populated starting with the number set in the Start Number field on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 If you replace the lt AUTO gt designator with a specific number that number will be used in all subsequent headers until OTDR Construction mode is re entered from the Top Menu MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 37 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 38 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired field and then press the Enter key The Text Entry dialog box appears see Figure If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 3 to enter the name using the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to return to the Header screen Repeat steps 2 until all desired text entry fields on the Header screen are edited Press the f6 key to close the Header and return to the Save screen Text Entry dialog box 2012 Jul 1 10 00 es 9 00h 80 4 Unit Header Customer Small Letter File Header Data Flag MAX 30 Genie iD EE a ta Fiber ID ZA GEOG oon Start Location Symbols womoedl Tete le fo ef el Operator Oooo Backspace OK 3 Use the Up
23. For each template non end event that is propagated to the target trace the target trace event s loss value is computed using the adjusted template event distance and LSA cursors Table 4 2 Resultant Target Trace Events shows examples of resultant target trace events for the three merge priority states Template On Merge Off Merge On Trace Priority Off Merge On Trace Priority On MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 63 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Table 4 2 Resultant Target Trace Events Sea ee tn ee ee Trace Event Event _ Merge On Merge On Location Location Template On Trace Trace Priority On Priority Off Distance and Absolute Distance The Percent Distance and Absolute Distance define the size of the correlation window which determines how close together events must be to correlate The size of the window is defined to be MINIMUM Percent Template Event Distance Absolute Distance To set Distance 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Distance field 2 Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value from 0 0 to 100 0 in the field 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen To set Absolute Distance 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Absolute Distance field When the distance display units are set to km 2 Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value from
24. Start Number 1310 1 AutoSave The number that auto increment will begin with oe Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 4 7 AutoSave Screen Auto Filename Parameters 4 24 The Auto Filename parameters allow you to enter a base filename which is used to generate sequentially numbered filenames The Auto Filename parameters include Enabled AutoSave Directory Base Filename Start Number Enabled Auto Filename Set this field to On to automatically generate a filename when a save is performed or set the field to Off so a filename is not automatically generated when a save is performed To turn the Auto Filename feature On or Off MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Enabled and then press the Enter key The Enable dialog appears Highlight the desired selection On or Off 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to the desired setting Note The status of the Auto Filename Enabled field is automatically set to On when the AutoSave Enabled field is set to On See Enabled AutoSave on page 4 28 for details AutoSave Directory The AutoSave Directory field allows you to select the directory into which AutoSave will save files To select the AutoSave directory 1 Use the
25. Starting Fiber Visualizer Mode To start the Fiber Visualizer mode 1 Press the Top Menu key 2 Highlight Fiber Visualizer then press the Enter key The initial Fiber Visualizer screen appears and the measurement starts when the Start key is pressed and the fault points in the fiber are shown by icons MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 1 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Setups Fiber Visualizer WL k k nm 2013 Apr 18 11 05 DR km PW gt eR US AVG Sec starts kk E Km Test Mode Auto Events Press the Start button for the test Wavelength 1310 Test Reflect dB dB km I0R BSC 1 467700 78 50 Pass Fail Wavelength nm Total Loss dB ORL dB CTT Fiber Visualizer Thresholds i Figure 5 1 Initial Fiber Visualizer Mode screen Fiber Visualizer Mode Setups for the Fiber Visualizer mode are accessed via the Setup key This section allows you to customize the preferences and parameters for a given data collection or a series of collections Entering Fiber Visualizer Setups 1 Start Fiber Visualizer mode The Fiber Visualizer screen appears 2 Press the Setup key The following Setup screens are available e General f1 e Preferences 1 2 f2 e Preferences 2 2 f3 e Thresholds f4 e AutoSave f5 e About f6 Pres
26. accuracy 20 dBm OPM Option Option 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C Center 650 nm 15 nm When Option 002 wavelength installed Optical output 0 3 dBm power Note 1 OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode 2 Note that the measurement port varies according to the measurement wavelength MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 43 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083C2 Option053 Testers Specification Results Remas ee ie e a poms is A Sons is id a iid poons ions SiO ow poso o po a E iP itm fis ts i io Wavelength um Range S N 1 Pulse width 20 ps 45 dB ode Distance range 100 km Average time 180 sec 1m 3 measurement Distance Measurement distance 10 marker resolution 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is greater Loss Measurement Accuracy Linearity 25 dB 25 dB Pulse width 100 ns Enhanced Range mode Distance range 100 km Average time 180 sec Light Source Output 5 1 5 dBm 1310 30 nm wavelength 1550 30 nm OPM option Option 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C Option 004 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW Option 005 5 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 25 C 12 44 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083C2 Option053 VLD Center wavelength 650415 nm fF When Option 002 inst
27. e Press No f2 if you do not want to overwrite the file Sorting Files The Sort function allows you to change the order in which files are listed in mass storage files saved to the MT9083 Series internal memory or to a USB memory stick Files can be sorted by type Name or Time Date in ascending or descending order To set the Sort type Press the File key The Load screen appears 2 Press Sort 3 The Sort By dialog appears 3 Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the white arrow so that it is positioned to the left of the first selection in the desired pane of the dialog Sort or By 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desire setting within the pane 5 With the desired settings highlighted in both panes press the Enter key The dialog closes and the files are listed in the selected order Deleting Files Use either the Save screen see Figure 9 8 on page 9 20 or the Load screen see Figure 9 9 on page 9 25 to delete any data files stored in the internal memory or ona USB memory stick You can delete a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 21 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS To delete a file 1 J Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 9 8 on page 9 20 or the Load screen see Figur
28. f6 until the legend on the f4 softkey reads Template and Press Template f4 The template soft key layer includes the following softkeys e Apply Template f1 e Create Template f2 e Clear Template f3 e Template Setting f4 OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Gp 9 00h_ 80 4 Reflect dB 1 5 8439km B 0 152 k kk 0 025 0 147 2 12 1526km EE 1 812 40 495 0 201 1 274 Apply 3 32 2436km 0 780 49 960 0 201 7 114 Template 4 52 4877km Ema Fiber End 32 415 0 204 12 028 Create Template Clear Template Template Settings 0 25 50 75 100km A 32 2436 km Splice Loss WL 1550 nm SM IOR 1 468200 B 52 4877 km 0 734 100 1km RES 5 003m A gt B 20 2442 km Refi 49 967 PW 4us HR AVG 24576 Analysis Prev Event Trace Next Event Figure 4 20 Template soft key layer To apply template 4 60 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode e Press Apply Template f1 to apply the created template trace to the current primary trace The Apply Template softkey is dimmed if there is no template trace To create template e Press Create Template f2 to create a template from the current primary trace When a template is created template mode becomes enabled gray bars appear on the screen to indicate where the template events are located and the template trace is drawn in purple To clear template e Press Cle
29. A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user in stalls one as long as the modified version is inter face compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary
30. Accuracy Linearity greater Fiber Identification ee Light Source SS o Measurement 46 5 1550nm CW Accuracy 20 dBm 23 2 C After executing zero offset MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 7 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 1 S N 1 Dynamic range value applies 2 6 dB to the peak value 2 Enhanced Range mode 3 Measurement range 50 to 5 dBm peak power absolute maximum input rating at 10 dBm wavelength at 1550 nm 4 An SM fiber ITU T G 652 and a master FC connector are used Table 12 4 Visible light source VLD option 002 or 102 specifications Center Wavelength 650 nm 15 nm Table 12 5 Optical power meter OPM option 004 005 007 specifications Measuremen Opt 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW After executing zero t 5 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C offset Accuracy Opt 004 5 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW Using a SM fiber Oped0s 145 O dBm 1910 1550nmew 1U T S652 ane a master FC 25 C connector 1310 1550 nm Using a MM fiber 62 5 125 pm anda master FC connector 850 nm 12 8 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 6 Measuring instrument recommended and optical fiber required for performance test for SMF unit Test item Measuring instrument and cable Optical Output accuracy Measurement Optical Spectrum Analyzer MS9740A Wavelength 0 6 to 1 65 um Level 6
31. Active Fiber Checka a ia N i a k 4 5 AUtO D N EA A A 4 5 PUTO Scale nae A a N A a aee AEE 4 6 Event SUMMARY 2520 eusccactccceueredesguuessysnesstersdipeeenerye casubayssucsehesccte ecny Shee 4 6 Reflectance Calculation ccccccccccccccccccccccccsssssseeeeseesseeseeeeeseecseeuseueeuaess 4 6 ORL Calculation cccccccccccecececeeeeeeececeseeaeeeeeueueeeueseaeseseseceeseeeeeeenenes 4 7 TRACE OVERVIEW soi ae a a a a esudaes a ea aaa obec ap aa IEN 4 7 Real Time Averages ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeecaeeeteaaeeneeeees 4 8 Real Time Attenuation nesae nna a a a aa 4 8 Display Mode After Annallysis ccccccecceceteceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeteeaeees 4 9 Preferences 2 2 oicccccccccccccscccccsseecsceeecessesecuseeeuecsceeueeususeusueseceeeesseeaeeueeueess 4 9 Auto Patch cord Removal cccccccccccececeeeeeeseseeessesesesesenecseeeeeeeneeenes 4 11 Grid Display erene ei a n a ea ea a N 4 12 FOrce Total LOSS ccccccscsescsesesesssesesesecececceceeeeeseueueeeeesesaueaeaeseaseseess 4 12 Event Icon Movement risie eas a ide aweslez wvesoevinel sane Ea 4 13 End Event for ORL Calculation ccccccccscccsccsecessessscseeuseueeeeeeseeseees 4 13 Event Table Span Calculation 0 cccecccceseseeceeeeeeseceeseeeeeeenaeeeeeaaeeens 4 14 A B Span Analysis eccccecccceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeneeeeeeeeaeenee 4 14 Thresholds sith e ois cretd aa aE Tae Ugnasebes r Arena slaved aa
32. Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common Cont d Optical Power Meter Optical power meter function No function for Function Opt063 850 1300 nm 004 005 007 is installed Applicable fiber SM fiber ITU T G 652 Wavelength setting Opt 053 056 057 058 063 073 OTDR1 me 1310 1490 1550 1625 1650 nm Opt055 OTDRI port OTDRI port Measurement 1310 1550 1625nm wavelength range 1280 to 1625nm OTDR2 port OTDR2 port 1650nm Measurement wavelength range 1650 5nm Optical power 50 to 5 dBm peak power Wavelength 1550 nm measurement range Absolute maximum rated input 10 dBm Measurement accuracy 6 20 dBm CW light 23 C 2 C after executing zero offset Wavelength 1550 nm when an SM fiber ITU T G 652 and master FC connector are used MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 13 Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common Cont d Display 7 0 inch TFT color LCD 800 x 480 dots with LED backlight Interface x 1 memory direct save load OTDR trace fileremote control MT9083 series can be remotely controlled by connecting LAN cable using a USB Ethernet converter Video inspection probe a fiber checker can be connected x 1 USB mass storage class internal memory of the MT9083 Series product can be read written as a PC disk drive by connecting to a PC via a USB cable video output the screen displayed on the PC with MX900021A re
33. Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 4 Connect the optical fiber to be measured to the measurement port of the Optical Light Source 5 Press Light Source Off f1 to turn on the Optical Light Source 6 Measure the target optical fiber with the fiber identification device ID tester 7 Press Light Source On f1 when the measurement is completed Note 1 The output from Optical Light Source may interrupt communications if the target measurement optical fiber is connected to the optical fiber currently operating Disconnect the target measurement optical fiber from the operating line 2 The MT9083 Series emits high output optical pulses Disconnect communications devices etc from the target measurement optical fiber during measurement to prevent the optical sensors from being damaged MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 31 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 9 32 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 10 Visual Fault Locate VFL Mode The Visual Fault Locate mode is available on MT9083 Series units equipped with the optional visible light red source Since the light from this light source is visible it is useful for locating fault points in the dead zone by visually checking the diffusing light It is also useful for fiber identification of a multi core optical fiber When visible light is injected into a non coated optical fibe
34. Front retaining nut 3 Barrel assembly 4 Lens SO Figure 11 3 Video Inspection Probe with Universal 1 25 mm Tip 11 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Note Do not touch the lens surface see item 4 in Figure 11 3 on page 11 4 2 Select the desired probe tip Make sure that the key small set screw on the inside of the threaded end of the probe tip aligns with the key channel on the barrel assembly see items 3 and 4 in Figure 11 4 and slide the probe tip into place 1 Probe tip FC style 2 Front retaining nut 3 Key Key channel Figure 11 4 Attaching a Probe Tip Note Do not adjust the set screw The 1 25 mm and 2 5 mm Universal probe tips do not have keys 3 Secure the probe tip in place with the front retaining nut see item 2 in Figure 11 4 Probe Tips with Optics Certain optional probe tips such as the long reach probes L series and the angled tips A 6 series contain their own optics Use of these tips requires removal of the barrel assembly Probe tips that require removing the barrel assembly are easily identified as they have a retaining nut see Figure 11 5 Retaining Nut Figure 11 5 Long Reach Style Probe Tip FBPT ST L MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 5 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 11 6 To Attach a Probe tip with Optics 1 Loosen the rear r
35. Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract sses 6 65 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Displ EVA AO L EET cts Lites ATEA E TT 6 65 Setting the Loss Moderisano ia pua ap a e aaa 6 66 Connection Check sssssssssssseesssessresssessssnssrnssrinertnnesnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnsnnnne 6 67 GOOD t nnection a e a aa E AEE AEA 6 67 BAD CONNECTION ecceceeeeeeeeee cece eee ee eee ee ea aeaaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeaaeaeeeeeees 6 68 Working with OTDR Construction Trace Files ceeee 6 70 Deleting Files c2 ani tk eae ee Ae a ee a 6 70 Gopying Files wi0 asec ncaa i Met eA nnn ent 6 72 SOMO FILES 2c ce tilegcthatedoecteastey devs TE TA ET 6 74 Printing Trace FileSend aNu an iiu aa 6 75 Connecting the Printer c cccessceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeesaeseeaaeeenaes 6 75 Printing a Trace Filesi iraniene a in sti ale aeres 6 75 Saving a Trace File as an Image File ccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 6 76 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements csssseeeeeeeeeeenseeneeees 7 1 Distance Measurement 0 c cece cece cece eeeee ee eeaeeeeaaeeeneeeeeeaaaeseeaeeeeaas 7 1 Fiber Length Measurement ccccecceceeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeecaeeeeeaaeeenaes 7 1 Distance to a Break Measurement cccecceeceeeeneeeeeeeeseeaaeseeeeeesaaeeeeneees 7 2 Loss Measurements 00000 0c eee eeeeenee sere rene eeeeeeeaeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneaaaeeeeeeeess 7 4 LOSS MO
36. Mode on page 4 32 for details 4 30 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Laser On Icon The flashing Laser On icon see item 2 in Figure 4 10 appears whenever a laser is firing Cursor Distance Information The Cursor Distance information see item 3 in Figure 4 10 displays the following e Distance from the origin of the trace to Cursor A e Distance from the origin of the trace to Cursor B e Distance between Cursor A and Cursor B As you move the cursors the Cursor Distance information updates simultaneously Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance The Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 displays the following e The current loss mode listed in the top section e The current loss reading in dB in the center section e A reflectance value reading for reflective events in the bottom section Fiber Test Parameters The Fiber Test Parameters area displays the Wavelength WL Distance Range DR Pulsewidth PW Index of Refraction IOR Resolution RES and Averaging mode AVG set for the current test The Test Progress bar indicates the current averaging status In addition it also displays the same information for a recalled trace placed in the Primary Trace position The Dead zone mode selected when performing the measurement is displayed after the Pulsewidth value e In the case of Enhanced Range mode ER is displayed e In the case
37. Note 6 34 The Time and Count selections are only available when the language is set to Chinese and are not show in Figure 6 13 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired pre set value or to move the white arrow down to the Sec field or Times field if the language is set to Chinese and Count is selected in step 3 e Ifyou highlighted one of the pre set values continue at step 6 e Ifyou are entering an amount in the Sec field or Times field if the language is set to Chinese and Count is selected in step 2 continue at step 5 Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value from 1 to 3600 in the field Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the new value is displayed in the Num Avgs field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Setting the IOR and BSC Use the IOR BSC dialog box to select one of the pre set Fiber Types which automatically sets the IOR Index of Refraction and BSC Backscatter Coefficient for the selected fiber type or select Other and then use the Numeric keypad to enter the desired IOR and BSC settings To set the IOR and BSC values 1 With the OTDR Construction Parameters screen displayed highlight the IOR BSC field 2 Press the Enter key The IOR BSC dialog appears see Figure 6 14 IOR 1 300000 1 700000 Fiber Type gt 1 467700 default BSC 90 00
38. OTDR Standard AUTO16250000 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 5 8172km i ek ek 12 1553km a 39 868 32 2370km 49 057 52 4821km 31 708 Drop Overlay AUTO13100000 SOR 1310 nm SM 100 1 km 4000 ns AUTO15500000 SOR 1550 nm SM 100 1 km 4000 ns A 7 5601 km 1625 nm SM IOR 1 468500 B 52 4821 km 11 910 100 1km RES 5 003m More gt gt A gt B 44 9221 km Refi 4us HR AVG 11776 Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 4 31 Drop Overlay Dialog 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to highlight the desired overlay trace in the Drop Overlay dialog when there is more than one overlay traces currently displayed 3 Press the Enter key The Drop Overlay dialog closes and the selected Overlay trace is removed from the Trace screen 4 86 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Swap Overlay Use the following procedure to swap an Overlay trace with the trace currently in the Primary trace position To Swap an overlay trace with the primary trace 1 When the Trace screen has a Primary trace and one or more Overlay traces displayed press Swap Overlay f2 the Swap Overlay dialog appears OTDR Standard AUTO16250000 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Em 9 00h_ 80 Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect aB dB km Cum Loss dB 5 8172km E 0 205 ek kk 12 1553km 1 560 39 868 32 2370km 0 743 49 057 Swap Overlay dB 6 5 AUT
39. Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the AutoSave Enabled status is set to On All data collections will be automatically saved gt Note Setting the AutoSave Enabled status to On automatically sets and locks the Auto Filename Enabled status at the On setting Verifying the AutoSave Use the following procedure to set the AutoSave status to Verify which displays the Save screen at the end of each data collection To set the AutoSave status to Verify 1 Press the Setup key while in OTDR Standard mode 2 Press AutoSave f5 The AutoSave setups screen appears see Figure 4 38 on page 4 98 4 98 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Enabled in the AutoSave field and then press the Enter key The Enabled dialog appears 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Verify 5 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the AutoSave Enabled status is set to Verify To AutoSave with verification 1 Set the AutoSave status to Verify as detailed in the procedure above 2 Perform the desired OTDR test When the data collection is complete the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 is displayed with the File Name field highlighted 3 Choose any or all of the following functions if desired or continue at step 4 e Press the Enter key to edit the Fil
40. Remarks 10am ooms O Bom poms id values Dynamic range Wavelength pm 1 31 1 49 Pulse width 20 ps S N 1 AEA Resa Distance range 100 km 41 dB 40 dB Average time 180 seconds Distance 1 m 3 x measurement measurement distance x 10 marker accuracy resolution Loss measurement 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB accuracy Linearity Whichever is greater Light Source output 5 1 5 dBm 1310 30 nm 1490 30 nm 1550 30 nm 1550 nm CW 20 dBm Option 004 5 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 25 C OPM Option Option 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C Option 005 5 V Center wavelength 650 nm 15 nm Optical output power 0 3 dBm Note OLS OPM Measurement accuracy Option LD OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual When Option 002 installed 12 39 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083B2 Option 057 Test item Wavelength 1310 nm Pulse width 10 ps 20 us Dynamic range Wavelength ym S N 1 Distance measurement accuracy Loss measurement accuracy Linearity 1 55 1 625 38 dB 37 dB 1 m 3 x measurement distance x 10 marker resolution 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is greater Light Source output OPM Option Option 007 Option 004 Option 005 OLS OPM Measurement
41. The following explanation assumes the Template Settings screen settings other than the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment options are as follows e Event Determination Merge e Trace Priority OFF e Distance 30 e Absolute Distance 1 km Next assuming the Template trace and Target trace event locations are as follows Target trace j e a event locations 15 30 45 Template trace p S O S S E E gt event locations 10 20 40 The following describes the corrections performed when each option is selected for the example shown above e IfNone is selected 1 The event locations for the Target trace and Template trace events remain unchanged and correlation is performed without using the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment function MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Target trace event locations 10 15 20 30 40 after correlation IfSnap to Template End is selected 1 Each Template trace event is converted proportionately relative to the Target trace end event location Adjusted Template trace _ event locations 11 25 22 5 45 after conversion 2 Next correlation is performed using the Target trace events and converted temporary Template trace events Temporary Target trace 8 __ ___ _ _ __ __ _ _ event locations 11 25 15 22 5 30 45 after correlation 3 Finally the correlated temporary Template trace events are converte
42. US embargoed countries or b to anyone on the Japanese or US Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the US Department of Commerce Denied Persons List or Entity List By using this Software you warrant that you are not located in any such country or on any such list xxi Software End User License Agreement EULA xxii You also agree that you willnot use 7 this Software for any purposes prohibited by Japanese and US law including without limitation the development design and manufacture or production of missiles or nuclear chemical or biological weapons of mass destruction j Termination Anritsu shall deem this EULA terminated if you violate any conditions described herein This 9 EULA shall also be terminated if the conditions herein cannot be continued for any good reason such as violation of copyrights patents or other laws and ordinances Reparations If Anritsu suffers any loss financial or otherwise due to your violation of the terms of this EULA Anritsu shall have the right to seek proportional damages from you Responsibility after Termination Upon termination of this EULA in accordance with item 5 you shall cease all use of this Software immediately and shall as directed by Anritsu either destroy or return this Software and any backup copies full or partial to Anritsu Dispute Resolution If matters of dispute or items not covered by this EULA arise th
43. Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Splitter Loss Press Enter The Splitter Loss dialog appears 3 Go to Step 4 if the splitter loss is already at hand Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select Branch and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to select the number of branches 4 Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select Splitter Loss and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the splitter loss threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 41 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 42 5 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Splitter Loss threshold is set Pass Fail Thresholds Parameters Events that exceed the Pass Fail Threshold parameters are highlighted in red in the Event Analysis table e The Pass Fail Thresholds parameters include Non Reflective Event Loss fusion Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical Reflectance Fiber Loss dB km Total Loss Splitter Loss ORL MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Non Reflective Event Loss fusion This parameter highlights non reflective event losses such as fusion splices in the Events Analysis table The range of settings for this parameter is 0 10 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Non Reflective Event Loss threshold 1 Use the Up
44. When Cursor A Y Axis data is greater than Cursor B Y Axis data a positive loss measurement is displayed 7 6 Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 Loss Distance dB km _2 Point Loss Distance Between Cursor A and Cursor B To perform a dB km Loss measurement 1 2 10 11 12 Select Display From Origin see Display From on page 4 71 Place Cursor B at the end of the fiber See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details Select Display From B Expand the screen horizontally and vertically for more accurate cursor placement See Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 for details Place Cursor B at the beginning of the reflective end of the fiber and read the total fiber length from the highlighted Cursor B location in the Cursor Distance area Select Display From Origin Place Cursor A just to the right of the diffusion tail if one exists after the beginning of the fiber Select Display From A Expand the screen horizontally and vertically for more accurate cursor placement Move Cursor A to the end of the diffusion tail Set the Loss Mode to dB km Loss See Setting the Loss Mode on page 4 74 for details The dB km loss reading appears the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Splice L
45. When all of the desired characters are entered in the Comment field press OK f6 to return to the Loss Table screen The Loss Table screen appears with the comment added to the Comment column of the selected row MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 33 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Working with Loss Test Set Files Saving Loss Test Set Files Loss Test Set test data Loss Tables can be saved to the unit s internal memory or to a USB memory stick To save a Loss Table 1 Press the Save key The Save screen appears with the File Name field highlighted see Figure 8 13 below 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Ga 9 00h 80 5 File Name NEWOO6 CSY Medium Internal Memory 5 Files 952 MB Free Save Table Folder fe File Name ov Date Time A NEWOO05 CSY 12 04 19 12 01 NEWO0O04 cSY 12 04 19 12 01 NEWOO3 CSY 12 04 19 12 01 Sort NEWO002 cSY 12 04 19 12 01 NEWOO1 cSY 12 04 19 12 01 New Folder Delete More gt gt Selected File Size Figure 8 13 Save screen Loss Test Set mode 2 Press the Enter key The FileName dialog box appears See Renaming a File on page 3 32 for details 3 When you have finished editing the file name the Save screen appears with the edited name highlighted in the File Name field 4 Choose any or all of the following functions if desired or continue at step 5 e Highlight the Medium field and then press the Enter key to toggle through the available selections
46. When an optical power level under the measurement range including light shielding is measured it is regarded as under range and Under is displayed in the Power reading area When an optical power level over the measurement range is measured it is regarded as over range and Over is displayed in the Power reading area Correct measurements cannot be performed in the under range or over range status Z CAUTION The light receiving part of the MT9083 Series may be damaged if light exceeding 10 dBm is injected In addition when the reference value as set in the Reference Field item 4 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 is set to None the background color of the Absolute Power reading changes according to the Pass Fail status established by the value in the Threshold field see item 5 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 Readings that pass have a black background while readings that fail have a red background Range Indicator The Range Indicator see item 3 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 provides a graphic representation of the optical power level being measured The greater the optical power level measured the further the Range Indicator is filled in Reference Field Displays the currently set reference value which is used to calculate the Loss reading item 4 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 Reference values can be entered for each of the power meter s calibrated wavelengths Threshold Field Displays the curren
47. dB Real Time EE off 0 0 i 13 0 Wavelength 7 1550 26 0 ki Test z Parameters 0 5 km 39 0 3nsiHR Display From 18 2 22 km A A 2 0001 km 2 Pt Loss SUMMARY gt Total Events 3 Bs 20000 km 0 000 Fiber Length 4 2039 km More gt gt A gt B 0 0000 km Refi 3 sk Total nec Fiber Visualizer Trace Thresholds Report D Figure 5 12 Trace screen 1 Event table 2 Trace graph 3 Cursor distance information 4 Loss mode Measurement and Reflectance 5 Fiber test parameters or Event summary 6 Softkeys Event Table The list of the event icons on the Fiber Visualizer screen is displayed MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 23 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 24 Note Any detected event within the threshold is enclosed within parentheses If the measured value cannot be obtained for example because a fault point is being approximated this is displayed as Reflectance A reflectance value is displayed for all reflective events while is displayed in the Reflectance field Reflect dB for non reflective events In addition to the reflectance value two other indicators may be present S e An S following the numeric value indicates that the reflective event being measured is very close to the top limit of the OTDR s data set and that it is considered saturated hitting the high limit of the measurement ability An S saturate
48. f6 twice 8 Press Test f1 to start the test 9 Set cursor A just prior to know reflective event Auto reflectance calculation will display the measured value 10 Check that the return peak is not saturated 12 28 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 11 Perform averaging until maximum noise reduction has occurred 12 The Return Loss reflectance is displayed in the lower left section of the screen see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 This value is assumed as R dB 13 Obtain the Difference between R dB and Ro dB 14 Add or subtract the result from step 13 to the current BSC value so that the measured reflectance equals the known reflectance Rg dB Optical Power Meter Measurement Accuracy Calibration Please contact Anritsu for calibration of the OPM measurement accuracy To maintain the performance of this parameter we recommend that the MT9083 Series is calibrated once a year MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 29 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Performance Test Result Sheet Test site Report No Date Test supervisor Equipment name Serial No Ambient temperature C Relative humidity Note 12 30 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual MT9083A2 Option 073 Test item 1310 nm Pulse width 20 ns 50 ns 200 ns 500 ns 1 ps 2 ps 4 us 10 ps 20 us Dynamic range Wavelength um S N
49. gt B 0 0000 km 1550 nm SM 100 1 km 4 us HR Prev Event IOR RES AVG Trace Analysis Next Event Figure 4 18 Editing an Event Note The Edit Event softkey is only active in Splice Loss mode Pressing Edit Event f2 when in any test mode other than Splice Loss displays the following message Cannot edit event Loss mode must be set to splice loss 4 46 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys to select the Start km field and then use the Numeric keypad see item 2 in Figure 2 1 on page 2 1 to enter the new starting point for the selected event 5 Move the to highlight the End km field and then use the Numeric keypad see item 2 in Figure 2 1 on page 2 1 to enter the new end point for the selected event 6 Press OK f1 the following happens e The Edit Events dialog closes e The event flag on the trace is moved to the new position Note An event that has been edited is flagged with an before its event number in the Event table Note The original trace and event table can be retrieved even if you have saved the edited trace Press More gt gt f6 until fL reads Analyze and then press f1 to re run the analysis The trace and it s Event table are returned to their original status Pasting an Event To Paste an event to a new location 1 Make sure that the current trace di
50. key to cancel the power off process Note You can force a Power Off at any time by holding down the Power key for approximately 10 seconds Adjusting the Backlight Pressing the Backlight key switches the brightness of the backlight in the following order High gt Low gt OFF gt High Note You cannot adjust the backlight in the following cases because the Backlight key is either used for another function or is disabled e Access to the internal memory or USB memory is in progress e You have selected a settings item and are entering a character or making a setting e A warning or caution message is displayed 3 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups The backlight has been turned off via the Auto Backlight Off function in the system settings When the backlight is left off via the Auto Backlight Off function you can return to the initially set conditions by pressing any key Top Menu Screen All test applications are accessed from the MT9083 Series Top Menu screen The menu items displayed in the Top Menu will vary with the options installed on the unit Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired test application and then press the Enter key or press the Rotary knob to open the application 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Gs 99 00h 80 4 Figure 3 2 Top Menu Screen 1 Screen Title area Displays the title
51. libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contra diction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 13 Appendix C Software License C 14 combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License How ever parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as
52. modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange fo
53. s calibrated wavelengths Loss Reading The Loss reading item 7 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 displays the optical power loss value When the reference value is set to None requires that a reference value is set is displayed as a Loss reading When a reference value is set the optical power loss is obtained as follows Optical power loss Reference Optical power measurement In addition when a reference value other than None is set in the Reference Field item 5 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 the background color of the Loss reading changes according to the Pass Fail status established by the value in the Threshold field see item 6 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 Readings that pass have a black background while readings that fail have a red background Port Connection Indicator The lower third of the Loss Test Set screen contains the Port Connection Indicator The Input port as shown in the following figure is the connection for the optional Power Meter while the Output port is the Optical Light Source 8 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Input Output Figure 8 6 Port Connection Indicator Loss Test Set mode Note The measurement port indicated as the Output port varies according to the optical wavelength of the light to be emitted Softkeys Loss Test Set screen The following softkeys are available on the Loss Test Se
54. symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name 4 With the desired character is highlighted in the character matrix and the text cursor placed in the desired position press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the file name Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in the Base Filename 5 When you have finished editing the base filename press OK f6 to close the Base Filename screen and return to the OTDR Construction Setup screen The edited base filename is now displayed in the Base Filename field Filename The Filename field reflects results of the replacement of the placeholder characters with the text entered in the Filename Element fields Site A Site B and Other as well the test wavelength and current fiber number Filename Elements The filename elements consist of the following e Test Direction e Site A e Site B Other Test Direction Specify the direction in which the test is performed A gt B or B lt A Thea and b placeholders in the Base Filename as well as the Site A and Site B filename elements reflect the chosen test direction To specify the Test Direction 1 Highlight A gt B the Test Direction field 2 Toggle the Enter key to select the desire direction MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 23 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Site A Site B The Site A field is the text field which contains the
55. the Auto Filename Enabled status at the On setting Verifying the AutoSave Use the following procedure to set the AutoSave status to Verify which displays the Save screen at the end of each data collection To set the AutoSave status to Verify 1 Enter the OTDR Fault Locate setups see page 5 2 for details 2 Press AutoSave f5 The AutoSave setup screen appears see Figure 5 23 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 63 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Enabled in the AutoSave field and then press the Enter key The Enabled dialog appears 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Verify 5 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the AutoSave Enabled status is set to Verify To AutoSave with verification 1 Set the AutoSave status to Verify as detailed in the procedure above 2 Perform the desired Fault Locate test When the data collection is complete the Save screen Figure 5 23 on page 5 63 is displayed with the File Name field highlighted 3 Choose any or all of the following functions if desired or continue at step 4 e Press the Enter key to edit the File Name if desired and follow the on screen instructions for editing the file name e Highlight the Medium field and then press Enter to toggle through the available selections e Press Header f2 to enter Header information S
56. to highlight Connection Check 2 Press Enter and then select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the selection is set Active Fiber Check The Active Fiber Check performs a live fiber check on the currently attached fiber under test to detect whether the fiber is carrying traffic before firing any OTDR laser sources e If no traffic is detected the test proceeds normally e If traffic is detected a warning message appears on the screen and the test is aborted To set the Active Fiber Check 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Active Fiber Check 2 Press Enter and then select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the selection is set Note The Active Fiber Check feature does not apply for the following options Opt 063 0 85 1 3 pm MMF only Auto Analysis When set to On OTDR trace analysis is automatically performed at the completion of data collection for the current fiber under test To set Auto Analysis 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Analysis 2 Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 5 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Note Regardless of the set value the waveform data is automatically analyzed if measured on
57. to increment or decrement the desired dBm setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 9 5 If necessary change the reference from to by pressing Change 1 6 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the new setting Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each wavelength to be tested To paste the current Power Meter reading as a reference 1 Connect a patch cord from the Power Meter port Input to the Light Source port Output Press Light Source Off f1 to activate the light source 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Reference field 4 Press the Enter key The Reference screen appears 8 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 5 Press Paste f3 The reference value is replaced with the current Power Meter reading 6 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the new setting 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each wavelength to be tested To set Reference to None 1 Highlight Reference and then press the Enter key The Reference dialog appears displaying the current setting Press None f2 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the reference is set to None Setting the Threshold value Use the following procedure to set threshold value used to determine the Pass Fail status of the Loss reading as displayed in the Loss Table see Figure 8 7
58. 012 0 5 x 10 0 036 pape MT9083A2 B2 1 lt 0 15 4x10 1300 063 0 037 1M lt 0 15 20 x 10 1310 0 019 1 lt 0 15 20 x 10 1550 0 019 oe a Indicates the possible optical output power when each and every reasonably foreseeable single fault condition is included Table 2 Incorporated Laser Specification Beam Divergence 1 Pulse Duration s Maximum output x Wavelength deg ee Rate Le ee W E u x MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Laser Safety Table 2 Incorporated Laser Specification Wavelength Beam Divergence Pulse Duration s Maximum output nm deg Repetition Rate power W 1 This product incorporates a laser diode module with optical fiber output 2 Maximum output power is the estimated value when something breaks down MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual xi Laser Safety Class 1M Laser Class 3R Laser Certification Identification T xii Table 3 Indication Labels on Product MT9083B2 C2 053 MT9083A2 B2 055 MT9083B2 056 MT9083A2 B2 C2 057 MT9083A2 B2 063 MT9083B2 058 MT9083A2 073 Figure 2 A Figure 2 B Figure 2 C All models MT9083A2 B2 C2 002 THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO 50 DATED JUNE 24 2007 A oe ACCESS Master ANRITSU COPR 5 1 1 ONNA ATSUGI SHI KANAGAWA 243 8555 JAPAN MANUFACTURED BY ATP es O All models D
59. 055 056 057 058 063 46 5 1550nm CW 20 dBm 23 2 C After executing zero offset Center Wavelength 1 Wavelength range of less than 20 dB from peak value Peak value optical output 15 dBm max 2 S N 1 Dynamic range value applies 2 6 dB to the noise peak values 3 Background light of 1550 nm and CW light of 19 dBm are added when wavelength is 1650 nm Pulse width is 500 ns and distance range is 25 km for MMF 850 nm Pulse width is 4 ps and distance range is 25 km for MMF 1300 nm 4 Measurement range 50 to 5 dBm Peak power absolute maximum input rating at 10 dBm wavelength at 1550 nm 5 An SM fiber ITU T G 652 and a master FC connector are used 12 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 3 MT9083C2 specifications Wavelength 1310 25 nm Opt053 057 Temperature 25 C 1550 25 nm Opt053 057 Pulse width 1ps 1625 25 nm Opt057 Pulse Width ns 3 10 20 50 100 200 Opt053 057 500 1000 2000 4000 10000 20000 Dynamic Range dB 25 C S N 1 1 Distance range 100 Opt053 45 45 dB 1 31 1 55 um 20 ps kmo Average time 180 sec 25 25 dB 1 31 1 55 pm 100 ns Opt057 45 45 43 dB 1 31 1 55 1 625 um 20 us 25 25 23 dB 1 31 1 55 1 625 pm 100 ns 2 Distance 1 m 3 measurement distance 10 Measurement marker resolution Note that this does not Accuracy include optical fiber refraction index IOR based uncertainty ee a
60. 12 41 22 11 03 Nevopoer AUTO15500002 S0R 12 11 22 10 59 AUTO13100002 SOR 12 11 22 10 55 AUTO13100001 SOR 12 11 22 10 51 Delete More gt gt Selected File Size Figure 5 24 Save Screen Edit the filename if desired or continue at step 6 to use the current filename To edit the filename press the Enter key The FileName dialog box appears If no USB keyboard is connected Refer to Renaming a File on page 3 32 to input the file name If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 65 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Enter key to return to the Save screen Press the F1 key to complete the manual save Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the File Name field which is located directly above the character matrix Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the File Name field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the File Name field In Fiber Visualizer Mode the item below is displayed for MACRO Table 5 1 MACRO Buttons Number 4 digit serial number starting with a number in the Number field yy mm dd Digits to represent Year Month Day Digits to rep
61. 180 seconds 1550 nm CW 20 dBm 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 25 C When Option 002 installed Note OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 41 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083B2 Option 063 Wavelength Pulse width Distance measurement accuracy Loss measurement accuracy Linearity 12 42 MME 850 nm 30 nm Pulse width 100 ns 1300 1300 nm 30 nm 4 1310 1310 nm 25 nm Pulse width 1 us nm 1550 1550 nm 25 nm nm The selectable pulse width is 500 ns or less when the wavelength is MME 850 nm and 4 ps or less when the wavelength is 1300 nm pos psi A E e E A C e A c as iO c e S wo ooo o o C e S E ieee E S E ee E eae range Wavelength pe h 85 1 3 TT 1 55 125 C Pulse width 20 us Distance range 25 km Average time 180 seconds 500 nm when the wavelength is 850 nm and 4 us when 1300 nm 1 m3 x measurement distance x 10 marker resolution 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is greater MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration OLS Light Source 5 1 5 dBm output 850 nm 850 nm 850230nm o 30 850230nm o 1330 1300 30 nm nm 1310 1310 30 nm nm 1550 1550 30 nm nm OPM Measurement 6 5 1550 nm CW
62. 22 10 51 Symbols Space Backspace OK v Selected File Size Figure 3 22 New Folder Screen 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the New Folder name field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the New Folder name field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the New Folder name field 5 Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 41 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 6 With the desired character highlighted in the character matrix and the text cursor placed in the desired position press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the New Folder name field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in New Folder name field 7 When all of the desired characters are entered press OK f6 save the new folder to the selected medium or press ESC to cancel the New Folder process 3 42 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operati
63. 34 Shift MOd SOTtKEYS wesc sesteed sees eh ese ri ai a at aa 5 35 Extension SOFtKCYS cccecececceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceaeesaaecaaeeseeeseaeetenessereteaees 5 35 Selecting and Positioning CUISOMS cccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeaeeeeeaeeteeaeees 5 35 Setting the Active CUFSOT ccccccteeeeeceeeeceeeeeseeeeeeaeetteaeeeenaaeseeaaeeeaes 5 35 Precise Positioning of the Active CUISOD c cccccceeseeeteeesteeeteeeeeee 5 36 Locking and Unlocking CUrSOTS cce cceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeens 5 36 Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract c ceessceeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 5 36 Rlalt clalel EA reer err ee cere AE E cr eerer er ree er eerrere 5 37 Auto Detect Parameters cc cccceicccsccncececrcessectonseesecuersereececueaesenecnersene 5 38 Spliceilioss EET E E ad Oe ee ae Se 5 38 Reflectance s civie sient ein i aie Maven eens 5 39 BIBER EMG 2 ccccsstrecethsmsttectaxntots LcataadecacessteedicasardvteeLeassats dean iettecadeeunsets 5 39 Macro Bendar i ie aetna sien Gane te ieee ene 5 41 Splitter Loss eneit Sacto an eaeiveieste ee at ies eee sve ates Aces 5 41 Pass Fail Thresholds Parameters ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeessaeeseeaeees 5 42 Non Reflective Event Loss FUSION ccceececsseseeceseeseeseeeeeeeeeseeees 5 43 Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical cceceeeeeeees 5 43 Refl ctanc s 4 aaiis ea Sa aa Se cai ee sens 5 44 Fiber Loss AB KIN irn r a a k 5 44 WOtal o EE A AE A T T
64. 40 00 dBm Reference Paste a Figure 9 5 Reference screen 3 Ifthe Reference dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key or turn the Rotary knob to change it to the dBm setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dBm setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 9 5 If necessary change the reference from to by pressing Change f1 6 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the new setting 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each wavelength to be tested To paste the current Power Meter reading as a reference 1 Connect a patch cord from the Optical Power Meter port on the MT9083 Series to the output port of an external light source Activate the external light source On the MT9083 Series use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Reference field Press the Enter key The Reference screen appears 5 Press Paste 3 The reference value is replaced with the current Power Meter reading 6 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the new setting 9 10 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each wavelength to be tested To set Reference to None 1 Highlight Reference and then press the Enter key The Reference d
65. 6 26 Loss Mode Dialog 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired loss mode For details on the various loss modes see Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Note Not all of the procedures described in Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements apply to OTDR Construction mode 6 66 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 3 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and red legend on the softkey changes to the selected loss mode Note The Loss Mode softkey f4 is only active when the legend on f1 reads Open Summary Connection Check When the Connection Check is set to On on the setups Preferences screen a connection check is automatically performed at the beginning of each fault locate test The Connection Check screen consist of a simple gauge which provides a graphical representation of the connection quality along with instructions detailing how to proceed when the connection is GOOD and how to correct a BAD connection GOOD connection The gauge is green and yellow when connection is good The closer the bar in the connection gauge extends to HIGH end the better the connection is If the gauge is yellow and red the fiber needs cleaning Press Continue f1 or Start key to start the measurement immediately OTDR Construction Connection Check 2013 Apr 24 13 14 gS Continue Connecti
66. 6 75 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Perform the test 3 Press Close Summary f1 to display the trace graph without the Summary box if desired 4 Press the Print key The following message appears Output screen image to a printer or as an image file Please select output type using the function keys 5 Press Printer f1 The message changes to Please wait Printing The MT9083 Series returns to the Trace grid when the printout is completed Saving a Trace File as an Image File See Saving a Screen Image to a File on page 3 31 for details Note In order to save the OTDR Construction Test Results screen as an image file Preview f3 must be set to On on the Test in Progress screen see Figure 6 18 on page 6 49 6 76 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Distance Measurement When a primary trace is displayed the fiber distance is automatically measured from the origin of the trace to each of the two cursors and between the cursors The values are displayed in the Cursor Distance area Proper cursor placement is crucial for accurate measurements Note Improper distance readings may be reported if the Index of Refraction IOR is set inaccurately See Setting the IOR and BSC on page 4 73 for details on changing the IOR setting Two of the most common distance measurements are e Fiber Length the total distance of a fiber e Distance
67. 60825 1 2007 standard Never use optical instruments to directly view Class 1M laser products Doing so may result in serious damage to the eyes viii MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Laser Safety Table 1 Laser Safety Classifications Based on IEC 60825 1 2007 Pulse Incorporated Laser Aperture in Figure 1 Optical Duration Emitted Taser Output s Wavelength specication Power Repetition nm Refer to Rate Table 2 lt 0 15 20 x 10 1310 0 019 lt 0 15 20 x 10 1550 0 019 Model Name MT9083B2 C2 053 lt 0 15 20 x 10 1550 c 1 10 019 MT9083A2 B2 Aa 1M lt 0 15 20x10 1310 MT9083A2 073 0 019 15 20x10 1550 10 019 1 lt 0 15 2 0x 107 1650 10 019 MT9083B2 056 10 019 i lt 0 15 20x10 1490 b mj 10 019 i 0 15 20x10 1550 5 i 0 019 IM lt 0 15 20x10 1310 J m 10 019 MT9083A2 B2 C 1 lt 0 15 20x10 1550 A i 2 057 0 019 1 lt 0 15 20 x 10 1625 d 1 0 019 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual ix Laser Safety Table 1 Laser Safety Classifications Based on IEC 60825 1 2007 Cont d Max Pulse Incorporated ioe Optical Duration Emitted Laser Pano Output s Wavelength Specification Pe Model Name Class in St in Power Repetition nm Refer to Figure 1 w Rate Table ae lt 0 15 2 0 x 10 1310 0 019 MT9083B2 058 lt 0 15 2 0 x 10 1490 1 0 019 lt 0 15 2 0 x 10 1550 1 0 019 lt 0 15 2 0 x 10 1625 0 019 1M lt 0
68. 7 11 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements intervals See Adjusting the Left and Right LSA Intervals on page 7 12 for details 7 The 2 Point LSA loss reading appears the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area Adjusting the Left and Right LSA Intervals 7 12 The left interval is associated with Cursor A and the right interval with Cursor B The default location for the left interval is immediately to the right of Cursor A The default location for the right interval is immediately to the left of the B Cursor Note This function is not available for the OTDR Construction application at the current software release dB 0 0 13 0 26 0 ee 39 0 o iii T o 25 50 75 100km In some cases such as a very noisy trace or a trace with closely spaced event you may need to adjust the LSA intervals fuzzy cursors to obtain more accurate 2 Point LSA and dB km LSA loss measurements To modify the LSA interval 1 Set the Loss Mode to either 2 Pt LSA or dB km LSA 2 Select the desired cursor A or B 3 Press More gt gt f6 to access the Level One softkeys 4 Toggle Display From to display from the selected cursor Display From A or Display From B MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 10 11 12 13 dB km LSA Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Expand the trace around the cursor See Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 for details If nece
69. Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Range field or PW field for the for the first desired wavelength and then press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The Distance Range Resolution and Pulse width dialog appears see Figure 4 22 on page 4 68 Press Dead zone f1 and set the desired mode Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the newly selected Dead zone mode displays on the PW field Note e This mode selection function is not available on the MT9083A2 except the models with Option 073 e The Enhanced Range mode is only available if an SM unit is fitted The Dead zone f1 key becomes unavailable if an MM unit is fitted e Ifthe range of the selected pulse width does not fall between 50 ns to 2000 ns the f1 key is grayed out and set to Standard HR To set the Average Time in Wavelength All mode i 4 80 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Num Avgs field for the for the first desired wavelength and then press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The Average Time dialog appears see Figure 4 24 on page 4 72 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Note When the language is set to Chinese this dialog is titled Averaging 2 Ifthe language is currently set to Chinese use the Left and Right Arrow keys to toggle the Averaging mode from Time to Count depending on the desired mode
70. Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Note Total Loss Cum Loss cannot be displayed when e An event appeared before backscatter could be found after the launch reflection e An event exists 1 1 pulse widths after the launch backscatter e Fiber end cannot be detected 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Force Total Loss field Event Icon Movement Selects the direction of event icon movement when the encoder is turned This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer To set the Event Icon Movement 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Event Icon Movement 2 Press Enter The Event Icon Movement dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired setting Left to Right If the encoder is turned clockwise the event icons move from right to left If it is turned counterclockwise the event icons move from left to right Right to Left Opposite to Left to Right 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Event Icon Movement field End Event for ORL Calculation Set whether to include reflection in Far End events or not when calculating the ORL This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer To set the End Event for ORL Calculation 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight End Event for ORL Calculation Press Enter The End Event for ORL Calculation dialog appears 3 Highlight the desire
71. Enter The Fiber End dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the fiber end threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 39 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Fiber End threshold is set 5 40 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Macro Bend Determines the Macro Bend detect value equal to or above which will be reported in the Events analysis Note Macro Bend detection requires a unit with at least two single mode operating wavelengths one at 1310 nm and a second at either 1550 nm or 1625 nm The range of settings for this parameter is 0 3 dB to 2 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Macro Bend threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Macro Bend Press Enter The Macro Bend dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the fiber end threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Macro Bend threshold is set Splitter Loss Determines the Splitter Loss value equal to or above which will be reported as Splitter event in the Events analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 1 0 dB to 30 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Splitter Loss threshold 1
72. Figure 2 E Figure 2 F MT9083A2 B2 C2 002 MT9083A2 B2 C2 002 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Laser Radiation Markings Laser Radiation Markings 3 2 1 amh CE wo TUSE AAYA KOT 002 003 010 Figure 2 Locations of Affixed Labels MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual xiii Electrical Safety Electrical Safety To reduce risk of equipment damage injury or death adhere to the following warnings xiv DO NOT use the MT9083 Series or its external power supply if case for either is cracked or damaged Use the MT9083 Series only with an external power supply provided for the MT 9083 Series by Anritsu Anritsu does not guarantee the safety and functionality of other power supplies The MT9083 Series external power supply requires a three wire grounded line cord Do not use two wire line cords ungrounded line cords or damaged line cords DO NOT use the MT9083 Series external power supply in outdoor or wet environments Ensure that the AC input to the external power supply is within the voltages marked on the power supply case DO NOT attempt to service the product in any way other than routine maintenance as described in this manual MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual For U S Customers For U S Customers Please Recycle The product that you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery The battery is recyclable At the end of its useful
73. For any language other than Chinese skip step 2 and continue at step 3 Note The Time and Count selections are only available when the language is set to Chinese and are not show in Figure 4 24 on page 4 72 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired pre set value or to move the white arrow down to the Sec field or Times field if the language is set to Chinese and Count is selected in step 2 e Ifyou highlighted one of the pre set values continue at step 5 e Ifyou are entering an amount in the Sec field or Times field if the language is set to Chinese and Count is selected in step 2 continue at step 4 4 Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value from 1 to 3600 in the field 5 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the new value is displayed in the Num Aygs field 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each desired wavelength 7 Press Exit f6 to close the OTDR Parameters screen or move the highlight to the next desired parameter to continue Use the following procedure to set the Range Resolution Pulse Width and Average Time to the same values for all available wavelengths To apply the Range Resolution Pulse Width and Average Time to all wavelengths 1 Set the Range Resolution and Pulse Width as well as the Average Time as detailed in the previous two procedures for one of the available wavelengths 2 Select Apply to A
74. GES anseia E T E E 7 4 Event EXAMPlES sc cccc2i eesereasenesteyscoeeestdehp cee lhedacceasutdy araea Aetna Aera iaoee etas 7 4 2 POIMTMLOSS scars E ETA A A 7 5 ABk LOSS sensa enanats aa aE AEE Aaa aea EAS EE ANE 7 6 Splice LOSS EEE E A E 7 7 Adjusting the LSA Intervals for Splice Loss Mode ccescesseeeereeeeeees 7 9 Setting LSA Defaults issiskiria aaeitiiin reinsa ienaa iiad aaink 7 10 2 POINT LSAs os aana epa a a a aa eaa e e a ae aa 7 10 Adjusting the Left and Right LSA Intervals c ccccceeceeeteetteeeteetees 7 12 OB Ki ESAs agit E devote cannes Aectints A ita cede A Autechre 7 13 ORL Optical Return LOSS ccccccccesesseceeeseeneeeeeceseaeeeeeesenaaeeessseaaeeeeseenas 7 15 2 Point amp dB km LOSS cccccceesceceeeeeeeceeeeeeceeaeeeeeseeeaeeeesseaaaeeeeseeaaeeeeneeaas 7 16 Reflectance Measurements 2 ccccecceeeeceeeceeeceeeeeaeseaeesnaeeeaeeeaaee 7 17 OVERVIOGW ninsis iaa a a of eet araa oana ia Sau atintan in Aa a aaao 7 17 Auto Reflectance MOde ecccescesceseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaeeseaeesaeeeaeeseeeaes 7 18 Manual Reflectance Mode 2 ccc cceceeceteeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceesteaeenaaees 7 20 Real Time Testing cccccceeeccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaaaeseneeeeeaaeeneeeeee 7 22 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode ccccsccesseseseeesseeeeeeeeeeesenneenes 8 1 OVE IVI OW ieicc ia isteciecidtectiased cdebe cet scunteeden cevtvweanisneee na thsirei sentation tbare
75. General Operation System Setups Saving a Screen Image to a File You can save the image on test result screens and most setup screens as PNG files To save a Screen Image to a file 1 With the desired screen displayed press the Print key the following message appears Output screen image to a printer or as an image file Please select output type using the function keys 2 Press File f2 The Save screenshot screen appears see Figure 3 16 Save screenshot 2012 Jul 1 10 00 File Name maseooor PNG Medium Internal Memory OFiles 1151MB Free Save Image Folder File Name Date Time File Type 2 PNG Sort New Folder Delete More gt gt v Selected File Size Figure 3 16 Save Screenshot Screen 3 Select the image file type Each time File f2 is pressed the file extension changes from png bmp and jpg 4 With the File Name highlighted press the Enter key to rename the file if desired See Renaming a File on page 3 32 for details 5 Select the desired Medium to save the file to by highlighting the Medium field and toggling the Enter key to choose from Internal Memory or USB Memory MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 31 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Note The USB Memory selection is only available when a USB memory stick is connected to the MT9083 Series Press New Folder f4 if you desire to setup a new folder in which to save the image f
76. IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGING THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH YOU SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT YOU NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CON TRIBUTOR ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NEC ESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTI TUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHOR IZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER 8 TERMINATION 8 1 This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License Provisions which by their nature must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive 8 2 If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim excluding declatory judgment actions against Initial Developer or a Contributor the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as Participant alleging that a such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2 1 and or 2 2 of this License shall upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospec
77. Mode To Set the Standard Mode 1 Pressing Range Pulse Width f4 brings up Dead zone f1 See figure below Press Dead zone f1 and set Standard HR 3 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the red legend on the Range Pulse Width softkey displays the newly selected Dead zone mode e HR Standard mode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 69 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode e ER Enhanced Range mode Note e If the range of the selected pulse width does not fall between 50 ns to 2000 ns the f1 key is grayed out and set to Standard HR OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 WHE Dead zone Enhanced 13 0 Range ER Distance Range Resolution Pulse width Low Density High Density Very High 100km Enhanced Range ER PON High Dynamic Range Standard HR High Resolution Short dead zone If f1 is grayed out only Standard HR is available for the selected PW At Event Figure 4 23 Dead zone Mode Selecting screen Setting the Enhanced Range Mode To Set the Enhanced Range Mode 1 Pressing Range Pulse Width f4 brings up Dead zone f1 2 Press Dead zone f1 and set Enhanced Range ER 3 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the red legend on the Range Pulse Width softkey displays the newly selected Dead zone mode e HR Standard mode e ER Enhanced Range mode Note e The Enhanced Range mode is o
78. New Folder Delete More gt gt Selected File Size 42759 Figure 4 37 Sort By Dialog 3 Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the white arrow so that it is positioned to the left of the first selection in the desired pane of the dialog Sort or By 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desire setting within the pane 5 With the desired settings highlighted in both panes press the Enter key The dialog closes and the files are listed in the selected order New Folder Use the following procedure to create a new folder 1 Press the File key the Load screen appears see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 2 Select the desired medium in which the new folder will be located by highlighting the Medium field and toggling the Enter key to choose from Internal Memory or USB Memory 4 92 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Note The USB Memory selection is only available when a USB memory stick is connected to the MT9083 Series 3 Press New Folder f4 the New Folder screen appears See Figure 3 22 on page 3 41 If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 4 to enter the name using the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to save the new folder to the selected medium or press the ESC key to cancel the N
79. Option 005 105 205 SMF High Power Optical Power Meter Option 007 107 207 SME MMEF Optical Power Meter e Option 010 110 210 Protector including protective cover and strap Optical Connector e Option 025 FC APC Connector One specified e Option 026 SC APC Connector connection is supplied Option 037 FC Connector e Option 038 ST Connector Can be replaced by the Option 039 DIN 4725 Connector pore e Option 040 SC Connector e Option 043 HMS 10 A DIAMOND Connector SM APC type connectors are factory options A 8 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common Cont d Appendix A Specifications 1310 25 nm Opt 053 055 056 057 058 Wavelength Fiber under test Pulse width 1490 25 nm Opt 056 058 063 073 1550 25 nm Opt 053 055 056 057 058 1645 to 1655 nm Opt 055 1625 25 nm Opt 057 850 30 nm Opt 063 1300 30 nm Opt 063 063 073 10 125 pm single mode fiber ITU T G 652 except for Opt 063 MMF 62 5 125 um GI fiber Opt 063 MMF 3 10 20 50 100 200 500 ns 1 2 4 10 20 us 3 10 20 50 100 200 500 ns 1 2 4 ps Note Only 1300 nm can be selected for 1 ps or more Temperature 25 C Pulse width For Opt 053 055 056 057 058 063 073 SMF 1 ps For Opt 063 MMEFEF 100 ns Wavelength range for 20 dB lower than the peak value Peak value 15 dBm or less Opt 053 055 056 057 058 073 Opt 063 SMF Op
80. PC via LAN The example uses the Window XP screens 1 Click Start right click My Network Places and click Properties 2 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties s Network Connections File Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back QJ s Search Folders Address Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet ie Disable a Bridge Connections Local r Create Shortcut Rename Wizard New Connection Wizard Network Setup Wizard 3 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box displays Select Internet Protocol TCP IP MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 14 7 Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function 4 Local Area Connection Properties e General Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Conr This connection uses the following items M E Client for Microsoft Networks M File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks M fH QoS Packet Scheduler a Internet Protocol TCP IP Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity 4 Click Properties The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box displays Select Use the following IP address
81. Power key to start the MT9083 Series Charging the Battery Pack To charge the Battery Pack using the AC Charger Adapter Ls 2 Power off the MT9083 Series Attach the jack from the AC charger adapter to the DC input located on the top connector panel of the MT9083 Series see Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 Attach the AC line cord to the receptacle on the AC charger adapter Insert the plug from the AC line cord into an AC outlet high speed changing starts The Battery Charging indicator lamp see item 2 in Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 is illuminated while the battery pack is charging Charging finished in about 6 hours and the Battery Charging indicator lamp goes out The battery is however charged 90 or more after 5 hours Disconnect the AC charger adapter from the DC input when charging is completed Note Notes on charging with the AC adapter charger MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 11 Chapter 2 Overview e To charge the battery pack fully keep the MT9080 Series at an ambient temperature of 5 to 30 C and keep the power off during the charging process Even while the battery pack is left installed and used with the power on charging occurs In this case it stops after three hours Also when charging is attempted at an ambient temperature higher than the specified value it may stop before the pack is fully charged This is because the temperature in the battery pack may rise above the upper limit during hi
82. Refi 31 754 Total Loss Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 6 21 OTDR Standard Analysis Screen Event Summary ON and open 6 54 summary MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Note To disable Pass Fail display set all of the Pass Fail Thresholds in Thresholds f to NONE See Thresholds on page 6 11 6 18 PASS is displayed in Event Summary when all of the Pass Fail Thresholds pass MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 55 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Trace Graph OTDR Construction Mode 6 56 The Trace graph displays the trace data in graph form Power loss is measured in dB along the vertical axis and distance is measured along the horizontal axis Use the Distance Display Units setting on the Preferences screen to set the horizontal axis units The downward slope of the trace indicates power loss attenuation over the distance of the fiber Figure 6 22 Trace Graph OTDR Construction Mode Trace waveform s Cursor A Cursor B Horizontal Axis scale Vertical Axis scale dB level indicator N AUV A N Trace Overview window Trace Waveform The Trace Waveform or Trace is the downward sloping line going from left to right that connects the data points collected during a test See item 1 in Figure 6 22 Up to four traces can be displayed simultaneously in Construction mode de
83. Resolution Short dead zone If f1 is grayed out only Standard HR is available for the selected PW Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 12 Dead zone Mode Selecting screen Setting the Average Time Average Count Specify the Average Time Average Count by either selecting one of the four pre set values or by entering the desired value in the field at the bottom of the dialog see Figure 6 13 on page 6 34 Note Average Count can only be accessed when the language for the MT9083 Series is set to Chinese See Language on page 3 10 for details on changing the current language selection Actual average time may be longer than the set average time depending on the resolution and distance range setting To set the Average Time 1 With the OTDR Construction Parameters screen displayed highlight the Num Avgs field 2 Press the Enter key The Average Time dialog appears see Figure 6 13 Note When the language is set to Chinese this dialog is titled Averaging MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 33 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 3 Average Time 15 sec Figure 6 13 Average Time Dialog If the language is currently set to Chinese use the Left and Right Arrow keys to toggle the Averaging mode from Time to Count depending on the desired mode For any language other than Chinese skip step 3 and continue at step 4
84. Select the desired storage medium by highlighting the Medium field if not already highlighted and then press the Enter key to toggle the selection to either Internal Memory Default or USB Memory MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 11 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 11 12 Note USB Memory is displayed in the Medium field when you connect the USB memory stick USB HUB cannot be used Disconnect the probe before using the USB memory stick To save to a specific folder in the selected Medium highlight the name of the folder Then press the Enter key and the name of the selected folder appears below the Medium field Press Select f1 and the Select Directory screen closes and the selected directory is displayed in the File Location field Base Filename The Base Filename field provides a template for use when generating an auto filename You can enter a base filename of up to 26 characters with a four character file extension To set the Base Filename 1 Press Settings f4 on the VIP screen to display the VIP Test Settings screen Press Auto Settings f3 to display the VIP Auto File Settings screen Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the Base Filename Press the Enter key to display the Base Filename dialog box Refer to Renaming a File on page 3 32 to input the file name Press OK f6 after making all desired entries and exit the Base Filename dialog box
85. Series appears in this manual it encompasses the MT9083x When the designation MT9083x appears the descriptions pertain uniquely to each respective unit Anritsu 1042 Jul t 10 00 Sy ox m TEE OTDR Construction H 5 Visual Fault Locate LU Light Source 0 OO op Mii eo eao wey lt i 5 F Figure 1 1 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master OTDR MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 1 1 Chapter 1 Quick Start MT9083 Series Functions The MT9083 Series provide the functions required to perform diagnosis of optical fiber faults especially in FTTx applications In addition to Optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTDR testing the MT9083 Series also include an Optical Power Meter OPM for power measurement testing and an Optical Light Source OLS for fiber identification Units can also be equipped with an optional Visual Fault Locator VFL which provides a visual reference for locating fiber bends and breaks within the OTDR dead zone Remote controlled operation is made possible with the USB Ethernet converter Basic Configuration The basic configuration of the MT9083 Series includes e TFT color LCD e AC charger adapter with line cord e Rechargeable lithium ion battery pack e Simple menu based op
86. Series nor into the end of a cable connected to the MT9083 Series If laser radiation enters the eye there is a risk of injury MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 10 3 Chapter 10 Visual Fault Locate VFL Mode Visible Fault Location The following is an example of how to use the Visual Fault Locate option to perform visible fault locations To perform a visible fault location b Set the MT9083 Series to Visual Fault Locate mode if necessary See Accessing the Visual Fault Locator on page 10 1 for details Connect the optical fiber to be measured to the VLD port as shown by the Port Connection indicator see item 2 in Figure 10 2 on page 10 2 Press Light Source Off f1 or Blink Off f2 to turn on the Visual Fault Locator Visually examine the fiber under test locating the fault bend or break by finding the red glow Press Light Source On f1 or Blink On f2 depending on which softkey was selected in step 2 to turn off the Visual Fault Locator when you have finished examining the fiber under test Note 10 4 Loss measurement and event point detection cannot be performed in the Visual Fault Locate mode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option The Video Inspection Probe VIP option is used to inspect fiber optic terminations Use the VIP to inspect installed connectors located inside hardw
87. TAT 5 45 Splitter Loss acer inna r a e Se din ae te 5 45 OR eae Seay AA ere ie oe a sheet E ea et 5 45 Report S ttingS ss serran a E i nee 5 46 HOACC i size E E AA E diane Mee aaceeetetertangeets 5 46 Selecting Data to OUTPUT ccc eeceeeeeeeeeeeneee teas seeeeeeeeeaeeeenaeeenaas 5 46 Fault Locate Testinng 0 cccccccccceeeeeeeeeee cece eee eeeeeeeeeaeseeeaeeeecaeeeeeeaeeneaees 5 48 Running a Fault Locate TeSt eccccccsceeesceeceeeeeeeaeeeeceeeeaaeeeesaeeeeeaaeeneaes 5 48 Connection CHECK 0 ceeeececceneeeeecee eee eeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeeaesecaeeesaaaeseneeeeesaeeseeaeees 5 51 GOOD connection sees spi cei eee ci a Havin eee 5 51 BAD CONMECTION ccceceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeaaeeeeesnaeeeeeeneeeseeeneneenes 5 52 Real Time Testing riiin eevee ibe A 5 53 Fiber Visualizer Mode Measurement Parameters 0 ee 5 54 Setting the Source Wavelength cceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseaeeeeaaeeenaes 5 54 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual IX Setting the Range Resolution Pulse Width and Average Time 5 54 Selecting the Dead Zone Mode 00 ecscceeeeceeeeneeeeeeee encase seeeaeeeneeeeeeaaeeenae 5 55 Setting the Standard Mode 0 cccececceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeneaes 5 55 Setting the Enhanced Range Mode cescceeeceeeeeereeeeeeeeeenaeeeees 5 56 Setting the IOR and BSC ecceeeceeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeaa 5 57 Swa
88. To ensure that the instrument is earthed always use the supplied 3 pin power cord and insert the plug into an outlet with a earth terminal If power is supplied without earthing the equipment there is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal electric shock or causing damage to the internal components Repair e Only qualified service personnel with a knowledge of electrical fire and shock hazards should service this equipment This equipment cannot be repaired by the operator DO NOT attempt to remove the equipment covers or unit covers or to disassemble internal components There are high voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury or fatal electric shock to untrained personnel In addition there is a risk of damage to precision components MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual v For Safety vi Calibration Replacing Battery Battery Fluid Battery Disposal The performance guarantee seal verifies the integrity of the equipment To ensure the continued integrity of the equipment only Anritsu service personnel or service personnel of an Anritsu sales representative should break this seal to repair or calibrate the equipment Be careful not to break the seal by opening the equipment or unit covers If the performance guarantee seal is broken by you or a third party the performance of the equipment cannot be guaranteed When replacing the battery use the specified battery and insert it
89. To set the source wavelength e Press Wavelength f3 to toggle through the source wavelengths The red legend on the softkey changes with each key press Depending on the configuration of MT9083 Series in use up to four wavelengths are available Note Pressing the Wavelength softkey on single wavelength units causes an error tone to sound The wavelength may be changed while a Real Time or Averaging cycle is running The test will restart using the new wavelength Setting the Range Resolution Pulse Width and Average Time The Range Resolution Pulse Width and Average Time settings determine the trace data distance range and resolution value data point spacing as well as the pulse width used for the test cycle To set the Range Resolution Pulse Width and Average Time 1 Press Test Parameters f4 the Distance Range Resolution Pulse width and Average Time dialog appears see Figure 5 20 on page 5 54 Distance Range Resolution Pulse width Average Time f Figure 5 20 Range Resolution Pulse Width Average Time Dialog 2 Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the white arrow to the desired list 5 54 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired setting within the selected list 1 to 3600 seconds can be input directly only for Average Time Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the desired settings are
90. WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LI BRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY AP PLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN AD VISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All source and documentation amp copy 1998 2003 Bill Spitzak and others Send questions and comments concerning this site to webmaster at fltk dot org This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the FLTK License Agreement MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License 5
91. Wavelength 0 6 um to 1 65 pm Level 65 dBm to 20 dBm Wavelength accuracy 0 3 nm Variable Attenuator 81578A 062 8163B Agilent Technologies Wavelength 0 7m to 1 4 pm Attenuation 0 to 60 dB 12 10 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 7 Measuring instruments recommended and optical fiber required for performance test for MMF unit Cont d Test item Measuring instrument and cable Optical Output Wavelength Waveform Monitor P6701B Tektronix Wavelength 0 5 um to 0 95 um P6703B Tektronix Wavelength 1 1 um to 1 65 pm Rising Falling 500 ps max Oscilloscope DC to 1 GHz GI Optical Fiber 62 5 125 um 8 km GI Optical Fiber 62 5 125 um 2 km GI Optical Fiber 62 5 125 um 2 m Optical Power Meter 81635A 8163B Agilent Technologies Wavelength 0 80 um to 1 65 pm Level 80 dBm to 10 dBm Accuracy 3 5 0 80 to 1 2 um Note See Conventions below for items 1 through 8 Conventions 1 Optical output and wavelength 2 Pulse width 3 Dynamic range Distance measurement accuracy MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 11 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 5 Loss measurement accuracy 6 Visible light source VLD Visible Laser Diode 7 Optical light source for fiber identification OLS Optical Light Source 8 Optical Power Meter OPM Table 12 8 Measur
92. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is inter active but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License
93. aaa ea ea aE detects 2 2 Dedicated Function KeYS ssesessessssessissrirssirnssirssrnssinnetnntnnntnnnnntnnnennas 2 2 Numeric Keypads iiaii neiaie ae iie p aa Aa ee aa aira e naat 2 3 LONI NAR kt ta A A T O ease ET 2 3 Rotary KNOB irsin a a aaa a a a 2 4 ESC Escape KEY eacoir E ETE AAS Ea E RET RA EaR iA 2 4 Arrow Key Set iriiri ea a a a aarep iat ae e 2 5 a A E E 2 6 Start Keyi e aaa a as NEE AE N a O 2 7 TOP MONU LEE ETE TT TT 2 7 SOMKEY S neaei eaa a ea e a a Eaa a a T a nea Ai 2 7 Back Panels E A E ee a A ee ee ae Aes 2 8 Installing a Battery Pack Treimi ai 2 8 Top Connector Parnell c cece ce eeece cence eee ee eee cease eeaaeeeeeeeetaaeeseeaeeeeaas 2 10 AC Charger Adapter sisine iiin ia ieaiai Au nii 2 11 AC Power Operation oo cceeceetceeeeeenneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeenees 2 11 Charging the Battery Pack cceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeaeeenees 2 11 Checking the Remaining Battery POWED cccesceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 2 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Important Information about the Battery Pack ccceeeeeees 2 15 Measurement POrts iicccecsecciccesececccteerseaccitivesenecdvuscsedsdltvenadectevertennetberss 2 16 Optical Connector and Adapter 00 cccceeceeeeeceeceeeeeeeaeteeeeeeeenaeenenees 2 17 Cleaning the Optical CONNECtOM eeeeeceeteeeeeeeee eect teeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeenee 2 17 Cleaning Optical Adapters cccceeseeceeeeeeneeeeeeeee
94. and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the current text entry field which is located directly above the character matrix The current title of the text entry field matches the currently selected Header screen field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the text entry field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the text entry field 4 Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name 5 With the desired character is highlighted in the character matrix press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the text entry field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in the Base Filename Use Backspace f5 or the BS key to delete characters entered in the text entry field 6 When all of the desired characters are entered in the text entry field press OK f6 to return to the Header screen 7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 until al
95. and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regard less of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding ma chine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party fora charge no mo
96. based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a
97. box closes when all of the selected files are pasted to their new location Use the following procedure to copy all of the files in a directory folder MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 27 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 11 28 To copy all files in a directory or folder 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen or the Load screen 2 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the files to be copied 3 Press the Down Arrow key and highlight the first file in the selected directory folder if not already highlighted Press More f6 5 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off 6 Press Copy f1 7 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files 8 Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the files from the selected directory folder are pasted to their new location MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration This chapter details how to check the performance of the MT9083 Series and calibrate measurement values Contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office when the specificati
98. can delete specific characters in a file name by using the Left and Right Arrow keys to position the text cursor behind the character to delete and then pressing the BS key When all of the desired characters are entered press OK f6 to use the new file name or press ESC to close the File Name dialog box without changing the file name Edit shortcut characters as described below 1 Press Edit List f5 to display the Edit List screen on the Figure 3 17 File Name dialog box 2014 Jan 26 15 32 Group Name Selections Wl SiteSSlocation name Sector Connector Position FiberS Pair FiberS Number Fiber Color Connector Location Insert new line MAX 20 Groups MAX 25 Items Export i Internal Memory USB Memory None Figure 3 18 Edit List screen 2 The following operations are allowed on the Edit List screen 3 34 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Changing order of groups items in the list Changing a group item name Adding a new group item Copying a group item Deleting a group item Changing a group type 3 To change the order of groups items in the list use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the group name filed or selections field Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to select an item to change the order in the list Then press Up F3 or Down F4 to move the selected item up or down 4 To change a name us
99. copy of this License along with the Library MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 27 Appendix C Software License C 28 You may charge a fee for the physical act of transfer ring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions The modified work must itself be a software library You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License Ifa facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application There fore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or
100. days currently set for Password Lifespan 4 Press the Up and Down keys to switch the Password Lifespan dialog box from Unlimited to a mode allowing you to set the number of days 3 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 5 Use the Up and Down keys or use the rotary knob or numeric keypad to set a desired lifespan from 1 to 200 days 6 Press the Enter key The Expiration Date indicates the expiration date calculated based on the current time To set the Password Lifespan to Unlimited 1 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight Password Lifespan 2 Press the Enter key to display the Password Lifespan dialog box Password Settings 2012 Jul 1 10 00 E 9 00h 80 4 General Setting Password Protect On Administrator Setting Password Password Lifespan ES 1 200 days User Setting Password Password Lifespan Expiration Date Unlimited Set the Password Lifespan Choose Unlimited in the case without limitation cS Press the Up Down keys or use numeric entry keys to change the value Figure 3 11 Password Lifespan dialog box 3 Press Unlimited f1 to switch the dialog box to Unlimited 4 Press the Enter key to display Unlimited in Expiration Date MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 23 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups To reset the expiration date
101. details Press f2 to toggle the state of the LSA loss intervals When the red legend on the softkey reads On you can adjust the length of the LSA loss intervals Note The Move LSA softkey is only active in the following loss modes Splice Loss 2pt LSA and dB km LSA Press f3 to return the LSA loss intervals to their default settings Note The Default LSA softkey is only active when in the following loss modes Splice Loss 2Pt LSA and dB km LSA Press 6 to close the Cursor softkeys and return to the Level Three softkeys 5 34 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Shift Mode Softkeys The Shift Mode softkeys are accessed from the Level Three softkeys by pressing Shift f5 Toggle f to set the Shift Mode Horizontal or Vertical Press f2 to reset the horizontal shift to 0 zero Press 3 to reset the vertical shift to 0 zero Press 6 to close the Shift Mode softkeys and return to the Level Two softkeys Extension Softkeys Fiber Visualizer Press F1 to display the Fiber Visualizer screen Press F2 to display the Trace screen emaa Press F3 to display the Threshold screen Press F4 to display the OTDR Report Settings screen Selecting and Positioning Cursors The active cursor is displayed as a red vertical line in the Trace graph Setting the Active Cursor To toggle the active cursor Press the Rotary knob or the Enter key to select
102. displayed in the Start Number field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 13 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Captured a VIP image 11 14 A captured image will look similar to the live image If it is read from a file a filename will be loaded and displayed on the image You can pan and zoom the captured image using the Left Right Up and Down keys and the rotary knob VIP 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Probe Model GO293A Tip Type FBET U12M Test Profile SM UPC gt 45 Auto Analyze off Auto File On N A 100 Captured Press START for Live image Figure 11 11 Captured a VIP image To capture image 1 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight VIP on the Top Menu screen Then press the Enter key to display the VIP screen 2 Assemble the VIP and press Settings f4 on the VIP screen to display the VIP Test Settings screen 3 Edit the VIP Test Settings and then press the Start key 4 Use the rotary knob to zoom in counterclockwise or zoom out clockwise The range of magnification percentage is from 100 to 200 and is displayed in the lower left of the image area If press the ESC key then the magnification percentage will become 100 5 Use the Left Right Up and Down keys to move the captured image MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Note If the magnification percentage is 100 the captured
103. disposal in accordance with your initial contract and the local law CE Conformity Marking Anritsu affixes the CE conformity marking on the following product s in accordance with the Council Directive 93 68 EEC to indicate that they conform to the EMC and LVD directive of the European Union EU CE marking CE Model MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master 1 Product Model 2 Applied Directive EMC Directive 2004 108 EC LVD Directive 2006 95 EC xxvi MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual CE Conformity Marking 3 Applied Standards EMC Emission EN 61326 1 Class A Immunity EN 61326 1 Table 2 Performance Criteria IEC 61000 4 2 ESD B IEC 61000 4 3 EMF A IEC 61000 4 4 Burst B IEC 61000 4 5 Surge B IEC 61000 4 6 CRF A IEC 61000 4 11 V dip short B C Performance Criteria A During testing normal performance within the specification limits B During testing temporary degradation or loss of function or performance which is self recovering C During testing temporary degradation or loss of function or performance which requires operator intervention or system reset occurs Harmonic current emissions EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 Class A equipment No limits apply for this equipment with an active input power under 75 W e IVD EN 61010 1 2010 Pollution Degree 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual xxvii CE Conformity Marking 4 Authorized Representative Na
104. dusty places In liquids such as water oil or organic solvents and medical fluids or places where these liquids may adhere In salty air or in places where chemically active gases sulfur dioxide hydrogen sulfide chlorine ammonia nitrogen dioxide or hydrogen chloride etc are present In places where high intensity static electric charges or electromagnetic fields are present In places where abnormal power voltages high or low or instantaneous power failures occur In places where condensation occurs In the presence of lubricating oil mists In places at an altitude of more than 2 000 m In the presence of frequent vibration or mechanical shock such as in cars ships or airplanes Anritsu Corporation Contact In the event that this equipment malfunctions contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office Contact information can be found on the last page of the printed version of this manual and is available in a separate file on the CD version MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual xix Software End User License Agreement EULA Software End User License Agreement EULA Please read this Software End User License Agreement hereafter this EULA carefully before using includes executing copying registering etc this software includes programs databases scenarios etc used to operate set etc Anritsu electronic equipment By reading this EULA and using this software you are agreeing to be bound by the te
105. e Press Sort f3 and then select the method by which the file names are displayed See Sorting Files on page 8 35 for details 8 34 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Press New Folder f4 to create a new folder for the file save See New Folder on page 3 40 for details 5 Press Save Table f1 To overwrite the current Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either the current table after having been saved or a recalled table press the Save key 2 Press Save Table f1 The following message appears File exists already Do you want to overwrite it e Press Yes f1 if you want to overwrite the file e Press No f2 if you do not want to overwrite the file Sorting Files The Sort function allows you to change the order in which files are listed in mass storage files saved to the MT9083 Series internal memory or to a USB memory stick Files can be sorted by type Name or Time Date in ascending or descending order To set the Sort type Press the File key The Load screen appears 2 Press Sort 3 The Sort By dialog appears 3 Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the white arrow so that it is positioned to the left of the first selection in the desired pane of the dialog Sort or By 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desire setting within the pane 5 With the desired settings highlighted in
106. facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying un combined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore
107. file ile Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 or the Load screen see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 Press More gt gt f6 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file Press Copy f1 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 95 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 96 5 6 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected file Press Paste f2 A message box stating Copy 1 1 along with the name of the file appears briefly Use the following procedure to copy multiple files in a directory To copy multiple files 1 OO ST LON Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 or the Load screen see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to copy and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to copy Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file a
108. file to be transferred To select multiple files click the mouse while pressing and holding Shift or Ctrl key 3 Click OK Ensure that the PC has enough free disk space Note 1 If total of multiple transferred files exceeds 5 MB an error message displays In this case the selected files will not be archived 2 File transfer will also fail when any of the following is used for the file name lt gt amp No folder can be loaded on the file operation screen when any of the following is used for the folder name lt gt amp File transfer from the main unit to PC becomes possible if file folder name is changed in File Utility via panel operation 3 You cannot upload the file whose name includes multi byte character 14 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 ACCESS Master MT9083A2 ACCESS Master Composition e Option 055 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 65 pm OTDR e Option 057 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 625 pm OTDR e Option 063 MMF 0 85 1 3 pm amp SMF 1 31 1 55 um OTDR e Option 073 SMF 1 31 1 55um OTDR Dynamic range Opt 055 1 31 1 55 1 65 um S N 1 37 5 36 33 5 dB Typ 38 5 37 34 5dB 25 C Opt 057 1 31 1 55 1 625 um 36 34 5 31 5 dB Typ 37 35 5 32 5dB 25 C Opt 073 1 31 1 55 pm 38 36 5 dB Typ 39 37 5dB 25 C Opt 063 0 85 1 3 1 31 1 55 um SMF 1 31 1 55 um 38 36 5 dB Typ 39 37 5dB 25 C MME 0 85 1 3 pm 28 27 dB Typ 29 28dB 25 C The dynamic
109. for Analysis to distinguish them as separate events are reported as Grouped events Far End Event EM Any event with a loss equal to or greater than the Fiber End threshold is reported as the Far End event Questionable End Event Bta A Questionable End event is reported instead of a Far End event when an Out of Range or Out of Distance condition is encountered PON Event BS All events other than far end events with losses greater than the far end threshold are displayed as PON events Loss dB The Loss calculated for the event is displayed in decibels dB A Loss value followed by an E indicates detection of a Macro Bend Note Macro Bend detection requires an MT9083 Series unit with at least two single mode operating wavelengths one at 1310 nm and a second at either 1550 nm or 1625 nm Reflectance A reflectance value is displayed for all reflective events while in the Reflectance field Reflect dB for non reflective events ook kk is displayed In addition to the reflectance value two other indicators may be present S e An S following the numeric value indicates that the reflective event being measured is very close to the top limit of the OTDR s data set and that it is considered saturated hitting the high limit of the measurement ability An S saturated indicator will be present any time that the peak of the event being measured is within 1 dB of the top of the OTDR Trace gra
110. has been published under a particular version of the License You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License 6 3 Derivative Works If You create or use a modified version of this License which you may only do in order to apply MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C21 Appendix C Software License C 22 it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License You must a rename Your license so that the phrases Mozilla MOZILLAPL MOZPL Netscape MPL NPL or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license except to note that your license differs from this License and b otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License Filling in the name of the Initial Developer Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License 7 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LI CENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WAR RANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE
111. image cannot be moved Analyze a VIP image Images captured by the VIP can be analyzed on the MT9083 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Probe Model Tip Type FBET U12M Test Profile SM UPC gt 45 Auto Analyze Auto File 100 Captured Press START for Live image Figure 11 12 Analyze a VIP image To analyze the image 1 Capture the image or load VIP image If you would like to change the VIP Test Settings press Settings f4 and change the settings 3 Press Analyze f2 to start analysis of the VIP image The progress bar is displayed during analysis 4 Circle of analysis range on VIP image and Pass Fail indicator are displayed if analysis is normally completed MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 15 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 5 Press Analysis Result f6 to show the table of analysis details probe moder 0E DAM Defects Count ven S If there are defects whose SIZE 1S O ieeans yan pass 9 neo asso acceptable found on the fiber they Adhesive 130 PASS 0 0 00 PASS o hi ll di 1 d Een contact 250 PASS 0 0 00 PASS o are grap ica y Isp aye in green that means Test Profile muro gt 45 Auto Analyze on Auto File on mss Hu a aii Press START for Live image Figure 11 13 Passing Analysis a EET When major defects detected during O analysis are flagged a pop up is Tip Type
112. in an Existing Loss Table 9 15 Deleting Test Data from a Loss Table ccccccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 9 16 Deleting All Test Data from a Loss Table cceseeeceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 16 Adding Comments to a Loss Table cccceecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeenee 9 17 Working with the Loss Table 0 0 0 cccecccccecceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaas 9 20 Saving Loss Table Data cceccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeteeaaeesneeeeeaaeeenaa 9 20 Sorting Files 4 2 3 vcci ied ie eee 9 21 Deleting Files xiccc t ET E TE aks tatceetpeca TE 9 21 Copying Piles ae ccicasectiie en ade aes de ei ett hate nee 9 23 Loading a Loss Table from Mass Storage 2 eccceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 25 Printing Loss Tables nreo ede aed eee 9 25 Connecting the Printer c cccescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeenaeeeeeaeeeeaas 9 26 Printing a Loss Table nsien eriin died ni a a a ai 9 26 Optical Light Source OLS Overview c ccccccsesseeeeeessseeeeesenaes 9 27 Accessing Optical Light Source MOde ecccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeneees 9 27 Optical Light Source Screen Elements ceceeeeeee esses eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 9 28 Light Source On Off Indicator 0 ceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeee tees ceaeetaeeeeeeeteneess 9 28 Port Connection INGICAtOM cece ce cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeaeeneaees 9 28 Softkey Shaa uae Mera ai eevee 9 29 Turning the Light S
113. in the LEGAL file c Representations Contributor represents that except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3 4 a above Contributor believes that Contributor s Modifications are Contributor s original creation s and or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License 3 5 Required Notices You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure then You must include such notice in a location such as a relevant directory where a user would be likely to look for such a notice If You created one or more Modification s You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code You may choose to offer and to charge a fee for warranty support indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code However You may do so only on Your own behalf and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty support indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warran
114. insert a blank space in the file name MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 25 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 4 With the desired character is highlighted in the character matrix press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the text entry field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in the filename Use Backspace f5 or the BS key to delete characters entered in the text entry field 5 Repeat steps 1 4 until all desired fields are edited Wavelengths The Wavelengths field displays all of the test wavelengths available for the current MT9083 Series Depending on the configuration of the unit this field will display 1 to 4 wavelengths In addition the selected wavelength per test replaces the _ placeholder character in the filename To select the desired test wavelength s 1 Highlight the desired wavelength 2 Toggle the Enter key to select or clear the check box for the highlighted wavelength depending on the current status of the check box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the desired wavelength settings are made Number of Fibers 6 26 Enter the maximum number of fibers for the current test in this field The number entered in this field sets the number of digits up to 4 digits used by the autonumber section of the base filename which is represented by the placeholder character To set the number of fibers to be tested 1 Highlight the Number of Fibers field Pre
115. is indicated by the Power Meter Wavelength indicator See item 1 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 for the location of the indicator MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 11 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Setting the Modulation Mode The MT9083 Series has four modulation settings in Loss Test Set mode e CW Continuous Wave e 270 Hz e kHz e 2kHz Note The following procedure applies to both the Light Source and the Power Meter when performing Loss tests with a single MT9083 Series It applies to the Power Meter only when testing with an external light source To set the Modulation mode e Press Modulation f4 Each key press toggles to the next modulation rate The red legend on the Modulation softkey displays the current modulation rate 8 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Setting the Average Time The following procedure details how to set the number of times the test data is averaged The higher the number of averages the more stable the Power reading To set the number of times data is averaged 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Average field 2 Press the Enter key The Average dialog appears Average 1 99 Times Figure 8 8 Average Times dialog 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to enter the desired number of times OR Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired number of tim
116. key The following message appears Are you sure you want to apply factory defaults 4 Press Yes f1 to restore the factory defaults OR Press No 2 to cancel the restore 5 Press the ESC key to exit setups Formatting Internal Memory The Format Internal Memory button on the About tab formats Internal Memory To format Internal Memory 1 Press the Setup key 2 Press About f6 3 Highlight Format Internal Memory and then press the Enter key The following message appears All user data files in the internal memory will be lost Are you sure you want to format internal memory 3 28 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 4 Press Yes f1 to format the Internal Memory OR Press No f2 to cancel the format The following progress message appears 2012 Nov 23 15 01 System Information Manufacturer Anritsu Model MT9083C2 057 Serial Number Hardware Vers Firmware Versi Formatting internal memory UNITROM Vers It may take a few minutes FPGA Version Do not power down the unit while format is running Formatting in progress Restore Defaults Erase Internal Memory Press Enter to format internal memory or ESC to exit Figure 3 14 About Screen 5 Wait for the format to complete Do not power off the MT9083 Series 6 Press the ESC key to exit setups Erase Internal Memory The Erase Internal Memory button on the About tab eras
117. key automated test Note The Start key does not apply to the following applications e Loss Test Set e Optical Power Meter e Light Source e Visual Fault Locate Top Menu Key m The Top Menu which lists the functions of the MT9083 Series is displayed whenever the Top Menu key is pressed See Top Menu Screen on page 3 3 for further details Softkeys The MT9083 Series have four softkeys on the front panel located to the under of the LCD screen and numbered F1 through F4 Each softkey s function is designated by the current operating mode of the unit and is labeled on the screen to the left of the key amp F4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 7 Chapter 2 Overview Back Panel The back panel of the MT9083 Series contains the unit s tilt bail and battery compartment as well as the various compliance and warning labels for the unit In addition the model serial label is also located on the back panel see item 2 in MT9083 Series Back Panel below Figure 2 2 MT9083 Series Back Panel 1 Compliance and Warning labels Model Serial label Tilt bail mr WO N Battery compartment Installing a Battery Pack To install a battery pack 1 Power down the unit if it is currently operating A CAUTION Be sure to keep the power off when removing the battery pack The battery pack and or the MT9083 Series may be damaged if the power is on when you remove
118. keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 14 3 Remote Setup Screen 14 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function To set the IP Address IP Netmask and Default Gateway 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the field 2 Press the Enter key An editor displays IP Address 192 Bee a t eee Figure 14 4 Editor 3 Use the Numeric keypad Left Right Up Down Arrow keys and Rotary knob to change the value Note When editing Default Gateway press None f1 to indicate that no default gateway address is to be used To set the Remote GUI Password 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Remote GUI Password Press the Enter key 3 The Text Entry dialogbox appears Up to 12 characters in length is acceptable This password will be required to gain access to the unit from the remote client Note The default password is blank MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 14 5 Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function To set the Remote GUI Port Number The Remote Control feature uses HTTP protocol for communications The default port for HTTP protocol is 80 In some cases due to network configuration rules it may be necessary to change the default port for HTTP 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Remote GUI Port Number 2 Press the Enter key Use the editor
119. link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library
120. more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C7 Appendix C Software License C 8 If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker lt signature of Ty Coons 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License do
121. necessary in most cases is however recommended by the TIA Telecommunications Industry Association EMS and M F are not included with the MT9083 Series Press Light Source Wavelength f2 to set the Light Source and Power Meter to the same wavelength if necessary Make sure that the modulation mode is set to CW by checking the red legend on the Modulation f4 softkey Toggle the softkey until the red legend reads CW if necessary Press Light Source Off f1 to activate the unit s light source Highlight the Reference field and paste the current Power reading as the reference See To paste the current Power Meter reading as a reference on page 8 14 for details The Loss reading indicates 0 00 dB and the Reference field displays the reference value for the current wavelength 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 for any additional wavelengths to be tested Note The Reference value s just stored are retained on power down of the MT9083 Series Test Procedure 1 Highlight the Threshold field to set a Pass Fail threshold for the current wavelength if desired See To set the Threshold value on page 8 15 for details If using the two patch cord method disconnect the patch cords at the inline connector If using the one patch cord method disconnect the patch cord from the optional Power Meter port MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode A CAUTION Regardless of t
122. not aligned e Align Overlays On When Align Overlay is toggled to On all currently displayed Overlay traces are aligned to the same point on the screen as that of the intersection of the Primary trace and the cursor See Figure 4 30 on page 4 85 e Align Overlay 1 dB Offset When Align Overlay is toggled to 1 dB Offset the traces are aligned as in Align Overlays On but each overlay is offset from the common intersection point by 1 dB See Figure 4 34 below OTDR Standard AUTO15500000 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Lew Dist km Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 5 7928km E 0 151 ppe 0 197 1 144 2 12 1475km 1 777 40 434 0 202 2 576 Drop 3 32 2385km Em 0 788 49 903 0 201 8 396 Overlay 4 52 4877km kM Fiber End 32 521 0 205 13 334 Hide Overlays 2 Pt Loss Refi ss WL IOR 1 468200 DR 100 1km RES 5 003 m PW 4us HR AVG 11264 Prev Event 1550 nm SM A 6 4310 km B 52 4821 km A gt B 46 0512 km More gt gt Next Event Trace Analysis Figure 4 34 Align Overlays 1 dB Offset MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 89 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Working with OTDR Standard Trace Files Displaying Trace Files You can display up to four traces at one time on the Trace grid Traces can either be recalled from mass storage e g internal memory or USB memory stick or displayed while testing To
123. of Standard mode HR is displayed Note The Fiber Test Parameters area is replaced by the Event Summary area when the Event Summary selection is set to On on the Preferences screen see Figure 4 3 on page 4 4 The Event Summary area displays the Total Events Fiber Length and Total Loss of the current fiber under test MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 31 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Trace Graph OTDR Standard Mode 4 32 The Trace graph displays the trace data in graph form Power loss is measured in dB along the vertical axis and distance is measured along the horizontal axis Use the Distance Display Units setting on the Preferences screen to set the horizontal axis units The downward slope of the trace indicates power loss attenuation over the distance of the fiber OTDR Standard AUTO16500009 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 as Horiz Shift 3 3873 km Vert Shift 1 150 dB 0 0 7 7 G Tanana o EPN L Reset Horiz Reset Vert 40 1550 nm SM IOR 1 468200 100 1 km RES 003m PW 4us HR AVG 24064 km A 15 5500 km B 35 6319 km A gt B 20 0819 km 8 402 Refi 40 512 Exit Prey Event Figure 4 11 Trace Graph OTDR Standard Mode dB level indicator 1 Trace waveform s 2 Cursor A 3 Cursor B 4 Horizontal Vertical offset 5 Horizontal Axis scale 6 Vertical Axis scale 7 8 Trace Ove
124. on page 8 9 Threshold values can be entered for each of the power meter s calibrated wavelengths To set the Threshold value 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Threshold field 2 Press the Enter key The Threshold screen appears Loss Test Set 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Light Source Wavelength 1550 nm Change Threshold AA CE mmie Wavelength Average 99 90 99 90 dB Reference 15 00 dBm 9 77 dB Input Output Be o I m Anritsu ee Figure 8 10 Threshold screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 15 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 8 16 6 os Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no reference currently set or the dialog displays the current reference setting in dB If the Threshold dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key or turn the Rotary knob to change it to the dB setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 9 If necessary change the threshold from to by pressing Change 1 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the new setting Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each wavelength to be tested To set Threshold to None 1 Highlight Threshold and then press the Enter key Th
125. on the setups Preferences screen a connection check is automatically performed at the beginning of each fault locate test The Connection Check screen consist of a simple gauge which provides a graphical representation of the connection quality along with instructions detailing how to proceed when the connection is GOOD and how to correct a BAD connection GOOD connection The gauge is green and yellow when connection is good The closer the bar in the connection gauge extends to HIGH end the better the connection is If the gauge is yellow and red the fiber needs cleaning Press Continue f1 or Start key to start the measurement immediately Fiber Visualizer 2013 Apr 19 11 21 gS WL gt nm DR km PW 3 US i AVG Sec start gt FE EEEE km Continue Events Connection Check Level LOW HIGH Connection level is GOOD Press CONTINUE or Start when the best connection is made to perform a test or press CANCEL to abort Test Will Auto Advance in 2 Seconds Reflect dB dB km Wavelength nm Pass Fail Total Loss dB ORL dB Fiber Visualizer Figure 5 18 Connection Check Good Connection Cancel Thresholds MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 51 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode BAD connection When the connection check leve
126. or By 6 74 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desire setting within the pane 5 With the desired settings highlighted in both panes press the Enter key The dialog closes and the files are listed in the selected order Printing Trace Files Trace files can be printed via the optional BL 80RII or SD1 31 printers Note The printed output from the MT9083 Series consists of a screen shot Only the details currently displayed on the LCD less the softkeys are printed Make sure that the desired details are displayed before printing Connecting the Printer Connect the MT9083 Series to the BL 80RII or SD1 31 printers using a USB printer conversion cable as shown in the figure below 36 pin male s4 Connect to the USB Down port Figure 6 30 Connecting the BL 80RII Printer Printing a Trace File Make sure that the Printer setup parameters are set as desired on the setups General screen See Printer and Paper Feed on page 3 9 for details Note In order to print an OTDR Construction Test Results screen Preview f3 must be set to On on the Test in Progress screen see Figure 6 18 on page 6 49 To print trace files 1 Connect the BL 80RII or SD1 31 printers to the MT9083 Series as shown in Figure 6 30 and then power up the printer MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual
127. or press the ESC key to cancel You can now use the new Base Filename Auto Functions Analysis This check box sets the status of the Auto Analysis function Select either of the followings Clear the check box No Auto Analysis is performed after capturing an image Select the check box Auto Analysis is performed after capturing an image MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Auto Functions File Name This check box sets the status of the Auto File Name function Select either of the followings e Clear the check box File name is not automatically generated e Select the check box File name is automatically generated Start Number Use this field to establish a start number for the auto increment section of the Auto Filename The setting range of the Start Number is from 1 to 9999 in increments of 1 To set the Start Number 1 Press Settings f4 on the VIP screen to display the VIP Test Settings screen Press Auto Settings f3 to display the VIP Auto File Settings screen 3 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the Start Number Press the Enter key to display the Start Number dialog box 5 Increment and decrement the Start number by using the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob or directly entering with the numeric keypad 6 Press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the entered Start Number is
128. ordinary GNU General Public License which was designed for utility programs This license the GNU Library General Public License applies to certain designated libraries This license is quite different from the ordinary one be sure to read it in full and don t assume that anything in it is the same as in the ordinary license The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it Linking a program with a library without changing the library is in some sense simply using the library and is analogous to running a utility program or application program However in a textual and legal sense the linked executable is a combined work a derivative of the original library and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such Because of this blurred distinction using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License not effectively promote software sharing because most developers did not use the libraries We concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better However unrestricted linking of non free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves This Library General Public License is intended to permit developers of non free programs to use free libraries whil
129. paste the selected files Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the selected files are pasted to their new location oN aM To copy all files in a directory or folder 1 At the completion of a Construction mode test the Save screen appears see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 Note You can only access the Save screen in OTDR Construction mode when File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 23 on page 6 61 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the files to be copied Press More f6 4 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off SoS 5 Press the Down Arrow key and highlight the first file in the selected folder directory 6 Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files 8 Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the files from the selected directory folder are pasted to their new location MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 73 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode
130. printout is completed Saving Fault Locate Data as an Image File You can save the image on test result screens and most setup screens To save a Screen Image to a file 1 Perform a Fault Locate test 2 At the conclusion of the test To save a screen image of the Summary screen continue at step 3 or To save a screen image of the Trace press View Trace f6 and then continue at step 3 3 Press the Print key the following message appears Output screen image to a printer or as an image file Please select output type using the function keys 4 Press File f2 The Save screenshot screen appears see Figure 5 29 Save screenshot 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GD 9 00h 80 4 File Name Medium Internal Memory OFiles 1150 MB Free Save Image Folder File Name Date Time Y File Type PNG Sort New Folder Delete More gt gt v Selected File Size Figure 5 29 Save Screenshot Screen 5 72 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 With the File Name highlighted press the Enter key to rename the file if desired See Renaming a File on page 3 32 for details 6 Select the desired Medium to save the file to by highlighting the Medium field and toggling the Enter key to choose from Internal Memory or USB Memory Note The USB Memory selection is only available when a USB memory stick is connected to the MT9083 Series 7 Press New Folder f4 if you desi
131. range is lowered by about 3 dB when a 50 125 pm optical fiber is measured using an MMF option MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications Temperature 25 C Pulse width 20 ps Distance range 100 km Averaging time 180 sec At 1 65 pm With background light 1 31 1 55 pm 19 dBm CW light Temperature 25 C Distance range 100 km for SME 25 km for MME Averaging time 180 sec Pulse width For 1 31 1 55 um 20 ps For 0 85 pm 500 ns For 1 3 pm 4 ps A 1 Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 ACCESS Master ltem Specifications Remarks Dead zone Temperature 25 C Back scattered light Deviation 0 5 dB IOR 1 500000 Opt 055 073 lt 7 0 m Pulse width 10 ns lt 8 0 m Return loss 40 dB lt 11 0 m Opt 055 lt 5 0 m Pulse width 10 ns lt 5 5 m Return loss 55 dB lt 6 5 m Opt 055 1 31 um lt 8 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 55 pm lt 9 0 m Return loss 40 dB 1 625 pm lt 12 0 m 1 31 pm lt 6 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 55 pm lt 6 5 m Return loss 55 dB 1 625 pm lt 7 5 m Opt 063 1 31 um lt 7 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 31 pm lt 5 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 0 85 um lt 4 0 m Pulse width 3 ns Typ 3 0 m Return loss 40 dB 1 3 um lt 5 0 m Typ 4 0 m Dead zone lt 1 0 m Typ 0 8 m The width for 1 5 dB lower than the peak Fresnel reflection IOR 1 500000 value of the reflected waveform Pulse width 3 ns Return
132. range setting To set the Average Time 1 Press Average Time f1 The Average Time dialog appears see Figure 4 24 on page 4 72 Note When the language is set to Chinese this dialog is titled Averaging MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 71 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 2 Average Time P 15 sec Figure 4 24 Average Time Dialog If the language is currently set to Chinese use the Left and Right Arrow keys to toggle the Averaging mode from Time to Count depending on the desired mode For any language other than Chinese skip step 2 and continue at step 3 Note The Time and Count selections are only available when the language is set to Chinese and are not show in Figure 4 24 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired pre set value or to move the white arrow down to the Sec field or Times field if the language is set to Chinese and Count is selected in step 2 e Ifyou highlighted one of the pre set values continue at step 5 e Ifyou are entering an amount in the Sec field or Times field if the language is set to Chinese and Count is selected in step 2 continue at step 4 Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value from 1 to 3600 in the field Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the new value is displayed in the red legend on the softkey The Averaging Mode setting can be c
133. rising edge of the reflection See the figure in step 7 which uses a 1000 ns pulsewidth and yields a 200 meter minimum distance between origin and Cursor A placement Cursor A may be placed to within two pulsewidths from the origin or start of the OTDR trace OTDR bulkhead MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 19 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Manual Reflectance Mode Both Cursors A and B are used for this measurement Note The following procedure applies to the OTDR Standard and OTDR Fault Locate applications only To perform manual reflectance measurements 1 Press the Setup key Press Preferences f2 3 Set the Reflectance Calculation to Manual See Reflectance on page 4 16 for details 4 Press Range Pulse Width f4 the Distance Range Pulse width and Resolution dialog appears Set the following e Set the Distance Range selecting the shortest possible range following the fiber length plus 25 rule e Set the Pulse width 1000 ns is a good typical setting This setting generally provides a combination of good range and good resolution e Set the Resolution to High Density See Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width on page 4 68 for details on making the setting for step 4 5 Press Average Time f1 and set the averaging to 60 seconds to provide good data acquisition See Setting the Average Time Average Count on page 4 71 for details 6 Press ManualTest f1 to t
134. s ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 1 OVGrVICW R A eee Be A B 1 2 Point Loss MeaSUreMeMts ccccceceeeececeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeenaeeeeeneaaaes B 1 Panel Splice MeasureMent ecccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeseseaaeencaeseeeaaeeeaes B 2 Panel Connector and Panel Splice Measurements ceeeceesteeeeeees B 3 Bad METAVE p EEPE EE E E ieee aditdileh T B 3 End to Endi LOSS tnea a ea a a ative a E E a a at B 4 Fiber Length Distance Measurements ssessriesrirssrrrrrirerrissrreesrressrns B 4 Set Up Using a Bare Fiber Adapter ccecceceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeenaees B 5 Set Up for Short Fibers ccccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaecaeesaaesaaeesaeeteeeseeneeee B 5 Determining the CB LOSS ccscccssecceeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeceeneaeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeas B 6 Appendix C Software License cc ssecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeenees C 1 Appendix D Limited Life Span Parts ccseseeeeeeeeeeeeees D 1 XVIII MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 1 Quick Start Chapter 1 Quick Start Introduction The MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTDR reduces the time to install commission and maintain fiber spans via high performance hardware and easy to use software This chapter describes an overview of the MT9083 Series detailing the characteristics of the unit and its basic operation When the designation MT9083
135. set via the Light Source Wavelength f2 softkey Light Source On Off Indicator Displays the current status of the Light Source laser Power Meter Area ED Power Meter Power Wavelength 1550 nm D Soy 1 Times 4 99 dBm pi lt oo resno None 10 ol dB Figure 8 5 Power Meter Area 1 Power Meter Wavelength indicator 2 Absolute Power reading 3 Range indicator 8 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 4 Average field 5 Reference field 6 Threshold field 7 Loss reading Power Meter Wavelength Indicator Displays the current test wavelength as set via the Power Meter Wavelength f3 softkey Absolute Power Reading Displays the current value measured by the Optical Power Meter The optical power measurement range varies depending on the specific optional power meter with which the MT9083 Series is equipped See MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common on page A 8 for details When an optical power level under the measurement range including light shielding is measured it is regarded as under range and Under is displayed in the Power reading area When an optical power level over the measurement range is measured it is regarded as over range and Over is displayed in the Power reading area Correct measurements cannot be performed in the under range or over range status CAUTION The light receiving part of the MT9083 Ser
136. size of the red circle as shown Slow Medium Fast Figure 14 6 Rotary Knob Speed Display You cannot rotate the rotary knob on the Remote GUI Also you cannot move any by keep pressing the rotary knob on the Remote GUI CAUTION If you change the remote control configuration such as IP address on the Remote GUI you can no longer control the main unit 14 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function File operation Click File to display the file operation screen File button ACCESS Master intmem mincbikOpt mimebikOp2 mmcbikOp3 nts usb Download Upload progress EE Click the Name column on the first line to switch the save destination Intmem internal memory usb USB memory No file name will display even if you select usb when no USB memory is connected MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 14 13 Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function File transfer from the main unit to PC L Ds Click the file name to be transferred To select multiple files click the mouse while pressing and holding Shift or Ctrl key When multiple files are selected it will be saved in a zip file Click Download on the bottom left Save destination selection screen will display Choose the destination folder and click OK File transfer from PC to the main unit 1 Click Upload on the bottom left A file selection screen will display 2 Click to select the
137. such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer 3 7 Larger Works You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product In such a case You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code 4 Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute judicial order or regulation then You must a comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible and b describe the limitations and the code they affect Such description must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3 4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation such description must be sufficiently de tailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it 5 Application of this License This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code 6 Versions of the License 6 1 New Versions Netscape Communications Corporation Netscape may publish revised and or new versions of the License from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number 6 2 Effect of New Versions Once Covered Code
138. such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you per mission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribut
139. taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license 8 4 In the event of termination under Sections 8 1 or 8 2 above all end user license agreements excluding distributors and resellers which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination 9 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL YOU THE INITIAL DEVELOPER ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHAR ACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MAL FUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COM MERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMI TATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM AGES SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 10 U S GOVERNMENT END USERS The Covered Code is a commercial item as that term is defined in 48 C ER 2 101 Oct 1995 consisting of commercial computer softw
140. the current test Note The Fiber Test Parameters area is replaced by the Event Summary area when the Event Summary selection is set to On on the Preferences screen see Figure 6 3 on page 6 3 The Event Summary area displays the Total Events Fiber Length and Total Loss of the current fiber under test Test Results Screen Softkeys The following softkeys are available on the OTDR Construction Test Results screen At the end of a test a Summary box containing the End Fault Distance Prior Event location and Total Loss value for the current test is superimposed over the Trace Grid e To view the Trace Grid press Close Summary f1 The Summary box closes allowing the full Trace Grid to be viewed e To recall the Summary box press f1 when the legend on the softkey reads Open Summary 6 58 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Press Accept f2 to accept the current test results The following actions occur e The Summary window closes if opened The current test results data is saved to Mass Storage If File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 the Save screen is displayed requiring the user to press Save Trace f1 before continuing to the next test e Construction mode advances to the next test Pressing Cancel f3 cancels the current test without saving the trace data and r
141. the Fiber Visualizer screen Auto Scale When set to On Auto Scale provides a trace display that utilizes the maximum amount of horizontal scale for optimum trace viewing To activate Auto Scale 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Scale 2 Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set Event Summary When the Event Summary selection is set to On the Fiber Test Parameters area see item 5 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 of the Trace screen is replaced by the Event Summary area listing the Total Events Fiber Length and Total Loss of the current fiber under test To set the Event Summary status 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Event Summary 2 Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set 5 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Reflectance Calculation Reflectance is the ratio of reflected power to incident power displayed in dB see Reflectance Measurements on page 7 17 for details The MT9083 Series has three settings for Reflectance Calculations Off Auto and Manual off Reflectance will not be calculated Auto The reflectance of any event is reported based on the position of cursor A The Auto setting is most useful for reflective even
142. the OTDR Construction Parameters screen displayed highlight the Range field or PW field Press the Enter key The Distance Range Resolution and Pulse width dialog appears see Figure 6 11 Distance Range Resolution Pulse width Low Density High Density Figure 6 11 Range Resolution Pulse Width Dialog Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the white arrow to the desired list Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired setting within the selected list Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the desired settings are highlighted MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 31 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the Range field and PW field displays the newly selected Distance Range and Pulse Width The distance range resolution pulse width settings may be changed while a Real Time or Averaging cycle is running The test will restart using the new settings The distance range resolution pulse width settings vary depending on what model of MT9083 Series product you are using Selecting the Dead zone Mode 6 32 The MT9083A2 B2 C2 have a Dead zone mode selection function The two modes available via this mode selection function are Standard mode and Enhanced Range mode The features of the two modes are described below Standard mode e Standard mode allows short dead zone measurements to be performed Enhanced Range m
143. the Preferences 1 2 screen and set the status for the following Distance display Units Connection Check Active Fiber Check Auto Analysis Auto Scale Event Summary Reflectance Calculation ORL Calculation Trace Overview Real Time Averages Real Time Attenuation Display Mode After Analysis MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 00h Preferences 1 2 80 J Preferences 2 2 Thresholds AutoSave About 4 3 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 4 Preferences 1 2 2013 Nov 1 21 52 Connection Check On General Active Fiber Check On Auto Analysis On Auto Scale Off Preferences 1 2 Event Summary On Reflectance Calculation Auto ORL Calculation Full Trace references 2 2 Trace Overview On Real Time Averages Low Real Time Attenuation Auto Attenuation WWE Display Mode After Analysis End Break AutoSave Used to select the units for distance measurement About Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 4 3 Preferences 1 2 Screen Distance Display Units Select the unit of measurement used to display distance on the horizontal axis of the Trace graph This affects Range and Resolution readings and analysis events incorporating distance To set the Distance Display units 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Distance display Units 2 Press Enter and select the desired unit from the Distance display Units men
144. the desired option settings are made MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode OTDR Construction Setup Screen Softkeys The OTDR Construction Setup screen contains the following three softkeys Press Continue fl to advance to the OTDR Construction Connect Fiber screen see Figure 6 17 on page 6 47 Press Test Parameters f2 to advance to the OTDR Construction Parameters screen see Figure 6 10 on page 6 30 Note This softkey is dimmed when Automode is selected in the Options area of the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 Press Header f3 to open the Header screen See Headers on page 6 37 for details Press Template f4 to open the Template Settings screen See Template on page 6 39 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 29 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode OTDR Construction Parameters Screen The OTDR Construction Parameters screen is divided into four panes with each pane representing the basic test parameters set per wavelength for the MT9083 Series unit in use To access the OTDR Construction Parameters screen e Press Test Parameters f2 on the OTDR Construction Setup screen The OTDR Construction Parameters screen appears Note The OTDR Construction Parameters screen can not be accessed when Automode is selected in the Options area of the OTDR Construction Setup scree
145. the pack 2 8 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview 2 Disconnect the AC adapter charger if currently operating the unit on AC power 3 Lay the unit down on its front panel to provide easy access to the battery compartment 4 If the tilt bail is closed lift the bail and place it in its upright position You cannot access the battery compartment when the tilt bail is in its closed position 5 There are two releases on the battery compartment cover which are denoted by recessed arrows Push down on the arrows and slide the door off of the unit 6 Ifa battery pack is currently installed take hold of the pull strap and lift the battery pack out of the compartment 7 Insert the new battery pack making sure that the terminals on the battery pack are lined up with the connector in the battery compartment Press down on the battery pack to insure that it is fully seated in the connector 8 Replace the battery compartment cover A CAUTION Attach the battery compartment cover securely Otherwise the battery pack may fall out resulting in injury to the user and or damage to the battery pack Note See Charging the Battery Pack on page 2 11 for details on charging the battery pack MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 9 Chapter 2 Overview Top Connector Panel 2 10 The top connector panel of the MT9083 Series contains the measurement ports used to connect optical fiber to
146. the pre set threshold criteria will be reported in the Event table see Thresholds on pages 4 15 4 19 Events whose loss equals or exceeds the Pass Fail Thresholds see pages 4 19 4 22 are highlighted in red in the Event Table No Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 1 5 8439km Ex 0 152 ee 0 025 0 147 2 12 1526km 1 812 40 495 0 201 1 274 3 32 2436km 0 780 49 960 0 201 7 114 4 52 4877km ME FiberEnd 32 415 0 204 12 028 Figure 4 15 Event Table The Event Table displays the following e Event number e Distance to the event e Type of event e dB loss for the event Reflectance if the event is a reflective event e dB km e Cumulative loss dB Note If the measured value cannot be obtained for example because a fault point is being approximated this is displayed as MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 39 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 40 Distance to Event The Distance field Dist km on the Event Table represents the distance from the start of the trace to the start of the feature This value is reported in the Distance Display Units selected on the setups Preferences screen for example km Types of Events Reported Reflective Event Reflection from an splice point such as a Fresnel reflection caused by a mechanical splice or connector Non Reflective Event EM Non reflective events include such low loss events as fusion splices and Ma
147. the threshold of splice loss Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 5 14 Thresholds Screen Thresholds settings can be saved and loaded MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 37 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 38 To Load a Threshold file Press Load f1 to display the Load Threshold screen 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Threshold file INI to read 3 Press Load f1 1 To Save a Threshold file 1 Press Save f2 to display the Save Threshold screen 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight File Name and then press the Enter key 3 Enter the file name for Threshold file and then press OK f6 4 Select the desired storage medium by highlighting the Medium field if not already highlighted and then press the Enter key to toggle the selection to either Internal Memory which is the default setting or USB Memory 5 Press Save f1 Auto Detect Parameters Events that exceed the Auto Detect parameter settings are reported in the Event Analysis table The Auto Detect parameters include Splice Loss Reflectance Fiber End Macro Bend Splitter Loss Splice Loss Determines the Splice Loss value equal to or above which will be reported in the Events analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 0 01 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Splice Loss threshold Use t
148. to x according to the length of the code A for 1 m B for 2 m and C for 3 m MT9083A2 OTDR Options List cron oe ert OTDR1 OTDR2 a one Light Source Optical Power Meter OTDR1 OTDR2 OTDR1 OTDR2 ae 55 E 1 31 1 55 1 65 1 31 1 55 1 65 1 65 pm OTDR 1 625 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 625 ym OTDR 1 625 1 625 1 625 1 65 MMF 0 85 1 3 pm 1 31 1 55 0 85 1 3 1 31 1 55 0 85 1 3 1 31 1 55 amp SMF 1 31 1 55 SMF MMF 1 625 1 pm OTDR 65 SMF SMF 1 31 1 55 pm 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 OTDR 1 625 1 65 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 23 Appendix A Specifications MT9083B2 OTDR Options List OTDR1 OTDR2 Optical Light Source Optical Power Meter OTDR1 OTDR2 OTDR1 OTDR2 SME 1 31 1 55 pm 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 L 4 1 31 1 55 a ies 1 31 1 49 1 31 1 55 1 625 1 65 0 1 31 1 49 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 625 1 31 1 49 055 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 65 1 31 1 55 1 65 1 65 um OTDR 56 31 1 SMF 1 31 1 49 1 31 1 49 057 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 625 pm OTDR SMF 1 31 1 49 1 31 1 49 1 55 1 625 pm 1 55 1 6 1 55 1 6 1 55 1 6 OTDR 25 25 25 MMF 0 85 1 3 pm 1 31 1 55 0 85 1 3 1 31 1 55 0 85 1 3 1 31 1 55 MMF amp SMF 1 31 1 55 SMF MMF 1 625 pm OTDR 1 65 SMF MT9083C2 OTDR Options List OTDR1 OTDR2 Optical Light Source Optical Power Meter a OTDR1 OTDR2 OTDR1 OTDR2 SMF 1 31
149. to highlight the desired row in the Loss Table Press Comment f5 The Text Entry dialogbox appears If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 3 to enter the name using the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 17 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 9 18 Enter key to use the new comment or press the ESC key to close the Text Entry dialogbox without changing the comment Power Meter 2012 Jul 1 10 00 9 00h 80 j Power Meter Wavelength 1550 nm Small Letter Reference MAX 30 Capital Letter ere es 002 1550nm zim ET cos assonm HH See gt e a e e 006 1550nm 007 1550nm ful fw x Space 008 1550nm 009 1550nm 7 6dB 32 4dBm 010 1550nm 3 3dB 31 7dBm Pass Backspace OK Figure 9 7 Text Entry dialogbox Loss Test Set mode 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the Comment field which is located directly above the character matrix Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the Comment field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the
150. to highlight the last row in the Loss Table Note The Delete f3 softkey is only available when the last row in a Loss Table is highlighted 2 Press Delete f3 The test data is deleted Note When working with a recalled Loss Table always rename the file before saving it This assures that the original data is still available See Saving Loss Table Data on page 9 20 for details Deleting All Test Data from a Loss Table When you start a new Loss Test Set test the Loss Table is populated with the data from the previous test either current or recalled Use the following procedure to delete all data from the Loss Table 9 16 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS To delete all Test Data from a Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled press Delete All f4 A dialog box with the following question appears Are you sure you want to clear the table Press Yes f1 to delete all test data from the table The dialog closes and the Loss Table screen is displayed with a blank Loss Table In addition the only softkeys available are Add f1 and Back f6 Adding Comments to a Loss Table Use the following procedure to add comments to any row in a Loss Table To add Comments to a Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob
151. value s just stored are retained on power down of the MT9083 Series MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 13 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Test Procedure L On the MT9083 Series highlight the Threshold field to set a Pass Fail threshold for the current wavelength if desired See To set the Threshold value on page 9 11 for details If using the two patch cord method disconnect the patch cords at the inline connector If using the one patch cord method disconnect the patch cord from the Optical Power Meter port Z CAUTION Regardless of the method used one or two patch cord do not disconnect the patch cord from the external light source The coupled level of the light source may change when the patch cord is reconnected Attach the free end of the patch cord connected to the external light source to one end of the fiber to be tested Using a second patch cord connect the MT9083 Series Optical Power Meter to the other end of the fiber to be tested Make sure that the Power Meter and external light source are set to the same wavelength Start the transmit mode for the external light source On the MT9083 Series press Loss Table 6 The Loss Table screen appears see Figure 9 3 on page 9 5 Press Add f1 to add the current test data to the Loss Table Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all fibers for the current Loss Table are tested Note It is a g
152. view of the current trace This is helpful in determining the location of an expanded section on the main view The black rectangle inside the Trace Overview window indicates the section of the trace that is currently displayed in the Trace graph when the trace has been expanded horizontally vertically Trace Overview must be set to On in the Preferences tab for the window to be displayed See Trace Overview on page 6 6 for details Cursor Distance Information The Cursor Distance information see item 3 in Figure 6 19 on page 6 51 displays the following e Distance from the origin of the trace to Cursor A e Distance from the origin of the trace to Cursor B e Distance between Cursor A and Cursor B MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 57 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode As you move the cursors the Cursor Distance information updates simultaneously Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance The Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 6 19 on page 6 51 displays the following e The current loss mode listed in the top section e The current loss reading in dB in the center section e A reflectance value reading for reflective events in the bottom section Fiber Test Parameters The Fiber Test Parameters area see item 5 in Figure 6 19 on page 6 51 displays the Wavelength WL Distance Range DR Pulsewidth PW Index of Refraction IOR Resolution RES and Averaging mode AVG set for
153. with the correct polarity If the wrong battery is used or if the battery is inserted with reversed polarity there is a risk of explosion causing severe injury or death DO NOT short the battery terminals and never attempt to disassemble the battery or dispose of it in a fire If the battery is damaged by any of these actions the battery fluid may leak This fluid is poisonous DO NOT touch the battery fluid ingest it or get in your eyes If it is accidentally ingested spit it out immediately rinse your mouth with water and seek medical help If it enters your eyes accidentally do not rub your eyes rinse them with clean running water and seek medical help If the liquid gets on your skin or clothes wash it off carefully and thoroughly DO NOT expose batteries to heat or fire Do not expose batteries to fire This is dangerous and can result in explosions or fire Heating batteries may cause them to leak or explode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual For Safety LCD e This instrument uses a Liquid Crystal Display LCD DO NOT subject the instrument to excessive force or drop it If the LCD is subjected to strong mechanical shock it may break and liquid may leak This liquid is very caustic and poisonous DO NOT touch it ingest it or get in your eyes If it is ingested accidentally spit it out immediately rinse your mouth with water and seek medical help If it enters your eyes accidentally do not rub yo
154. you clean the ferrule end surface of the fiber to be tested with an approved ferrule cleaner prior to making any connections To clean the optical fiber Ferrule end surface 1 Pull the ferrule cleaner lever to expose the cleaning surface d a Lf La i EA j iT a Cleaning surface A Figure 13 5 Ferrule Cleaner details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 13 3 Chapter 13 Maintenance 2 Hold the lever in the opened position press the optical connector ferrule end into the cleaning surface and then rub in one direction as shown in the following figure Figure 13 6 Cleaning the Optical Fiber Ferrule End Surface General Notes on Cleaning 1 Do not clean with a used ferrule cleaner 2 Do not finish cleaning with a swab as the swab fibers may adhere 3 Cap the cleaned connector 7 WARNING Check that no light is being emitted when cleaning and checking the ferrule end surface CAUTION The MT9083 Series may not satisfy performance when used with dirt or dust adhering to the ferrule end surface In addition the connected fiber and or the MT9083 Series ferrule end surface may be burned if high output light is emitted in this state Fully clean the fiber to be connected and the MT9083 Series ferrule end surface before measurement Notes On Storage Note the following when storing for long periods 1 Remove any dust or dirt adhering to the MT9083 Series before s
155. 0 000 to 250 0000km in the field 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen 4 64 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Distance Helix Factor Events in the template trace and the target trace may not align perfectly due to the differences in length of the fibers within a single cable Distance Helix Factor Adjust options compensate for the difference in length and also obtain improved splice location and loss estimation There are three option buttons in the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment area e None The template and target trace event locations will be used as is without Distance Helix Factor Adjustment Snap to Template End All template event locations will be converted to proportional relative to target end target event locations prior to correlation For example if a template event is located at a distance which is 43 21 from the template end event location then the location will be temporarily converted to a distance 43 21 from the target trace end event After correlation all events will be converted to proportional template end locations and stored in the target trace e Snap to Trace End All template event locations will be converted to proportional relative to target end target event locations prior to correlation and left as is after correlation To Set the Distance Helix Factor 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highligh
156. 0 nm CW 25 C 5 VLD Center wavelength 650415 nm When Option 002 installed Opal Oupa pove Note OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode 12 46 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 13 Maintenance This chapter details cleaning storage and transport of the MT9083 Series to help maintain performance Optical Connector Optical Adapter Cleaning Optical connectors and adapters need periodic cleaning Although the following procedures use the FC connector and adapter as an example use the same methods when cleaning other connector and adapter types Cleaning the MT9083 Series Connector Ferrule End Surface Use an approved adapter cleaner to clean the ferrule inside of the MT9083 Series measurement port s The ferrule should be cleaned periodically To clean the Ferrule end surface 1 Remove the currently connected adapter by raising the adapter lever you will hear a click when the latch disengages and then gently pull the adapter straight towards you Figure 13 1 Removing the Optical Adapter MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 13 1 Chapter 13 Maintenance 2 Saturate an adapter cleaner with isopropyl alcohol and then use it to clean the end surface and sides of the ferrule Figure 13 2 Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface 3 Press the tip of a new dry adapter cleaner into the ferrule end surface an
157. 04 005 007 Optical Variable Reference Attenuator Light Source we Optical fiber Optical fiber Reference Optical Reference Power Meter Optical Multimode Fiber Mandrel Detector 850 nm measurement Figure 12 14 Optical Power Meter Measurement Accuracy Test Connection Diagram Test Procedure Measure the measurement accuracy for input level 20 dBm and measurement wavelength of 1550 nm When Option 007 is installed the measurement is performed for input level 10 dBm and measurement wavelength of 1310 1550 850 nm When Option 004 or 005 is installed the measurement is performed for input level 0 dBm and measurement wavelength of 1310 1550 nm 1 Connect the reference optical power meter to the optical variable attenuator 12 26 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 2 Adjust the optical variable attenuator so that the indication value of the reference optical power meter is 20 00 dBm 10 dBm when Option 007 is installed and 0 dBm when Option 004 or 005 is installed 3 Connect the MT9083 Series to the optical variable attenuator 4 Check that the indication value of the MT9083 Series is 20 0 0 27 dBm measurement accuracy 6 5 Check that the indication value is 10 0 21 dBm measurement accuracy 5 when Option 007 is installed and 0 0 2
158. 073 38 36 5 dB SMF 1 31 1 55 ym Distance m 3 X measurement distance x 10 gt Measurement marker resolution Note that this does not Accuracy include optical fiber refraction index IOR based uncertainty Loss Measurement 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is Accuracy Linearity greater MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 3 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 1 MT9083A2 specifications Cont d em Rated values Romania Fiber Identification Loe CW 25 C SM fiber Light Source length 2 m 1550 30nm Opt 055 057 063 073 1650 5nm Opt 055 Center Wavelength 850 30nm Opt 063 1300 30nm Opt 063 Optical Power No function for Opt 063 MMF Meter 4 Measurement 46 5 1550nm CW Accuracy 20 dBm 23 2 C After executing zero offset gt 1 Wavelength range of less than 20 dB from peak value Peak value optical output 15 dBm max 1625 30nm Opt 057 2 S N 1 Dynamic range value applies 2 6 dB to the noise peak values 3 Background light of 1550 nm and CW light of 19 dBm are added when wavelength is 1650 nm Pulse width is 500 ns and distance range is 25 km for MMF 850 nm Pulse width is 4 ps and distance range is 25 km for MMF 1300 nm 4 Measurement range 50 to 5 dBm Peak power absolute maximum input rating at 10 dBm wavelength at 1550 nm 5 An SM fiber ITU T G 652 and a master FC connector are used 12 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Ope
159. 083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode OTDR Construction Connect Fiber Screen The OTDR Construction Connect Fiber screen contains two panes The top pane is the Connect Fiber prompt which prompts you to connect the fiber that corresponds to the number displayed The lower pane displays a list of filenames based on the base filename as established on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 OTDR Construction Connect Fiber 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Continue Connect Fiber 1 Change Fiber i 2 Cancel Files wn NearFar13100ther 001 NearFar15500ther 001 Cancel All NearFar16250ther 001 Josts Connect test fiber and press Continue to start test Figure 6 17 OTDR Construction Connect Fiber screen OTDR Construction Connect Fiber Screen Softkeys The following four softkeys are available on the OTDR Construction Connect Fiber screen Press Continue f1 to advance to the Connection Check screen if Connection Check is selected in the Options section of the OTDR Construction Setup screen If Connection Check is cleared in the Options section of the OTDR Construction Setup screen pressing Continue f1 advances to the OTDR Construction Trace screen and starts the test of the currently connected fiber MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 47 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Press Change Fiber f2 to change the
160. 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Non Reflective Event Loss 2 Press Enter The Non Reflective Event Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 Ifthe Non Reflective Event Loss dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 5 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set Non Reflective Event Loss to None when it is currently set in dBs To set Non Reflective Event Loss threshold to None 1 Highlight Non Reflective Event Loss and then press the Enter key The Non Reflective Event Loss dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical This parameter highlights reflective event losses such as connectors and mechanical splices in the Events Analysis table The range of settings for this parameter is 0 10 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Reflective Event Loss threshol
161. 1 55 pm 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 OTDR 1 625 1 65 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 625 1 625 1 65 1 31 1 49 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 31 1 55 1 625 um OTDR 1 625 A 24 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix B Sample Traces Appendix B Sample Traces Overview This appendix contains examples of trace displays and the cursor positions for the various Standard OTDR mode measurements The samples include e 2 Point Loss e Panel Splice Measurements e Panel Connection and Panel Splice Measurements e Bad Launch e End to End Loss e Fiber Length Distance Measurements e Set Up when using a Bare Fiber Adapter e Set Up for Short Fibers e Determining the dB Loss 2 Point Loss Measurements The following figure shows an OTDR sample trace with a section of launch cord dead zone fiber of a known length preceding it The 2 Point loss includes the input connector loss of the fiber under test FUT FUT OTDR LAUNCH CORD J A B Distance MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual B 1 Appendix B Sample Traces The next figure shows an OTDR sample trace with a section of launch cord dead zone fiber of a known length preceding the FUT and a cord following the FUT The 2 Point loss includes the loss of both connectors of the fiber under test FUT LAUNCH CORD y FUT gCORD A B dB Distance Panel Splice Measurements The figure below shows an OTDR sample trace with Cursor A positioned for a P
162. 1 dBm measurement accuracy 5 when Option 004 or 005 is installed Note Use a SM fiber ITU T G 652 and master FC connector MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 27 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Calibration The parameters that can be calibrated with the MT 9083 Series are the Backscatter coefficient BSC level and the Optical Power Meter measurement accuracy Of these the Backscatter coefficient level is the only parameter that the user can calibrate Backscatter Coefficient Level Calibration Prepare the optical connection where the return loss Rp dB is known then connect the devices as shown in the following figure MT9083 Series Optical connector where return loss is known SM Optical Fiber SM Optical Fiber Figure 12 15 Backscatter Coefficient Level Calibration Connection Diagram Test Procedure 1 At the Top Menu screen select OTDR Standard and then press the Enter key the OTDR Standard Trace screen appears 2 Press the Setup key 3 Press Preferences f2 and then set the Reflectance Calculation to Auto if not already set See Reflectance Calculation on page 4 6 for details 4 Press the ESC key to close the Setups and return to the OTDR Standard Trace screen 5 Press More f6 until the black legend on f2 reads IOR BSC 6 Press IOR BSC f2 and set the BSC to 80 00dB See Setting the IOR and BSC on page 4 73 for details Press More
163. 12 1502km 1 600 39 901 0 219 2 888 Close 3 32 2370km Em 0 759 49 072 0 209 8 692 Summary 4 52 4770km E Fiber End 31 751 0 216 dB Accept 0 0 13 0 SUMMARY 26 0 End Fault Distance 52 4770 km Cancel 39 0 Prior Event 32 2370 km Loss Mode 52 0 13 829 dB Ennen oss Display From o 25 50 75 100km A 52 4770 km SUMMARY Pass Total Events 4 H Cursor Bo pa4BT7 im 0 829 Fiber Length 52 4770 km pears A gt B 0 0107 km Refi 31 754 Total Loss Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 1 5 OTDR Construction Summary screen For further details on Construction mode testing see Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 1 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 1 Quick Start Loss Test Set Testing Loss Test Set mode is made available by equipping a MT9083 Series with one of the optional Power Meters Options 004 005 007 This provides the ability to perform power meter light source tests The optical power measurement range varies depending on the specific optional power meter with which the MT9083 Series is equipped See MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common on page A 8 for details Loss Test Set mode is accessed by highlighting the Loss Test Set selection on the Top Menu screen and then pressing the Enter key Units not equipped with the power meter option will not display the Loss Test Set selection Loss Test Set 2012 Jul 1 10 00 3 Light Source Wavelength 1550 nm
164. 14 8 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server i 5 For the IP address assign the network address that is different from the one set for the main unit In this document we use the below address When finished click OK IP address 192 168 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 14 9 Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Obtain DNS server addre automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS ser
165. 2 tee Ldiff x Lx Lave_2 Check that the Lair n Ldiff 1 Ldi 2 Ldif 6 Laue 9 Laie X is 0 1 or less MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 23 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Optical Output Level and Wavelength of Visual Fault Locator VLD option 002 or 102 This test is performed on MT9083 Series units equipped with the optional Visual Fault Locator VLD Visual Laser Diode Connect the devices as shown in the following figure Optical Fiber within 2 m fiber bending radius 50 mm MT9083 Series Optical Spectrum Analyzer Optical Detector Optical Power Meter Figure 12 12 Optical Output Level and Wavelength of Visual Fault Locator Test Connection Diagram Test Procedure 1 At the Top Menu screen select Visual Fault Locate and then press the Enter key the Visual Fault Locate screen appears 2 Press Light Source Off f1 to start the Visual Fault Locator visible laser diode the red legend on the softkey changes to On 3 Measure the center wavelength using the optical spectrum analyzer and measure the optical output level using the optical power meter Note The wavelength and optical output performance test is performed with the Visual Fault Locator set to On Do Not activate the Blink mode 12 24 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Optical Output and Wavelength of Optical Light Source for Fiber Identi
166. 25 1650 nm Modulated light 270 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz measurement Wavelength range 0 75 to 1 7 pm Option 007 1 2 to 1 7 pm Option 004 005 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 17 Appendix A Specifications Optical Power Meter Option 004 005 007 Cont d Optical power Option 004 measurement range 23 to 50 dBm CW light 1550 nm 20 to 53 dBm modulated light 1550 nm Option 005 30 to 43 dBm CW light 1550 nm 27 to 46 dBm modulated light 1550 nm Option 007 6 to 67 dBm CW light 1310 nm 3 to 60 dBm CW light 850 nm 3 to 70 dBm modulated light 1310 nm 0 to 63 dBm modulated light 850 nm Measurement accuracy Option 004 5 After executing zero 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW light offset when master FC connector is used Option 005 5 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW light 25 C Option 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW light 5 10 dBm 850 nm CW light 25 C A 18 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications Optical Power Meter Option 004 005 007 Cont d Return loss 36 dBm or greater Option 004 1 55 0 02 pm When an SM fiber ITU T G 652 is used with 45 dB or more return loss No specification for option 005 007 Optical connector Option 004 Replaceable adapter 037 FC MT9083A2 B2 C2 038 ST Option number for 037 038 039 039 DIN 040 043 040 SC 043 HMS 10 A Option 005 Connector adapter MA9005B
167. 3 14 New Folder Delete More gt gt Selected File Size 586 Figure 9 9 Load screen Loss Test Set mode 2 Highlight the desired File Name in the File Name table 3 Press Load Table f1 The Loss Table screen appears with the selected Loss Table displayed Printing Loss Tables Loss Tables can be printed via the optional BL 80RII printer MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 25 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Note The printed output from the MT9083 Series consists of a screen shot Only the details currently displayed on the LCD less the softkeys are printed Make sure that the desired details are displayed before printing Connecting the Printer Connect the MT9083 Series to the BL 80RII printer using a USB printer conversion cable as shown in the figure below 36 pin male _ Connect to the USB Down port Figure 9 10 Connecting the BL 80RII Printer Printing a Loss Table Make sure that the Printer setup parameters are set as desired on the setups General screen See Printer and Paper Feed on page 3 9 for details To print a Loss Table 1 Connect the BL 80RII printer to the MT9083 Series as shown in Figure 9 10 and then power up the printer 2 Perform the desired test or recall the desired Loss Table from mass storage 3 Press the Print key The following message is displayed Output screen image to a printer or as an i
168. 40 00 78 50 default Figure 6 14 IOR BSC Dialog 3 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys to move the white arrow to the Fiber Type field if necessary and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired fiber type When the desired fiber type is highlighted press the Enter key or the Rotary knob Or If the fiber type is not listed select Other and then move the white arrow to the IOR and BSC fields Use the Numeric keypad to enter the desired values When the IOR and BSC values are entered press the Enter key or the Rotary knob Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value 4 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob to close the dialog The new settings are displayed in the IOR BSC field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 35 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Apply to All Wavelengths setting Use the Apply to All Wavelengths setting to automatically set the same basic test parameters for all test wavelengths available on the MT9083 Series in use To apply the same parameter settings for all wavelengths 1 With the OTDR Construction Parameters screen displayed highlight the Apply to All Wavelengths field 2 Press the Enter key The setting established for the current wavelength will be applied to all available wavelengths OTDR Construction Parameters Screen Softkeys The following three softkeys are available on the OTDR Construction Par
169. 43d6 00dBM 006 1550nm 3 02dB 12 01dBm Backspace 007 1550nm 1 36dB 13 67dBm 008 1550nm 1 02dB 14 01dBm 009 1550nm 9 82dB 21dBm 010 1550nm 9 97dB 5 06dBm OK Capital Letter 8 32 Figure 8 12 Text Entry dialogbox Loss Test Set mode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the Comment field which is located directly above the character matrix Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the Comment field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the Comment field 4 Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name 5 With the desired character is highlighted in the character matrix press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the Comment field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in the Comment Use Backspace f5 or the BS key to delete characters entered in the Comment field 6
170. 5 to 20 dBm Wavelength accuracy 0 3 nm Variable Attenuator 8163B 81570A Agilent Technologies Wavelength 1 1 to 1 65 pm Attenuation 0 to 30 dB Insertion loss 3 dB or less Resolution 0 1 dB or less a E a E Waveform Monitor P6703B Tektronix AA Wavelength 1 1 to 1 65 um v ae 500 ps max pews TEL LL DC to 1 GHz SM Optical SM Optical Fiber 60 km 60 km SM Optical Fiber 60 km Mw fet ff td SM Optical Fiber 20 km Pt vy J fof tf fp monia P t gt opasan e Optical Power Meter OPM37LAN Sanwa Electric Instrument co ltd y Wavelength 0 65 um Level 65 to 10 dBm Accuracy 0 3 dB MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 9 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 6 Measuring instrument recommended and optical fiber required for performance test for SMF unit Cont d Test item Measuring instrument and cable Wavelength Optical Output Measurement accuracy Optical Power Meter 8163B 81630B Agilent Technologies Wavelength 0 97 mm to 1 65 mm Level 70 dBm to 28 dBm Accuracy 3 0 1255 to 1630 nm Reference Light Source 81654A 8163B Agilent Technologies Wavelength 1 31 1 55 mm Output 0 dBm or more Table 12 7 Measuring instruments recommended and optical fiber required for performance test for MMF unit Test item Measuring instrument and cable Optical Output Wavelength Optical Spectrum Analyzer MS9740A
171. 52 4877km Fiber End 32 415 Are you sure you want to delete the event at distance 32 2436 km 50 75 100km WL 1550 nm SM IOR 1 468200 DR 100 1km RES 5 003m Pw 4us HR AVG 24576 Prev Event Next Event Figure 4 19 Delete Event Warning Message Splice Loss 0 734 Refl 49 967 Analysis A 32 2436 km B 52 4877 km A gt B 20 2442 km Trace Note The end event cannot be deleted If you select the end event the following message is displayed Cannot delete the end event MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 49 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 Press Yes f1 The following happens e The Warning Message closes The event is removed from the Event table The event flag for the deleted event is removed from the trace Note The original trace and event table can be retrieved even if you have saved the edited trace Press More gt gt f6 until f1 reads Analyze and then press f1 to re run the analysis The trace and it s Event table are returned to their original status Softkeys OTDR Standard Mode OTDR Standard mode has six softkeys accessed via the f1 f6 keys on the right side of the LCD screen and four softkeys accessed via the F1 F4 keys on the lower side of the LCD Screen see Figure 2 1 on page 2 1 Softkey text indicates the softkey functions and may change with each keypress Softkey Levels There are four main levels
172. 6 Load Overlay Dialog 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired Load Overlay mode e Without Setups Loads the trace for display only e With Setups Loads the trace for display and forces the instrument test parameters to those used when the selected Overlay trace was collected 5 Press the Enter key the Load screen closes and the selected trace is displayed in the Trace grid in the an Overlay trace position Note If an Overlay trace is loaded when no primary trace exists the Overlay trace will NOT behave the same as a Primary trace when performing expansion contraction or Display From A B or Origin Sorting Files The Sort function allows you to change the order in which files are listed in mass storage files saved to the unit s internal memory or to a USB memory stick Files can be sorted by type Name or Time Date in ascending or descending order MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 91 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode To set the Sort type 1 Press the File key The Load screen appears 2 Press Sort 3 The Sort By dialog appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Ga 69 00h 80 4 Medium Internal Memory 4 Files 1151 MB Free Folder Load File Name Date Time Primary A AUTO15500003 SOR Sort By 12 11 22 11 03 AUTO15500002 SOR Names 12 11 22 10 59 Load AUTO13100002 S0R P Descending Date Time 12 14 22 10 55 Overlay AUTO13100001 SOR 12 11 22 10 51 Sort
173. 6 20 through 6 36 for details 4 Fill in the header details if desired Press Header f3 the Header screen appears See Headers on page 6 37 for details 5 Ifyou want to set a template press Template f4 to open the Template Settings screen See Template on page 6 39 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 61 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 Press Continue f1 The OTDR Construction Connect Fiber screen appears see Figure 6 17 on page 6 47 7 Connect the first fiber to be tested to the desired test measurement port See Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 for the location of the test measurement ports Note Depending on the configuration of your MT9083 Series the unit may have one or two test measurement ports 8 Press Continue f1 Depending on the Connection Check setting on the previous screen one of the following will happen e Ifyou selected Connection Check on the Setup screen the Connection Check screen appears When the best optimized connection is achieved see Connection Check on page 6 67 for details press the Start key or Continue f1 to perform the test e Ifyou cleared the Connection Check check box pressing Continue f1 begins the Construction mode test and advances to the Test in Progress Trace screen see Figure 6 18 on page 6 49 9 Ifyou want to review the Trace data and Event Table at the conclusion of the current test toggle Preview f3
174. 8200 B 52 5684 km 13 300 DR 100 1km RES 5 003 m More gt gt A gt B 51 9232 km Refi tkk PW 4us HR AVG 24064 Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event The LSA 2 Point Loss is the change in dB Y Axis calculated between the two points When the Cursor A Y Axis position is greater than the Cursor B Y Axis position a positive loss measurement is displayed LSA Least Squares Approximation technique is useful when the trace is excessively noisy The left interval is associated with Cursor A and the right interval with Cursor B The default location for the left interval is immediately to the right of Cursor A The default location for the right interval is immediately to the left of the B Cursor To perform a 2 point LSA loss measurement 1 we tS Place the cursors as for an end to end loss measurement See Fiber Length Measurement on page 7 1 for details Select Display From Origin see Display From on page 4 71 Press More gt gt f6 to access the Level Two softkeys Press Loss Mode f3 and set the loss mode to 2 Pt LSA Display from each cursor and expand the screen horizontally and vertically for more accurate cursor placement if necessary see Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 Check that the LSA intervals are located on areas of linear backscatter and do not touch a splice or other feature If necessary adjust the LSA MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual
175. 9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 15 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 2 The unit cannot accept SCPI commands unless you log in To access the Password Settings screen 1 Press the Setup key on the Top Menu screen if you are not currently in Setup 2 Press Password Settings f2 to display the Password Settings screen Password Settings 2012 Jul 1 10 00 General Setting Administrator Setting Password RR SR RE EE User Setting Password Settings Password Password Lifespan Unlimited Expiration Date Unlimited Set On or Off for protection with Password The Login screen is displayed on startup when set to On Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 3 5 Password Settings screen item OR 3 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the desired Press the ESC key to close the Password Settings screen 3 16 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Password Protect If Password Protect is set to On the Login screen will appear at startup Additionally when Password Protect is set to On all user access will be recorded to a log file Access log entries are recorded at the following times Power on Login Start OTDR measurement Power off Z CAUTION Do not forget your Administrator Password If you forget the password you will
176. ACCESS Master Operation Manual 1 11 Chapter 1 Quick Start For further details on the Video Inspection Probe see Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 1 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview Chapter 2 Overview It is important to become familiar with the layout of the MT9083 Series Three areas important to the use and function of the MT9083 Series are the front panel back panel and top connector panel Front Panel The front panel contains the unit s operating controls and its LCD display Figure 2 1 MT9083 Series Front Panel 1 Power key 6 ESC Escape key 2 Dedicated function keys 7 Arrow key set and Numeric keypad 8 Enter key 3 LCD display 9 Start key MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 1 Chapter 2 Overview 4 Softkeys 10 Top Menu key 5 Rotary knob 11 Softkeys Power Key Power Press the Power key to power the unit up down Dedicated Function Keys VLD VLD key this key is reserved for future expansion Backlight key this key is used to adjust the brightness of the backlight See Adjusting the Backlight on page 3 2 for details Save key Press this key to access the Save screen File key Press this key to enter the Load screen to recall previou
177. ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 21 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Real Time Testing Real Time test mode provides a quick real time view of the initial trace information In this mode trace data is not continually averaged but is stopped and restarted after each screen update Real Time mode enables optimization of fiber connections at or near the OTDR connector as the trace display shows the effect of the making changes to the connections To start a Real Time test e Press Real Time Off f2 to start a real time test The red legend on the softkey changes to On and the test begins Note To attenuate a saturated event when in Real Time test mode move the active cursor within the event until the unit auto attenuates the event pulling the event out of saturation To stop a Real Time test e Press Real Time On f2 to stop the current real time test The red legend on the softkey changes to Off and the real time test ends 7 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Overview Loss Test Set mode is made available by equipping a MT9083 Series with one of the optional Power Meters options 004 005 007 This provides the ability to perform power meter light source tests The optical power measurement range varies depending on the specific optional power meter with which the MT9083 Series is equipped See MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common on page A 8 for deta
178. AUTO16250000 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Cp 99 00h 80 Cum Loss dB 1 5 8172km D 0 205 sete kkk 0 222 1 291 2 12 1553km E 1 560 39 868 0 219 2 886 Drop 3 32 2370km 0 743 49 057 0 211 8 687 Overlay 4 52 4821km ME FiberEnd 31 708 0 216 13 798 20 km WL 1625 nm SM IOR 1 468500 DR 100 1km RES 5 003 m Moraes PW 4us HR AVG 11776 Prev Event 2 Pt Loss 10 921 Refi 39 870 Analysis A 12 0765 km B 52 4821 km A gt B 40 4057 km Trace Next Event Figure 4 33 Trace Screen with Overlay Traces Hidden To restore hidden Overlay traces e Press Show Overlays f3 The hidden overlays are restored to the Trace screen Note The Show Overlays softkey is only available when there are hidden overlay traces as shown in Figure 4 33 above 4 88 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Align Overlays The Align Overlay function forces all Overlay traces to align at the intersection of the currently active cursor and the Primary trace Note The Align Overlay function is only available when in either Display From A or Display From B mode See Display From on page 4 71 for details on setting the Display From mode There are three Align Overlay states which are reached by toggling Align Overlays f4 e Align Overlays Off When Align Overlay is toggled to Off the currently displayed Overlay traces are
179. Active Cursor To precisely position the cursor 1 Select the desired cursor see Setting the Active Cursor above 2 Press Display From f5 and select the desired display from setting Display From A or Display From B depending on which is cursor is currently selected as the active cursor 3 Use the Left Right Up and Down Arrow keys to zoom up the desired amount See Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 6 65 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 4 Turn the Rotary knob to position the active cursor until the desired cursor distance is displayed in the Cursor Distance Information area see item 3 in Figure 6 22 on page 6 56 Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract Use the Horizontal Vertical expand to expand a section of the trace when e Positioning the cursors for a test e Adjusting the LSA intervals To expand an area 1 Position the desired cursor A or B to the approximate position 2 Toggle Display From f5 to the desired mode Display From A or Display From B depending on the cursor selected in step 1 3 Press the Up Arrow key Each press decreases the dB division value of the vertical grid scale by a factor of two Press the Right Arrow key Each press decreases the distance division value on the horizontal grid scale by a factor of two To contract an area e Press the Down Arrow key Each press increases the dB divi
180. Around selected cursor Attenuation is optimized in real time to show the backscatter around the selected active cursor 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Real Time Attenuation field Display Mode After Analysis In Fiber Visualizer the cursor position is End Break regardless of user s setting Preferences 2 2 Press Preferences 2 2 3 to access the Preferences 2 2 screen and set the status for the following e Auto Patch cord Removal e Grid Display e Force Total Loss e Event Icon Movement End Event for ORL Calculation Event Table Span Calculation e A B Span analysis Preferences 2 2 2013 Oct 30 04 14 Grid Display Dotted Force Total Loss Off Fiber Visualizer Event Icon Movement Left to Right End Event for ORL Calculation OMIT Event Table Span Calculation Span Length Preferences A B Span Analysis Off 2 2 Used to automatically shift out patch cords after analysis is complete WARNING This function may not work with certain patch cord lengths Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 5 4 Preferences 2 2 Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 9 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 10 Auto Patch cord Removal Specify the event number to treat as dummy fiber The range of settings for this parameter is 1 to 9 in 1 increments To set the Auto Patch cord Re
181. C charger adapter is connected to the unit Refer to the following sections for details on charging the battery pack or connecting the AC charger adapter e Charging the Battery Pack on page 2 11 e AC Power Operation on page 2 11 Press the Power key to start the MT9083 Series the Top Menu screen is displayed 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Figure 3 1 Initial Screen Top Menu Note If the screen shown in Figure 3 1 does not appear after powering up the MT9083 Series may have failed Run the unit through a power cycle power MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 1 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups down power up If the problem persists contact the Anritsu Technical Support Center see page xxx or your local Anritsu representative Power On Power Off To Power On the MT9083 Series e Press the Power key The MT 9083 Series performs a self test during which the Anritsu splash screen followed by the MT9083 Series splash screen briefly appears When the self test is completed the Top Menu screen or one of the Test Application screens if the unit was powered down via the Auto Power Off function appears see Figure 3 1 on page 3 1 To Power Off the MT9083 Series 1 Press the Power key the following message appears Press the Power key again to turn off the instrument Press any other key to cancel 2 Press the Power key again to power off the instrument or press any other
182. CCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Working with OTDR Trace Files Deleting Files Use the Save screen see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 to delete any data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can delete a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To delete a file 1 At the completion of a Fault Locate test press the Save key The Save screen appears see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file 3 Press Delete f5 A message box appears with the following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection 4 Press Yes f1 to delete the selected file or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the file 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for any additional file deletions 6 Press the ESC key to return to the test application Use the following procedure to delete multiple files in a directory To delete multiple files l At the completion of a Fault Locate test press the Save key The Save screen appears see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to delete and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is sh
183. Comment field 4 Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 5 With the desired character is highlighted in the character matrix press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the Comment field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in the Comment Use Backspace f5 or the BS key to delete characters entered in the Comment field 6 When all of the desired characters are entered in the Comment field press OK f6 to return to the Loss Table screen The Loss Table screen appears with the comment added to the Comment column of the selected row MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 19 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Working with the Loss Table Saving Loss Table Data Loss Table test data can be saved to the unit s internal memory or to a USB memory stick To save a Loss Table 1 Press the Save key The Save screen appears with the File Name field highlighted see Figure 9 8 below 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Ga 9 00h 80 4 File Name Medi
184. Distance range 100 km P 37 5 dB 36 dB 33 5 dB Average time 180 seconds Distance 1 m 3 x measurement measurement distance x 10 marker accuracy resolution Loss measurement 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB accuracy Whichever is greater Linearity OLS Light Source output 5 1 5 dBm 1310 30 nm 1550 30 nm 1650 5 nm OPM Measurement 6 5 1550 nm CW accuracy 20 dBm OPM Option Option 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C Option 004 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW Option 005 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 25 C VLD Center wavelength 650 nm 15 nm Po When Option 002 Optical output power 0 23 dBm i oo Notes 1 OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode 2 Note that the measurement port varies according to the measurement wavelength 12 32 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083A2 Option 057 Wavelength Results Remarks nn E 3 i pow a E e A o o oo o D o a e a e a eae Pulse width 1 ps Dynamic range 1 625 1 31 1 55 1 625 Pulse width 20 ps S N 1 Distance range 100 km Average time 180 seconds Distance 1 m 3 x measurement measurement distance x 10 marker resolution Loss measurement accuracy Linearity 1550 nm 1550 30 nm fF 1625 nm 1625 30 nm a OPM Measurement 1550 nm CW accuracy 20 dBm 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10
185. E USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUD ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for
186. EUNG anean aiena ATEA AEAT ERA AA TR 11 9 VIP AUTO File Settings ics ncn dete ines ee ei 11 11 FilesEOCAatION si 30 tee Aes Beck ee Sen teen eee 11 11 Base Filnames 20 15 cise visi r aa ai aiii 11 12 Auto Functions AMalySiS c eecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeees 11 12 Auto Functions File Name eeccceccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeneeeeee 11 13 Start NUMDEDS 0 0 E T ATT 11 13 Captured a VIP image iniia aae aaoi N aeina 11 14 Analyze a VIP IMag9e eecccescceeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeseeeeeeaaaeeniees 11 15 VIP Report Settings dansarinn aaa N A heeds 11 17 me E E E A TE T A A 11 17 Include Analysis RESUItS cccceesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeeteaaaeenaees 11 19 Include Analysis Details ccccecececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeneeeenaas 11 19 Current Results Only Results in Folder sessen 11 20 Create a PDF Tile E ee tie eee dct T nae 11 20 Working with VIP Image Files cccce cece eeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeees 11 21 SAVING VIP IMAGES eee eeeeeee eect eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaees 11 21 Loading a VIP IMagQe piire aeaiiai anaia ruien tia 11 23 Sorting MaI EEA a TE a ee 11 23 New Fold ePrice geicareveite eee nse el ernie dee rei genie 11 24 Deleting Files pensia uean rainat pe anaana peia agaaa indai eea aaea a apria irait 11 25 Gopyiing FileSend An Aen ee 11 27 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration
187. FBET U12M VIP ANALYSIS FAILED displayed to instruct you to correct the problem Connector could be badly damaged Clean connector and try again Test Profile Verify correct probe model is selected SMUPC gt 45 Verify correct tip is selected Verify 400X magnification is selected Return to live mode and check initial focus Auto Analyze On Auto File on N A 100 Captured Press START for Live image Figure 11 14 Failed Analysis mo ea __ If there are defects whose size is not 02938 man ao a a ams 22 es 0 E E TE E E acceptable found on the fiber they Pa Contact 250 FAIL 230 2776 30 PASS o are displayed in red that means Fail TEDE The table shows the zone and area of e each defect Auto Analyze On Captured Press START for Live image Figure 11 15 Damaged fiber 11 16 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option VIP Report Settings Analysis results can be output as PDF file on the MT9083 Series VIP Report Settings 2014 Jan 31 13 16 GS 15 09h 98 Location Operator Notes Include Analysis Results Include Analysis Details Result Source C Current Results Only Results in Folder Folder INTMEM Create PDF Enter customer name for report Exit Press the Up Down keys to move cursor pres
188. File Size Figure 11 18 Saving VIP image To save a VIP image 1 Display the desired image on the VIP screen 2 Auto File Name is ON Press Save f1 and the VIP image is automatically saved as a VIPI file Note If you press Save f1 or the Save key again before capturing a VIP image the Save VIP screen appears Or Auto File Name is OFF or VIP image is not captured Press Save f1 to display the Save VIP screen Continue from Step 3 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 21 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 3 Edit the filename if desired or continue from Step 8 to use the current filename To edit the filename press the Enter key to display the FileName dialog box Refer to Renaming a File on page 3 32 to input the file name 4 When all the desired characters are entered press OK f6 if you want to use the new File Name or press the ESC key if you want to cancel the new file name and close the Text Entry screen 5 Ifyou would like to save the format toggle File Type f2 6 Press Save f1 to save the current VIP image as a PNG file 11 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Loading a VIP Image VIPI files or VIP PNG files can be loaded to the MT9083 Series from the mass storage This provides a method of visually checking the condition of a fiber optic termination that has been saved as VIPI or PNG files To
189. GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all sub sequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for soft ware interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by bei
190. Gu AA ee pence cde ead eee A tees i Xxil Chapter 1 Quick Start cic cccces cance ces ecke des se siteben eared etedeceaneeweee 1 1 Introductio Me fs hoes e aaora aaa E oae ead ee vtuee ls e a a EA E e 1 1 MT9083 Series FUNCIONS ecseeccceceeseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeneeeneeeeneaeetes 1 2 Basic Configuration 0 ccccccccceceee cence cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeaeseeaeseeeenaees 1 2 Powering Up the Unit 0 0 00 0c ee ceeeeeee ee eee ae tees eeeaaaeseeeeesaaaeseeaeeeeaas 1 2 Start Up SCQUENCE siie ee a AN Nae aniraa 1 2 Optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTDR Testing cccccsseeeees 1 4 Fault Locate Testing mietoa wien acai edie anai aai 1 5 Construction Mode Testing cccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaaeenee 1 6 Loss Test Set Testings iiien riaa cece seve Naaa E aA aE Ea 1 7 Optical Power Meter OPM TeSting c cccccssesseeeeceseneeeeeessenaeeeeessaaaes 1 8 Optical Light Source OLS Testing cceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeteeeeeeessaeeseeneees 1 9 Visual Fault Locate VFL Option cccccccsssseecessssseeeeesssneeeessesseeeeesees 1 10 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option cscccccesssseeeeeessseeeeeessssteeeeeeees 1 11 Chapter 2 Overview oisicciisccincicicnaced dc vicina sewiendenneovicscunsinetaeseeauss 2 1 Front Panel a ecco iestacea he costs acta ands shoe dusnetbasbastinensdectinsvacuatnsiscusdsinsbedie 2 1 Power Key eves scenncvledes ie aa Ne aa a ei a
191. IL judgment on all events On Gives PASS FAIL judgement only on the events within the span specified by Marker A and B However the last event specified by the marker is excluded from analysis If Marker A specifies the first event the last event specified by Marker B is excluded from analysis and vice versa MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the A B Span Analysis field Thresholds Press Thresholds f4 to access the Thresholds screen This screen provides access to the various Auto Detect and Pass Fail Thresholds setting Thresholds 2013 Oct 30 04 03 Auto Detect Reflectance 60 0 dB General Fiber End 3 dB Macro Bend 0 3 dB ee axe 10 0 aB ieee Pass Fail Thresholds Non Reflective Event Loss fusion None Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical None lg Reflectance None Fiber Loss dB km None Total Loss None Thresholds Splitter Loss None Used to change the threshold of splice loss About Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 4 6 Thresholds Screen Auto Detect Parameters Events that exceed the Auto Detect parameter settings are reported in the Event Analysis table e The Auto Detect parameters include Splice Loss Reflectance Fiber End Macro Bend Splitter Loss MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 15 Chapter 4 O
192. INCICATON cee ceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeetaeenenaeees 8 6 Softkeys Loss Test Set SCPECMN rrean iai aa 8 7 Loss Table Screens e a eee tl dees Acide eee 8 8 Light Source Settings Area etccceceeeesceeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeseneeeesaaeeneaeeeeaas 8 9 Power Meter Settings Area oo eeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteneaeeees 8 9 LOSS Tabli iooni aa a a a Rana a a a a aae 8 9 LOSS Table SOPEK EWS preire esternare ee an aneao Teea fase devon tenetlecs 8 10 Setting Loss Test Set Measurement Parameters ceees 8 11 Setting the Light Source Wavelength sssessssesssesssisssrrssirrssinsssrnsssenss 8 11 Setting the Power Meter Wavelength ssssssssseessessisssirssrrrssirssrrsesesns 8 11 Setting the Modulation Mode ssesseseessessrssrrssirsssrnesnrsrnnesnnsree 8 12 Setting the Average Time sesssessesssssssssssrsrssissssinsstnnesnnnnrnnnnnnsrnnsnnne 8 13 Setting the Power Meter Reference cccccccesceeeeeeeereeeeeteeeeeetaeenaeeeaes 8 13 Setting the Threshold value cccccectceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeenaeeseeeeeeees 8 15 Optical Power Meter Zero Offset cccccceeceeseeceeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeaeseaeeeaaes 8 17 Loss Test Set Measurement Procedures c cscs eeeeeeeeee eee 8 18 Verifying Patch Cords cccccecceceseeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeecaeseaaeseaeesaaeeeaeesenetaes 8 18 Single MT9083 Series Method ccecscceeeeceeeeceeeeeee
193. If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the library s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Soft ware Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact yo
194. K f6 save the new folder to the selected medium or press ESC to cancel the New Folder process MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Deleting Files Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Use either the Save screen or the Load screen to delete any data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can delete a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To delete a file 1 5 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen or the Load screen Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired file Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete the selected file or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the file Press the ESC Key to return to the test application Use the following procedure to delete multiple files in a directory To delete multiple files 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen or the Load screen Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to delete and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repea
195. License released under Section 6 1 and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients rights hereunder However You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3 5 3 2 Availability of Source Code Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism must remain available for at least twelve 12 months after the date it initially became available or at least six 6 months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party 3 3 Description of Modifications You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived directly or indir
196. Light Source off an E Power Meter Power Light Source Wavelength 1550 nm U d A Wavelength nder Power Meter Loss Wavelength Reference None Threshold None Modulation cw Input Output oa Set Zero aa a g A mi Anritsu Loss Table mm 1 sao Figure 1 6 Initial Loss Test Set screen For further details on Loss Test Set mode see Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode WARNING NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the MT9083 Series nor into the end of a cable connected to the MT9083 Series If laser radiation enters the eye there is a risk of injury MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 1 7 Chapter 1 Quick Start Optical Power Meter OPM Testing The OPM function provides the capability for measuring optical power levels By measuring the power level on the fiber under test you can easily decide whether the fault point is on the fiber or on the network Power Meter 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Power Meter 30 6 dBm Wavelength Wavelength 1550 nm Tt Loss Reference 35 0 dBm e CC 4 4 dB SS Set Zero oe N P EESE Li Loss Table Figure 1 7 Optical Power Meter screen For further details on Optical Power Meter testing see Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 1 8 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 1 Quick Start Optical Light Source OLS Testing The OLS function provides a light source for use
197. MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12th Edition For safety and warning information please read this manual before attempting to use the equipment Keep this manual with the equipment ANRITSU CORPORATION Document No M W3634AE 12 0 29 June 2012 First Edition 1 April 2014 12th Edition Copyright 2012 2014 ANRITSU CORPORATION All rights reserved This document and the product to which it relates are protected by copyright law from unauthorized reproduction Notice to U S Government End Users The Software and Documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined at 48 C ER 2 101 consisting of Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C ER 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C ER 12 212 or 48 C ER 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to the U S Government end users a only as Commercial Items and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States e The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice e No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of the publisher Windows is a registered trademark of Micr
198. Meter reference value on page 8 13 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to input the reference values noted for the current MT9083 Series unit into the MT9083 Series unit at the opposite end Test Procedure 1 On the MT9083 Series designated as Unit A highlight the Threshold field to set a Pass Fail threshold for the current wavelength if desired See To set the Threshold value on page 8 15 for details 2 Disconnect the patch cords at the inline connector If using the one patch cord method disconnect the patch cord from the optional Power Meter port A CAUTION Do not disconnect the patch cord from the Optical Light Source port The coupled level of the light source may change when the patch cord is reconnected MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 27 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode UNIT A UNIT B 4 EMS or M F see the following note 2 Patch cords 3 Fiber under test FUT Note EMS Equilibrium Mode Simulator multimode fiber M F Mode Filter singlemode fiber Use of either an EMS or M E while not necessary in most cases is however recommended by the TIA Telecommunications Industry Association EMS and M F are not included with the MT9083 Series 3 Attach the free end of the patch cord connected to the Optical Light Source port on Unit A to one end of the fiber to be tested Using a second patch cord connect the optional Power Meter port of the MT9083 Series designated as Unit B t
199. Near Site B Far Other other v 1310 v 1550 1625 Automode File Save Verify Macrobend x Template Connection Check otf Continue B gt A Test Parameters Header Number of Fibers 1 Om Start Number 1 Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value olf 6 Wavelengths Options On Figure 6 7 Initial Construction Mode screen OTDR Construction Setup screen Store Files At Base Filename Filename A BW Nel Base Filename Elements e Test Direction e Site A e Site B Other 5 Wavelengths Store Files At Number of Fibers Start Number Options e Connection Check e Automode e File Save Verify e Macro Bend Softkeys The Store Files At setting allows you to select a directory folder for trace file storage of Construction mode test data To select a file storage location 6 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 1 Highlight the Store Files At field and then press the Enter key The Select Directory screen appears 2 With the Medium field highlighted press the Enter key to toggle the selection between Internal Memory and USB Memory Note The USB Memory selection is only available when a USB memory stick is connected to the MT9083 Series 3 Choose either or both of the following functions if desired or continue at
200. O13100000 SOR 1310 nm SM 100 1 km 4000 ns AUTO15500000 SOR 1550 nm SM 100 1 km 4000 ns 13 0 Hide Overlays 0 A 7 5601km 2 Pt Loss WL 1625nmSM IOR 1 468500 B 52 4821 km 11 910 DR 100 1km RES 5 003m More s gt A gt B 44 9221 km Refi k kk PW 4us HR AVG 11776 Trace Prev Event Next Event Analysis Figure 4 32 Swap Overlay Dialog 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to highlight the desired overlay trace in the Swap Overlay dialog when there is more than one overlay traces currently displayed 3 Press the Enter key The Swap Overlay dialog closes and the selected Overlay trace is moved to the Primary trace position while the former Primary trace is moved to the overlay position of the swapped Overlay trace MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 87 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Hide Show Overlays Use Hide Overlays function to isolate the Primary trace by temporarily removing the currently displayed overlay trace s from the Trace screen To isolate the Primary trace e When the Trace screen has a Primary trace and one or more Overlay traces displayed press Hide Overlays f3 The legend on the softkey changes to Show Overlays and the Overlay traces are hidden leaving only the Primary trace visible Note The Hide Overlays softkey is only available when there are overlay traces currently displayed as shown in Figure 4 30 on page 4 85 OTDR Standard
201. OLA Ke a AAE E EE E E E P T T 6 53 Reflecta NCE ndini ennot idno obs bentiternaaceddeesvdeetateueiee daea 6 53 BAK ibid E E A E E at doveed A E E 6 54 Cumulative Loss dB rrain e eea ea a E a oi 6 54 Pass Fail Threshold Sa a a a a aa Eea alien 6 54 Trace Graph OTDR Construction Mode c cccccccsssseeeeesssseeeessnaees 6 56 TRACE WAVETONIN isis fe chectte loath cre BA E E 6 56 CUS ONS E eaa es t ae a Anse ie Rieke aa raana daea E Ais Aae ai 6 57 lae I EE E E A E E I AA E E E 6 57 OB LeVel IMAI atO ceened Era AUas 6 57 Trace Overview WiINGOW cccccscccececceeeeeneeeeseeesseesssesesenececeeeeeeneeenes 6 57 Cursor Distance Information sssessssssessrirrssrsssesrrrrrnrnnunrnnessrnrrnnnrennsnns 6 57 Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance ccccccccsscsssessesseeeeeeeeeeeens 6 58 Fiber Test Parameter cccccccccccececeeeeeesceeeceeaeeeseueueusseeseseseeeeseeeeeneeenes 6 58 Test Results Screen SOftkeys cesccceceseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeesaesnaeesaeeeaes 6 58 OTDR Construction Mode Testing cc ccccccsesscecessesseeeesesseeees 6 61 Running an OTDR Construction TeSt ccccccccsscceecssseeeeeesssnaeeeesenaaees 6 61 Selecting and Positioning CUISOIS ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeentaeeeeeeeeenee 6 64 Setting the Active CUISOD cectceetseeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeneaees 6 64 Precise Positioning of the Active CUISOF ccscceesecetteteeeeeeeeteteees 6 64
202. Others i Copyright Wnn Consortium 1993 x Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that all of the following conditions are satisfied x 1 The above copyright notice appears in all copies 2 Both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation 3 The name of gerodic NOT be used if ANY modifications are made and 3 Following words followed by the above copyright notice appear in software based on gerodic x This software is based on the original version of gerodic developed by Wnn Consortium 4 The name Wnn Consortium not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Wnn Consortium makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty WNN CONSORTIUM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL WNN CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTUOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WI
203. P screen VIP Report Settings 2014 Jan 31 13 16 E 15 12h 98 E Location Small Letter Operator Notes Customer MAX 30 imetude anf usome Include An ppggcacan popooo0gog Capital Letter Symbols O Current Rel T gt D00000SNNE s Fol Backspace Enter customer name for report ok Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 11 17 Text Entry Screen 3 Use the Up and Down keys to move the highlighted selection from row to row including the current text entry field Use the Left and Right keys to move the highlighted selection within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the text entry field if the field is highlighted Or Use the rotary knob to highlight the string entered from the software keyboard Then press the Enter key and you can copy and paste the highlighted string to the text entry field Press OK f6 and the Text 11 18 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Entry dialog box closes and the entered text is displayed in the current field 4 Use the f1 f4 softkeys for the following actions Small Letter f1 to switch the software keyboard to lower case letters e Capital Letter f2 to switch the software keyboard to upper case letters e Symbols f3 to switch the software keyboard to display symbols e Space f4 to insert a blank space in the text en
204. Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the new setting by pressing Change 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each wavelength to be tested To set Threshold to None 1 Highlight Threshold and then press the Enter key The Reference screen appears displaying the current setting 2 Press None f2 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the threshold is set to None Optical Power Measurements Optical Power Level Measurement The following procedure outlines how to measure the optical power level Note The Optical Power Meter only supports single mode fibers To measure optical power levels 1 Set the MT9083 Series to Power Meter mode See Accessing the Optical Power Meter on page 9 1 for details 2 Close the measurement port connector cover to shield the port form incident light and then execute zero offset for the optical power meter See Optical Power Meter Zero Offset on page 9 7 for details 3 Toggle Power Meter Wavelength f1 until the desired wavelength is displayed 4 Connect the fiber under test to the desired measurement port on the MT9083 Series The optical power level of the fiber under test is displayed in the Power reading area see item 2 in Figure 9 2 9 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Note Correct measurement may not be obtained until zer
205. R and BSC wv cccAbdeieied tetiieetieeeeervtedrevan de 4 73 Dial QR ninaa aaa aa Aa Na A ra a EAEE EAE aAa 4 73 VI MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Setting the Loss Mode cceccceesecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeesteaaeeeneeeeeaaeeneaes 4 74 Shitting Trace Data 4 2n cnet sneered dinates 4 75 Resetting a Shifted Trace ceccccccecesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseaaeseaeesaeeeaes 4 76 Running Analysis ON a Trace eeeceeesseeeeeeeeeeeaeseeneeeeeaaeeseeaeeeeeaaeseeaaeeenaes 4 76 Wavelength All Mode 00 cccccc cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseseeeeenaaeseeaaeeeaes 4 78 Wavelength All Test Parameters cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeneaes 4 78 Setting the Source Wavelength to All eecceeeeceesseeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 78 Setting the Test ParaMetels ccccecceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaas 4 78 Wavelength All Testing c cccccceeeesceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeaeesneeeneeaaeensaees 4 83 Trace Overlay Management 0 0 cece eee ee eee ee ee ae teeeeee teas eeeaaeeeaes 4 85 Trace Overlay FUNCTIONS 0 cceeceeeesceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeaeenaees 4 85 Drop OVerlay ies s sie heats See ee 4 85 SWAP OVE LAY siiip na eaaa Ee eann aaran pe iaai Sa aana ai oiia airas 4 87 Hide Show Overlays niie Nenias piia 4 88 Align OV rAaYS ee eeeeeececeeceteeeeeeaeeeceeeeaaaesecaeeeeaaaeseeaaeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeneeeee 4 89 Working with OTDR Standard Trace Fil
206. SB connector see item 5 in Figure 11 7 into the USB Down port MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 7 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Accessing VIP Mode To start the VIP 1 Assemble the VIP and attach it to the MT9083 Series as outlined in VIP Setup on pages 11 4 through 11 7 2 Depending on the probe tip selected connect the probe to the bulkhead or patch cord to be tested 3 Press the Top Menu key The Top Menu screen appears 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight VIP then press the Enter key The VIP screen appears Note Do not disconnect the fiber scope before displaying the fiber scope screen Otherwise the USB device may not be recognized 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Press START to capture image Figure 11 8 VIP Screen Live Mode 5 Use the 200x 400x switch see item 3 in Figure 11 2 on page 11 3 to set the desired magnification rate The example shown in Figure 11 8 has the magnification rate set to 400x 6 Use the Focus Control knob see item 2 in Figure 11 2 on page 11 3 to adjust the focus of the image if the image is not in clear focus 7 Press Settings f4 to change the VIP Test Settings 11 8 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 8 Press Report f5 to change the VIP Report Settings 9 Press the Start key to capture the current image and analyze VIP Test Settings Image
207. See Starting OTDR Standard Mode on page 4 1 for details This section allows you to customize the preferences and parameters for a given data collection or series of collections Entering OTDR Standard Setups 1 Start OTDR Standard mode The Trace screen appears see Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 2 Press the Setup key The following Setup screens are available e General f1 e Preferences 1 2 f2 e Preferences 2 2 f3 e Thresholds f4 e AutoSave f5 Press the softkey f1 f5 that corresponds to the desired settings category General Setups Press General f1 to access the General setups screen if not already displayed The General setups pertain to general settings for the MT9083 Series and are detailed in General Screen Settings on pages 3 7 3 15 4 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode ia Local Time Time difference from UTC Date display Format Auto Launch Printer Paper feed Color Theme Language USB Video Output Auto Backlight Off Auto Power Off Instrument Power Save mode Used to modify date 2012 Jul 1 10 00 2012 Jul 1 10 00 0 0 Hours Year Month Day None BL 8ORII SD1 31 On Grayscale English Off None None Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 4 2 General Setups Screen OTDR Standard Mode Preferences 1 2 Press Preferences 1 2 f2 to access
208. Start button for the test Test Parameters Reflect dB dB km I0R BSC 1 467700 78 50 Wavelength nm i Pass Fail Total Loss dB ORL dB Thresholds Fiber Visualizer Figure 5 15 Initial Fiber Visualizer Mode screen 3 Connect the fiber under test to the desired test measurement port See Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 for the location of the test measurement ports Note Depending on the configuration of your MT9083 Series the unit may have one or two test measurement ports 4 Ifthe Connection Check is On on the setups Preferences screen see Figure 5 3 on page 5 4 a connection check is automatically preformed When the best optimized connection is achieved the closer the 5 48 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode connection check gauge is to HIGH the better the optimization of the connection press the Start key to perform the test If the Connection Check is set to Off continue at step 5 Fiber Visualizer pr 19 11 21 g WL 3 nm DR km PWR US i AVG Sec start a kk kE KM Events Continue Connection Check Level LOW HIGH Connection level is GOOD Press CONTINUE or Start when the best connection is made to perform a test or press CANCEL to abort Test Will Auto Advance in 2 Seconds Reflec
209. Start key to start a test The test proceeds through the following steps e Performs a connection check e Runs the test e Reports the test results Fiber Visualizer WL 1340nmSM_ DR 5km i PW 100ns ER AVG 60 Sec y stark i i 4 2039 km pres Events 3 0 0000 2 0001 km Wavelength 1310 Fiber End dB Test Parameters 0 5 km start Reflect dB dB km edie dee 0 652 1oR BSC 1 467700 Wavelength nm 78 50 Total Loss dB 21 224 ORL dB 35 441 Figure 1 4 Fiber Visualizer screen For further details on Fault Locate testing see Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 1 5 Chapter 1 Quick Start Construction Mode Testing Construction mode simplifies and automates the testing required when installing fiber Construction mode is used when many fibers in a cable need to be tested and documented before deployment Depending on the setup selections made for Construction mode testing you can e Step through the test process and save the results without reviewing the trace data OR e Setup the application so that it displays a Summary screen allowing review of the test data before proceeding to the next test OTDR Construction 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Reflect dB 1 5 7763km B 0 208 E k 0 222 1 281 2
210. T 28800E Class 2 Splash proof Conforms to JIS C 0920 TYPE 1 or IP51 IEC60529 Laser safety level IEC 60825 1 2007 Class 1M Option 053 055 056 057 058 063 073 THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO 50 DATED JUNE 24 2007 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 15 Appendix A Specifications Lithium ion Battery Pack tam e emarts Taye eo ase O Relapse woo Dimensions mass 53 W x 19 H x 215 D mm Environmental Charging 0 to 40 C aa Conditions Discharging 20 to 60 C Storage 20 to 50 C lt 80 RH AC Adapter C sectei Remarta Dimensions mass 47 W x 33 H x 112 D mm 240 g or less Ls Environmental Operating 0 to 45 C 20 to 80 RH Ly Conditions Storage 20 to 70 C 10 to 90 RH Operating voltage within the range of 10 to 10 from the rated voltage A 16 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications Optical Power Meter Option 004 005 007 Model name unit name Option 004 SMF Optical Power Meter Option 005 High Power Optical Power Meter Option 007 SMF MMF Optical Power Meter Applicable fiber Option 004 005 10 125 pm single mode fiber ITU T G 652 Option 007 10 125 pm single mode fiber ITU T G 652 and 62 5 125 pm GI fiber Settable wavelength Option 004 005 1310 1383 1490 1550 1625 1650 nm Option 007 850 1300 1310 1383 1490 1550 16
211. TDR Standard Mode 4 16 Splice Loss Determines the Splice Loss value equal to or above which will be reported in the Events analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 0 01 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Splice Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Splice Loss Press Enter The Splice Loss dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the splice loss threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Splice Loss threshold is set Reflectance Determines the lowest Reflectance value that will be reported by analysis Any event with a reflectance equal to or greater than the value in this parameter will be reported in Event analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 70 0 dB to 20 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Reflectance threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance Press Enter The Reflectance dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the reflectance threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Reflectance threshold is set Fiber End Determines the Fiber End value equal to or above which will be reported in the Events analysis The range of
212. TDR Parameters to their default settings e With the OTDR Parameters screen displayed press Set Defaults f1 The screen returns to its factory default settings To activate Macro Bend mode e With the OTDR Parameters screen displayed press f2 to set the On Off state of the Macro Bend detect function Losses that meet or exceed the Macro Bend threshold are flagged in the Event table with an M indicator following the Loss reading 4 82 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode See Macro Bend on page 4 17 for details on setting the Macro Bend threshold Note Macro Bend detection requires an MT9083 Series unit with at least two single mode operating wavelengths one at 1310 nm and a second at either 1550 nm or 1625 nm Wavelength All Testing The following procedure outlines the steps used to perform a Wavelength All test To perform a Wavelength All test i 2 Toggle Wavelength f3 until the red legend on the softkey reads All Press Test Parameters f4 and set the desired test parameters per available wavelength for the test See Setting the Test Parameters on pages 4 78 through 4 82 for details Set the desired Loss Mode See Setting the Loss Mode on page 4 74 for details Enable Auto Analysis if desired See To set Auto Analysis on page 4 5 for details Enable AutoSave if desired See AutoSave on page 4 24 for details When all of the de
213. TH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE f MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 33 Appendix C Software License 6 Others Copyright C 1995 1998 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution C 34 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix D Limited Life Span Parts The MT9083 Series uses consumable parts for which the life span is determined according to the usage frequency times A fee will be charged for replacement of such parts due to end of life even if it is within the warranty period of the MT9083 Series Take the life span of the consumable parts into consideration when using the MT9083 Series continuou
214. Test Set Mode Loss Test Set Measurement Procedures There are three methods of performing Loss Test Set measurements with the MT9083 Series when equipped with one of the optional Power Meters 004 005 007 Single MT9083 Series method Single MT9083 Series with an external light source Dual MT9083 Series method Note Before performing any measurements verify all reference patch cords in all directions Verifying Patch Cords Verify all reference patch cords in both directions before performing any tests 8 18 To verify patch cords i 9 Connect a short patch cord with the same fiber and connector type as the system to be tested between the Light Source port and the Power Meter port Power up the MT9083 Series and enter Loss Test Set mode The unit performs a Zero Offset If there is a value in the Reference field clear the current reference value by setting it to None See To set Reference to None on page 8 15 for details Press Light Source Off f1 to turn on the light source Press Light Source Wavelength f2 to set the Light Source and the Power Meter to the same wavelength Press the Enter key The Reference screen appears Press Paste f3 The Reference dialog now displays the current Power reading Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the new reference value is displayed in the Reference field Press Light Source On f1 to power down the Light Source 10 Reverse the Power Meter
215. USB Video Output and then press the Enter key 2 The USB Video Output dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight either On or Off 3 Press the Enter key to save the selected USB Video Output setting 4 Finally turn off and then turn on the power of ACCESS Master Note To use the USB Video Output function you need to install MX900021A on your PC Refer to MX900021A Remote Screen Software Operation Manual for details When USB Video Output is set to On access from the PC to the internal memory of ACCESS Master is not possible Power saving Setting There are three power saving settings for the MT 9083 Series Auto Backlight Off Auto Power Off and Instrument Power Save Mode all of which are accessed via the General screen Auto Backlight Off The Auto Backlight Off setting turns off the LCD screen backlight when a set period of time passes without any key presses When the time period elapses and the backlight goes out pressing any key on the unit will restore the backlight To set a time period for the Auto Backlight Off MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 11 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 3 12 Highlight Auto Backlight Off on the General screen and then press the Enter key The Auto Backlight Off dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that the Auto Backlight Off setting is set to None o
216. Ui GPs Gen ke Copying Files Use either the Save screen see Figure 8 13 on page 8 34 or the Load screen see Figure 8 14 on page 8 39 to copy data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can copy a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To copy a file 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 8 13 on page 8 34 or the Load screen see Figure 8 14 on page 8 39 2 Press More gt gt f6 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file Press Copy f1 5 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected file 6 Press Paste f2 A message box stating Copy 1 1 along with the name of the file appears briefly Use the following procedure to copy multiple files in a directory MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 37 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 8 38 To copy multiple files i po NAY Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 8 13 on page 8 34 or the Load screen see Figure 8 14 on page 8 39 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to copy and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the tota
217. Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight AutoSave Directory and then press the Enter key The Select Directory screen appears 2 Select the desired storage medium by highlighting the Medium field if not already highlighted and then press the Enter key to toggle the selection to either Internal Memory which is the default setting or USB Memory Note You must have a USB Memory stick connected to the MT9083 Series in order to access the USB Memory selection in the Medium field 3 To save to a specific folder in the selected Medium highlight the name of the folder and then press the Enter key The name of the selected folder appears below the Medium field Ifyou are not saving to a specific folder skip step 3 and continue at step 4 4 Press Select f1 The AutoSave setups screen appears with the selected directory displayed in the AutoSave Directory field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 25 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 26 Base Filename The Base Filename field provides a template for use when generating an auto filename You can enter a base filename of up to 30 characters with a three character file extension To set a Base Filename Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Base Filename and then press the Enter key The Base Filename dialog box appears see Figure 4 8 below If no USB keyboard is connected Refer to Renaming a File on page 3 32 to inpu
218. W 100ns ER AVG 60 Sec y atat i jm 4 2039 km i er Events 3 3 2 2061 4 2039 km A Wavelength 6 297 Fiber End dB Reflect dB dB km K KE 0 329 IOR BSC 1 468200 Pass Fail 81 50 Total Loss dB 21 224 C ORL dB 35 500 SS Fiber Visualizer Trace Thresholds Figure 5 10 Fiber Visualizer Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 21 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Fiber Visualizer pr 18 16 12 g amp Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 2 0001km E 13 144 ETETE 0 329 0 659 2 2 2061km EA 6 297 K kkk 0 652 13 934 Test Mode EE 4 2039km TMS Fiber End 0 497 Auto Real Time Off Test Parameters Display From km A 2 0001 km 2 Pt Loss SUMMARY FAIL Total Events 3 2 0001 km 0 000 Fiber Length 4 2039 km 0 0000 km Refi E Total Loss 21 224 dB Fiber Visualizer Thresholds Figure 5 11 Trace Screen in Fiber Visualizer 5 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Trace Screen Trace screen appears when you press Trace F2 on the Fiber Visualizer screen see Figure 5 9 on page 5 20 No Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB EE 2 0001km EJ TRE ae akak 0 329 0 659 2 2 2061km EG 6 297 kk 66H 0 652 13 934 Test Mode 4 HE 4 2039km THs Fiber End 15 666 0 497 Auto
219. X km B 1km B 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix B Sample Traces See the B or A depending on the cursor positioned at the end of the fiber under test in the Cursor Distance Area for the distance measurement see Cursor Distance Information on page 4 31 for details Set Up Using a Bare Fiber Adapter The following figure shows an OTDR sample trace with the proper cursor placement when using a bare fiber adapter such as the Fiber Connect For accurate measurements be sure to place Cursor A in the linear portion of the trace Bare Fiber Adapter A Note Cursor B is placed at the end of the fiber reel Set Up for Short Fibers The following figure shows an OTDR sample trace with proper cursor placement for measuring a short fiber span Place Cursor A and Cursor B as shown Note The distance from Cursor A to Cursor B is the length of the fiber under test Select 2 Pt loss to determine the loss in the fiber under test FUT MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual B 5 Appendix B Sample Traces OTDR LAUNCH CORD dp FUT dp CORD A B dB Distance Determining the dB Loss The figure below shows an OTDR sample trace with the cursor placement for determining the overall dB loss for a fiber span Initial Backscatter Level Move Cursor A to the beginning of the fiber and then zoom in on the initial reflection dead zone Determine the point where the in
220. a tender 5 24 Trace Graph inei i eee ative en aed 5 24 Trace Waveform ccccccccccssccsccsecececcecsseeueeuseuseeeeeseeceeceesaeeueueeeeeeseeeeees 5 25 CUS ONS vere deed a ceteris ie lade vee ee eevee 5 26 Horizontal Vertical Of fset ccccccesscscsseesesseeesseeseeeueueeeseeseeeseeeaees 5 26 Taa EEEE AE E A AEN EENE EAEE A S EEEE 5 26 dB Level INGicator cccesseeeeeeseeesecececececeeucucaeaeaeeeueueeneseseseeeeeeess 5 26 Trace Overview WiINGOW ccccccccscececcececeneeeesessessssseesesesececeeeeeeeeeeees 5 26 Cursor Distance INFOrmation ccccccceccsessceeceseeseeeseeseesseseeaueusenss 5 27 Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance ccccccccccssceseseeeeeeeeeees 5 27 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Fiber Test ParaMeters ccccccccccccsseeccesscueeeseeeeeuseuueseuueuuuaueeueeuaeaaass 5 27 Softkeys Fiber Visualizer Mode ccccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 5 28 Softkey Levels Fiber Visualizer screen 2 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeesaeeeeeeaes 5 28 Softkey Levels Trace screena i aa 5 30 Level One Softkeys sssessssssessrnsrnesrestnstnsnntnetnnnnnnnnstnntnnsnnnnnnnn nennt 5 30 Level TWO SOftKEY Sinni a r sheep tetera ete ee 5 31 Level Three SOftKCYS c ccccecceececeeeceeeeeeecaeeeeeesaaeeseeeseeeseeeeseaeeeaees 5 32 Level Four Softkeys ienna a a ie 5 33 CUPSONSOFEK CYS cn scceeceueetsdsesevaceaceetnedstnstepeaeteatbe sony sedVeadeesstcnesuiegatieeds 5
221. aae ea i a A ed 3 8 Time Difference from UTC ccccccccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeesaaeseaeesaeeeeaeeeeneeaes 3 8 Date Display FOrMat sensisset aao eieaa aaua Maddau aa att atna 3 9 Auto Launcha eaaa eaaa aaaea iaat 3 9 PIN e etaa a a A N S AS 3 9 Paper Feed E E A E E T 3 10 Color TN GIG x sccescaceceseuet vcatetes sed seetetes tactesGeate Ae EAE a EEEak 3 10 LAN QUAGC ies iin ana tivyeectead wei a a ae andadi 3 10 USB Vid o OUTPUT aii ee ae ae cece te 3 11 POWer SAVING Setting marconii iiai eanan rai D Rii 3 11 Auto Backlight Off ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesecaeseaeseaeesaaeesaeeseneeaes 3 11 Auto Power Officier iu iaiaaa kaia aaoi a n eataa eaaa aa 3 12 Instrument Power Save Mode ssesssssssssiisssrssssrsssrsrriesrrrnsriessens 3 14 Password Settings a cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeaaeeseeaaeeeneeseeaaeeeneees 3 15 Password Protects cccs zececusustegeucesattcnss surengaeteevbeteceudeeedectivaetstseancbeeeisteessee 3 17 Setting the Administrator PaSSWOI c ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeaeteeeeeeteaeeeeneeeees 3 18 Setting the User PassWOrd cccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaaesesaeeeenaeeseeaeees 3 21 Password Lif s pani soiis enairat eiaei vides needed ect 3 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual III Viewing the access log file cescesscceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeaesaaeeeneeteneeaes 3 25 Abo t Scree irp e eae ia vane cduascudvesdueveaudsiedesaeuasavetan 3 26 Updating Firmware
222. able 4 2 Resultant Target Trace Events Template Targat race Distance Helix Factor Adjustment Trace Event Event Location Location Snap to Template Snap to Trace End End MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 67 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode OTDR Standard Mode Measurement Parameters Setting the Source Wavelength To set the source wavelength e Press Wavelength f3 to toggle through the source wavelengths The red legend on the softkey changes with each key press Depending on the configuration of MT9083 Series in use up to four wavelengths are available In addition dual tri and quad wavelength units also feature a Wavelength All setting See Setting the Source Wavelength to All on page 4 78 for details on setting the wavelength in Wavelength All mode Note Pressing the Wavelength softkey on single wavelength units causes an error tone to sound The wavelength may be changed while a Real Time or Averaging cycle is running The test will restart using the new wavelength Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width The Range Resolution and Pulse Width settings determine the trace data distance range and resolution value data point spacing as well as the pulse width used for the test cycle To set the Range Resolution and Pulse Width 1 Press Range Pulse Width f4 the Distance Range Resolution and Pulse width dialog appears see Figure 4 22 on page 4 68 Distance Range Res
223. able connected to the MT9083 Series If laser radiation enters the eye there is a risk of injury 1 10 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 1 Quick Start Video Inspection Probe VIP Option The Video Inspection Probe VIP option is used to inspect fiber optic terminations Use the VIP to inspect installed connectors located inside hardware devices or on the backside of patch panels eliminating the need to either disassemble hardware devices prior to inspection or access the backside of patch panels The VIP option consists of the following e Video Inspection Probe VIP e 5 probe tips SC ST FC Universal 1 25 mm and Universal 2 5 mm e USB converter e Software CD 2012 Jul 1 10 00 VIP Zone Dia u Defects Count Area Scratch Count Probe Model core 25 PASS 0 0 00 PASS 0 arzan Cladding 120 PASS 0 0 00 PASS 0 Adhesive 130 PASS 0 0 00 PASS 0 Tip Type Contact 250 PASS 0 0 00 PASS 0 FBET U12M Test Profile SM UPC gt 45 Auto Analyze On Auto File On 100 Captured Press START for Live image Figure 1 10 VIP Screen Images captured with the VIP can be saved as PNG or VIPI files which can be recalled for viewing on the MT9083 Series Also captured images can be analyzed on MT9083 or using the VIP Analysis software on a PC Note The Software CD contains the VIP Analysis software which is for PC use only See the software s help set for details on its use MT9083 Series
224. accuracy LD Pulse width 1 ps Indicative values Pulse width 20 ps Distance range 100 km Average time 180 seconds 1550 nm CW 20 dBm 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 25 C V Center wavelength 650 nm 15 nm When Option 002 Optical output power 0 3 dBm peeled Note OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode 12 40 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual MT9083B2 Option 058 Test item Specification Wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm 25 nm 1490 nm 1490 nm 25 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 25 nm Pulse width Dynamic range Wavelength pm Eee dee a 1 m 3 x measurement measurement distance x 10 marker accuracy resolution Loss measurement 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB accuracy Linearity Whichever is greater 5 1 5 dBm 1310 30 nm 1490 30 nm 1550 30 nm 1625 30 nm OLS OPM Measurement accuracy ion LD SISI alalaaji ss EJE IE eE1e 214 SC SC SC sie e z sis s 2121 82 B 2 8 N T a _ W iN es n n A a les a lex Distance OPM Option Option 007 Option 004 Option 005 5 V Center wavelength 650 nm 15 nm Optical output power 0 3 dBm wn Al lon S S amp Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Indicative values ulse width 20 ps istance range 100 km werage time
225. ack has been charged the battery pack s life may have expired Replace it with a new one in this case It is advisable to discharge the battery pack on occasion in order to enhance its performance and extend its life If the battery pack is stored at an excessively high 40 C or higher or low 0 C or lower temperature its performance and life will degrade When the ambient temperature rises battery pack discharge speeds up A fully charged battery pack will be completely discharged in several months if left as is MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 15 Chapter 2 Overview If the battery pack has been discharged fully its smart memory capabilities will be lost In this case the remaining battery charge indication and other information may be displayed inaccurately or the pack may be unable to be charged normally CAUTION 1 The battery pack must be charged only with the AC charger adapter furnished by Anritsu for the MT9083 Series Use of a different AC charger adapter the battery pack may malfunction or cause a fire Do not short circuit the terminals of the battery pack If you do so the battery pack may malfunction or cause a fire Do not drop or attempt to disassemble the battery pack If you do so the battery pack may malfunction or cause a fire Do not use the battery pack for other than the intended purpose If you do so the battery pack may malfunction or cause a fire Be sure to recycle or di
226. al Fiber Cables Optical fiber cables may degrade in performance or be damaged if handled improperly Note the following points when handling them CEON A CAUTION Do not pull the cable when removing the connector Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable or remove the cable sheath from the optical connector A CAUTION Do not excessively bend fold or pinch an optical fiber cable Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable Keep the bend radius of an optical fiber cable at 30 mm or more If the radius is less optical fiber cable loss will increase 2 18 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview A CAUTION Do not excessively pull on or twist an optical fiber cable Also do not hang anything by using a cable Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable CAUTION Be careful not to hit the end of an optical connector against anything hard such as the floor or a desk by dropping the optical fiber cable Doing so may damage the connector end and increase connection loss Z WARNING Do not touch the end of a broken optical fiber cable The broken optical fiber may pierce the skin causing injury A CAUTION Do not disassemble optical connectors Doing so may cause part to break or the performance to degrade MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 19 Chapter 2 Overview nsys Figure 2 6 Measurement Ports 1 Measurement Port 1 2 Measure
227. al Light Source Screen Elements 9 28 The Optical Light Source screen is comprised of the elements flagged in the following figure Light Source 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Light Source Off Ti Modulation cw Ce l El mritsu _ A Figure 9 12 Optical Light Source Screen Elements 1 Light Source On Off indicator 2 Port connection indicator 3 Softkeys Light Source On Off Indicator Displays the current status of the Optical Light Source laser e The indicator reads On and the background is red when the laser is on The indicator reads Off and the background is black when the laser off Port Connection Indicator The measurement port indicated varies according to the optical wavelength of the light to be emitted Item 2 in Figure 9 12 the Port Connection indicator displays the port to be used when testing MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Softkeys Light Source Off On f1 Press the Light Source Off softkey to start the optical light source The red legend on the softkey as well as the legend in the Light Source Wavelength indicator see item 1 in Figure 9 12 on page 9 28 change to On In addition the background of the Light Source Wavelength indicator changes from black to red Wavelength f2 Toggle the Wavelength softkey to scroll through the available light source wavelengths The r
228. al Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Setting Power Meter Measurement Parameters To set the Power Meter wavelength Press Power Meter Wavelength f1 Each key press toggles to the next power meter wavelength The current wavelength is indicated by the Power Meter Wavelength indicator See item 1 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 for the location of the indicator Note Pressing Power Meter Wavelength f1 on single wavelength MT9083 Series units will sound an error tone Setting the Power Meter Reference Set a reference value for each power meter wavelength required by the current test conditions The reference can either be entered directly or you can use the current power meter reading by pasting it into the reference To direct enter a Power Meter reference value 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Reference field Press the Enter key The Reference dialog appears and the legends on softkeys f1 f3 change as follows e Change f1 e None f2 e Paste f3 Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no reference currently set or the dialog displays the current reference setting in dBm MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 9 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 2012 Jul 1 10 00 9 00h 80 J Power Meter Wavelength 1550 nm 31 8 dBm Change 99 90
229. alculation e Trace Overview e Real Time Averages e Real Time Attenuation e Display Mode After Analysis Preferences 1 2 2013 Nov 1 21 52 Connection Check On General Active Fiber Check On Auto Analysis On Auto Scale Off Preferences 4 2 Event Summary On Reflectance Calculation Auto 7 Preferences ORL Calculation Full Trace 2 2 Trace Overview On Real Time Averages Low Real Time Attenuation Auto Attenuation Thresholds Display Mode After Analysis End Break AutoSave Used to select the units for distance measurement About Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 5 3 Preferences 1 2 Screen Distance Display Units Select the unit of measurement used to display distance on the horizontal axis of the Trace graph This affects Range and Resolution readings and analysis events incorporating distance To set the Distance Display units 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Distance display Units 2 Press Enter and select the desired unit from the Distance display Units menu 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selected unit is set MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Connection Check The Connection Check function confirms whether or not the fiber is connected correctly to the OTDR measurement port To set the Connection Check 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob
230. alled Opal Oupa pove orda i Note OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode MT9083C2 Option057 Testitem item Specification Wavel o en 1310nm 1550 nm 1625 nm ulse width 10 ns 0 ns 100 ns 00 ns 1000 ns 1310 25 nm Pulse width 1 us Indicative value nle altro le e Tulruofe uleofey ete Sl Sj lJeir Ie ojlo ojl ofl al gy e z2 23 3 2 So o sis S y ala sis ojal lI 5 Lae Hoy B N N ajA 5 3 3 3 sjal ajn ajx ojlo cle S TE Qe 5 ala 5 A A ejeje e e elefeleaye N Go amp ole ololo lo loe AJ ala a S S S S s S S S Dynamic Wavelength um caus Los 25 C Pulse width 20 us Distance range 100 km Average time 180 sec 25 C Pulse width 100 ns Enhanced Range mode Distance range 100 km Average time 180 sec W w Al nN N Al nN n a wW A n a ler oS a pa QO wn Al 5 Distance Measurement Accuracy lm 3 measurement distance 10 marker resolution 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is greater Loss Measurement Accuracy Linearity MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 45 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083C2 Option057 OLTS 5115 dBm OPM Measurement accuracy 6 5 1550 nm CW 20 dBm OPM option Option 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C Option 004 0 dBm 1310 155
231. alled trace file see Displaying Trace Files on page 4 90 affects only that trace file the edits are not carried over to the general header Use the following procedure to access and edit the header when collecting traces in OTDR Standard mode To access and edit the Header 1 Press the Save key The Save screen appears see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired file name if necessary 3 Press Header f2 the Header screen appears see Figure 4 40 e To edit or enter header information continue at step 4 e To close the Header continue at step 10 2012 Jul 1 10 00 9 00h 80 4 Unit Header Customer File Header Data Flag oT Cable ID Fiber ID 3 Cable Code Start Location Terminal Location Operator Comment Used to input the owner name or company name Number of characters must be less than 30 Exit Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 4 40 Header Screen 4 102 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Note When Auto Filename is enabled on the AutoSave screen see Figure on page 4 24 the Fiber ID field of the Header screen is auto populated starting with the number set in the Start Number field Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired field and then press the Enter key The Text Entry dialog boxdialog box app
232. along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you per mission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual c5 Appendix C Software License C 6 exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this Lic
233. ameters screen Press Set Defaults f1 to return the settings on the OTDR Construction Parameters screen to their default settings Press Cancel f5 to close the OTDR Construction Parameters screen without saving any changes made returning to the OTDR Construction Setup screen Press Exit f6 to save any changes made on the OTDR Construction Parameters screen and return to the OTDR Construction Setup screen 6 36 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Headers Headers hold valuable information about the trace files which may save a considerable amount of time when recalling traces for comparison The header does not require repopulating each time a new trace is collected Information entered on the Header screen is retained until such a time as the header requires editing Use the following procedure to access and edit the header when in Construction mode To access and edit the Header 1 With the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 displayed press Header f3 The Header screen appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Unit Header a Customer File Header Data Flag OT Cable ID Fiber ID lt AUTO gt Cable Code Start Location Terminal Location Operator Comment Used to input the owner name or company name Number of characters must be less than 30 Exit Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value
234. an be horizontally or vertically shifted to adjust the view and event locations The distance offset horizontal and decibel offset vertical are displayed above the trace graph To shift trace data 1 If two traces are displayed make sure that the desired trace is in the primary trace position The primary trace is always displayed in red 2 With the Level Two softkeys displayed press Shift f5 The Shift Mode softkeys appear 3 Toggle the Shift Mode softkey f1 to the desired shift type Horizontal or Vertical 4 Turn the Rotary knob to shift the trace along the chosen axis The offset values of the shift are displayed above the trace graph See Figure 4 27 OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 9 00h_ 80 16 3284km 0 152 Kk kk 2 22 6371km 1 812 40 495 0 204 1 274 Shift Mode 3 42 7281km 0 780 49 960 0 201 7 114 Harzantal 4 62 9722km lf Fiber End 32 415 0 204 12 028 dB Horiz Shift 10 4845 km Vert Shift 1 300 dB 3 Reset Horiz Reset Vert 0 25 75 100km WL 1550 nm SM IOR 1 468200 DR 100 1km RES 5 003m PW 4us HR AVG 24576 Prev Event A 32 2436 km B 52 4877 km A gt B 20 2442 km Splice Loss 0 003 Refi Hk k Exit Trace Analysis Next Event Figure 4 27 Shift Mode 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to shift along the other axis 6 When you have reached the desired shift location press Exit f6 to close the Shi
235. an be printed via the optional BL 80RII or SD1 31 printers Note The printed output from the MT9083 Series consists of a screen shot Only the details currently displayed on the LCD less the softkeys are printed Make sure that the desired details are displayed before printing Connecting the Printer Connect the MT9083 Series to the BL 80RII or SD1 31 printers using a USB printer conversion cable as shown in the figure below 36 pin male s4 Connect to the e USB Down port Figure 5 28 Connecting the BL 80RII Printer Printing a Fault Locate Trace File Make sure that the Printer setup parameters are set as desired on the setups General screen See Printer and Paper Feed on pages 3 9 3 10 for details To print trace files 1 Connect the BL 80RII or SD1 31 printers to the MT9083 Series as shown in Figure 5 28 and then power up the printer Perform a Fault Locate test 3 At the conclusion of the test To print the Summary screen continue at step 4 or To print the Trace press View Trace f6 and then continue at step 4 4 Press the Print key The following message is displayed Output screen image to a printer or as an image file Please select output type using the function keys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 71 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 Press Printer f1 The message changes to Please wait Printing The MT9083 Series returns to the Trace grid when the
236. an existing Loss Table e Overwriting test data in an existing Loss Table e Deleting test data from a Loss Table e Deleting all test data from a Loss Table e Adding comments to a Loss Table Adding Test Data to an Existing Loss Table To add Test Data to an existing Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled press Add f1 The current test data will be added at the end of the Loss Table Note Make sure that the Light Source is active for the current trace If the Light Source is not On a Loss value of dB along with a Power reading of Under is recorded for the current fiber test data number In addition if a Threshold value was set it will be recorded as Fail 2 Continue testing to populate the table with the additional fiber test data required Note When working with a recalled Loss Table always rename the file before saving it This assures that the original data is still available See Saving Loss Test Set Files on page 8 34 for details Overwriting Test Data in an Existing Loss Table To overwrite Test Data in an existing Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired row in the Loss Table 2 Press Overwrite f2 The new test data information appears in the highlighted row 8 30 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mod
237. ancel P No te The softkey is displayed only when Connection Check is being executed Press f1 to switch Auto Manual or FTTA of Average Tete measurement mode FTTA stands for Fiber to the antenna The red legend on the softkey displays the current Test Mode setting Press f2 to switch the marker A or B The red legend on the cana softkey displays the current Marker setting afi a fE Press the Enter key to specify the marker position The distance and loss between A and B are displayed in the trace events 5 28 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Press f3 to toggle through the available source wavelengths The red legend on the softkey displays the current wavelength setting Note Pressing the Wavelength softkey on single wavelength units sounds an error tone The macro bending is detected before tests when Wavelength 1310 1550 Macro Bend or 1310 1625 Macro Bend is selected Note Macro Bend detection requires a unit with at least two single mode operating wavelengths one at 1310 nm and a second at either 1550 nm or 1625 nm Press f4 to display the Test Parameter screen See Setting the Test Parameters on page 4 78 for details When Test Mode is set to FTTA Test Parameters are fixed values Press f5 to set the IOR Index of Refraction and BSC Backscatter Coefficient used for the current test The red legends display the current settings Press f6 to swa
238. and then mail the battery to your local recycling center 1 Disconnect the AC adapter if used Turn the power switch to on 3 Leave the product on until the power indicator goes off the battery is now discharged Remove the battery 5 Insulate the battery terminals with adhesive tape Please recycle in accordance with your national or regional legislation Nach Gebrauch der Ver Kaufsstelle Zuriickgeben Apr s usage rapporter au point de vente xvi MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual For Safety Replacing Memory Back up Battery External Storage Media Use in a residential environment Use in Corrosive Atmospheres For Safety CAUTION This equipment uses a Poly carbonmonofloride lithium battery to backup the memory This battery must be replaced by service personnel when it has reached the end of its useful life contact the Anritsu sales section or your nearest representative Note The battery used in this equipment has a maximum useful life of 7 years It should be replaced before this period has elapsed This equipment uses USB memory as external storage media for storing data and programs If this media is mishandled or becomes faulty important data may be lost To prevent this chance occurrence all important data and programs should be backed up Anritsu will not be held responsible for lost data Pay careful attention to the following points e Never remove the memory f
239. and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Non Reflective Event Loss 2 Press Enter The Non Reflective Event Loss dialog appears The dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set Non Reflective Event Loss to None when it is currently set in dBs Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical This parameter highlights reflective event losses such as connectors and mechanical splices in the Events Analysis table The range of settings for this parameter is 0 10 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Reflective Event Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflective Event Loss 2 Press Enter The Reflective Event Loss dialog appears The dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 43 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 44 Reflectance This parameter highlights events in the Event Analys
240. and Light Source connections MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 11 Press Light Source Off f1 to turn on the Light Source e Ifthe Loss reading displayed is lt 0 5 dB the patch cord is good and will provide a valid test e Ifthe Loss reading is gt 0 5 dB clean the connections and repeat steps 9 and 11 If the Loss reading is still gt 0 5 dB after cleaning the connectors replace the patch cord and repeat steps 5 through 11 12 Repeat as required for all wavelengths to be tested Single MT9083 Series Method This procedure details how to use a single MT 9083 Series equipped with an optional Power Meter options 004 005 007 in Loss Test Set mode This procedure requires that the Input and Output for the fiber to be tested are at the same location The Single MT9083 Series method consist of two parts a reference procedure and then the test procedure Reference Procedure 1 Power up the MT9083 Series and enter Loss Test Set mode 2 Connect the optional Power Meter to the Optical Light Source port using either a single patch cord or two patch cords and an inline connector 4 EMS or M F see the following note 2 Patch cords 3 In line connector MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 19 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 8 20 Note EMS Equilibrium Mode Simulator multimode fiber M F Mode Filter singlemode fiber Use of either an EMS or M E while not
241. and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI CABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLI CABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIB UTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LI ABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUS TAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 15 Appendix C Software License C 16 END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
242. anel Splice measurement using the Launch Level Va LAUNCH CORD lOTDRL dp Fur A Distance B 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix B Sample Traces Panel Connector and Panel Splice Measurements The figure below shows an OTDR sample trace with Cursor A positioned for a Panel Connection and Panel Splice measurement using Splice Loss mode and a long launch cable LAUNCH CORD 4 FUT J A dB Distance Bad Launch The following figure show an example of a bad launch Ft 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 Possible causes of a bad launch can include e Faulty connection at the OTDR e Defective patch cord e Bad connectors on the FUT fiber under test A break in the first few feet of the FUT fiber under test MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual B 3 Appendix B Sample Traces End to End Loss The figure below shows an OTDR sample trace with cursor placement for an End to End Loss measurement Place Cursor A and Cursor B as shown Fiber Under Test 1km OTDR dp Connector A B 2 PT Loss 0 20 dB See 2 Point Loss on page 7 5 for further details Fiber Length Distance Measurements The figure below shows an OTDR sample trace with the proper cursor placement for a Fiber Length Distance measurement Position Cursor A at 0 00 km or at the end of a pulse suppressor such as a Test Fiber module if one is used Place Cursor B at the location shown A B A XX
243. any data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can delete a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To delete a file 1 5 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 or the Load screen see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete the selected file or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the file Press the ESC Key to return to the test application Use the following procedure to delete multiple files in a directory To delete multiple files 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 or the Load screen see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to delete and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to delete Press More gt gt f6 Press Delete f5 The following message
244. appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual fs Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Press Yes f1 to delete the selected files or press No 2 to cancel without deleting the files Use the following procedure to delete all of the files in a directory or folder To delete all files in a directory or folder i Si Ry SoS Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 or the Load screen see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the file to be deleted Press the Down Arrow key to open the selected folder directory Press More f6 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note Copying Files If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off Press More f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete all files in the selected directory or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files Use either the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 or the Load screen see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 to copy data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can copy a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To copy a
245. ar Template f3 to clear the template trace Template mode is disabled when the template is cleared To set the Template Setting e Press Template Settings f4 to access the template settings screen Template Settings Screen Template Settings screen see Figure 4 21 on page 4 62 contains access for the following parameter settings e Event Determination e Trace Priority e Distance e Absolute Distance e Distance Helix Factor Adjustment Note Trace Priority Distance and Absolute Distance are only activated when Merge is selected for Event Determination MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 61 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 62 Template Settings 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Event Determination O Merge Distance Helix Factor Adjustment None Snap to Template End Snap to Trace End Exit Figure 4 21 Template Setting screen Event Determination The setting made in the Event Determination control how the Template trace event are applied to the selected target trace To Set the Event Determination 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Template on the Event Determination field Toggle the Enter key or the Rotary knob to select the desire mode Template or Merge Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen If Template is selected all events are copied directly from the template trace and onto the collected trace If Merge is selec
246. arameter highlights reflective event losses such as connectors and mechanical splices in the Events Analysis table The range of settings for this parameter is 0 10 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Reflective Event Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflective Event Loss 2 Press Enter The Reflective Event Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 If the Reflective Event Loss dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 5 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set Reflective Event Loss to None when it is currently set in dBs To set Reflective Event Loss threshold to None 1 Highlight Reflective Event Loss and then press the Enter key The Reflective Event Loss dialog appears displaying the current dB setting 2 Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Reflectance This parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table th
247. are and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C ER 12 212 Sept 1995 Consistent with 48 C ER 12 212 and 48 C ER 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 June 1995 all U S Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein 11 MISCELLANEOUS This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable This License shall be governed by California law provisions except to the extent applicable law if any provides otherwise excluding its conflict of law provisions With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 23 Appendix C Software License C 24 District of California with venue lying in Santa Clara County California with the losing party responsible for costs including without limitation court costs and reasonable attorneys fees and expenses The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the Inter national Sale of Goods is expressly excluded Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a con trac
248. are devices or on the backside of patch panels eliminating the need to either disassemble hardware devices prior to inspection or access the backside of patch panels MT9083 Series can use following VIP OPTION 545 VIP Magnification 200 400 G0293A Magnification 400 G0306A Magnification 400 This section explains the operation of OPTION 545 VIP Fiber Microscope Video Inspection Probe VIP USB converter Probe tips Figure 11 1 Video Inspection Probe OPTION 545VIP MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 1 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option The VIP option consists of the following e Video Inspection Probe VIP e 5 probe tips one each SC ST FC Universal 1 25 mm and Universal 2 5 mm e USB converter e Software CD Note The Software CD contains the VIP Analysis software which is for PC use only See the software s help set for details on its use 11 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Video Inspection Probe VIP This small lightweight probe measures 139 7 mm in length It contains a long life coaxial LED source and 8 46 mm CCD video camera 1 Dust cap 2 Focus Control knob 3 200x 400x switch Figure 11 2 Video Inspection Probe Probe Tips The VIP includes five interchangeable probe tips three standard tips FC ST and SC and two universal tips 1 25 mm and 2 5 mm Standard Tips There a
249. assword use the Left and Right keys to position the text cursor to the right of the character to delete then press Backspace f5 or the BS key 4 Use the Up and Down keys to move the highlighted selection from row to row including the Administrator Password field Use the Left and Right keys to move the highlighted selection within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the Administrator Password field if the field is highlighted Or Use the rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix or to highlight the Administrator Password field 5 Use the f1 f3 softkeys for the following actions e Small Letter f1 to switch the character matrix to lower case letters e Capital Letter f2 to switch the character matrix to upper case letters e Symbols f3 to switch the character matrix to display symbols 6 With the text cursor positioned at the desired location press the Enter key to enter the character selected highlighted from the character matrix into the password Use the numeric keypad to enter numbers into a password Press OK f6 after making all desired entries 8 Enter the password again to confirm it MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 19 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 9 Press OK 6 and you can now use the new Administrator Password To cancel press the ESC key Password Settings 2012 Jul 1 10 00 E gt 9 00h 80 General Setting Password Pr
250. at exceed the set Reflectance value MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode The range of settings for this parameter is 50 0 dB to 10 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Reflectance threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance 2 Press Enter The Reflectance dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 If the Reflectance dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 5 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set Reflectance to None when it is currently set in dBs To set Reflectance threshold to None 1 Highlight Reflectance and then press the Enter key The Reflectance dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Fiber Loss dB km This parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the dB km loss exceeds the value set The range of settings for thi
251. at its own discretion fix the bug or exchange the software or suggest a workaround free of charge However notwithstanding the above the following items shall be excluded from repair and warranty i If this Software is deemed to be used for purposes not described in the operation manual or specifications ii If this Software is used in conjunction with other non Anritsu approved software iii Recovery of lost or damaged data iv If this Software or the Equipment has been modified repaired or otherwise altered without Anritsu s prior approval v For any other reasons out of Anritsu s direct control and responsibility such as but not MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Software End User License Agreement EULA limited to natural disasters software virus infections etc Expenses incurred for transport hotel daily allowance etc for on site repairs by Anritsu engineers necessitated by the above faults shall be borne by you The warranty period for faults listed in article 3a above covered by this EULA shall be either 6 months from the date of purchase of this Software or 30 days after the date of repair whichever is longer Export Restrictions You may not use or otherwise export or re export directly or indirectly this Software except as authorized by Japanese and United States law In particular this software may not be exported or re exported a into any Japanese or
252. ate TargetTrace est Trace Event Event Merge On Merge On Location Location Template On Trace Priority Off Trace Priority On aee 6 42 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Distance and Absolute Distance The Percent Distance and Absolute Distance define the size of the correlation window which determines how close together events must be to correlate The size of the window is defined to be MINIMUM Percent Template Event Distance Absolute Distance To set Distance 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Distance field 2 Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value from 0 to 100 0 in the field 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen To set Absolute Distance 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Absolute Distance field When the distance display units are set to km 2 Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value from 0 000 to 250 000km in the field 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen Distance Helix Factor Events in the template trace and the target trace may not align perfectly due to the differences in length of the fibers within a single cable Distance Helix Factor Adjust options compensate for the difference in length and also obtain improved splice location and loss estimation There are three option button
253. ategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor w
254. avelength selection and Reference value established on the Power Meter screen see Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 as well as the current Loss reading Loss Table The Loss Table occupies the lower half of the Power Meter mode Loss Table screen The table is scrollable by using either the Rotary knob or the Up and Down Arrow keys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 5 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Each row in the table represents a tested fiber A Loss Table can contain up to a maximum of 999 rows and presents the following details No Number of the fiber tested e WL Wavelength set for the Power Meter Loss Current loss value Power Current optical power measurement value Threshold Pass Fail status as determined by the current Threshold value Comment Comments entered by the operator Loss Table Softkeys The following softkeys are available on the Power Meter mode Loss Table screen Add f1 Press the Add softkey to add the current test results to the Loss Table Overwrite f2 Press the Overwrite softkey to overwrite the highlighted row in the Loss Table with the results from the current test Delete f3 Press the Delete softkey to delete the test results of currently highlight row Delete All f4 Press the Delete All softkey to clear all test results from the Loss Table Comment f5 Press the Comment softkey to
255. be unable to use the unit To set Password Protect 1 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight Password Protect 2 Press the Enter key to display the Password Protect dialog box Password Settings 2012 Jul 1 10 00 ED 9 00h 80 General Setting Password Protect Off Administrator Setting Password Password Protect i Password Settings User Setting Password P Off Password Lifespan Unlimited Expiration Date Unlimited Set On or Off for protection with Password The Login screen is displayed on startup when set to On Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter or ESC to exit Figure 3 6 Password Protect dialog box 3 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the desired selection On or Off MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 17 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Setting the Administrator Password A valid Administrator Password contains 8 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols If you execute the Restore Default the default Administrator password will be restored The default password for the current version is MT9083ANRITSU This password is used to login in as an Administrator Z CAUTION Do not forget your Administrator Password If you forget this password you will be unable to use the unit To set the Password 1 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight Password 2 Press t
256. ble connector on the equipment nor into the end of a cable connected to the equipment If laser radiation enters the eye there is a risk of injury In addition the MT9083 Series outputs high power optical pulses To prevent damage to the photoreceiving circuit of the communication device connected to the optical fiber to be measured remove the communication device from the optical fiber before measurement Anritsu will take no responsibility for damage to the communication or any other device e Maintenance Anritsu recommends that the MT9083 Series be inspected once a year at the Anritsu Customer Service Center a fee will be charged e Humid or dusty place Avoid installing MT8820C in a humid or dusty place Drops of water or accumulated dust may constitute a short circuit thus causing a fire accident electric shock and or failure MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 25 Chapter 2 Overview e Place where it is exposed to active gas Avoid installing MT8820C in a place that may be ex posed to active gas Otherwise MT8820C may be damaged thus causing a fire accident and or failure For other notes on use read the safety related information in this manual thoroughly before use 2 26 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups General Operation This section assumes that the battery pack is already charged or that the A
257. both panes press the Enter key The dialog closes and the files are listed in the selected order Deleting Files Use either the Save screen see Figure 8 13 on page 8 34 or the Load screen see Figure 8 14 on page 8 39 to delete any data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can delete a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 35 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode To delete a file 1 J Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 8 13 on page 8 34 or the Load screen see Figure 8 14 on page 8 39 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired file Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete the selected file or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the file Press the ESC key to return to the test application Use the following procedure to delete multiple files in a directory To delete multiple files Le Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 8 13 on page 8 34 or the Load screen see Figure 8 14 on page 8 39 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight th
258. brary It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library
259. by are Copyright C All Rights Reserved Contributor s Alternatively the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the license the ___ License in which case the provisions of License are applicable instead of those above If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the ___ License If you do not delete the provisions above a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the ___ License NOTE The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License 4 LGPL exception FLTK License Agreement The Fast Light Toolkit Home Page Home Documentation FAQ Links Bazaar News Newsgroups Polls Software Support FLTK License Agreement December 11 2001 The FLTK library and included programs are provided under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License LGPL with the following exceptions Modifications to the FLTK configure script config header file an
260. by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or other wise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it an
261. cal Power Meter To start Power Meter mode 1 Press the Top Menu key The Top Menu screen appears 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Power Meter then press the Enter key The Power Meter screen appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Gp 9 00h_ 80 SG Power Meter Power Wavelength 1550 nm Seer 31 Fi dBm Wavelength gt ee Threshold None 3 3 dB Set Zero MT AAT o Anritsu Loss Table nal Figure 9 1 Power Meter Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 1 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Power Meter Screen The Power Meter screen is comprised of the elements flagged in the following figure Power Meter Power Meter Wavelength 1550 nm 35 0 dBm qn None Power Meter Wavelength Set Zero Prins Anritsu Loss Table Figure 9 2 Power Meter Screen Elements Wavelength indicator Power reading Range indicator Reference field Threshold field Loss reading Port connection indicator Softkeys o N WBN KR WY NH KF Wavelength Indicator Displays the current test wavelength as set via the Power Meter Wavelength f1 softkey 9 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Power Reading Displays the current value measured by the Optical Power Meter The optical power meter measurement range is 50 to 5 dBm
262. cccscceceesssssseeeuseeeeeeseeseeeeees 5 13 Event Table Span Calculation cccceccseesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeene 5 14 A B Span Analy siSize sivvcc oat see a aa cereus teenecievien 5 14 AUTOS AVG EAA ore csi T stot seke does cis A Gon laemvscl sc cusconted Lecodes 5 15 Auto Filename ParaMeters cccccccscscscssssssesssssseseseeecseeeeeeeseneneneeeeeeeeaes 5 15 Enabled AUtO FilQGnaMe cccccccccccceeceseseceeseseeeeeeesseseeseseceeeeeeeeeeess 5 15 AutoSave Directory asns ees aia a ewes ade E E 5 16 Base FIICMNAMG cccccccccecececeeeeceseneeesssssesesenecececeeceseueueuseeeesesauaneneansess 5 17 Start NUMBER niner eek heats a eee Hawes a a a cjagesedee 5 18 Enabled AUtOSAVE cccccccccccceseseeeeeeeeesecaeaeaeeeeeueeesneseseseseceeeeeeeeeeees 5 19 ADOUE SCE ON iccedescetaew denies aPrecedbageacstealanQideeven Woy Aivebadaweve a a 5 19 Fiber Visualizer Screen cccccccccccscsecececeeecseseueucuceeaesauensueaeeeaeeseeeees 5 20 Over view of the fiber Under teSt ccccccccccccscseccsseeseesseeeeeuseuseeeeess 5 20 Wace CVENtS sess nee tee ee BE ee ae 5 21 Test RESUS ain o a a a a 5 21 Pass Fail ThresholdS cccccscccsecesssesssssesesecececeeeeeeseueuseeeeseseuaaeeesneess 5 21 Trace Screenin r ee hess Menten eee es Gee 5 23 EVEN ta DG ioc A O vavt oeuisuas then sitessoensisuccossbavvunsubabistecccners 5 23 Reflectance icccssi sor a ee hie artes 5 24 CUB Kei amp sete 22 treet ect A a a
263. ceceeaeaeaeueusueueseeseseceeseeeeeeenenes 6 23 TESEID IFS COM aaar eara a a e a a a a A aa EN 6 23 Site A Site Boieecccccccccccccccccecccesseceecesesseescueceececseesaeeuseusuesesseeueesscesaeeuees 6 24 QUA GI a a A ai 6 24 Wavelengths a a e r aaae a aar aaa a aranana ar aa n Ea nei EEEa 6 26 Number Of ADES aa aee aaea a a aa a ENa a a Eea 6 26 Start ONA OE A E T 6 27 OPONSE Ea AA A E A a 6 27 Connection CNECK ccceseeeseeeseeesesececeecececeecueueuceeeeeauaneaeseesseseeeeess 6 27 Automoderna eia aae a ae a N a a 6 27 File Save Verify ccccccecceeeeeeeeceeeeceaeeeaeceaeecaaeeeaeesaaeseaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeas 6 28 Macro Be i a a a a A 6 28 OTDR Construction Setup Screen Softkeys ccccccssesssseeessseeessaeeeees 6 29 OTDR Construction Parameters Screen ccccceseseseseseeeeeeeeeeees 6 30 Setting the OTDR Construction Test Parameters 0 6 31 Setting the Distance Range Resolution and Pulse Width 0 6 31 Selecting the Dead Zone Mode 00 ececeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeneeeeeaaaeenae 6 32 Setting the Average Time Average Count c scccccecsstceeesesseeeessnaees 6 33 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual XI XII Setting the IOR and BSC eeccceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeaeeseeaaeeeae 6 35 Apply to All Wavelengths setting euseseesseeeessersssrresrnrsnrsrrssrresrrens 6 36 OTDR Construction Parameters Screen SoftkeyS
264. celed The current settings and trace if in Standard OTDR mode are saved in memory and will be read at the next startup with the screen at shut down displayed e A battery pack temperature failure warning occurs When the battery pack is in use or charging the following message appears Battery charge was terminated since the temperature exceeded the limit 0 to 40 deg C MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 5 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups When charging is terminated Battery temperature exceeded the discharging temperature limit The instrument will automatically turn off after a minute When the above message is displayed the charging is terminated Charging will resume automatically when the battery pack temperature returns to the normal temperature When the power is OFF Battery temperature exceeded the discharging temperature limit The instrument will automatically turn off after a minute When one minute has elapsed the power automatically shuts down At this time any measurement currently in progress is canceled The current settings and trace ifin Standard OTDR mode are saved in memory and will be read at the next startup with the screen at shut down displayed 15 C o c 40 C 55 C lt 4 Charging range Discharging range Figure 3 3 Charging discharging temperature range of battery pack Note The remaining battery power indicators only provide an ap
265. ces 2 2 Auto Patch cord Removal Grid Display Force Total Loss Event icon movement End event for ORL calculation 2013 Oct 30 04 14 Noe Grid Display Dotted Force Total Loss Off Fiber Visualizer Event Icon Movement Left to Right End Event for ORL Calculation OMIT Event Table Span Calculation Span Length A B Span Analysis off Preferences 2 2 Used to automatically shift out patch cords after analysis is complete WARNING This function may not work with certain patch cord lengths k Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 4 Preferences 2 2 Screen Auto Patch cord Removal Specify the event number to treat as dummy fiber The range of settings for this parameter is 1 to 9 in 1 increments To set the Auto Patch cord Removal l Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Patch cord Removal Press Enter The Auto Patch cord Removal dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no Auto Patch cord Removal currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the Auto Patch cord Removal MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 3 Ifthe Auto Patch cord Removal dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the event number setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys o
266. ch Template trace event is converted proportionately relative to the Target trace end event location Adjusted Template trace _ _ __ _ __ event locations 11 25 22 5 45 after conversion 2 Next correlation is performed using the Target trace events and converted temporary Template trace events Temporary Target trace __ __ _ _ __ __ __ _ event locations 11 25 15 22 5 30 45 after correlation 4 66 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 3 Finally the correlated temporary Template trace events are converted proportionately relative to the end event location for the Template trace events Final Target trace _ __ _6__o __ 0 __1 __ _ event locations 10 13 33 20 26 66 40 IfSnap to Trace End is selected 1 Each Template trace event is converted proportionately relative to the Target trace end event location Adjusted Template trace t _ _ a event locations 11 25 22 5 45 after conversion 2 Next correlation is performed using the Target trace events and converted temporary Template trace events Target trace j S _ __ _ _ _ __ __ event locations 11 25 15 22 5 30 45 after correlation Table 4 2 Resultant Target Trace Events shows examples of resultant target trace events for the three Distance Helix Factor Adjustment options None Snap to Template End Snap to Trace End T
267. cro Bends Grouped Event Events spaced too close to each other for Analysis to distinguish them as separate events are reported as Grouped events Far End Event EM Any event with a loss equal to or greater than the Fiber End threshold is reported as the Far End event Questionable End Event alta A Questionable End event is reported instead of a Far End event when an Out of Range or Out of Distance condition is encountered PON Event FS All events other than far end events with losses greater than the far end threshold are displayed as PON events Loss dB The Loss calculated for the event is displayed in decibels dB MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Reflectance A reflectance value is displayed for all reflective events while is displayed in the Reflectance field Reflect dB for non reflective events In addition to the reflectance value two other indicators may be present S e An S following the numeric value indicates that the reflective event being measured is very close to the top limit of the OTDR s data set and that it is considered saturated hitting the high limit of the measurement ability An S saturated indicator will be present any time that the peak of the event being measured is within 1 dB of the top of the OTDR Trace graph dB km This field displays the dB km between the selected event and the prior event Cumu
268. ction of the active cursor and the trace level Trace Overview Window The Trace Overview window located in the lower left corner or the Trace graph show a thumbnail view of the current trace This is helpful in determining the location of an expanded section on the main view The black rectangle inside the Trace Overview window indicates the section of the trace that is currently displayed in the Trace graph when the trace has been expanded horizontally vertically MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Trace Overview must be set to On in the Preferences tab for the window to be displayed See Trace Overview on page 5 8 for details Cursor Distance Information The Cursor Distance information see item 3 in Figure 5 12 on page 5 23 displays the following e Distance from the origin of the trace to Cursor A e Distance from the origin of the trace to Cursor B e Distance between Cursor A and Cursor B As you move the cursors the Cursor Distance information updates simultaneously Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance The Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 5 12 on page 5 23 displays the following e The current loss mode listed in the top section e The current loss reading in dB in the center section e A reflectance value reading for reflective events in the bottom section Fiber Test Parameters The Fiber Test Parameters area see item 5 in Figu
269. ctor Battery pack Lithium ion rechargeable battery 11 1 V 4200 mAh AC adapter 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 12 VDC 5 A SC Plug in Converter UPC P APC J MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 21 J J Appendix A Specifications Parts and accessories Cont d Specifications SC Plug in Converter APC P UPC FC Plug in Converter UPC P APC J FC Plug in Converter APC P UPC LC SC Plug in Converter for SM SC P LC J Aeneas LC SC Plug in Converter for MM SC P LC AC cord J0980 For US Canada and Taiwan J0981 For UK Malaysia South Africa and Hong Kong J0982 For Europe J0983 For China and Oceania J1027 For India J1028 For Switzerland J1511A For Korea Soft carrying case An MT9083 Series unit with Option 10 B0582A attached can be stored Hard carrying case B0583A Connector Video Inspection Probe OPTION 545VIP Video Inspection Light Probe Video Inspection Probe Magnification 400 G0306A Integrated USB converter A 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications Parts and accessories Cont d Hard case for VIP option 2 La a FS PT USB CASE External Battery Charger Li ion battery charger for MT9083A2 B2 C2 Charge time 1 hour for 90 2 5 hours for 100 Note 1 Also includes Quick User s Guide Remote Control Operation Manual MxX900021A Remote Screen Software Operation Manual Add A B or C
270. current Connect Fiber number See Changing the Connect Fiber Number below for details Cancel Test f4 cancels the pending test and advances both the Connect Fiber number and the filename auto increment number by one each time Cancel Test is pressed Note If the Number of Fibers field see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 is set to 1 pressing Cancel Test returns you to the OTDR Construction Setup screen Press Cancel All Tests f5 to cancel all test and return to the OTDR Construction Setup screen Changing the Connect Fiber Number Use the following procedure to change the Connect Fiber number from the OTDR Construction Connect Fiber screen To change the Fiber Connect number 1 With the OTDR Construction Connect Fiber screen displayed press Change Fiber f2 The Current Fiber dialog appears 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Numeric keypad to enter the desired new current fiber number up to 999 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the number set is displayed in the Connect Fiber pane 6 48 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Test In Progress Screen When a test has been started Construction mode enters Analysis mode displaying the Test in Progress screen see Figure 6 18 OTDR Construction Press ESC to stop the test 2012 Jul 1 10 00 C 9 00h 80 dB 0 0 i Continue a Cancel 4 Preview On o 25 100km
271. d MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 15 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 16 5 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflective Event Loss Press Enter The Reflective Event Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs If the Reflective Event Loss dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set Reflective Event Loss to None when it is currently set in dBs To set Reflective Event Loss threshold to None 1 Ds Highlight Reflective Event Loss and then press the Enter key The Reflective Event Loss dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Reflectance This parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table that exceed the set Reflectance value The range of settings for this parameter is 50 0 dB to 10 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Reflectance th
272. d proportionately relative to the end event location for the Template trace events Final Target trace mo oo ro o event locations 10 13 33 20 26 66 40 e IfSnap to Trace End is selected 1 Each Template trace event is converted proportionately relative to the Target trace end event location Adjusted Template trace i E S O O S S E E E event locations 11 25 22 5 45 after conversion MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 45 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 2 Next correlation is performed using the Target trace events and converted temporary Template trace events Target trace _ _ _ __ _ _ __ __ _ o event locations 11 25 15 22 5 30 45 after correlation Table 6 2 Resultant Target Trace Events shows examples of resultant target trace events for the three Distance Helix Factor Adjustment options None Snap to Template End Snap to Trace End Table 6 2 Resultant Target Trace Events Template Target Trace Trace Event Event Distance Helix Factor Adjustment Location Location Snap to Template Snap to Trace End End Template Settings Screen softkey The following two softkeys are available on the Template Settings screen Click the currently selected template trace and then click Clear Template f1 to turn template mode off Settings screen and return to the OTDR Construction Setup screen a Press Exit f6 to save any changes made on the Template 6 46 MT9
273. d changes to Test Parameters Pressing Test Parameters f4 displays the OTDR Parameters screen see Figure 4 28 on page 4 79 which contains access for the following test parameter settings e Range Resolution Pulse Width e Dead zone e Number of Averages Averaging Time e TOR Index of Refraction BSC Backscatter Coefficient In addition each pane has an option button which when selected sets the basic test parameters to the same setting for all available wavelengths The OTDR Parameters screen also provides access to Macro Bend testing To access the OTDR Parameters screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode e With the Wavelength softkey f3 set to Wavelength All press Test Parameters f4 The OTDR Parameters screen see Figure 4 28 on page 4 79 appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 1310 1550 Set Range Range 100 km Datani PW 3 ns HR PW 4000 ns HR Macro Bend Num Avgs 15 Sec Num Avgs 30 Sec off O Apply to All Wavelengths O Apply to All Wavelengths IOR BSC 1 467700 78 50 IOR BSC 1 468200 81 50 1625 N A Range 0 5 km PW 3 ns HR Num Avgs 15 Sec Cancel Apply to All Wavelengths 1OR BSC 1 468500 81 50 Exit Figure 4 28 OTDR Parameters Screen To set the Range Resolution and Pulse Width in Wavelength All mode 1 With the OTDR Parameters screen displayed use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highli
274. d indicator will be present any time that the peak of the event being measured is within 1 dB of the top of the OTDR Trace graph dB km This field displays the dB km between the selected event and the prior event The unit of distance km kf or mi will vary depending on the Distance Display Units selected on the Preferences screen Trace Graph The Trace graph displays the trace data in graph form Power loss is measured in dB along the vertical axis and distance is measured along the horizontal axis Use the Distance Display Units setting on the Preferences screen to set the horizontal axis units The downward slope of the trace indicates power loss attenuation over the distance of the fiber MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode dB Horiz Shift 14 5425 km Vert Shift 1 300 dB M 0 0 Figure 5 13 Trace Graph p Trace waveform s Cursor A Cursor B Horizontal Vertical offset Horizontal Axis scale Vertical Axis scale dB level indicator oN AV A WH N Trace Overview window Trace Waveform The Trace Waveform or Trace is the downward sloping line going from left to right that connects the data points collected during a test See item 1 in Figure 5 13 on page 5 25 Up to four traces can be displayed simultaneously a primary trace and up to three overlay traces MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 25 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer M
275. d makefiles by themselves to support a specific platform do not constitute a modified or derivative work The authors do request that such modifications be contributed to the FLTK project send all contributions to fltk bugs fltk org Widgets that are subclassed from FLTK widgets do not constitute a derivative work Static linking of applications and widgets to the FLTK library does not constitute a derivative work and does not require the author to provide source code for the application or widget use the shared FLTK libraries or link their applications or widgets against a user supplied version of FLTK If you link the application or widget to a modified version of FLTK then the changes to FLTK must be provided under the terms of the LGPL in sections 1 2 and 4 You do not have to provide a copy of the FLTK license with programs that are linked to the FLTK library nor do you have to identify the FLTK license in your program or documentation as required by section 6 of the LGPL However programs must still identify their use of FLTK The following example statement can be included in user documentation to satisfy this requirement program widget is based in part on the work of the FLTK project http www fltk org GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribut
276. d setting INCLUDE Includes the reflection in Far End events when calculating the ORL MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 13 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 14 OMIT Not Includes the reflection in Far End events when calculating the ORL 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the End Event for ORL Calculation field Event Table Span Calculation Selects whether to display the span length or transmission loss dB km on event table This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer To set the Event Table Span Calculation 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight SPAN Calculation Press Enter The Event Table Span Calculation dialog appears Highlight the desired setting Span Length Display the span length between each event calculation on event table dB km Display the transmission loss dB km between each event calculation on event table Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Event Table Span Calculation field A B Span Analysis Sets whether to specify the PASS FAIL analysis span by Marker A and B This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer To set the A B Span Analysis 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight A B Span analysis Press Enter The A B Span Analysis dialog appears Highlight the desired setting Off Gives PASS FA
277. d then wipe in one direction 2 or 3 times to dry the surface Dust and other contaminates in the isopropyl alcohol may remain on the ferrule end surface if cleaning is not properly finished 4 Clean the connector adapter before reattaching it See the following procedure To clean an Optical Adapter for details 5 Attach the adapter in the reverse order described in step 1 Be careful not to scratch the ferrule end surface 6 OPTIONAL With the MT9083 Series powered down inspect the ferrule using a hand held microscope or magnifier It should appear similar to the Clean Ferrule Tip below see Figure 13 3 Contaminated Ferrule End Surface Clean Ferrule End Surface Figure 13 3 Magnified Ferrule End Surface 13 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 13 Maintenance Cleaning the Optical Adapter Use an approved adapter cleaner to clean the optical fiber cable optical adapter To clean an Optical Adapter 1 Remove the Optical adapter See step 1 of To clean the Ferrule end surface on page 13 1 for details 2 Saturate an adapter cleaner with isopropyl alcohol and then insert it into the split sleeve of the adapter Rotate the adapter cleaner in one direction while moving it back and forth Figure 13 4 Cleaning an Optical Adapter Note Check the ferrule diameter and use a cleaner only for the 91 25 mm or 92 5mm adapter Cleaning the Optical Fiber Cable Ferrule End Surface It is advised that
278. d this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the b
279. dBm 850 nm CW 25 C 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW LD Center wavelength 650 nm 15 nm fF When Option 002 installed Optical output power 0 3 dBm o Note OLS Optical light source OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode V MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 33 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083A2 Option 063 Wavelength MMF 850nm 850nm 30nm Pulse width 100 ns Poe oe tere se The selectable pulse width is 500 ns or less when the wavelength is MMF 850 nm and 4 ps or less when the wavelength is 1300 nm Dynamic range Wavelength um 1 55 0 85 1 3 1 31 1 55 Pulse width 20 ps 27 dB S N 1 Distance range 100 km for SME 25 km for MMF a n a Average time 180 seconds 500 ns when the wavelength is 850 nm and 4 ps when 1300 nm Distance 1 m 3 x measurement measurement distance x 10 marker accuracy resolution Loss measurement 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB accuracy Linearity Whichever is greater OLS Light Source output 5 1 5 dBm Po 850 30 nm 12 34 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration OPM Measurement 6 5 1550 nm CW accuracy 20 dBm OPM Option Option 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C VLD Center wavelength 650 nm 15 nm gt 7 When Option 002 Optical output power 0 3 dBm Zo e Notes 1 OLS Optical light source for
280. defects and faults and determine the amount of signal loss at any point in an optical fiber The Analysis function automatically detects event positions such as splice points with loss exceeding the preset threshold or return loss and lists the data in an event table Remote controlled measurement is possible in the OTDR Standard mode OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GS 9 00h_ 80 SF Dist km Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB D 5 8132km 0 158 kk kkk 0 197 1 147 2 12 1526km 1 811 40 469 0 200 2 571 Manual Test 3 32 2436km 0 775 49 948 0 201 8 422 off 4 52 4877km ME FiberEnd 32 358 0 206 13 357 Real Time off Wavelength 1310 Range Pulse width Display From 0 25 50 75 100km A A 52 4877 km 2 Pt Loss 1550 nm SM IOR 1 468200 B 52 6490 km 6 646 DR 100 1km RES 5 003m A gt B 0 1613 km Refl 32 362 PW 4us HR AVG 11264 Analysis Prev Event More gt gt Trace Next Event Figure 1 3 OTDR Standard Screen with Event Table For further details on OTDR testing see Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode For further details on remote control operation see MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Remote Control Operation Manual 1 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 1 Quick Start Fault Locate Testing Fiber Visualizer provides an easy method to determine the end fault location of a fiber Press the
281. delete the selected files or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files To delete all files in a directory or folder 1 At the completion of a Construction mode test the Save screen appears see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 Note You can only access the Save screen in OTDR Construction mode when File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 23 on page 6 61 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the file to be deleted Press the Enter key to open the selected folder directory Press More f6 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off 6 Press More f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection 8 Press Yes f1 to delete all files in the selected directory or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files Uh RS Oe iS MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 71 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Copying Files 6 72 Use the Save screen see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 to copy data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can copy a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To copy a file 1 At the completion of a Construction mode test the Save screen appears see Figur
282. der Patent Claims infringed by the making using or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and or in combination with its Contributor Version or portions of such combination to make use sell offer for sale have made and or otherwise dispose of 1 Modifications made by that Contributor or portions thereof and 2 the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version or portions of such combination c the licenses granted in Sections 2 2 a and 2 2 b are effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code d Notwithstanding Section 2 2 b above no patent license is granted 1 for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version 2 separate from the Contributor Version 3 for infringements caused by i third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software except as part of the Contributor Version or other devices or 4 under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor 3 Distribution Obligations 3 1 Application of License The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License including without limitation Section 2 2 The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this
283. difference from UTC 9 0 Hours ener Date display Format Year Month Day Auto Launch None Printer BL 80RII SD1 31 Paper feed On Color Theme Grayscale Language English USB Video Output Off Auto Backlight Off None Auto Power Off None Instrument Power Save mode High Used to modify date About Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value About Screen Figure 8 2 General Setups Screen See Password Settings on page 3 15 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Loss Test Set Screen The initial Loss Test Set screen consists of four main areas as flagged in the following figure Loss Test Set 2012 Jul 1 10 00 _ 9 00h Light Source Wavelength 1310 nm Light Source On r Power Meter Power Light Source Wavelength 1550 nm Wavelength Average i Times 5 04 dBm p a a a Power Meter Loss Wavelength Threshold None 9 96 dB Modulation cw ae aa Set Zero Fintan Loss Table Figure 8 3 Loss Test Set Screen Elements Light Source area Power Meter area Port connection indicator Softkeys mM BO N e MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 3 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Light Source Area o Light Source Wavelength a On w Figure 8 4 Light Source Area 1 Light Source Wavelength indicator 2 Light Source On Off indicator Light Source Wavelength Indicator Displays the current test wavelength as
284. e Note Make sure that the Light Source is active for the current trace If the Light Source is not On a Loss value of dB along with a Power reading of Under is recorded for the current fiber test data number In addition if a Threshold value was set it will be recorded as Fail 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 as needed Note When working with a recalled Loss Table always rename the file before saving it This assures that the original data is still available See Saving Loss Test Set Files on page 8 34 for details Deleting Test Data from a Loss Table To delete Test Data from a Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the last row in the Loss Table Note The Delete f3 softkey is only available when the last row in a Loss Table is highlighted 2 Press Delete f3 The test data is deleted Note When working with a recalled Loss Table always rename the file before saving it This assures that the original data is still available See Saving Loss Test Set Files on page 8 34 for details Deleting All Test Data from a Loss Table When you start a new Loss Test Set test the Loss Table is populated with the data from the previous test either current or recalled Use the following procedure to delete all data from the Loss Table To delete all Test Data from a Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table d
285. e first file to delete and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to delete Press More gt gt f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete the selected files or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files Use the following procedure to delete all of the files in a directory or folder To delete all files in a directory or folder 8 36 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 8 13 on page 8 34 or the Load screen see Figure 8 14 on page 8 39 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the file to be deleted Press the Down Arrow key to open the selected folder directory Press More f6 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off 6 Press More f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection 8 Press Yes f1 to delete all files in the selected directory or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files
286. e graph The red legend on the softkey displays the current display mode Press f6 to advance to the Level Two softkeys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 51 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Level Two Softkeys Press f1 to set the averaging time The red legend displays the current averaging time Note The Average Time softkey is dimmed when the Wavelength softkey is set to Wavelength All mode Actual average time may be longer than the set average time depending on the resolution and distance range setting Press f2 to set the IOR Index of Refraction and BSC Backscatter Coefficient used for the current test The red legends display the current settings Note The IOR BSC softkey is dimmed when the Wavelength softkey is set to Wavelength All mode Press 3 to select the desired loss mode for the current test The red legend displays the currently selected loss mode Press 4 to access the Cursor softkeys See Cursor Softkeys on page 4 55 for details Press f5 to access the Shift mode softkeys See Shift Mode Softkeys on page 4 55 for details Press f6 to advance to the Level Three softkeys 4 52 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Level Three Softkeys Press f1 to perform analysis on the current primary trace Press f2 to toggle the status of the active cursor When the red legend reads Event turning the Rotary knob ca
287. e preserving your freedom as a user of such pro grams to change the free libraries that are incorporated in them We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header files but we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library The hope is that this will lead to faster development of free libraries The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library while the latter only works together with the library Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather than by this special one TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work
288. e you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The MT9083 Serie
289. e 6 25 on page 6 64 Note A a You can only access the Save screen in OTDR Construction mode when File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 23 on page 6 61 Press More f6 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected file Press Paste f2 A message box stating Copying 1 1 along with the name of the file appears briefly Use the following procedure to copy multiple files in a directory To copy multiple files L At the completion of a Construction mode test the Save screen appears see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 Note You can only access the Save screen in OTDR Construction mode when File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 23 on page 6 61 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to copy and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to copy Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to
290. e 9 9 on page 9 25 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired file Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete the selected file or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the file Press the ESC Key to return to the test application Use the following procedure to delete multiple files in a directory To delete multiple files Le Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 9 8 on page 9 20 or the Load screen see Figure 9 9 on page 9 25 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to delete and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to delete Press More gt gt f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete the selected files or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files Use the following procedure to delete all of the files in a directory or folder To delete all files in a directory or folder 9 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual
291. e Full Trace The ORL measurement is calculated from the Origin to the last data point and the Incident Power is attained from the origin e g 0 km or Bulkhead connector To set the ORL Calculation type 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight ORL Calculation 2 Press Enter The ORL Calculation dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired ORL Calculation setting A Cursor Origin or Full Trace 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the ORL Calculation field Trace Overview When set to On a small overview of the trace is displayed in the lower left portion of the Trace graph MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 7 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode To activate the Trace Overview 1 2s 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Trace Overview Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set Real Time Averages Use the Real Time Averages setting to set the amount of averages used in a real time scan To set the Real Time Averages i Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Real Time Averages Press Enter The Real Time Averages dialog appears Highlight the desired setting Low provides fast real time updates with a lower dynamic range High provides slower real time updates with a higher d
292. e Name if desired and follow the on screen instructions for editing the file name e Highlight the Medium field and then press Enter to toggle through the available selections e Press Header f2 to enter Header information See Headers on page 4 102 for details e Press New Folder f4 to create a new folder for the file save See New Folder on page 3 40 for details e Select a different folder for the file save by highlighting the desired folder name folder names are displayed in parentheses above the list of filenames and then pressing Enter 4 Press Save Trace f1 to complete the verified AutoSave MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 99 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Saving Files Manually You can perform a manual file save when the AutoSave status is set to Off See To select the AutoSave Enabled status on page 4 28 for details Note The MT9083 Series maintains the path of the last directory to which a manual file save has occurred The auto save directory may in fact be a different directory The MT9083 Series therefore maintains 2 file save pathnames manual save and auto save To manually save files 1 At the completion of a test press the Save key The Save screen Figure 4 39 appears with the File Name field highlighted 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 9 00h 80 5 File Name AUTO15500003 SOR Medium Internal Memory 4Files 1151 MB Free Save Trace Folder Fi
293. e Options area also controls The Connection Check function on the Preferences screen Changing the enabled disabled status on either screen is tracked on both Automode Select the Automode check box to have Construction mode automatically select the test parameters for the current fiber under test If you do not select Automode see Setting the OTDR Construction Test Parameters on pages 6 31 through 6 36 for details on how to manually set the test parameters MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 27 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 28 File Save Verify Select the File Save Verify check box to display the Save screen see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 when each test trace about to be saved This allow you to review the file save details such as the filename and save location Macro Bend Select the Macro Bend check box to activate the Macro Bend detection feature Macro Bends are indicated in the Event Table when a Loss value is followed by the E indicator Note Macro Bend detection requires an MT9083 Series unit with at least two single mode operating wavelengths one at 1310 nm and a second at either 1550 nm or 1625 nm To select clear the Options 1 Highlight the desired Option Connection Check Automode File Save Verify or Macro Bend 2 Toggle the Enter key to select or clear the check box for the highlighted option depending on the current status of the check box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until
294. e Reference screen appears displaying the current setting Press None f2 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the threshold is set to None MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Optical Power Meter Zero Offset To zero the optical power meter offset 1 With the unit set to Loss Test Set mode press Set Zero f5 The Zero Offset screen appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GD 99 00h 80 4 Loss Test Set Light Source Wavelength 1550 nm Start Disconnect fiber and close protective cover then FAS press the f1 key Wavelength Average Reference Threshold 4 00 dB ep SR Input Output Cancel Figure 8 11 Zero Offset Start Screen 2 Disconnect the fiber from the Power Meter Input port if connected and close the protective cover to shield the port from incident light 3 Press Start f1 The message Zeroing power meter appears briefly and the unit returns to the Loss Test Set screen with a Power reading of Under Note The following message Zero set failed please check protective cover is fully closed and try again may be displayed when executing zero offset without light shielding Press any key to clear the message from the screen make sure that the measurement port is closed and then execute zero offset again MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 17 Chapter 8 Loss
295. e ee ee 4 31 Cursor Distance INfOrmatiOn ccccceccsesseceeeeseeseeeeesseessesaeaueeuenss 4 31 Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance cccccccccsesecseeeeeeeseees 4 31 Fiber Test ParaMeterss cccccccscscssssssssssseseeeseceeseseceeeeeeeneneeeeaeaeanaaeea 4 31 Trace Graph OTDR Standard Mode cccccsssseeceeesteeeesessteeeeesenes 4 32 Trace Waveform ccccccccccscccccsccccceccecsseeeeeuseuseseeeeeeceesseusaeeueueeesseseeeeees 4 33 GUIS ONS 2225552 c tee sees tases serene Soha sete eae le andes acest tee es 4 33 Horizontal Vertical Of fset cccccccssccscssesseseseecsseeeeeeeueeeseeseesseeeaees 4 33 Salen ana Ged a aes sie deveteadeoavdbadeediedaduuaientevaddebedeseat 4 33 dB Level INGiCAtON ceseseseeeseeeeeeecececeeensescecueucaeaeueueneseseneseneeeeess 4 33 Trace Overview WiINKOW ccccccccccececcececeeeeeeseeseesesseesesesececeeeeeeneeeees 4 34 CONNECTION CHECK SCrECN cccccccccceceeececececeeeeeeceueueeeeesseseseseseseceeeeeeeeeeees 4 34 GOOD cCONNECHON E Aa a a a r a a 4 34 BAD CONNECTION cccceseeseceececeeeseseeeceseaeseeeeeceauanseeeeeeseaueseeeeeseauses 4 35 OTDR Standard Analysis Screen ccccccccceseeeceeeeesesneeeeesesseeeess 4 38 SIAE AE AT eR coerce to rtaray E ot ceceubund T anceabaeas 4 39 Distance to Evet iisi a sane diver e a eet 4 40 Types of Events Reported c cccecceeeeceeeeeeeececeeeeaeecaeesaeeseneseeeeeeneee 4 40 LOSS AB a e a a Rt
296. e pasted to their new location To copy all files in a directory or folder p At the completion of a Fault Locate test press the Save key The Save screen appears see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the files to be copied Press the Enter key and highlight the first file in the selected directory folder if not already highlighted Press More f6 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files Press Paste f2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 61 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the files from the selected directory folder are pasted to their new location Saving Files with AutoSave AutoSave automatically saves trace data at the completion of data collection Note The MT9083 Series maintains the path of the last directory to which a manual file save has occurred The auto save directory may in fact be a different directory The MT9083 Series therefore maintains 2 file save pathnames manual save and auto save Depending on the settings made on the AutoSav
297. e same as the Cursor B distance Distance to a Break Measurement The following procedure demonstrates a method of locating a break relative to a known point on the fiber 1 Select Display From Origin see Display From on page 4 71 2 Place Cursor B at the break in the fiber as shown in the following figure 7 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual ew po SAO 11 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements FIBER UNDER TEST LAUNCH CORD KNOWN SPLICE OTDR dp A B dB Distance Select Display From B Use the Right and Up Arrow keys to expand the screen horizontally and vertically around Cursor B for more accurate cursor placement Use the Rotary knob to place Cursor B on linear backscatter just prior to the left side of the break in the fiber see the following figure Non Reflective Reflective Cursor Select Display From Origin Place Cursor A at a known point on the fiber see figure in step 2 Select Display From A Use the Right and Up Arrow keys to expand the screen horizontally and vertically around Cursor A for more accurate cursor placement Use the Rotary knob to place Cursor A on linear backscatter just prior to the left side of the beginning of the known point see figure in step 5 Read the distance from the known point to the break as the A B distance in the Cursor Distance information area see item 3 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Op
298. e screen in Setups AutoSave behaves in one of the following way e On AutoSave is performed automatically without displaying the Save screen e Verify AutoSave displays the Save screen at the end of each data collection so you can verify the save details e Off AutoSave is not performed You need to perform a manual save to save the current test data if desired Automatic File Save To set up AutoSave for a full automatic save 1 Enter the OTDR Fault Locate setups see page 5 2 for details 2 Press AutoSave f5 The AutoSave setups screen appears see Figure 5 23 on page 5 63 5 62 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 2013 Oct 30 05 55 AutoSave Directory INTMEM Base Filename AUTO WLEN NUM Start Number 1310 1 AutoSave The number that auto increment will begin with oe 4 Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 5 23 AutoSave Setups Screen 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Enabled in the AutoSave field and then press the Enter key The Enabled dialog appears 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight On 5 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the AutoSave Enabled status is set to On All data collections will be automatically saved Note Setting the AutoSave Enabled status to On automatically sets and locks
299. e the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the group name filed or selections field Then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to select an item to change name Press Rename 3 the Enter key or Rotary knob Edit the name on the character input screen and press OK f6 5 To adda new group or item use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the group name filed or selections field Press Add f1 to display the character input screen Input a name to add and press OK f6 6 To copy a group or item use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the group name filed or selections field Then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to select an item to copy and press Duplicate f4 The selected item is added at the bottom of the list 7 To delete a group or item use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the group name filed or selections field Then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to select an item to delete and press Delete f2 The item is deleted from the list 8 To change a group type use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the group name filed Then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to select an item to change the group type and press Change Group Type f5 OTDR VIP and blank appears in turns every time f5 is pressed To display only in OTDR or VIP select the type Set to blank to use in common 9 To use the edited list for other Access Master use the Left and Right Arrow
300. e the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is in tended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copy righted interfaces
301. e the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file 3 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection 4 Press Yes f1 to delete the selected file or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the file 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for any additional file deletions 6 Press the ESC Key to return to the test application Use the following procedure to delete multiple files in a directory To delete multiple files 1 At the completion of a Construction mode test the Save screen appears see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 Note You can only access the Save screen in OTDR Construction mode when File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 23 on page 6 61 Press More f6 3 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On 6 70 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to delete and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom 5 Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to delete 6 Press More f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection 8 Press Yes f1 to
302. e verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the library GPL It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 25 Appendix C Software License C 26 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free soft ware to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Library General Public License applies to some specially designated Free Software Foundation software and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it You can use it for your libraries too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the soft ware or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it F
303. e want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free pro gram by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual c9 Appendix C Software License c 10 Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its cr
304. eaeeseeeeeeeaeeeteaeees 2 17 Changing the Optical Adapter 0 ceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 2 17 Connecting Fiber to a Measurement Port cceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 18 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables s es 2 18 Visual Fault Locator COnnection eccceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee 2 21 Connecting Peripheral Devices ecceeeeceeceteeeeeeeee tees eeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeee 2 22 USB Up to PC Port ccccccccessesceeeeesseeeeeeeesseeaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeseaaeeeeenenaaes 2 22 USB DOWN POTG iiaa a a a a an Ea a a 2 23 Basic Notes on Use a aa a e a a E ee etiam 2 24 Chapter 3 General Operation System SetupsS cccsseeseeeeees 3 1 General Operati eaea E aa a A weeds 3 1 Power On Power Off cccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeceneeeaeeseeeeseeeseesecaeseeaeeeaeeenaeed 3 2 Adjusting the Backlight cecceeecseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeseeaaeeencaeeeeeaaeeee 3 2 Top Menu Screen 0cii0 ccccciecccccccseecicceectetcccesnniesceseeesscccetueestcceversetcceeeeveaes 3 3 Battery Status Atai heitir onioni at a aieeaa a aiie 3 4 Remaining Battery Charge Indication eesesseeeeereesrrssrrerrrn 3 5 Syst m S t ps siiip ean tases lacie eee etvaded catia Sesacaced coeeecanadtensielengeneees 3 6 General Screen SettingS cceecceccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeesaeeseeaeeeenaeeeeeaeeesaes 3 7 Date setting aen ail Aenean eee a andrenstehe rites lease 3 8 Local TIME S ttiNG siiri ieaie
305. eal to protect the unit 4 Use a heavy corrugated cardboard box several times larger than the MT9083 Series to provides ample space for the unit and for protective packing materials such as bubble wrap or packing peanuts to provide cushioning Make sure that the MT9083 Series is nested within the packing material 5 Seal the box with adhesive tape along the seams 13 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Outline MT9083 supports remote control via PC The screen simulates the operation panel and buttons of the unit allowing you to operate with a mouse It is also possible to transfer and save the files stored in the MT9083 to your PC USB Ethernet converter a Figure 14 1 Remote GUI Overview When this function is used the main unit works as a web server Therefore the PC side is not required to have dedicated software It is also possible to control the main unit via network The following is required to use the Remote GUI function MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 14 1 Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Table 14 1 Required Equipment OS Windows XP Professional SP3 or later CPU Intel Pentium 4 3 0 GHz or more Memory 1 GB or more Free hard disk space 5 GB or more Ethernet 10 100BASE T Display 1280 x 1024 or more Software Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver 8 0 or later Adobe Flash Player 10 1 or later USB E
306. eans the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it including all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known available Covered Code of the Contributor s choice The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form provided the appropriate decompression or de archiving software is widely available for no charge 1 12 You or Your means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under and complying with all of the terms of this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6 1 For legal entities You includes any entity which controls is controlled by or is under common control with You For purposes of this definition control means a the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or b ownership of more than fifty percent 50 of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity 2 Source Code License 2 1 The Initial Developer Grant The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license subject to third party intellectual property claims a under intellectual property rights other than patent or trademark Licensable by Initial Developer to use rep
307. ears see Figure 4 41 If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 5 to enter the name using the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to return to the Header screen Repeat steps 4 until all desired text entry fields on the Header screen are edited Press the f6 key to close the Header and return to the Save screen 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Unit Header Customer File Header Data Flag Cable ID Fiber ID Cable Code Start Location Terminal Locatigq Operator Comment Small Letter Capital Letter MAX 30 Symbols Backspace Figure 4 41 Text Entry dialog box MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 103 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 104 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the current text entry field which is located directly above the character matrix The current title of the text entry field matches the currently selected Header screen field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the text entry field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the text entry field Use the f1 f4 softkeys for the followin
308. easured 5 Set the Loss Mode to Splice Loss See Setting the Loss Mode on page 4 74 for details 6 Ifthe LSA intervals are set properly they should appear similar to those in the following figure If so go to Step 8 OTDR Standard AUTO15500010 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Average Time 13 0 15 Sec I0R BSC 1 468200 16 25 4 81 50 SSESESE x Loss Mode Splice Loss 19 5 Xr o d Cursors 22 75 7 T T Shift 11 12 13 km A 12 1526 km Splice Loss WL 1550nmSM IOR 1 468200 B 74 9084 km 1 798 DR 100 1 km RES 5 003m More gt gt A gt B 62 7558 km Refi 40 537 PW 4us HR AVG 5120 Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event 7 Adjust the LSA intervals so that they are on linear backscatter See Adjusting the LSA Intervals for Splice Loss Mode on page 7 9 for details 8 The Splice Loss reading appears in the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area as shown in the figure above MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Adjusting the LSA Intervals for Splice Loss Mode On some events you may need to adjust the LSA intervals fuzzy cursors to obtain a better estimate of an event splice loss especially if either of the intervals fall within the actual loss interval or knee see the following figure Note This function is not available for the OTDR Construction application at the current software release OTDR S
309. ectance Calculations Off Auto and Manual e Off Reflectance will not be calculated Auto The reflectance of any event is reported based on the position of cursor A The Auto setting is most useful for reflective events that are not close together or close in to the OTDR e Manual MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode When set to Manual the reported reflectance is based on the positions of both cursors A and B The Manual setting is most useful for reflective events that are close together or close in to the OTDR To set the Reflectance Calculation type 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance Calculation 2 Press Enter The Reflectance Calculation dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired Reflectance Calculation setting Off Auto or Manual 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Reflectance Calculation field ORL Calculation Set the starting point for ORL Optical Return Loss measurements see ORL Optical Return Loss on page 7 15 for details Select from the following e ACursor The ORL measurement is calculated from the A cursor to the B cursor but the Incident Power is attained from the A cursor position e Origin The ORL measurement is calculated from the A cursor to the B cursor but the Incident Power is attained from the origin e g 0 km or Bulkhead connector
310. ection Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired date is displayed in the dialog box 5 Press the Enter key to save the new Date setting Local Time setting To set the Local Time 1 Highlight Local Time and then press the Enter key 2 The Local Time dialog appears Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the highlight to the desired section 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to increment or decrement the highlighted section 4 Press the Enter key to save the new Local Time setting Time Difference from UTC To set the Time difference from UTC l 3 8 Highlight Time difference from UTC and then press the Enter key MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups The Time difference from UTC dialog and the Change softkey f1 appear Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the setting in the hours field Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad The number of hours set can range from 12 0 to 12 0 in half hour 5 increments Toggle Change f1 to change the value of the hours setting from adding the hours set to subtracting the hours set Press the Enter key to save the time difference setting Date Display Format To select the Date display Format 1 2 3 Highlight Date display Format and then press the Enter key The Date display Format dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary kn
311. ectly from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in a MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 19 Appendix C Software License C 20 the Source Code and b in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code 3 4 Intellectual Property Matters a Third Party Claims If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party s intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2 1 or 2 2 Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled LEGAL which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as described in Section 3 2 Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has been obtained b Contributor APIs If Contributor s Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API Contributor must also include this information
312. ectly with the Numeric keypad 5 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting ORL This parameter highlights ORL value in the ORL of Test results field that exceed the set ORL value The Fiber End event is not included when End event for ORL calculation is OMIT MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 45 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode The range of settings for this parameter is 0 0 dB to 60 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the ORL threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight ORL 2 Press Enter key The ORL dialog appears The dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Report Settings In Fiber Visualizer mode the measurement result is output to PDF by report format Header The following items can be output as a header on report cover e Customer e Location e Operator e Notes To edit Headers 1 Press Report F4 on Fiber Visualizer screen or Trace screen to display the Report Settings screen 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired field and then press the Enter key The Text Entry dialog boxdialog box appears 3 Correct the selected field 4 When a
313. ed and the standard power meter can not be used Softkeys Power Meter Wavelength f1 Toggle the Power Meter Wavelength softkey to scroll through the available test wavelengths Set Zero f5 Press the Set Zero softkey to adjust the optical power meter offset Loss Table f6 Press the Loss Table softkey to advance to the Loss Table screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Loss Table Screen Power Meter Mode The Loss Table screen consists of three main areas as flagged in the following figure Press Loss Table f6 on the Power Meter screen see Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 to display the Loss Table screen Power Meter 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Gt 99 00h 80 5 Power Meter Loss Wavelength 1550 nm 3 2 dB ad Reference 35 0 dBm _ ea a No WL Loss Power Threshold Comment Overwrite 001 1550nm 7 7dB 32 3dBm Pass 002 1550nm 7 7dB 32 3dBm Pass 003 1550nm 5 8dB 34 2dBm Pass Delete 004 1550nm 5 0dB 35 0dBm Pass 005 1550nm 1 5dB 38 5dBm Pass 006 1550nm 1dB 34 9dBm Pass 007 1550nm 5 5dB 45 5dBm Fail Delete All 008 1550nm 7 8dB 32 2dBm Pass 009 1550nm 7 6dB 32 4dBm Pass 010 1550nm 3 3dB 31 7dBm Pass Comment Back Figure 9 3 Power Meter mode Loss Table screen 1 Power Meter settings area 2 Loss table 3 Softkeys Power Meter Settings Area The Power Meter Settings area displays the W
314. ed legend on the softkey displays the current wavelength Modulation f3 Toggle the Change Modulation softkey to scroll through the modulation modes CW continuous wave 270 Hz 1 kHz and 2 kHz The red legend on the softkey displays the current modulation mode Turning the Light Source On Off To turn the Light Source On Off 1 Set the MT9083 Series to Light Source mode See Accessing Optical Light Source Mode on page 9 27 for details 2 Press Light Source Off f1 to turn on the light source The red legend on the softkey changes to On In addition the Light Source On Off indicator see item 1 in Figure 9 12 on page 9 28 changes to read On and its background changes from black to red 3 Press Light Source On f1 to turn off the light source The red legend on the softkey changes to Off The Light Source On Off indicator changes to read Off and its background changes to black Note Indication of warm up operation and out of operating temperature ranges status MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 29 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS e Certain units may require a warm up If Light Source Off f1 is pressed during a warm up the following message is displayed Laser Diode warm up Please re select after a short while Close the Light Source screen by pressing any key wait a short while and then re start the light source e If Lig
315. ee Headers on page 5 67 for details e Press New Folder f4 to create a new folder for the file save See New Folder on page 3 40 for details e Select a different folder for the file save by highlighting the desired folder name folder names are displayed in parentheses above the list of filenames and then pressing Enter 4 Press Save Trace f1 to complete the verified AutoSave 5 64 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Saving Files Manually You can perform a manual file save when the AutoSave status is set to Off See To select the AutoSave Enabled status on page 5 19 for details Note The MT9083 Series maintains the path of the last directory to which a manual file save has occurred The auto save directory may in fact be a different directory The MT9083 Series therefore maintains 2 file save pathnames manual save and auto save To manually save files 1 At the completion of a test press the Save key The Save screen see Figure 5 24 appears with the File Name field highlighted 2012 Jul 4 10 00 gt 9 00h_ 80 Fi File Name Medium internal Memory 10 Files 1150 MB Free a e Trace Folder File Name Date Time Al Header AUTO16250001 S0R 12 11 22 11 44 AUTO16250000 SOR 12 11 22 11 37 AUTO13100000 SOR 12 11 22 11 37 ES AUTO15500001 SOR 12 11 22 11 33 AUTO15500000 SOR 12 11 22 11 28 AUTO15500004 SOR 12 11 22 11 18 AUTO15500003 SOR
316. eeaaeeneeeee 9 4 STO n CVA EE E can eadlvve Guede Gein ad eevee 9 4 Loss Table Screen Power Meter Mode cceceeeceeeeceeeeeneeeeees 9 5 Power Meter Settings Area cecceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeneeaaaes 9 5 LOSS Te Dl set ccedczetedeecexeccecvedeeuthechessnecteedeenasl T A E ds 9 5 Loss Table Softk y wi ncccsciveatveedeveectesceuditesagetsaesdeeedetestcgaa esgegeesescceedayents 9 6 Optical Power Meter Zero Offset c cccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeed 9 7 Setting Power Meter Measurement Paramete rs 0 eee 9 9 Setting the Power Meter Reference ccccccsceceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeenaees 9 9 Setting the Threshold value ccceccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaaeeeeneeeetaaeeneaeees 9 11 Optical Power Measurements 0 00 cece cee cesee cee eeneeeeeeeeaneeeneeseeeeees 9 12 Optical Power Level Measurement c ccceeeceeesceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeaaeeneaes 9 12 Optical Power Loss Measurements cccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaeeseeneeeeaas 9 13 Reference ProceQure esccsececeseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaaeseeeesaeeseeeeeeeeseaeens 9 13 TOSt PrOCOAUIC isccveesccpertet cacti el on tee Ra detest eal ane erate 9 14 Editing the Loss Table cecccccceceeeeeceeeeceeteeeeee ease seeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeneees 9 15 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual XV Adding Test Data to an Existing Loss Table s es 9 15 Overwriting Test Data
317. eeeeaeteseeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeee 8 19 Reference ProceQure ccscicsccediecseceeud even cebeteverseesdidaataceeaedbieeeatensaess 8 19 TeSt PrOCOAUIC wiisisccteciviescladdvis ected ctusl celadivisacadavissedecevaseselaciviesclactvns 8 20 Single MT9083 Series with an External Light Source ceeeeeeee 8 22 Reference Procedure vis cc iccss cecegeevsdesageecetelecegertelacigecssesdentiebeteensceys 8 22 Test Procedure vies ius cecetirsssasstcesstesedsbatessavdesdetth eldhededuics Mesinswnteaelvi nes 8 24 Dual MT9083 Series Method ecceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaesteneeeeeaeenenees 8 25 Reference Procedure cccescccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeceaeeeaaecaaeeseeeeeaeeseneseeaeenaees 8 25 Modifying the Stored Reference c cccccceseeeeeceeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeneees 8 27 Test Procedure vccscscccesevessssshevecscssdueea hescsswecssaessevvesesaysivesscseiteresteanteecs 8 27 Editing the Loss Table 0 ccccccecc ee eece cece ee eeeeeeecaeeeeaaaeseeeeeetaaaeeeeeeee 8 30 XIV MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Adding Test Data to an Existing Loss Table s an 8 30 Overwriting Test Data in an Existing Loss Table 8 30 Deleting Test Data from a Loss Table ccccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeteeneees 8 31 Deleting All Test Data from a Loss Table c cesceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 31 Adding Comments to a Loss Table cccceecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeenee 8 32 Working with Loss Test Set Files 0
318. een appears see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 Review the file name and edit if desired then press Save Trace f1 The Save screen closes and Construction mode advances to the next test For how to edit a file name refer to Renaming a File on page 3 32 If you did not select File Save Verify continue at step 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 63 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Save 2012 Jul 1 10 00 9 00h_ 80 File Name Medium Internal Memory 11 Files 1150 MB Free Save Trace Folder ye File Name Date Time A Header NearFar13100ther 001 SOR 12 11 22 12 04 AUTO15500002 S0R 12 11 22 11 48 AUTO16250001 S0R 12 11 22 11 47 an AUTO16250000 S0R 12 11 22 11 37 AUTO13100000 S0R 12 14 22 11 37 AUTO15500001 SOR 12 14 22 11 33 AUTO15500000 SOR 12 11 22 11 28 Noe Folder AUTO15500004 S0R 12 11 22 11 18 AUTO15500003 S0R 12 11 22 11 03 AUTO13100002 SOR 12 14 22 10 55 Delete AUTO13100001 SOR 12 11 22 10 51 More gt gt Selected File Size Figure 6 25 Save screen 13 Continue until the connected fiber is tested at all the wavelengths selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen 14 Connect the next fiber to be tested Selecting and Positioning Cursors 6 64 The active cursor is displayed as a red vertical line in the Trace graph Setting the Active Cursor To toggle the active cursor e Press the Rotary knob or the Enter key to select the desired cursor Precise Positioning of the
319. eld to Off so a filename is not automatically generated when a save is performed MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 15 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 16 To turn the Auto Filename feature On or Off 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Enabled and then press the Enter key The Enable dialog appears Highlight the desired selection On or Off 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to the desired setting Note The status of the Auto Filename Enabled field is automatically set to On when the AutoSave Enabled field is set to On See Enabled AutoSave on page 5 19 for details AutoSave Directory The AutoSave Directory field allows you to select the directory into which AutoSave will save files To select the AutoSave directory 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight AutoSave Directory and then press the Enter key The Select Directory screen appears 2 Select the desired storage medium by highlighting the Medium field if not already highlighted and then press the Enter key to toggle the selection to either Internal Memory which is the default setting or USB Memory Note You must have a USB Memory stick connected to the MT9083 Series in order to access the USB Memory selection in the Medium field 3 To save to a specific folder in the selected Medium highlight the name of the folder and the
320. eld when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the text entry field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 6 Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name 7 With the desired character is highlighted in the character matrix press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the text entry field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in the text entry field Use Backspace f5 or the BS key to delete characters entered in the text entry field 8 When all of the desired characters are entered in the text entry field press OK f6 to return to the Header screen 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 until all desired text entry fields on the Header screen are edited 10 Press Exit f6 to close the Header and return to the Save screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 69 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Sorting Files 5 70 The Sort function allows you to change the order in which files are listed in mass storage files saved to the MT9083 Series inter
321. elr ccccceesseeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeteneees 13 3 Cleaning the Optical Fiber Cable Ferrule End Surface 05 13 3 General Notes on Cleaning ececceesceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeteeeeeeeeaeenenees 13 4 Notes On Storage iciccceccecieceis cccceveteceventtecesvnecseheceuteenceceteetetedersuscanteenneis 13 4 Recommended Storage Conditions ecceeesceeeeteeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeees 13 5 Tra sportihg oriei eioan devas tiaeuvevckensdeedas Casecvned dienaa ia redai 13 6 Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function 2 000seeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 1 Outline fiche r as He a naa oe ee 14 1 Preparations eect ie nai ae ee ed ed 14 3 Gable cOnneCtlONy cnsa iiidl seen aeneaiaier iid ati aaia anaana 14 3 Network Setup On Main Unit 2 0 ceeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeees 14 4 To set the IP Address IP Netmask and Default Gateway 14 5 Network Setupron PC aasin iaae eaa aee aaa pE a teense 14 7 CORNEC CUON eiaa E AEAN 14 10 Operation icici ene ene ae eet 14 12 Panel Operation ccccccccssscccecsssseececsseseeeeeeeseseeeeeeseseeeeeseesneeeeeseaes 14 12 File Operation svarc da pian fot th a aaiae aa 14 13 File transfer from the main unit tO PC eeeeeeeeeseeeeteeseeeeeeeees 14 14 File transfer from PC to the main Unit cccceceeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeaes 14 14 Appendix A Specifications cscccsesesessceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeaes A 1 Appendix B Sample Traces 2
322. en MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Use the following procedure to set Auto Patch cord Removal to None when it is currently set in event number To set the Auto Patch cord Removal to None 1 Highlight Auto patch cord and then press Enter The Auto Patch cord Removal dialog appears displaying the current event number setting 2 Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 3 Press Enter The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Note The Auto Patch cord Removal feature works only with patch cords that are at least 40 m 120 ft and 40 data points longer than the pulse width MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 11 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Grid Display Select the format for the grid lines on the trace screen To set the Grid Display 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Grid Display Press Enter The Grid Display dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired setting Dotted A dotted line grid is used for trace display Solid A solid line grid is used for trace display 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Grid Display field Force Total Loss Select the display settings for Total Loss Cum Loss dB To set the Force Total Loss 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Force Total Loss 2 Press Enter The Force Total Loss dial
323. en horizontally and vertically for more accurate cursor placement if necessary see Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 Check that the LSA intervals are located on areas of linear backscatter and do not touch a preceding feature If necessary adjust the LSA intervals See Adjusting the Left and Right LSA Intervals on page 7 12 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 13 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements 7 The dB km LSA loss reading appears the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area 7 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements ORL Optical Return Loss The MT9083 provides the ability to calculate Optical Return Loss ORL the ratio of reflected energy to input energy for a fiber optic link ORL can be calculated for a section of the fiber optic link or for the entire link Note The ORL function is not available for the OTDR Construction application at the current software release To perform an ORL measurement 1 Select the desired ORL Calculation on the Preferences screen in setups See ORL Calculation on page 4 7 for details 2 Press Range Pulse Width f4 the Distance Range Pulse width and Resolution dialog appears Set the following e Set the Distance Range selecting the shortest possible range following the fiber length plus 25 rule e Set the Pulse width 1000ns is a good typical setting This sett
324. ength Range Pulse width Display From 0 25 Origin 52 4877 km 2 Pt Loss 1550 nm SM IOR 1 46820C 52 4877 km 0 000 100 1 km RES 5 003m 0 0000 km Refl 32 418 4us HR AVG 24576 Analysis Prev Event Next Event More gt gt Figure 4 14 OTDR Standard Analysis Screen Analysis can be executed in one of two ways To run Auto Analysis e Set Auto Analysis to On in the OTDR Standard setups Preferences screen to automatically display the Analysis screen at the completion of each test This is the default setting for the MT9083 Note Auto Analysis is not available in Real Time test mode To run a manual analysis e Press Analysis Off f5 when operating the unit in OTDR Standard mode the OTDR Analysis screen appears and the Event Table is generated 4 38 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Note If the legend on the f5 softkey does not read Analysis Off press More gt gt f6 twice to display the level three softkeys The highlighted row in the Event Table corresponds to the event on the trace with the solid event marker Event Table In fiber analysis an event is considered to be a distinct deviation from normal fiber attenuation that may be introduced by a lossy connection microbend connector or splice a reflective connection connector or fiber break or the end of the fiber Only events that meet one or more of
325. ense 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is in tended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent applicatio
326. ent table are returned to their original status Editing an Event The most common application for editing an event is to move the event so it reflects a more accurate manual measurement MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 45 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Moving an Event To move an event 1 Make sure that the current trace displays an Event table 2 Set Cursor Aas the active red cursor and position it at the desired event see Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 Note Toggle More gt gt f6 until the legend on the f2 softkey reads Cursor and then toggle f2 so that the red legend on the softkey reads Event Turning the Rotary knob will cause the active cursor to snap to the events on the trace Press More gt gt f6 once again to return to the editing softkeys 3 Press Edit Event f2 the Edit Event dialog appears OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 dB km Cum Loss dB 0 025 0 147 40 495 0 201 1 274 49 960 0 201 7 114 4 0 20 2 028 Dist km 5 8439km 12 1526km 32 2436km 52 4877km Type Ee Uy Edit Event Loss dB 0 152 1 812 0 780 ber End S Reflect dB ee Cancel Start km a 52 4877 End km 53 3051 Event Type End Event Loss dB 29 868 Reflect dB 32 415 Questionable End HB Saturated Change 100km 1 468200 5 003 m 24576 A 52 4877 km B 52 4877 km A
327. er the percent of the remaining battery power with the operating time remaining for the current battery The following items are displayed in the Battery Status area Battery indicator i Provides a quick graphic illustration of the amount of charge remaining in the battery 3 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Remaining battery power 4 Presents the amount of charge remaining in the battery as a percentage of the fully charged battery Remaining battery power h BAIAN Presents the amount of charge remaining in the battery relative to the amount remaining operation time Remaining Battery Charge Indication The following section details what occurs when the battery charges falls below certain levels 10 2 and 1 as well as when a battery pack temperature warning occurs e Remaining battery power is less than 10 The battery indicator flashes e Remaining battery power is less than 2 The following message appears Battery running low Please connect AC adapter and the buzzer sounds Pressing any key causes the message to disappear stopping the buzzer Note The following operations will be interrupted in this event Copying and deleting of files e Remaining battery power is less than 1 The following message appears Battery is empty and the power goes off automatically At this time any measurement currently in progress is can
328. er key to display the File Name dialog box Above the buttons the names of the button groups are displayed Use the Left Right Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to invert the button and press the Enter key The word on the button will be displayed in the File Name field white letters in the above figure The buttons are displayed up to 4 columns When there are 5 or more columns Next Page f3 is displayed Press Next Page f3 to flip the pages The words on the button will be displayed in the File Name field white letters in the above figure Up to 30 characters can be input Press Edit List f5 to edit shortcut characters that are displayed Note The number of characters input by pressing the button of the MACRO column and that of the actual file name are different The actual number MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 33 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups of characters is displayed above the File Name field The file name without extension should be up to 30 characters 6 Press All Clear f4 to clear all the characters in the File Name field 7 Use the BS key Backspace key to clear the entry in the File Name field located above the character matrix Each press of or the BS key moves the text cursor vertical line one character space to the left while deleting the character in that space Continue backspacing until you have deleted all or as much of the file name as desired 8 You
329. er paper is also fed according to this setting when printing is cancelled If an error out of paper excluded occurs during printing the printer paper is fed according to this setting when printing out next time However the printer paper is not fed for the next printout if the MT9083 Series was turned off after a print error occurrence Color Theme Use the Color Theme setting to select one of the four preset screen color themes To change the Color Theme 1 Highlight Color Theme and then press the Enter key 2 The Color Theme dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired color theme 3 Press the Enter key The display changes to the selected color theme Language This setting switches the language of the on screen characters To set the on screen Language 1 Highlight Language and then press the Enter key MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 2 The Language dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired language 3 Press the Enter key The MT9083 Series switches to the selected language Note Some symbols in Chinese Simplified differ from those in other languages For example is displayed as USB Video Output Turning USB Video Output ON allows the ACCESS Master screens to be displayed on a PC To set the USB Video Output 1 Highlight
330. er test data required Note When working with a recalled Loss Table always rename the file before saving it This assures that the original data is still available See Saving Loss Table Data on page 9 20 for details Overwriting Test Data in an Existing Loss Table To overwrite Test Data in an existing Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired row in the Loss Table MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 15 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 2 Press Overwrite f2 The new test data information appears in the highlighted row Note Make sure that the external light source is active for the current trace If the external light source is not active ON a Loss value of dB along with a Power reading of Under is recorded for the current fiber test data number In addition if a Threshold value was set it will be recorded as Fail 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 as needed Note When working with a recalled Loss Table always rename the file before saving it This assures that the original data is still available See Saving Loss Table Data on page 9 20 for details Deleting Test Data from a Loss Table To delete Test Data from a Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob
331. eration e Users Manual Options for the MT9083 Series include e Optical Power Meter e Visual Fault Locator e Printer Powering Up the Unit The MT9083 Series can be powered externally by using the AC charger adapter see AC Charger Adapter on page 2 11 for details or internally by using the rechargeable lithium ion battery pack see Installing a Battery Pack on page 2 8 for details Note The AC charger adapter used must be the one supplied by Anritsu with the MT9083 Series Use of another charger adapter may result in damage to the MT9083 Series and or the battery pack Start Up Sequence 1 Press the Power key 1 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 1 Quick Start 2 The unit performs a self test during which the Anritsu splash screen appears briefly followed by the MT9083 Series splash screen 3 When the self test is complete the unit proceeds to the Top Menu screen see Figure 1 2 4 Select the desired test application if not already highlighted and press the Enter key Figure 1 2 Top Menu screen Note The selections available on the Top Menu will vary with the configuration of the given MT9083 Series MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 1 3 Chapter 1 Quick Start Optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTDR Testing The OTDR function provides the capability for measuring connection loss fiber loss and distance of an optical fiber You can locate
332. eration Manual 7 3 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Loss Measurements Loss Modes When a primary trace is displayed there are several different types of measurements available through the Loss Mode f3 softkey e 2 Pt Loss e dB km Loss e Splice Loss e 2 Pt LSA e dB km LSA e ORL Optical Return Loss e 2 Pt amp dB km Loss See Setting the Loss Mode on page 4 74 for details on how to set a loss mode Event Examples Figure 7 1 Event Examples shows examples of events on a fiber that are referred to in the various Loss Mode procedures that follow this section Use the figure as an aid to understanding some to the terminology used to describe measurement procedures ATTENUATION oe DISTANCE ram Figure 7 1 Event Examples 7 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual NWDW KR WON 2 Point Loss Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements OTDR input 8 Reflective splice connector Fusion splice 9 Fresnel reflection Mechanical splice connector 10 Rayleigh backscatter Fusion splice 11 Non reflective gainer End of cable 12 Reflective end Diffusion tail 13 Noise floor Non reflective loser The 2 Point Loss Measurement uses a data point at Cursor A and a data point at Cursor B to calculate the change in dB between the two points Normally the Cursor A Y Axis data is greater than the Cursor B Y Axis data and a positive loss measurement is displayed Othe
333. ers are entered press the Enter key to use the new base file name or press the ESC key to close the Text Entry dialog boxdialog box without changing the base file name OTDR Construction Setup 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Space V 1625 _ File Save Verify l Marrnhend Backspace Template that will be used to generate the filename characters specify the auto increment field characters specify the wavelength ID OK Store Files At Base Filename small Letter Base Filename MAX 28 Capital Letter Symbols eee ie letel it Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 8 Base Filename screen Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the Base Filename field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the Base Filename field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the Base Filename field Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the
334. ervaiuves 4 15 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Auto Detect ParaMetelss ccccccccccccccssseeeeccseeeueeeeuseeeeeeeeeueeeaueeeeeeeaess 4 15 Splic tOss inii a ih eet sere ets 4 16 Reflectance oo cee iececccccccsseseeeeecuseececececseeueeeaeeuseuseeuseesensensaeeaueuseuaeeaeeees 4 16 Fiber Enina aa a a a i a a a 4 16 MELSOM no EAE TTA 4 17 Splitter LOSS istisini i a wee are EUa cee 4 17 Pass Fail Thresholds Parameters s s sssseesseeeeeeseeeceeeeeneneeeeeeeeaea 4 19 Non Reflective Event Loss fusion essssscessesrecrrrrrrrrressrenn 4 19 Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical sesser 4 20 Reflectan Ce oioi ap a a Aaa p od 4 20 Fiber Loss AB KM ccccccccccecscececeececeeeeeessesecsseeeecseseeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeananaea 4 21 TOCA E OSS a a 4 22 To nT Lossy ET R EE E TT 4 23 AUTOSAVE oie ec e e eet ee ieee ae A Ae a 4 24 AUto FilenaMme ParaMeters ccccccsssssescssssssseeesececececeeeeseeeueeeeesaueneneeees 4 24 Enabled AUtO FIlIQGNAME cccccccccccccecceseseseeseeeseeesessseseseseceeeeeeeeeenes 4 24 AutoSave Directory rrarena te AA n R AI EANA T Rinie R 4 25 B seFil na Me d araar ar a A a s anapa i 4 26 SALAMO Oaa 1E E E A E A T 4 27 Enabled A toSave aan e a a a 4 28 Noo EN E AAT 4 29 Trace Screen OTDR Standard 0 cccccccccsccececeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 4 30 Trace Graphisscas ceca spies A apria nanata Sees pee eves 4 30 Laser On ICON ii ccd ec fee divested ee ee e
335. es ccscccccessseeeeees 4 90 Displaying Trace Files cceecsseeeseceeesseeeeeeeeeceaeeseeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeseaaeeeeaaeeenaas 4 90 Sorting File c teee es ect eesetnecti teenth einen ehh eerie ann ae 4 91 New Fold rcs 2 ae SAS Ase Sa A oA 4 92 Deleting Filesive c ini ida ree ae 4 94 COpYyING E EE AE O ET 4 95 Saving Files with AutoSave sesseesseessssssssriissirissrrrsrnrsintsrinnrnnnnrensrren 4 97 Automatic File SaVC cece ceeecceeeeeeeeeeee cent eeeeeaeseceeeeeeaaeeeneeeeeeaaeeeee 4 97 Verifying the AUtOS AVG iii iaa 4 98 Saving Files Manually 0 cccececesceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeaaeeeseaeseeeeaeeenaees 4 100 Headers sirine e a a ap ea eats aa E a 4 102 Printing Trace Fil s eccccesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeneeeenaeseeaaeeens 4 105 Connecting the Printers na eiaei a t 4 105 Printing a Trace File cceccceessseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeseeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeenaas 4 105 Saving a Trace File as an Image File ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaees 4 105 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 2 seseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 5 1 OVENVICW 2565 EEEE TEITTE AE TE oth ital atee ect 5 1 Starting Fiber Visualizer Mode eeens neser rererere 5 1 Setups Fiber Visualizer Mode ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeaeeenaas 5 2 Entering Fiber Visualizer Setups ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeetaaaeeeeeeee 5 2 General SCtups c chsst gea Fett
336. es 4 Press the Enter key to close the dialog The new setting is displayed in the Average field Setting the Power Meter Reference Set a reference value for each power meter wavelength required by the current test conditions The reference can either be entered directly or you can use the current power meter reading by pasting it into the reference To direct enter a Power Meter reference value 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Reference field 2 Press the Enter key The Reference dialog appears and the legends on softkeys f1 f3 change as follows e Change f1 e None f2 e Paste f3 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 13 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no reference currently set or the dialog displays the current reference setting in dBm Loss Test Set 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 9 00h_ 80 SF Light Source Wavelength 1550 nm Change Reference Power Meter None Wavelength 15 00 Average 99 90 40 00 dBm Loss Threshold 4 00 4B 10 02 dB agi Paste Output we o EEEN Anritsu m Figure 8 9 Reference screen 3 Ifthe Reference dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key or turn the Rotary knob to change it to the dBm setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob
337. es ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Enabled AutoSave This parameter sets the status for the AutoSave function Select from the following setting e Off No AutoSave is performed after the measurement is complete On AutoSave is performed after the measurement is complete e Verify The Save screen appears after the measurement is complete so you can verify the Auto Filename To select the AutoSave Enabled status 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Enabled in the AutoSave field and then press the Enter key The Enabled dialog appears 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired AutoSave Enabled status Off On or Verify 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the AutoSave Enabled status is set Note Setting the AutoSave Enabled status to On automatically sets and locks the Auto Filename Enabled status at the On setting About Screen See About Screen on page 3 26 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 19 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Fiber Visualizer Screen The initial Fiber Visualizer screen appears when you start a Fault Locate test When the measurement completes the fault points are indicated by icons as the figure below
338. es Internal Memory CAUTION Always use the AC adapter charger to power the MT9083 Series when performing an internal memory format As it takes about 30 minutes to finish formatting the 1 GB of internal memory aborted formatting caused by battery failure may damage the internal memory use the AC adapter charger for power supply MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 29 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups To erase Internal Memory 1 Press the Setup key 2 Press About f6 3 Highlight Erase Internal Memory and then press the Enter key The following message appears All user data files in the internal memory will be lost Are you sure you want to format internal memory 4 Press Yes f1 to erase the Internal Memory OR Press No f2 to cancel the erase The following progress message appears 2012 Nov 23 15 01 System Information Manufacturer Anritsu Model MT9083C2 057 Serial Number Hardware Vers Firmware Versi Formatting internal memory UNITROM Vers It may take about thirty minutes FPGA Version Do not power down the unit while format is running Erasing in progress Restore Defaults Erase Internal Memory Press Enter to format internal memory or ESC to exit Figure 3 15 About Screen 5 Wait for the erase to complete Do not power off the MT9083 Series 6 Press the ESC key to exit setups 3 30 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3
339. es not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License 2 LGPL GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better str
340. es only to Fiber Visualizer 6 10 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode End Event for ORL Calculation This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer Event Table Span Calculation This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer A B Span Analysis This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer Thresholds Press Thresholds f4 to access the Thresholds screen This screen provides access to the various Auto Detect and Pass Fail Thresholds setting 2013 Oct 30 04 03 Auto Detect Reflectance 60 0 dB Fiber End 3 dB Macro Bend 0 3 dB Splitter Loss 1x8 10 0 dB Pass Fail Thresholds Non Reflective Event Loss fusion None Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical None Reflectance None Fiber Loss dB km None Total Loss None Splitter Loss None Used to change the threshold of splice loss Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 6 Thresholds Screen Auto Detect Parameters Events that exceed the Auto Detect parameter settings are reported in the Event Analysis table e The Auto Detect parameters include Splice Loss Reflectance Fiber End MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Preferences 1 2 Preferences 2 2 Thresholds About 6 11 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 12 Macro Bend Splitter Loss Splice Loss Determines the Splice Loss value equal to
341. ess Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 5 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 6 Reflectance Calculation Reflectance is the ratio of reflected power to incident power displayed in dB see Reflectance Measurements on page 7 17 for details The MT9083 Series has three settings for Reflectance Calculations Off Auto and Manual off Reflectance will not be calculated Auto The reflectance of any event is reported based on the position of cursor A The Auto setting is most useful for reflective events that are not close together or close in to the OTDR Manual When set to Manual the reported reflectance is based on the positions of both cursors A and B The Manual setting is most useful for reflective events that are close together or close in to the OTDR To set the Reflectance Calculation type 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance Calculation Press Enter The Reflectance Calculation dialog appears Highlight the desired Reflectance Calculation setting Off Auto or Manual Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Reflectance Calculation field ORL Calculation ORL testing is not available in OTDR Construction mode Trace Overview When set to On a small overview of the trace is disp
342. esssteeeeseees 6 2 General Setups cienie neti Manes Saati ere ete tie Be 6 2 Preferences 1 2 ccccccccccccscccccccecsecscecesceseeeceseeeeecseueueeususeesuessceceeseeeaeeuseneess 6 3 Distance Display UNItS riais a e ai 6 3 Connection Check asaurar a ei ee atta a E E 6 4 Active Fiber Check wsicaisccchisiadadecte lisa cattacedensteiedees Sa AEE Ee 6 4 AUTO AMAL YSIS erraien e ae anete ea sheave eaaa Sak aa aea taeae nea 6 5 Auto Scaler aa aeaa a raa e E a Ea aaa Eagan 6 5 Event SUIMIMARY asisite ae aa aaa Kaa inad aia E ap aaa iaa riaa aia Ni 6 5 Reflectance Calculation sssssssessesssesrneessrntnstnestnntnsnnennsnnnsnn ntent 6 6 ORL Calculation sedare pat enea aea a raae aaea aia 6 6 Trace QVGIVIOW wucciicieseee ae aana ia a AE REAA fiat aia Riias 6 6 Real Time AVe agesinn nective are aaa deacon Aneel anna 6 7 Real Time Attenuation cccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteaaeeseneeeetaeeenneeeens 6 7 Display Mode After Annalysis ccccccecceceteeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseneseeeeeeaeees 6 7 Preferences 2 2 a ese eel ree coe Seca Meade i ed ood hed oie 6 8 Auto Patch cord Removal cccsceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeesseeeeeaaeeteaes 6 8 Grid DISplay ivi ina eaa ee ected eden 6 10 X MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Force Total LOSS w c cccccccccccceseesccesesseeeeeceseueeeuaeseueeuuaueeuesauaueueeeueeuaes 6 10 Event Icon Movement in Fiber Visualizer s sssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 10 End Even
343. est Procedure 1 At the Top Menu screen select OTDR Standard and then press the Enter key the OTDR Standard Trace screen appears 12 18 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 2 With the Level One softkeys displayed press the following softkeys a Wavelength f3 and set the desired wavelength See Setting the Source Wavelength on page 4 68 b Range Pulse width f4 and set the desired distance range and pulse width See Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width on page 4 68 3 Press More f6 to display the Level Two softkeys and then press the following softkeys a Average Time f1 to set the desired averaging time See Setting the Average Time Average Count on page 4 71 b Loss Mode f3 and set the loss mode to 2 Pt Loss See Setting the Loss Mode on page 4 74 4 Press More f6 twice to return to the Level One softkeys and then press Test f1 to start the measurement 5 When the measurement is complete read the following values from the measurement waveform e Calculate the level of the gap between the MT9083 Series optical connector end level and the floor noise peak level then add 2 6 dB to this value 6 Check that this value satisfies the standard values prescribed for each wavelength Dynamic Range Dynamic Range Noise Peak S N 1 Figure 12 7 Dynamic Range S N 1 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 19
344. est the fiber After the test is complete the reflectance reading is displayed in the lower section of the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 Moving Cursor A will change the reflectance value Note The Reflectance value may be preceded by an S See Reflectance on page 4 41 for details 7 Place Cursor A on backscatter just prior to the left side of the reflective event in order to achieve an accurate reflectance measurement See 7 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details on cursor placement NWN Range Reso 125 km 0 5 m 8 Select Display From A see Display From on page 4 71 and then use the Right and Up Arrow keys to zoom in on the trace see Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 to place Cursor A as close as possible to the rising edge of the reflection Cursor A must be placed on a linear section of the waveform backscatter and NOT the rising edge of the reflection see the figure above 9 Place Cursor B on the center of the reflectance pulse see the figure above Note Occasionally a small narrow peak may be present as shown in the figure above Do not place Cursor B on top of the first narrow peak if a narrow peak is present as this will result in an inaccurate reflectance measurement MT9083 Series
345. et the Trace Priority 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Trace Priority field 2 Toggle the Enter key to select or clear the check box for the trace priority MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 41 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen e If the Trace Priority check box is cleared non correlated template events are inserted into the target trace correlated template events replace the correlating target trace events and all other target trace events are left unchanged e If the Trace Priority check box is selected only non correlated template events are inserted into the target trace all other events are left unchanged Note Correlation of events is determined by the correlation window which is based on the Distance and Absolute Distance settings If more than one target trace Event falls within the correlation window of a template event the closest event is considered correlated For each template non end event that is propagated to the target trace the target trace event s loss value is computed using the adjusted template event distance and LSA cursors Table 6 1 Resultant Target Trace Events shows examples of resultant target trace events for the three merge priority states Template On Merge Off Merge On Trace Priority Off Merge On Trace Priority On Table 6 1 Resultant Target Trace Events Templ
346. etaining nut on the barrel assembly see item 2 in Figure 11 6 Align the key channel on the probe tip with the key on the probe housing see items 3 and 4 in Figure 11 6 Secure the retaining nut on the probe tip to the probe housing 1 Barrel assembly 2 Rear retaining nut 3 Key channel 4 Key Figure 11 6 Attaching a Probe Tip with Optics Connecting the VIP to the USB Converter For OPTION 545 VIP use the following procedure to connect the Video Inspection Probe to the USB converter To connect the VIP to the USB converter 1 Align the connector on the coiled cord of the VIP with the receptacle on the USB converter see items 2 and 4 in Figure 11 7 on page 11 7 When properly aligned the connector slides into the receptacle Use the retaining nut see item 3 in Figure 11 7 on page 11 7 on the connector to secure it to the USB converter see item 4 in Figure 11 7 on page 11 7 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Video Inspection Probe Connector 3 Retaining nut USB converter USB connector Figure 11 7 VIP Connected to USB Converter Connecting the VIP to the MT9083 Series Use the following procedure to connect the VIP to the MT9083 Series To connect the VIP to the MT9083 Series 1 Open the cover for the USB ports on the MT9083 Series if not already opened See Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 for location 2 Insert the U
347. eteiateeeateas 8 1 Starting Loss Test Set Mode 00 ccccccee cc et eeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaeseeaeeeeaae 8 1 Setups Loss Test Set mode 00 cece ete eeeeee ee ee nae eeeeeeeseaaeseeaeeeeaas 8 2 Entering Loss Test Set Setups ec ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeetennaeeees 8 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual XIII General SCtUDS cecccccesceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeseeaaeeeaeeseeaaeeseeeeeeaaaeeneeeeess 8 2 About Sereen arn aig nitive iain Metin a 8 2 Loss Test Set Screen o oo cece ener ener eee eeeceseaeaaneeeeeeeeesseesseneenaeeeeeeeess 8 3 Light Source Areaiss ccwat civ esis Slee ete vein nee ee 8 4 Light Source Wavelength INdicator cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeaes 8 4 Light Source On Off Indicator c ececeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteaeeesaes 8 4 Power Meter Area 2 2 eceeeeeeete reer eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeaeseeasessaaseeneeeeeeeeeees 8 4 Power Meter Wavelength INdicator ccescceeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 8 5 Absolute Power Reading ccccccesesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaaeseseeeesaaeeneneees 8 5 Range Indicators score as irate eine ani eadi aed 8 5 Average Fields a sinus Stee aspen sno tete eatin 8 6 Reference Field aiian niana ease ated ieee 8 6 Threshold Field cccccssscccecesseseeeeesescaeeeccsecneeeecssqcaeeeeesenseeeeeseeeeeeeess 8 6 Loss Reading init weatiieiaiGh Gini eis Meir aga een ee 8 6 Port Connection
348. eturns to the Connect Fiber screen see Figure 6 17 on page 6 47 Note If the Number of Fibers field see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 is set to 1 pressing Cancel returns you to the OTDR Construction Setup screen Press f4 to select the desired loss mode for the current test The red legend displays the currently selected loss mode Press 5 to set the Display From mode for viewing the trace graph The red legend on the softkey displays the current display mode Press 6 to toggle the status of the active cursor When the red legend reads Event turning the Rotary knob causes the active cursor to snap to the events on the trace When the red legend reads Free you can position the cursors anywhere on the trace grid Note The Loss Mode Display From and Cursor softkeys f4 f6 are only active when the legend on f1 reads Open Summary MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 59 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Press F1 when the Analysis screen is displayed displays only the waveform on the screen Trace Press F2 when only the waveform is displayed on the screen Analysis selects the event just before the selected one _ Press F3 when the Analysis screen is displayed selects the event just after the selected event Prev Event m Press F4 when the Analysis screen is displayed selects the event ext Event R just after the selected event Note When the Analysis screen i
349. ew Folder process 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the New Folder name field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the New Folder name field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the New Folder name field 5 Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name 6 With the desired character highlighted in the character matrix and the text cursor placed in the desired position press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the New Folder name field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in New Folder name field 7 When all of the desired characters are entered press OK f6 save the new folder to the selected medium or press ESC to cancel the New Folder process MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 93 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Deleting Files 4 94 Use either the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 or the Load screen see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 to delete
350. ey shall be resolved by negotiations in good faith between you and Anritsu Court of Jurisdiction This EULA shall be interpreted in accordance with Japanese law and any disputes that cannot be resolved by negotiation described in Article 8 shall be settled by the Japanese courts MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Protection Against Computer Virus Infections Protection Against Computer Virus Infections Prior to the software installation Before installing this software or any other software recommended or approved by Anritsu run a virus scan on your computer including removable media e g USB memory stick and CF memory card you want to connect to your computer When using this software and connecting with the measuring instrument Copying files and data On your computer do not save any copies other than the following e Files and data provided by Anritsu e Files created by this software e Files specified in this document Before copying these files and or data run a virus scan including removable media e g USB memory stick and CF memory card Connecting to network Connect your computer to the network that provides adequate protection against computer viruses Cautions on Proper Operation of Software This software may not operate normally if any of the following operations are performed on your computer Simultaneously running any software other than that recommended or approved by Anritsu Clo
351. eys or the Rotary knob to highlight Active Fiber Check 2 Press Enter and then select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the selection is set MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Note The Active Fiber Check feature does not apply for the following options Opt 063 0 85 1 3 pm MMF only Auto Analysis This preference setting does not apply to OTDR Construction mode Auto Scale When set to On Auto Scale provides a trace display that utilizes the maximum amount of horizontal scale for optimum trace viewing To activate Auto Scale 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Scale Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set Event Summary When the Event Summary selection is set to On the Fiber Test Parameters area see item 5 in Figure 6 19 on page 6 51 of the Test Results screen is replaced by the Event Summary area listing the Total Events Fiber Length and Total Loss of the current fiber under test Note The OTDR Construction Test Results screen appears at the end of each test providing that Preview f3 is set to On on the Test in Progress screen see Figure 6 18 on page 6 49 To set the Event Summary status 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Event Summary 2 Pr
352. f a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is ad dressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License
353. f data in the event of a power failure You can replace the loss readings in a file if you need to retest a fiber at a later date See Editing the Loss Table on page 8 30 for details Single MT9083 Series with an External Light Source This method is used when the start and end of the fiber to be tested are at two different locations This procedure method consists of two parts a reference procedure and then the test procedure Reference Procedure 1 Power up the MT9083 Series and enter Loss Test Set mode 2 Connect the optional Power Meter to the external light source using either a single patch cord or two patch cords and an inline connector 4 EMS or M F see the following note 2 Patch cords 3 In line connector 8 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Note EMS Equilibrium Mode Simulator multimode fiber M F Mode Filter singlemode fiber Use of either an EMS or M F while not necessary in most cases is however recommended by the TIA Telecommunications Industry Association EMS and M F are not included with the MT9083 Series 3 Make sure that the optional Power Meter and the external light source are set to the same wavelength e On the MT9083 Series press Power Meter Wavelength f3 until the desired wavelength is displayed in the Power Meter Wavelength field e Power up the external light source Follow the instructions for the given external
354. f1 through f6 Each softkey s function is designated by the current operating mode of the unit and is labeled on the screen to the left of the key MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 3 Chapter 2 Overview Rotary Knob ESC Escape Key 2 4 The Rotary knob is used for the following General Setups e Turn the Rotary knob to scroll through menu selections e Press the Rotary knob to make a selection OTDR mode Turn the Rotary knob to e Make precise cursor placements e Scroll through menu selections Press the Rotary knob to e Switch the active cursor e Make selections Loss Test Set mode e Turn the Rotary knob to scroll the highlight up and down in the Loss Table The ESC Escape key is used for the following General Setups e Close a currently open setup menu e Return to the previous screen OTDR mode e Close a currently open setup menu e Stop the current trace data collect that is in progress MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview Arrow Key Set The Arrow Left Right Up Down key set is used for the following Left Arrow key e General Setups Press the Left Arrow key to move the cursor in a text box to the left e OTDR mode Horizontally contracts a portion of the trace for wider examination Moves the cursor in a text box to the left Right Arrow key e General Setups Press the Right Arro
355. fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode 2 Note that the measurement port varies according to the measurement wavelength MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 35 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083B2 Option 053 Test item im Pulse width 20 ns 50 ns 200 ns 500 ns 1 ps 2 ps 4 us 10 ps 20 us Dynamic range Wavelength pm S N 1 Distance measurement accuracy Loss measurement accuracy Linearity OLS OPM Measurement accuracy Option OPM Option Option 007 Option 004 Option 005 Light Source output 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 25 nm l m 3 x measurement distance x 10 marker resolution 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is greater 1550 30 nm VLD Center wavelength 650 nm 15 nm Optical output power 12 36 Pulse width 1 ps Indicative C am Me 25 C Pulse width 20 ps Distance range 100 km Average time 180 seconds 1550 nm CW 20 dBm 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 25 C When Option 002 installed MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Note OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode MT9083B2 Option 055 Testitem item Specification o e 1310 nm 1310 nm 25 nm 1550 nm 25 nm 1650 nm 1645
356. fication Measure the optical output and center wavelength of the optical light source OLS for fiber identification Connect the devices as shown in the following figure Optical Fiber within 2 m fiber bending radius 50 mm MT9083 Series Optical Spectrum Analyzer Optical Power Meter Figure 12 13 Optical Output and Wavelength of OLS Test Connection Diagram Test Procedure 1 At the Top Menu screen select Light Source and then press the Enter key the Light Source screen appears 2 Press Wavelength f2 until the red legend on the softkey displays the desired wavelength 3 Press Modulation f3 until the red legend on the softkey displays the desired modulation mode 4 Press Light Source f1 to start the test The red legend on the softkey changes from Off to On 5 Check that the center wavelength and spectrum width satisfy the specifications by using the optical spectrum analyzer MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 25 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 6 When measurement is complete press Light Source f1 to turn off the light source Measurement Accuracy of the Optical Power Meter Check that the measurement accuracy of the optical power meter satisfies the specifications Be sure to execute zero offset see page 9 7 for the optical power meter before starting measurement Connect the devices as shown in the following figure MT9083 Series or with options 0
357. for the current screen as well as the name of a recalled file when displaying a recalled file 2 Date Time area Displays the current date and time MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 3 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 3 Battery Status area Displays the battery indicator and remaining battery power See Battery Status Area on page 3 4 for details 4 Driving Power icon The icon displayed indicates the current power source The Plug icon EJ indicates that the unit is currently operating on the AC charger adapter The Battery icon f indicates that the unit is currently operating on battery power via the rechargeable battery pack 5 Test Application Displays the test applications available The Selection area number of available test applications will vary with the options installed 6 Source Wavelengths The Source Wavelength list displays all laser source list wavelengths available for the current MT9083 Series The list displays up to four wavelengths depending on the unit s configuration 7 Select SM MM The Select SM MM softkey f6 is only available on softkey specific units such as those with both single mode and multimode laser sources Toggle Select SM MM f6 to set the unit to the desired wavelength type Battery Status Area The Battery Status area see item 3 in Figure 3 2 on page 3 3 displays the battery indicator and the remaining battery power For the remaining battery pow
358. ft mode and return to the Level Two softkeys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 75 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Resetting a Shifted Trace Use the following procedure to reset the Shift values to 0 To reset shift values to 0 1 With the Shift Mode softkeys displayed press Reset Horiz f2 to reset the horizontal shift to 0 zero and or press Reset Vert f3 to reset the vertical shift to 0 zero 2 Press Exit f6 to close the Shift mode and return to the Level Two softkeys Running Analysis on a Trace The Analysis feature performs an automatic analysis of the fiber waveform returning information such as the location of connectors splices reflectance and loss values The results are presented in detail in the Event Table The types of data gathered by analysis are dependent upon the various settings selected on the Thresholds screen in setups see pages 4 15 4 22 Use the following procedure to automatically launch Analysis at the conclusion of a data collection The results appear on the OTDR Analysis screen see Figure 4 14 on page 4 38 To activate Auto Analysis 1 Enter OTDR Standard mode and then press the Setup key Press Preferences 1 2 f2 if necessary 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Analysis Press the Enter key The Auto Analysis dialog appears 5 Highlight On and then press the Enter key The dialog closes and the Auto Anal
359. g e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name With the desired character is highlighted in the character matrix press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the text entry field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in the filename Use Backspace f5 or the BS key to delete characters entered in the text entry field When all of the desired characters are entered in the text entry field press OK f6 to return to the Header screen Repeat steps 4 through 8 until all desired text entry fields on the Header screen are edited 10 Press Exit f6 to close the Header and return to the Save screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Printing Trace Files Trace files can be printed via the optional BL 80RII or SD 1 31 printers Note The printed output from the MT9083 Series consists of a screen shot Only the details currently displayed on the LCD less the softkeys are printed Make sure that the desired details are displayed before printing Connecting the Printer Connect the MT 9083 Series to the BL 80RII or SD 1 31 printers using a USB printer conversion cable as shown in the figure below 36 pin male
360. gh speed charging e Ifthe battery pack has been over discharged high speed charging may not start until trickle charging has occurred for several hours If the Battery Charging lamp does not light up even if you connect the AC adapter leave it as is for several hours and remove the AC adapter once before reconnecting it e The charging rate may not reach 100 even if the battery pack is fully charged However the battery is charged completely if the charging rate reaches 90 Z CAUTION The battery pack must not be charged for more than 24 hours Over charging the battery pack may shorten its life Checking the Remaining Battery Power The remaining battery power can be checked from either the indicator on the battery pack or by checking the on screen Battery Status area on the MT9083 Series The battery pack has an integral battery charge indictor consisting of a TEST button and 4 LED located on the lower right section of the battery as shown in the following figure Figure 2 4 Battery Pack with Charge Indicator detail To check remaining battery power via the Battery Pack charge indicator 2 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview 1 Open the battery compartment on the MT9083 Series See Installing a Battery Pack on page 2 8 for details on opening the battery compartment 2 Press the TEST button on the battery pack You can determine the remaining battery charge by the nu
361. ght the Range field or PW field for the for the first desired wavelength and then press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The Distance Range Resolution and Pulse width dialog appears see Figure 4 22 on page 4 68 2 Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the white arrow to the desired list 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired setting within the selected list Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the desired settings are highlighted 5 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the Range field and PW field displays the newly selected Distance Range and Pulse Width MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 79 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each desired wavelength 7 Press Exit f6 to close the OTDR Parameters screen or move the highlight to the next desired parameter to continue Use the following procedure to specify the Average Time Average Count by either selecting one of the four pre set values or by entering the desired value in the field at the bottom of the dialog see Figure 4 24 on page 4 72 Note Average Count can only be accessed when the language for the MT9083 Series is set to Chinese See Language on page 3 10 for details on changing the current language selection To select the Dead zone mode in Wavelength All mode L With the OTDR Parameters screen displayed use the Left Right Up Down
362. gin see Display From on page 4 71 2 Place Cursor B at the end of the fiber See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements 3 Select Display From B 4 Expand the screen horizontally and vertically for more accurate cursor placement See Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 for details 5 Place Cursor B at the beginning of the reflective end of the fiber and read the total fiber length from the highlighted Cursor B location in the Cursor Distance area 6 Select Display From Origin 7 Place Cursor A just to the right of the diffusion tail if one exists after the beginning of the fiber 8 Select Display From A 9 Expand the screen horizontally and vertically for more accurate cursor placement 10 Move Cursor A to the end of the diffusion tail 11 Set the Loss Mode to 2pt dB km See Setting the Loss Mode on page 4 74 for details 12 The 2 Pt amp dB km loss values separated by a are displayed in the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area The first value is the 2 point loss and the second value is the dB km loss Reflectance Measurements Overview Reflectance is the ratio of reflected power to incident power displayed in dB A reflectance measurement is affected by the Pulsewidth and the Backscatter Coefficient A reflectance value for reflective events is disp
363. gs f4 on the VIP screen to display the VIP Test Settings screen 2 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the Test Profile 3 Press the Enter key to display the Test Profile dialog box 4 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the desired Test Profile setting in the list 5 Press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Test Profile field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option VIP Auto File Settings VIP images and analysis results can be saved VIP Auto File Settings 2013 Oct 30 06 47 File Location ALAA Base Filename vip NUM Auto Functions Test Settings Analysis V File Name Auto Settings Start Number 1 INTMEM vip0001 VIPI M Enter the path or location of the files Exit Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 11 10 VIP Auto File Settings Screen File Location The File Location field allows you to select the directory in which you want to save VIP image files To set the File Location 1 Press Settings f4 on the VIP screen to display the VIP Test Settings screen 2 Press Auto Settings f3 to display the VIP Auto File Settings screen 3 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the File Location Press the Enter key to display the Select Directory screen 5
364. h Dist km p Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB ahame 0 025 2 12 1526km 1 812 40 495 0 201 3 32 2436km 0 780 49 960 0 201 4 52 4877km Fiber End 32 415 0 204 Start km 32 2436 Loss dB End km Event Type Reflect dB 26 0 0 734 49 967 39 0 Hi Saturated Change 100km 1550 nm SM IOR 1 468200 100 1 km RES 5 003 m Pw 4us HR AVG 24576 Prev Event A 32 2436 km B 52 4877 km A gt B 20 2442 km Refl 49 967 Analysis Trace Next Event Figure 4 17 Adding an Event Note The Add Event softkey is only active in Splice Loss mode Pressing Add Event f1 when in any test mode other than Splice Loss displays the following message 4 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys to navigate the highlight white arrow to the desired field to select that field e Select the Start km field and then use the Numeric keypad see item 2 in Figure 2 1 on page 2 1 to enter the desired starting point for the new event e Select the End km field and then use the Numeric keypad see item 2 in Figure 2 1 on page 2 1 to enter the desired end point for the new event e Move the highlight to the Event Type field and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys to position the highlight at the desired event type Non Reflective Reflective or Group MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode e Select the Lo
365. h of the last directory to which a manual file save has occurred The auto save directory may in fact be a different directory The MT9083 Series therefore maintains 2 file save pathnames manual save and auto save Depending on the settings made on the AutoSave screen in Setups AutoSave behaves in one of the following way e On AutoSave is performed automatically without displaying the Save screen e Verify AutoSave displays the Save screen at the end of each data collection so you can verify the save details e Off AutoSave is not performed You need to perform a manual save to save the current test data if desired Automatic File Save To set up AutoSave for a full automatic save 1 Press the Setup key while in OTDR Standard mode 2 Press AutoSave f5 The AutoSave setups screen appears see Figure 4 38 on page 4 98 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 97 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 2013 Oct 30 05 55 AutoSave Directory INTMEM Base Filename AUTO WLEN NUM Start Number 1310 1 AutoSave The number that auto increment will begin with Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 4 38 AutoSave Setups Screen 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Enabled in the AutoSave field and then press the Enter key The Enabled dialog appears 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight On 5
366. hanged on the fly while either in a Real Time or an averaging cycle by using the procedure above The test will restart using the new setting 4 72 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Setting the IOR and BSC Use the IOR BSC dialog box to select one of the pre set Fiber Types which automatically sets the IOR Index of Refraction and BSC Backscatter Coefficient for the selected fiber type or select Other and then use the Numeric keypad to enter the desired IOR and BSC settings To set the IOR and BSC values 1 Press IOR BSC f2 The IOR BSC dialog appears see Figure 4 25 IOR 1 300000 1 700000 Fiber Type gt 1 467700 default Alcatel ESF BSC 90 00 40 00 Alcatel SF 78 50 Alcatel Teralight default Figure 4 25 IOR BSC Dialog 2 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys to move the white arrow to the Fiber Type field if necessary and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired fiber type When the desired fiber type is highlighted press the Enter key or the Rotary knob Or If the fiber type is not listed select Other and then move the white arrow to the IOR and BSC fields Use the Numeric keypad to enter the desired values When the IOR and BSC values are entered press the Enter key or the Rotary knob Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value 3 The dialog box closes and the
367. he following options Opt 063 MMF A 10 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common Cont d Optical Light Source OLS Applicable fiber SM fiber ITU T G 652 PC type Opt 053 055 056 057 058 073 SME Opt 063 GI fiber 62 5 125 pm GI fiber Opt 063 MMF Central wavelength 1310 30 nm Opt 053 055 056 057 058 CW 25 C 063 073 1490 30 nm Opt 056 058 1550 30 nm Opt 053 055 056 057 058 063 073 1650 5 nm Opt 055 1625 30 nm Opt 057 850 30 nm Opt 063 1300 30 nm Opt 063 Spectrum width 1310nm 5 nm or less CW 25 C 1490 nm 10 nm or less 1550 nm 10nmor less 1625nm 10nmor less 1650nm 3 nm or less 850 nm 10 nm or less 1300 nm 10 nm or less Optical output power 5 1 5 dBm 25 C SM or GI fiber length 2 m CW MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 11 Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common Cont d Optical output power lt 0 1 dB e CW at a point instant stability MME No specification between 10 to 50 C 1 C difference between maximum and minimum values within one minute SM fiber length 2 m e When an optical power meter with 40 dB or greater return loss is used SM Optical output CW 270 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz waveform Modulation light is square wave Modulated frequency 270 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 1 5 A 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual
368. he left side of the trace graph and is expressed in dBs while the horizontal axis scale see item 5 in Figure 4 11 is located at the bottom of the trace graph and is expressed in the distance unit as set on the Preferences screen See Distance Display Units on page 4 4 for details dB Level Indicator The dB level indicator see item 7 in Figure 4 11 on page 4 32 denotes the intersection of the active cursor and the trace level MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 33 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Trace Overview Window The Trace Overview window located in the lower left corner or the Trace graph show a thumbnail view of the current trace This is helpful in determining the location of an expanded section on the main view The black rectangle inside the Trace Overview window indicates the section of the trace that is currently displayed in the Trace graph when the trace has been expanded horizontally vertically Trace Overview must be set to On in the Preferences tab for the window to be displayed See Trace Overview on page 4 7 for details Connection check Screen 4 34 When the Connection Check is set to On on the setups Preferences screen a connection check is automatically performed at the beginning of each fault locate test The Connection Check screen consist of a simple gauge which provides a graphical representation of the connection quality along with instructions detailing how to proceed w
369. he Auto Power Off MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups setting is set to None or the dialog will display the number of minutes for the current Auto Power Off setting If the Auto Power Off dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the minutes setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob or the Numeric keypad to set the desired time period from 1 to 99 minutes Press the Enter key The Auto Power Off setting is now set to the desired interval and the MT 9083 Series will automatically turn off if it is inactive for the set time interval Use the following procedure to set Auto Power Off to None when it is currently set for a time interval To set Auto Power Off to None 1 Highlight Auto Power Off on the General screen and then press the Enter key 2 The Auto Power Off dialog appears displaying the currently set time interval 3 Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 4 Press the Enter key The Auto Power Off setting is now set to None Note In the following cases the Auto Backlight Off function is disabled and the timer of the Auto Power Off function is restarted at the end of the current operation An OTDR test is in progress A Real Time measurement is in progress Optical power level measurement is in progress Fiber identification light source is on The Visual Fault Locator is on or fla
370. he Enter key to display the Administrator Password dialog box 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 9 00h_ 80 4 General Setting Password Protect Off Small Letter Administrator Setting Password for Administrator MAX 16 User Setting Capital Letter Password Password Lifesp Expiration Date Symbols Backspace Set the Administrator password Need to be set more than 8 characters Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 3 7 Administrator Password dialog box If no USB keyboard is connected start from Step 3 to use the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard Once you have entered all desired characters press OK f6 3 18 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups to activate and use the new Administrator Password or press the ESC key to close the dialog box without changing the password 3 Use Backspace f5 or the BS key Backspace key to clear the entry in the Administrator Password field located above the character matrix Pressing the Backspace f5 or BS key once will delete a single character to the left of the text cursor vertical line and move the cursor one space to the left Continue backspacing until you have deleted the entire password or the desired portion of the password To select and delete specific characters of the p
371. he Loss Table periodically for example every ten fibers as you store the loss readings to prevent loss of data in the event of a power failure You can replace the loss readings in a file if you need to retest a fiber at a later date See Editing the Loss Table on page 8 30 for details Dual MT9083 Series method This procedure details how to operate the Loss Test Set mode for two MT9083 Series designated Unit A and Unit B that have not been physically connected together to establish their Reference settings There are three parts to this test method a reference procedure a modification procedure and then a test procedure Reference Procedure Perform the following procedure on both Unit A and Unit B 1 Power up the MT9083 Series and enter Loss Test Set mode 2 Connect the optional Power Meter to the Optical Light Source port using two patch cords and an inline connector MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 25 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 8 26 4 EMS or M F see the following note 2 Patch cords 3 In line connector Note EMS Equilibrium Mode Simulator multimode fiber M F Mode Filter singlemode fiber Use of either an EMS or M E while not necessary in most cases is however recommended by the TIA Telecommunications Industry Association EMS and M F are not included with the MT 9083 Series Press Light Source Wavelength f2 to set the Light Source and Power Meter to the same
372. he Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Splice Loss 1 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Press Enter The Splice Loss dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the splice loss threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Splice Loss threshold is set Reflectance Determines the lowest Reflectance value that will be reported by analysis Any event with a reflectance equal to or greater than the value in this parameter will be reported in Event analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 70 0 dB to 20 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Reflectance threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance Press Enter The Reflectance dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the reflectance threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Reflectance threshold is set Fiber End Determines the Fiber End value equal to or above which will be reported in the Events analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 1 dB to 99 dB in 1 dB increments To set the Fiber End threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Fiber End Press
373. he active cursor e Press the Rotary knob or the Enter key to select the desired cursor Precise Positioning of the Active Cursor To precisely position the cursor 1 Select the desired cursor see Setting the Active Cursor above 2 Press Display From f5 and select the desired display from setting Display From A or Display From B depending on which is cursor is currently selected as the active cursor 3 Use the Left Right Up and Down Arrow keys to zoom up the desired amount See Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract below for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 57 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 Turn the Rotary knob to position the active cursor until the desired cursor distance is displayed in the Cursor Distance Information area see item 3 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 Locking and Unlocking Cursors To lock the cursors 1 Set Cursor B as the active cursor 2 Press Cursors f4 the Cursor softkeys appear 3 Toggle Cursors f1 until the red legend on the softkey reads Locked When the cursors are locked the distance between the cursors remains fixed To unlock the cursors 1 Press Cursors f4 the Cursor softkeys appear 2 Press Cursors Locked f1 the red legend on the softkey changes to Unlocked 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Cursor softkeys and return to the Level Two softkeys Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract Use the Horizontal Ver
374. he current setting MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Total Loss This Parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the Total loss Cum Loss dB exceeds the value set The range of settings for this parameter is 0 1 dB to 60 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Total Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Total Loss 2 Press Enter The Total Loss dialog appears The dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Splitter Loss This Parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the splitter loss exceeds the Auto Detect threshold plus value set The range of settings for this parameter is 0 1 dB to 20 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Splitter Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Splitter Loss When Test Mode is FTTA Splitter Loss cannot be selected 2 Press Enter The Splitter Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it dir
375. he cursors for a test e Adjusting the LSA intervals To expand an area 1 Position the desired cursor A or B to the approximate position 2 Toggle Display From f5 to the desired mode Display From A or Display From B depending on the cursor selected in step 1 5 36 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 3 Press the Up Arrow key Each press decreases the dB division value of the vertical grid scale by a factor of two Press the Right Arrow key Each press decreases the distance division value on the horizontal grid scale by a factor of two To contract an area e Press the Down Arrow key Each press increases the dB division value of the vertical grid scale by a factor of two e Press the Left Arrow key Each press increases the distance division value on the horizontal grid scale by a factor of two Note An error tone sounds when you reach the full expand contract value for either axis Thresholds Press Thresholds F3 on the Fiber Visualizer screen or the Trace screen to access the Thresholds screen 2013 Nov 1 21 53 Auto Detect Reflectance 60 0 dB Load Fiber End 3 dB Macro Bend 0 3 dB Splitter Loss 1x8 10 0 dB Save Pass Fail Thresholds Non Reflective Event Loss fusion 0 20 dB Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical 0 50 dB Reflectance 35 0 dB Fiber Loss dB km 1 00 dB Total Loss 3 0 dB Splitter Loss 3 0 dB ORL 27 0 dB Used to change
376. he method used one or two patch cord do not disconnect the patch cord from the Optical Light Source port The coupled level of the light source may change when the patch cord is reconnected 3 Attach the free end of the patch cord connected to the Optical Light Source port to one end of the fiber to be tested Using a second patch cord connect the optional Power Meter to the other end of the fiber to be tested 4 EMS or M F see the following note 2 Patch cords 3 Fiber under test FUT Note EMS Equilibrium Mode Simulator multimode fiber M F Mode Filter singlemode fiber Use of either an EMS or M F while not necessary in most cases is however recommended by the TIA Telecommunications Industry Association EMS and M F are not included with the MT9083 Series 4 Make sure that the Power Meter and Light Source are set to the same wavelength 5 Press Light Source Off f1 to activate the light source the red legend on the softkey changes to On MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 21 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 6 Press Loss Table f6 The Loss Table screen appears see Figure 8 7 on page 8 9 Press Add fL to add the current test data to the Loss Table 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all fibers for the current Loss Table are tested Note It is a good practice to save the Loss Table periodically for example every ten fibers as you store the loss readings to prevent loss o
377. hen the connection is GOOD and how to correct a BAD connection GOOD connection The gauge is green and yellow when connection is good The closer the bar in the connection gauge extends to HIGH end the better the connection is If the gauge is yellow and red the fiber needs cleaning Press Continue f1 or Start key to start the measurement immediately MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode OTDR Standard Apr 17 16 30 g Figure 4 12 Connection Check Good Connection BAD connection When the connection check level is low the bar in the connection gauge is red and only extends a short distance from the LOW end of the gauge If the connection state is not improved even if the fiber is cleaned the fiber needs to be replaced MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 35 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 36 OTDR Standard 2013 Apr 17 16 34 9 E Continue 13 0 E i E ees i LOW HIGH 39 0 52 0 Connection level failed Fiber may be shorter than approx 48 meters 160 ft Clean all optical connectors anced Switch ends of patch cord Use another patch cord xt Event Figure 4 13 Connection Check Bad Connection To correct a low connection level Press the ESC key or Cancel f6 to abort the current test Clean all of the optical connectors Press the Start key or Manua
378. her the Save screen see Figure 9 8 on page 9 20 or the Load screen see Figure 9 9 on page 9 25 2 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the files to be copied 3 Press the Down Arrow key and highlight the first file in the selected directory folder if not already highlighted Press More f6 5 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off 6 Press Copy f1 7 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 8 Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the files from the selected directory folder are pasted to their new location Loading a Loss Table from Mass Storage Use the following procedure to load a Loss Table from mass storage files saved to the MT9083 Series internal memory or to a USB memory stick 1 Press the File key The Load screen appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 9 00h_ 80 SG Medium Internal Memory 3 Files 951 MB Free Folder File Name Date Time w Load Table NEWO003 CSV 12 04 19 13 17 NEWOoOo2 csSY 12 04 19 13 17 NEWOO1 CSV 12 04 19 1
379. highlighted 5 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the red legend on the Range Pulse Width softkey displays the newly selected Distance Range and Pulse Width If distance range resolution pulse width or average time is changed during a Real Time test the test re starts in the newly set conditions Selecting the Dead zone Mode The MT9083A2 B2 C2 have a Dead zone mode selection function The two modes available via this mode selection function are Standard mode and Enhanced Range mode The features of the two modes are described below Standard mode e Standard mode allows short dead zone measurements to be performed Enhanced Range mode e Allows high dynamic range measurements e Allows fast measurements e Can be used to test the path over each optical fiber split by the splitter included in the PON system Setting the Standard Mode To Set the Standard Mode 1 Pressing Test Parameters f4 brings up Dead zone f1 See figure below 2 Press Dead zone f1 and set Standard HR Note e The Enhanced Range mode is only available if an SM unit is fitted The Dead zone f1 key becomes unavailable if an MM unit is fitted e Ifthe range of the selected pulse width does not fall between 50 ns to 2000 ns the f1 key is grayed out and set to Standard HR MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 55 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 56
380. hlight End Event for ORL Calculation Press Enter The End event for ORL calculation dialog appears Highlight the desired setting INCLUDE Includes the reflection in Far End events when calculating the ORL OMIT Not Includes the reflection in Far End events when calculating the ORL 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the End Event for ORL Calculation MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 13 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 14 Event Table Span Calculation Selects whether to display the span length or transmission loss dB km on event table This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer To set the Event Table Span Calculation 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Event Table Span Calculation Press Enter The Event Table Span Calculation dialog appears Highlight the desired setting Span Length Display the span length between each event calculation on event table dB km Display the transmission loss dB km between each event calculation on event table Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Event Table Span Calculation field A B Span Analysis Sets whether to specify the PASS FAIL analysis span by Marker A and B This setting function applies only to Fiber Visualizer To set the A B Span Analysis 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight A B S
381. ht Source Off f1 is pressed at a temperature that is out of the operating temperature range the following message appears Laser Diode out of the operating temperature range Function in fail safe mode is displayed and the light source does not turn on ZA WARNING NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the MT 9083 Series nor into the end of a cable connected to the MT9083 Series If laser radiation enters the eye there is a risk of injury A CAUTION The MT9083 Series emits high output optical pulses Disconnect communications devices etc from the target measurement optical fiber during measurement to prevent the optical sensors from being damaged Fiber Identification Measurement The following is an example of how to use the Optical Light Source to perform a fiber identification measurement Note The Optical Light Source only supports single mode fiber To perform a fiber identification measurement 1 Set the MT9083 Series to Light Source mode if necessary See Accessing Optical Light Source Mode on page 9 27 for details 2 Toggle Wavelength f2 to select the desired wavelength Note Single wavelength MT9083 Series units will sound an error tone if you press the Wavelength f2 softkey 3 Toggle Modulation f3 to select the desired modulation frequency The modulation frequency must match that of the fiber identification device ID tester 9 30 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual
382. ialog appears displaying the current setting Press None f2 the dialog changes to None 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the reference is set to None Setting the Threshold value Use the following procedure to set threshold value used to determine the Pass Fail status of the Loss reading as displayed in the Loss Table see Figure 9 3 on page 9 5 Threshold values can be entered for each of the power meter s calibrated wavelengths To set the Threshold value 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Threshold field 2 Press the Enter key The Threshold screen appears Power Meter Wavelength Change Threshold None Reference oom i aa A Figure 9 6 Threshold screen Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no reference currently set or the dialog displays the current reference setting in dB MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 11 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 3 Ifthe Threshold dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key or turn the Rotary knob to change it to the dB setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 9 5 Ifnecessary change the threshold from to 1 6
383. ies ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode If the Connection Check remains LOW after following the steps in the preceding procedure contact the Anritsu Technical Support Center at Phone 1 800 ANRITSU or 972 761 4600 Canada U S Latin and South America Fax 1 972 671 1877 e mail us sales anritsu com Web www anritsu com Real Time Testing Real Time test mode provides a quick real time view of the initial trace information In this mode trace data is not continually averaged but is stopped and restarted after each screen update Real Time mode enables optimization of fiber connections at or near the OTDR connector as the trace display shows the affect of making changes to the connections To start a Real Time test 1 Press Trace F2 to display the Trace screen 2 Press Real Time f2 to start a real time test The red legend on the softkey changes to On and the test begins Note To attenuate a saturated event when in Real Time test mode move the active cursor within the event until the unit auto attenuates the event pulling the event out of saturation To stop a Real Time test e Press Real Time f2 to stop the current real time test The red legend on the softkey changes to Off and the real time test ends MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 53 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Fiber Visualizer Mode Measurement Parameters Setting the Source Wavelength
384. ies ACCESS Master Operation Manual Preferences 1 2 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Press Preferences 1 2 f2 to access the Preferences 1 2 screen Figure 6 3 on page 6 3 and set the status for the following e Distance display Units e Connection Check e Active Fiber Check e Auto Analysis not applicable to OTDR Construction mode e Auto Scale e Event Summary e Reflectance Calculation e ORL Calculation not applicable to OTDR Construction mode e Trace Overview e Real Time Averages not applicable to OTDR Construction mode e Real Time Attenuation not applicable to OTDR Construction mode e Display Mode After Analysis Preferences 1 2 2013 Nov 1 21 52 Distance display Units Connection Check Active Fiber Check Auto Analysis Auto Scale Event Summary Reflectance Calculation ORL Calculation Trace Overview Real Time Averages Real Time Attenuation Display Mode After Analysis Auto Full Trace On Low Auto Attenuation End Break Preferences 4 2 Preferences 2 2 Thresholds Used to select the units for distance measurement Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 3 Preferences 1 2 Screen Distance Display Units AutoSave About Select the unit of measurement used to display distance on the horizontal axis of the Trace graph This affects Range and Resolution readings and analysis events
385. ies may be damaged if light exceeding 10 dBm is injected In addition when the reference value as set in the Reference Field item 5 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 is set to None the background color of the Absolute Power reading changes according to the Pass Fail status established by the value in the Threshold field see item 6 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 Readings that pass have a black background while readings that fail have a red background Range Indicator The Range Indicator provides a graphic representation of the optical power level being measured The greater the optical power level measured the further the Range Indicator is filled in MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 5 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Average Field Displays the number of times that the current test data is averaged before the Power reading item 2 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 is refreshed The higher the number of averages the more stable the Power reading Reference Field Displays the currently set reference value which is used to calculate the Loss reading item 5 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 Reference values can be entered for each of the power meter s calibrated wavelengths Threshold Field Displays the currently set threshold value which is used to determines the Pass Fail status of the Loss reading as displayed in the Loss Table see Figure 8 7 on page 8 9 Threshold values can be entered for each of the power meter
386. igh Density See Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width on page 4 68 for details on making the setting for step 4 5 Press Average Time f1 and set the averaging to 60 seconds to provide good data acquisition See Setting the Average Time Average Count on page 4 71 for details 6 Press Manual Test f1 to test the fiber After the test is complete the reflectance reading is displayed in the lower section of the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 Moving Cursor A will change the reflectance value Note The Reflectance value may be preceded by an S See Reflectance on page 4 41 for details 7 18 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements 7 Place Cursor A on backscatter just prior to the left side of the reflective event in order to achieve an accurate reflectance measurement See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details on cursor placement k lt 200 meters minimum A 200 meters PW 1000ns 100 0m 8 Select Display From A see Display From on page 4 71 and then use the Right and Up Arrow keys to zoom in on the trace see Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 to place Cursor A as close as possible to the rising edge of the reflection Cursor A must be placed on a linear section of the waveform backscatter and NOT the
387. ile See New Folder on page 3 40 for details Press Save Image f1 to save the image file or press ESC to cancel the file save Renaming a File Use the following procedure to enter a new filename Test Data files can be renamed from the Save screen while screen captures can be renamed from the Save screenshot screen To rename a file 1 3 32 With the desired results displayed on the screen press either the Save key when saving test data or the Print key when saving a screen capture When the Save screen for saving test data or the Save screenshot screen appears press the Enter key The FileName dialog box appears see Figure 3 17 below If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 3 to enter the name using the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to use the new file name or press the ESC key to close the File Name dialog box without changing the file name MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Save screenshot 2014 Jan 26 18 08 File Name image0001 PNG image NUM location name tls Sector Number Selected File Size Figure 3 17 File Name dialog box 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to select File Name field on the Save Screenshot Screen Figure 3 16 Press the Ent
388. ils Starting Loss Test Set Mode To start Loss Test Set mode 1 Press the Top Menu key 2 Highlight Loss Test Set then press the Enter key Note Units not equipped with the power meter option will not display the Loss Test Set selection 3 The unit displays the initial Loss Test Set screen see Figure 8 1 Light Source Jul F 4 Wavelength 1310 nm g Off Light Source Off Power Meter Power Light Source Wavelength Wavelength 1550 nm Under 3 Power Meter Loss Wavelength Reference None es Threshold None Modulation cw Input Output Set Zero g Anritsu 4 Loss Table I FE Figure 8 1 Initial Loss Test Set screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 1 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Setups Loss Test Set mode Press the Setup key to display the setup information for Loss Test Set mode See Starting Loss Test Set Mode on page 8 1 for details Entering Loss Test Set Setups 1 Start Loss Test Set mode The initial Loss Test Set screen appears see Figure 8 1 on page 8 1 2 Press the Setup key The General Setups screen appears The General and About screens are the only setup screens available when in Loss Test Set mode General Setups The General setups pertain to general setting for the MT9083 Series and are detailed in General Screen Settings on pages 3 7 3 15 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GD 9 00h 80 4 bate TS Local Time 13 02 Time
389. incorporating distance MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 3 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 4 To set the Distance Display units 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Distance display Units 2 Press Enter and select the desired unit from the Distance display Units menu 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selected unit is set Connection Check The Connection Check function confirms whether or not the fiber is connected correctly to the OTDR measurement port To set the Connection Check 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Connection Check 2 Press Enter and then select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the selection is set Note The Connection Check function on the Preferences screen also controls the Connection Check in the Options area of the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 Changing the enabled disabled status on either screen is tracked on both Active Fiber Check The Active Fiber Check performs a live fiber check on the currently attached fiber under test to detect whether the fiber is carrying traffic before firing any OTDR laser sources e If no traffic is detected the test proceeds normally e If traffic is detected a warning message appears on the screen and the test is aborted To set the Active Fiber Check 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow k
390. ing generally provides a combination of good range and good resolution e Set the Resolution to High Density See Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width on page 4 68 for details on making the setting for step 2 3 Press More gt gt f6 to access the Level Two softkeys 4 Press Average Time f1 and set the averaging to 1 minute to provide good data acquisition See Setting the Average Time Average Count on page 4 71 for details Press Loss Mode f3 and set the loss mode to ORL Press More gt gt f6 to return to the Level One softkeys Press ManualTest f1 to test the fiber Place Cursor B in the noise floor at the end of the trace See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details on cursor placement oN AM 9 Place Cursor A at the desired measurement point along the vertical backscatter after the initial refection 10 Press More gt gt f6 twice to display the Level Three softkeys 11 Press Calc ORL f4 The ORL value appears in the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area as shown in the following figure MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 15 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Depending on the ORL Calculation type selected on the Preferences setup screen the ORL value will be follow by either an A if set for A Cursor or an O if set for Origin If there is no indicator displayed after the ORL value the ORL Calculation was set to Full Trace
391. ing instruments recommended and optical fiber required for performance test for 004 005 007 Optical Power Meter options Test item Measuring instrument and cable 1310 1550nm Optical Power Meter 8163B 81630B Agilent Technologies Wavelength 0 97 pm to 1 65 pm v Level 70 dBm to 28 dBm Accuracy 3 0 1255 to 1630nm Reference Light Source 81657A 8163B Agilent Technologies Wavelength 1 31 1 55 um Output 13 dBm min Variable Attenuator 8163B 81570A Agilent Technologies Wavelength 1 2 pm to 1 65 pm Attenuation 0 to 30 dB Insertion loss 3dB max Resolution 0 1dB max Optical Power Meter 81635A 8163B Agilent Technologies Wavelength 0 80 pm to 1 65 pm v Level 80 dBm to 10 dBm Accuracy 3 5 0 80 to 1 2 um 12 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 8 Measuring instruments recommended and optical fiber required for performance test for 004 005 007 Optical Power Meter options Cont d Test item Measuring instrument and cable 1310 1550nm Reference Light Source MPS 8033 06 ILX Lightwave V Wavelength 0 85 um Output 0 dBm CW Variable Attenuator 81578A 062 8163B Agilent Technologies Wavelength 0 7 to 1 4 um Attenuation 0 to 60 dB GI Optical Fiber 62 5 125 um 2 m a ae aa MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 13 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Optical Outp
392. ion dialog appears Press the Up Arrow key to highlight On in the dialog and then press the Enter key The dialog closes and the Continuous Pulse Emission field reads On Press the ESC key The OTDR Standard Trace screen appears 8 Set the following test parameters e Wavelength see Setting the Source Wavelength on page 4 68 for details e Range and Pulse width see Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width on page 4 68 for details 9 Press ManualTest f1 the following message box is superimposed over the OTDR Standard Trace screen Continuous Pulse Emission is ON Cal 38 85 dB Press any key to stop Figure 12 3 Calibration Value Message Box MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 15 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 10 Use the optical power meter to measure the optical output Set the optical power meter wavelength and Calibration factor prior to measuring the optical output 11 The laser beam is received by the optical spectrum analyzer when measuring wavelength to adjust the optical spectrum analyzer measurement level and wavelength resolution Optical spectrum analyzer measurement varies according to the wavelength Select RMS for 850 1300430 nm 1310 1490 1550 1625 25 nm and select Threshold for 1645 to 1655 nm 12 Check that the optical output and wavelength measured results are within the specifications 13 When measuring another waveform contin
393. ired fields are edited 6 24 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode OTDR Construction Setup 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Store Files At Base Filename ab_o Small Letter MAX 8 Capital Letter Symbols ele elaleie ly space 15 1625 _ File Save Verify Macrobend Backspace Number of Fibers 4 OK Start Number 1 Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 9 OTDR Construction Setup Text Entry dialog box 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the current text entry field which is located directly above the character matrix The current title of the text entry field matches the currently selected Header screen field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the text entry field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the text entry field 3 Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to
394. is table that exceed the set Reflectance value The reflectance of Fiber End is not checked when End event for ORL calculation is OMIT The range of settings for this parameter is 50 0 dB to 10 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Reflectance threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance 2 Press Enter The Reflectance dialog appears The dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set Reflectance to None when it is currently set in dBs Fiber Loss dB km This parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the dB km loss exceeds the value set The range of settings for this parameter is 0 01 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Fiber Loss dB km threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Fiber Loss dB km 2 Press Enter The Fiber Loss dB km dialog appears The dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save t
395. isplayed either current or recalled press Delete All f4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 31 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode A dialog box with the following question appears Are you sure you want to clear the table Press Yes f1 to delete all test data from the table The dialog closes and the Loss Table screen is displayed with a blank Loss Table In addition the only softkeys available are Add f1 and Back f6 Adding Comments to a Loss Table Use the following procedure to add comments to any row in a Loss Table To add Comments to a Loss Table l With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired row in the Loss Table 2 Press Comment f5 The Text Entry dialogbox appears If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 3 to enter the name using the front panel keys Ifa USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to use the new comment or press the ESC key to close the Text Entry dialogbox without changing the comment Loss Test Set 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GD 9 00h_ 80 5 Light Source Wavelength 1550 nm Modulation cw Small Letter Power Meter Wavelength Modulation Reference Symbols ma CC Ce 002 1550nm_ e ieee MP e ff 004 1550nm 005 1550nm 7
396. iteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user o
397. ith the number set in the Start Number field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 67 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 68 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired field and then press the Enter key The Text Entry dialog boxdialog box appears see Figure 5 26 If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 5 to enter the name using the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to return to the Header screen Repeat steps 4 until all desired text entry fields on the Header screen are edited Press the f6 key to close the Header and return to the Save screen 2012 Jul 1 10 00 G 9 00h_ 80 SF Unit Header l Customer Small Letter File Header Data Flag MAX30 Cable ID Capital Letter Fiber ID Cable Code Start Location Symbols Terminal Locatiq Operator Comment Space Backspace OK Figure 5 26 Text Entry dialog box 5 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the current text entry field which is located directly above the character matrix The current title of the text entry field matches the currently selected Header screen field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the text entry fi
398. itial backscatter level would intersect the ascending side of the initial reflection and place cursor A as shown in the figure above Place Cursor B at the beginning of the reflective end of the fiber B 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License Appendix C Software License The MT9083 Series contains the software shown in the table below Refer to our website for more information on the MT9083 Series Anritsu Corporation Website http www anritsu co jp The package software on the table below is not covered in the Software License Agreement of Anritsu Corporation For complete details on the GNU LGPL and MPL General Public Licenses refer to the GNU Website http www gnu org Table C 1 Software License List L L 1 ui ee ee flnx 0 18 LGPL 4 program widget is based in part on the work of the FLTK exceptions project http www fltk org j e S 1 jpeg 8d Others This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group libpng 1 2 48 libpng license e C C MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 1 Appendix C Software License Table C 1 Continued Software License List util linux ng 2 16 GPL 1 a en C 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License 1 GPL GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 B
399. itn abo eld een dae ae eee 5 3 Preferences 1 2 aa ess Sccteciee tubes dh ceanddetens ial ovewsensbebdectecieddvicss 5 3 Distance Display Units cccccccseeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeteaaeeeeneeee 5 4 Connection Checker origine aleve a e ea aE a EE EEEa 5 5 Active Fiber Check iea ai aren a alt altel AE 5 5 Auto Analysis aae de eased a etd A aE 5 5 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Vil VIII UoN TE EEE EA ce toned 2s E AE ETEA EAT 5 6 Event SUMMA Yanni pra a e en t r a a 5 6 Reflectance Calculation n cccccccccccscsssceseeseecesseseeeessseeeseueueeeaseesenseees 5 7 ORE Calc lati Nisia e a a a a a a a a 5 7 T Trace OvervieW cccccccsssesceceeceessssceeeeesaesseceeecesaauseeeeeseauaeseeeeeanenaeseeeeees 5 8 Real Time Averages sssssssssssssesssressrssrensstesrtnnsrsnsstsnstnnersnnesnnennnnnn 5 8 Real Time Attenuation ccccccccccssssssssssssesesseeeeeeeceeeceueneneeeeeeeeaeanaeees 5 8 Display Mode After ArnalySis ccccccccccsecceeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeaeeseaeesaeetaes 5 9 Preferences 2 2 woccccccccccccccceccscseccsseeeeeecsesececeseeeesuseeueeseceseeceeesaeeuseueeeeeeseees 5 9 Auto Patch cord Removal ccccceececeeeeeescececeeaeaeeeeeueneeseseseseneeees 5 10 Grid PISIN AE E EE ee a RAS 5 12 F rc Total LOSS an a a ar A a a a a 5 12 Event ICON Movement 0 ccccecececeececeeeseceaaeeeseeseceaeeeessaaeeesaseeeesees 5 13 End Event for ORL Calculation cccccccccccc
400. ive CUFSOT cccccseeeeceeeeeceeeesaeeeeaeeseeaeeeeeaaeeteaaeeenaes 4 57 Precise Positioning of the Active Cursor ccesceceseeereeeeeeeeeeeeaee 4 57 Locking and Unlocking Cursors cccccecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeees 4 58 Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract s 4 58 Template Modei pe a Hida gean aie eaaa levee Sins cadets 4 60 Template soft key layer cccescecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaaeeeeeesaeeseaeeseneees 4 60 Template Settings SCre n ecccecesceeceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeteeeeeteaeeneneeeee 4 61 Event Determinat Or sssini anea SE een aa ar 4 62 Trace Priori oeaiei A A ete oe ea td 4 63 Distance and Absolute Distance ccccccseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeneeeees 4 64 Distance Helix FACTO i poitrine aariin po ansaa ianen 4 65 OTDR Standard Mode Measurement Parameters 0008 4 68 Setting the Source Wavelength c cceeecceesceeeeeeeeeeeaaeteeeeeeteaeeeeeneeeeas 4 68 Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width cccccsssseeeeeeeees 4 68 Selecting the Dead zone Mode cesceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeneeeeess 4 69 Setting the Standard Mode ccseecccececeeeeeeeee eect eeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeneaes 4 69 Setting the Enhanced Range Mode csccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeenaeeetes 4 70 Display Froe eeaeee a a a a e e iaeesaestenets evenness 4 71 Setting the Average Time Average Count ssessseeseeerrrerererreesressn 4 71 Setting the IO
401. keys to select the Internal Memory or USB Memory and press the Enter key or Rotary knob 10 Press OK f6 when all the editing has finished MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 35 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 3 36 There are MACRO buttons as below Table 3 2 MACRO Buttons Character string to insert Number 4 digit serial number starting from the number in the Number field on the right bottom yy mm dd Digits to represent Year Month Day Digits to represent Hour Minute Second 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to select the Number field on the Figure 3 17 File Name dialog box Press the Enter key to display the Number dialog box 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or Rotary knob to change the number Or Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 3 Press Enter key to use the new number or press ESC to close the Number dialog box without changing the number Save screenshot 2014 Jan 26 18 08 File Name image0001 PNG Site location name Number 1 Selected File Size Figure 3 19 Number dialog box Perform the following steps to input arbitrary characters MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 37 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 3 38 1 Press the Keyboard f1 or Enter key in the File Name field to display Text Entry dialog box Sa
402. l Test f1 to re start the test If the Connection Check is still low press the ESC key or Cancel f6 Switch the ends of the patch cord and press the Start key or Manual Test f1 again 6 Ifthe Connection Check is still low press the ESC key or Cancel f6 and then replace the patch cord 7 Press the Start key or Manual Test f1 to re start the test VA R O a a Note Fibers shorter than approximately 48 meters 160 ft will generally result in a low connection MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode If the Connection Check remains LOW after following the steps in the preceding procedure contact the Anritsu Technical Support Center at Phone 1 800 ANRITSU or 972 761 4600 Canada U S Latin and South America Fax 1 972 671 1877 e mail us sales anritsu com Web www anritsu com MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 37 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode OTDR Standard Analysis Screen The OTDR Standard Analysis screen consists of the same elements detailed for the OTDR Standard Trace screen see Trace Screen OTDR Standard on pages 4 30 4 33 with the addition of the Event Table and event marker flags on fiber trace OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GD 9 00h 80 3 Dist km p Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 0 152 96k 12 1526km 1 812 40 495 32 2436km 0 780 49 960 52 4877km Wm Fiber End 32 415 Manual Test Real Time off Wavel
403. l desired text entry fields on the Header screen are edited Template Template mode is a function to display event information by generating a predefined event table and mapping the collected trace onto the event conditions in this event table Use the following procedure to access and set the Template Settings when in Construction mode To access and set the Template Settings 1 With the OTDR Construction Setup screen See Figure 6 16 on page 6 40 displayed press Template f4 The Template Settings screen appears MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 39 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 40 Template Settings 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GD 9 00h 80 5 Template Fe Clear Template Event Determination Template Merge Distance Helix Factor Adjustment None Snap to Template End Shap to Trace End Exit Figure 6 16 Template Setting Template Settings screen contains access for the following file selecting and parameter settings Template File Event Determination Trace Priority Distance Absolute Distance Distance Helix Factor Adjustment The following softkeys are available in the Template Setting screen Clear Template f1 Selecting Template File Only one template trace can be loaded at a time Template trace can either be recalled from mass storage e g internal memory or USB memory stick To load the Template Trace MT9083 Series ACCESS Master O
404. l is low the bar in the connection gauge is red and only extends a short distance from the LOW end of the gauge If the connection state is not improved even if the fiber is cleaned the fiber needs to be replaced Fiber Visualizer 2013 Apr 18 17 40 g amp WL nm i DR km i PW us i AVG 9 Sec start gt nO H sai asediaiiel km Continue Events Connection Check Level Connection level failed Fiber may be shorter than approx 48 meters 160 ft Clean all optical connectors Switch ends of patch cord Use another patch cord Reflect dB dB km j Wavelength mm i Pass Fail i Total Loss dB ORL dB Cancel ETT Fiber Visualizer Thresholds Figure 5 19 Connection Check Bad Connection To correct a low connection Press the ESC key or Cancel f6 to abort the current test Clean all of the optical connectors Press the Start key to re start the test If the Connection Check is still low press the ESC key or Cancel f6 Switch the ends of the patch cord and press the Start key again If the Connection Check is still low press the ESC key or Cancel f6 and then replace the patch cord ON RS DI DA a 7 Press the Start key to re start the test Note Fibers shorter than approximately 48 meters 160 ft will generally result in a low connection 5 52 MT9083 Ser
405. l size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to copy Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the selected files are pasted to their new location Use the following procedure to copy all of the files in a directory folder To copy all files in a directory or folder 1 5 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 8 13 on page 8 34 or the Load screen see Figure 8 14 on page 8 39 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the files to be copied Press the Down Arrow key and highlight the first file in the selected directory folder if not already highlighted Press More f6 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 8 Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new di
406. lative Loss dB This field displays the total loss Cum Loss dB up to the selected event expressed in dB Note The Total Loss Cum Loss dB display differs depending on the Force Total Loss setting See Preferences 2 2 on page 4 9 If set ON the result is displayed for all waveforms If set OFF is displayed if the measured waveform is abnormal MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 41 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Pass Fail Thresholds Events whose loss exceeds the Pass Fail Thresholds are highlighted in red in the Event Table If within the Pass Fail Thresholds only Total Loss is highlighted in green in the Event Table OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Gp 9 00h_ 80 5 Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 5 8439km axe 0 152 kk kkk 2 12 1526km 1 812 40 495 0 201 1 274 Manual Test 3 32 2436km 0 780 49 960 0 201 7 114 4 52 4877km EM Fiber End 32 415 0 204 Real Time off Wavelength 1550 Range f Pulse width Display From Origin o 25 50 100km A 52 4877 km 2 Pt Loss SUMMARY PASS k Total Events 4 B 52 4877 km 0 000 Fiber Length 52 4877 km A gt B 0 0000 km Refi 32 418 Total Loss Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 4 16 OTDR Standard Analysis Screen Event Summary ON Note To disable Pass Fail display set all of the Pass Fail Thresholds in Th
407. layed in the lower left portion of the Trace graph To activate the Trace Overview 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Trace Overview Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Real Time Averages Real Time Averages is not applicable to OTDR Construction mode Real Time Attenuation Real Time Attenuation is not applicable to OTDR Construction mode Display Mode After Analysis The Display Mode After Analysis setting is used to set the post analysis display mode To set the Display Mode After Analysis 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Display Mode After Analysis 2 Press Enter The Display Mode After Analysis dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired setting End Break The display mode focuses on the end break event Full Trace The full trace is displayed in Display from Origin mode Current The display mode and cursor positions remain unchanged 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Display Mode After Analysis field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 7 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Preferences 2 2 Press Preferences 2 2 f3 to access the Preferences 2 2 screen and set the status for the following Preferen
408. layed in the lower section of the Loss Mode Measurement and Reflectance area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 when either Auto or Manual is selected on the Preferences screen in Setups The reflectance reading may also contain an S indicator see Reflectance on page 4 41 for details on the S indicators The reflectance measurement is made relative to Cursor A when set to Auto and relative to Cursors A and B when set to Manual MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 17 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Auto Reflectance Mode Auto Reflectance mode requires placement of Cursor A only and automatically makes the measurement based upon the cursor placement There are restrictions on the placement of Cursor A detailed in the following procedure Note The following procedure applies to the OTDR Standard and OTDR Fault Locate applications only To perform auto reflectance measurements 1 Press the Setup key Press Preferences f2 3 Set the Reflectance Calculation to Auto See Reflectance on page 4 16 for details 4 Press Range Pulse Width f4 the Distance Range Pulse width and Resolution dialog appears Set the following e Set the Distance Range selecting the shortest possible range following the fiber length plus 25 rule e Set the Pulse width 1000ns is a good typical setting This setting generally provides a combination of good range and good resolution e Set the Resolution to H
409. le Name Date Time al Header AUTO15500003 SOR 12 11 22 11 03 AUTO15500002 SOR 12 11 22 10 59 AUTO13100002 SOR 12 11 22 10 55 sort AUTO13100001 SOR 12 11 22 10 51 New Folder Delete More gt gt Selected File Size Figure 4 39 Save Screen Edit the filename if desired or continue at step 6 to use the current filename To edit the filename press the Enter key The File Name dialog box appears If no USB keyboard is connected Refer to Renaming a File on page 3 32to input file name 4 100 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to return to the Save screen Press the f1 key to complete the manual save 2 When all of the desired characters are entered in the File Name field press OK f6 to return to the Save screen 3 Press Save Trace f1 to complete the manual save MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 101 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Headers Headers hold valuable information about the trace files which may save a considerable amount of time when recalling traces for comparison The header does not require repopulating each time a new trace is collected Information entered on the Header screen is retained until such a time as the header requires editing Editing the header on a rec
410. life under various state and local laws it may Gey be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste a 9 stream Check with your local solid waste officials for wa details in your area for recycling options or proper disposal Before disposing of this product discharge the battery and Li ion then mail the battery to your local recycling center 1 Attach the battery pack to the product 2 Disconnect the AC adapter if used 3 Turn the power switch to on 4 Leave the product on until the power indicator goes off the battery is now discharged yn Remove the battery 6 Insulate the battery terminals with adhesive tape 7 Mailit to your Anritsu Service or Sales office or to the following address ANRITSU COMPANY 490 Jarvis Drive Morgan Hill CA 95037 2809 U S A MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual xv For EU amp EFTA Customers For EU amp EFTA Customers Please Recycle Read the following when using products to which the marks shown to the left are attached ey The product that you have purchased contains a GF rechargeable battery The battery is recyclable At the end a 9 of its useful life under various state and local laws it may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste Check with your local solid waste disposal officials Li ion for details of recycling options or proper disposal in your area Before disposing of this product discharge the battery
411. light source to set it to the desired wavelength Allow 5 minutes for the light source to stabilize 4 Make sure that the modulation mode for the MT9083 Series optional Power Meter and the external light source are set to CW e On the MT9083 Series check the red legend on the Modulation f4 softkey Toggle the softkey until the red legend reads CW if necessary e Follow the instructions for the given external light source to set it to CW Continuous Wave mode 5 Start the transmit mode for the external light source Highlight the Reference field and paste the current Power reading as the reference See To paste the current Power Meter reading as a reference on page 8 14 for details The Loss reading indicates 0 00 dB and the Reference field displays the reference value for the current wavelength 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 for any additional wavelengths to be tested Note The Reference value s just stored are retained on power down of the MT9083 Series MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 23 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Test Procedure L 3 8 24 On the MT9083 Series highlight the Threshold field to set a Pass Fail threshold for the current wavelength if desired See To set the Threshold value on page 8 15 for details If using the two patch cord method disconnect the patch cords at the inline connector If using the one patch cord method disconnect the patch cord f
412. literal string filename element for Site A This is typically the location where the MT9083 Series is located such as a City Central Office Patch Panel etc The characters in the Site A field 9 replace the a placeholder characters in the filename The Site B field is the text field which contains the literal string filename element for Site B This is typically the end point location of the current fiber under test such as a City Central Office Patch Panel etc The characters in the Site B field replace the b placeholder characters in the filename Other The Other field is commonly used to add any descriptive text into the base 9 filename such as the Cable ID Text entered into this field replaces the o placeholder character in the filename To edit the Site A Site B and or Other fields 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired field Site A Site B or Other and then press the Enter key The Text Entry dialog boxdialog box appears see Figure 6 9 below If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 2 to enter the name using the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to use the new name or press the ESC key to close the Text Entry dialog boxdialog box without changing the name Repeat this step until all des
413. ll Wavelengths MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 81 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 3 Press Exit f6 to close the OTDR Parameters screen or move the highlight to the next desired parameter to continue Use the following procedure to set the IOR Index of Refraction and BSC Backscatter Coefficient for each available wavelength To set the IOR and BSC values in Wavelength All mode 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the IOR BSC field for the for the first desired wavelength and then press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The IOR BSC dialog appears see Figure 4 25 on page 4 73 2 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys to move the white arrow to the Fiber Type field if necessary and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired fiber type When the desired fiber type is highlighted press the Enter key or the Rotary knob Or If the fiber type is not listed select Other and then move the white arrow to the IOR and BSC fields Use the Numeric keypad to enter the desired values When the IOR and BSC values are entered press the Enter key or the Rotary knob Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value 3 The dialog box closes and the new settings are displayed in the IOR BSC field 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each desired wavelength 5 Press Exit f6 to close the OTDR Parameters screen To reset the O
414. ll low press Cancel f6 5 Switch the ends of the patch cord and press Continue f1 once or twice again 6 68 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 Ifthe Connection Check is still low press Cancel f6 and then replace the patch cord 7 Press Continue f1 once or twice again to re enter the Connect Check screen Note Fibers shorter than approximately 48 meters 160 ft will generally result in a low connection If the Connection Check remains LOW after following the steps in the preceding procedure contact the Anritsu Technical Support Center at Phone 1 800 ANRITSU or 972 761 4600 Canada U S Latin and South America Fax 1 972 671 1877 e mail us sales anritsu com Web www anritsu com MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 69 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Working with OTDR Construction Trace Files Deleting Files Use the Save screen see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 to delete any data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can delete a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To delete a file 1 At the completion of a Construction mode test the Save screen appears see Figure 6 25 on page 6 64 Note You can only access the Save screen in OTDR Construction mode when File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 23 on page 6 61 2 Us
415. ll of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to return to the Report Settings Header screen 5 Repeat Step 2 through 4 Selecting Data to Output The following items can be output in the report 5 46 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode e Report Header e File Header e Fiber Pass Fail e Graphical Events e Events Table e Trace e VIP result e Logo To select output data 1 Press Report F4 on Fiber Visualizer screen or Trace screen to display the Report Settings screen 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired field and then press the Enter key The Text Entry dialog boxdialog box appears 3 To output logo select the logo file field and press the Enter key 4 Select the desired image and press Select f1 Note Only image files in JPEG and PNG can be output as Logo MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 47 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Fault Locate Testing Running a Fault Locate Test Fiber Visualizer provides an easy method to determine the end fault location of a fiber To run a Fault Locate test 1 Power up the MT9083 Series if necessary 2 Highlight Fiber Visualizer on the Top Menu screen and then press the Enter key Fiber Visualizer 2013 Apr 14 11 04 gS WL 8 nm i DR km i PW US H AVG Sec start kk kkk KM Test Mode Events Ana Press the
416. load a Primary trace from Mass Storage 1 Press the File key The Load screen appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 4 Files 1151 MB Free Medium Internal Memory Folder fe Load File Name Date Time Primary AUTO15500003 SOR A 12 11 22 11 03 AUTO15500002 SOR 12 11 22 10 59 Load AUTO13100002 SOR 12 11 22 10 55 Overlay AUTO13100001 SOR 12 11 22 10 51 a Sort New Folder Delete More gt gt v Selected File Size 42759 Figure 4 35 Load Screen 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file 3 Select Load Primary f1 the Load screen closes and the selected trace is displayed in the Trace grid in the Primary trace position To load an Overlay trace from Mass Storage 1 Press the File key The Load screen appears 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file 3 Select Load Overlay f2 the Load Overlay dialog appears See Figure 4 36 on page 4 91 4 90 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Medium Internal Memory 4 Files 1151 MB Free Folder Load File Name Date Time Primary Z AUTO15500003 SOR 12 11 22 11 03 Load Overlay AUTO15500002 SOR 12 11 22 10 59 Load AUTO13100002 SOR 12 11 22 10 55 Overlay AUTO13100001 SOR h Setups 12 11 22 10 51 Sort New Folder Delete More gt gt x Selected File Size 42759 Figure 4 3
417. load a VIP image VIPI or PNG 1 Launch the VIP application from the Top Menu if it is not already running Press File to display the Load screen appears Select the desired VIPI or PNG file 4 Press Load f1 then the Load screen closes and the selected VIPI or PNG file is now displayed on the VIP screen Note The following items are not changed even if either VIPI or PNG file is loaded e Probe Model e Tip Type e Test Profile Sorting Files The Sort function allows you to change the order in which files are listed in mass storage files saved to the unit s internal memory or to a USB memory stick Files can be sorted by type Name or Time Date in ascending or descending order To set the Sort type Press the File key The Load screen appears 2 Press Sort 3 The Sort By dialog appears 3 Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the white arrow so that it is positioned to the left of the first selection in the desired pane of the dialog Sort or By 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desire setting within the pane 5 With the desired settings highlighted in both panes press the Enter key The dialog closes and the files are listed in the selected order MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 23 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option New Folder Use the following procedure to create a new folder 11 24 Press the File key the Load sc
418. lose the dialog and return the previous setting The following settings are accessed via the General screen e Date modify the date displayed e Local Time modify the time displayed e Time difference from UTC set the difference in hours of the local time from Coordinated Universal Time For example US Eastern time is 5hrs from UTC e Date display format select the format for the Date displayed MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 7 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Auto Launch select a specific test application to launch at power up Printer select the printer type Note There are printers type available at the current software release Paper feed turn the paper feed on or off Color Theme select your screen color preference Language select the language used on screen USB Video Output turn Video Output on or off Auto Backlight Off set an idle time to automatically turn off the display backlight Auto Power Off set an idle time to automatically power down the unit Instrument Power Save Mode set the power save mode status to conserve power when making successive OTDR measurements Date setting To set the Date 1 Highlight Date and then press the Enter key 2 The Date dialog appears Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the highlight to the desired section of the date 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to increment or decrement the highlighted s
419. loss 40 dB Temperature 25 C A 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications MT9083B2 ACCESS Master L ee rr ar Ramak i e Maer Composition e Option 053 SMF 1 31 1 55 pm OTDR e Option 055 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 65 ym OTDR e Option 056 SMF 1 31 1 49 1 55 ym OTDR Option 057 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 625 pm OTDR e Option 058 SMF 1 31 1 49 1 55 1 625 um OTDR e Option 063 MMF 0 85 1 3 um amp SMF 1 31 1 55 pm OTDR MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 3 Appendix A Specifications MT9083B2 ACCESS Master item Specifications Remark Dynamic range Opt 053 1 31 1 55 um Temperature 25 C Opt 055 1 31 1 55 1 65 um Distance range 100 41 40 34 dB km Typ 42 41 35 dB 25 C Averaging time 180 Opt 056 1 31 1 49 1 55 pm ii AAR At 1 65 um With Typ 42 41 41 dB 25 C background light Opt 057 1 31 1 55 1 625 um 1 31 1 55 um 19 39 38 37 dB den Ow ent Typ 40 39 38 dB 25 C Opt 058 1 31 1 49 1 55 1 625 um 41 40 40 39 dB Typ 42 41 41 40 dB 25 C Opt 063 0 85 1 3 1 31 1 55 pm Temperature 25 C SMF 1 31 1 55 pm Distance range 41 40 dB Typ 42 41dB 25 C 100 km for SMF MMF 0 85 1 3 pm 25 km for MME 28 27 dB Typ 29 28dB 25 C Averaging time 180 sec Pulse width The dynamic range is lowered by about 3 dB when a 50 125 um optical fiber is measured For 1 31 1 55 pm using an MMF option 20 ps For 0 85 pm 500 ns For 1 3 pm 4 ps
420. mage file Please select output type using the function keys e Press Printer f1 The message changes to Please wait Printing The MT9083 Series returns to the Loss Table screen when the printout is completed 9 26 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Optical Light Source OLS Overview The MT9083 Series includes an optical light source for fiber identification measurements as standard equipment Fiber identification measurement provides a comparatively simple method to approximate the location of a break point in an optical fiber Using the unit s optical light source to inject light at a specific wavelength and modulation into the fiber under test you can then use a fiber identifier to locate the break by finding the section of fiber where the signal drops off Accessing Optical Light Source Mode To start Light Source mode 1 Press the Top Menu key The Top Menu screen appears 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Light Source then press the Enter key The Optical Light Source screen appears Light Source 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Gs 9 00h_ 80 4 Light Source Off ine E Modulation cw Mam __ oy El Anritsu POA a Figure 9 11 Optical Light Source Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 27 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Optic
421. mber of illuminated LEDs as shown in the following table Remaining battery charge guide 0 to 5 Goo 3 im 5 to 25 The LED flashes at 5 to 10 BIDS EE 25 to 50 wI dI 50 to 75 75 to 100 You can also check the remaining battery power by viewing the Battery Status area located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in Figure 2 5 on page 2 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 13 Chapter 2 Overview Remaining battery power Estimated available time Figure 2 5 Battery Status Area Indicators If the entire battery indicator is colored green the battery has been fully charged 100 As the battery is discharged the green field lessens The remaining battery charge is expressed numerically to the right of the battery indicator This field displays the remaining battery charge in percent and the estimated available time h forecast from the average power consumption over the previous 1 minute period When the remaining battery charge falls below 10 the battery indicator flashes When the remaining battery charge falls below 3 following message appears Battery running low Please connect the AC adapter and the warning buzzer sounds When the remaining battery charge falls below 1 the following message appears Battery is empty and then the unit automatically powers off 2 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview Note
422. me Murray Coleman Head of Customer Service EMEA ANRITSU EMEA Ltd Address City 200 Capability Green Luton Country Bedfordshire LU1 3LU United Kingdom xxviii MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C Tick Conformity Marking C Tick Conformity Marking Anritsu affixes the C Tick mark on the following product s in accordance with the regulation to indicate that they conform to the EMC framework of Australia New Zealand C Tick marking ON274 1 Product Model Model MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master 2 Applied Standards EMC Emissions EN 61326 1 2006 Class A equipment MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual XX X Technical Support Services and Repairs Technical Support Services and Repairs XXX Our Technical Support Center is at your service to answer technical questions and provide return authorization for service repairs or other returns Technical Support Center Phone 1 800 ANRITSU or 972 761 4600 Canada U S Latin and South America Fax 1 972 671 1877 e mail us sales anritsu com Web www anritsu com All returns require a Return Materials Authorization RMA number If possible return the unit in its original shipping materials If the original shipping materials are not available please contact the Technical Support Center for instructions Whether or not the warranty period of your Anritsu product has expired the unit can be returned to Anritsu for repairs Out of warranty repair
423. me dialog box 2 When all of the desired characters are entered press OK f6 to use the new Base Filename or press ESC to close the FileName dialog box without changing the Base Filename MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 17 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Start Number Use this field to establish a start number for the auto increment section of the Base Filename You can set a start number for each test wavelength available on the MT9083 Series in use or apply the same start number to all wavelengths The range of setting for the Start Number is from 1 to 9999 set in increments of l Note The wavelength listed in parentheses after the text Start Number will vary with the current test wavelength setting To set the Start Number 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Start Number and then press the Enter key The Start Number dialog appears Start Number 1310 1 9999 Apply to All Wavelengths Yes No Figure 5 8 Start Number Dialog 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the Start number Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 3 Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select either Yes or No in the Apply to All Wavelengths field 4 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the start number for the current test wavelength or for all wavelengths depending on the selection made in step 3 is set 5 18 MT9083 Seri
424. ment Port 2 CAUTION Never force the connector ferrule or insert it at an angle into the adapter Optical fibers are susceptible to loss from microbends or other stress Position the patch cord to minimize mechanical strain 2 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview Visual Fault Locator Connection The optional Visual Fault Locator VFL is equipped with a 2 5 mm universal fiber connector adapter which accepts the ferrule of most standard fiber connectors Note Not all MT9083 Series are equipped with the VFL option To connect fiber to the Visual Fault Locator 1 Open the cover on the VLD port 2 Insert the ferrule of a connectorized fiber into the connector on the VLD port nmsAlbuy VLD Port Figure 2 7 VLD Port MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 21 Chapter 2 Overview Connecting Peripheral Devices The standard configuration of the MT9083 Series includes two USB ports which allows a USB memory or personal computer to be connected Figure 2 8 USB Ports 1 USB Down port 2 USB Up to PC port USB Up to PC Port By connecting the USB UP to PC port of the MT9083 Series to a personal computer via a USB A to USB B cable you can access the internal memory of the unit directly from your computer While a personal computer is connected to the MT9083 Series accessing the internal memory from the MT9083 Series via the Save key is disabled See USB Video Ou
425. mote screen software Power supply DC Rating 12 V AC Rating 100 to 240 V frequency 50 60 Hz when using the dedicated AC adapter Battery pack Dedicated lithium ion battery Power consumption 20 W max when charged Standard 4 W with backlight set to low sweeping halted Battery operating time Continuous operating time 12 0 hours typical Telcordia GR 196 CORE Issue 2 September 2010 With backlight Off at 25 C Operating voltage within the range of 10 to 10 from the rated voltage A 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common Cont d Battery charging time 5 hours maximum with power off Time required for typical charging until the charging rate reaches 90 Temperature range 5 to 30 C Dimensions 270 W x 165 H x 61 D mm excluding protrusion When protector mounted 284 W x 200 H x 77 D mm Mass Max 1 6 kg with Option 053 installed Max 1 9 kg including battery pack with Option 053 installed Max 2 6 kg including battery pack with Option 010 protector mounted and Option 053 installed Operating temperature 10 to 50 C lt 80 No condensation Excluding humidity Opt002 004 005 007 Storage temperature 20 to 60 C lt 80 humidity Conforms to MIL T 28800E Class 3 EMC EN 61326 1 2006 Class A Table 2 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 Class A Conforms to MIL
426. moval 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Patch cord Removal 2 Press Enter The Auto Patch cord Removal dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no Auto Patch cord Removal currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the Auto Patch cord Removal 3 Ifthe Auto Patch cord Removal dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the event number setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired event number setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 5 Press Enter again to close the dialog and save the current setting The event tables shows the distance information of dummy fiber Fiber Visualizer 2012 Jul 1 10 00 E 9 00h_ 80 Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 0 0000km 1 806 40 528 6k 2 20 0909km 0 777 49 990 0 201 5 834 Manual Test 3 40 3351km EM Fiber End 32 446 0 205 10 753 dB Horiz Shift 12 1526 km Vert Shift 0 000 dB 3 Real Time F 4 Off 13 0 0 0 Wavelength 13 0 Test 26 0 Parameters Display From A A 0 0000 km 2 Pt Loss 1550nmSM IOR 1 468200 B 40 3351 km 10 754 100 1 km RES 5 003m A gt B 40 3351 km Refl 40 533 4 us HR AVG 24576 Thresholds Fiber Visualizer Figure 5 5 Auto Patch Scre
427. n Setup Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 1 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Setups OTDR Construction Mode Setups for the OTDR Construction mode are accessed via the Setup key This section allows you to customize the preferences and parameters for a given data collection or a series of collections Entering OTDR Construction Setups 1 Start OTDR Construction mode The OTDR Construction Setup screen appears 2 Press the Setup key The following Setup screens are available e General f1 e Preferences 1 2 f2 e Preferences 2 2 f3 e Thresholds f4 Press the softkey f1 f4 that corresponds to the desired settings category General Setups Press General f1 to access the General setups screen if not already displayed The General setups pertain to general setting for the MT9083 Series and are detailed in General Screen Settings on pages 3 7 3 15 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Local Time 10 00 General Time difference from UTC 0 0 Hours Date display Format Year Month Day Auto Launch None Preferences Printer BL 8ORII SD1 31 2 Paper feed On Color Theme Grayscale ee Language English USB Video Output Off Auto Backlight Off None LULLED Auto Power Off None Instrument Power Save mode High Used to modify date About Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 2 General Setups Screen OTDR Construction Mode 6 2 MT9083 Ser
428. n see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 Lf OTDR Construction Parameters 80 j 2012 Jul 1 10 00 9 00h 1310 1550 on Range Range 100 km BEATS Pw 3 ns HR PW 4000 ns HR Num Avgs 15 Sec Num Avgs 30 Sec Apply to All Wavelengths Apply to All Wavelengths IOR BSC 1 467700 78 50 IOR BSC 1 468200 81 50 1625 N A Range 0 5 km PW 3 ns HR Num Avgs 15 Sec Cancel Apply to All Wavelengths 0R Bsc 1 468500 81 50 Exit Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 10 OTDR Construction Parameters screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Setting the OTDR Construction Test Parameters Each pane in the OTDR Construction Parameters screen provides access to the basic test parameters per wavelengths available on the unit Range Resolution Pulse Width Dead zone Number of Averages Averaging Time IOR Index of Refraction BSC Backscatter Coefficient In addition each pane has an option button which when selected sets the basic test parameters to the same setting for all available wavelengths Setting the Distance Range Resolution and Pulse Width The Range Resolution and Pulse Width settings determine the trace data distance range and resolution value data point spacing as well as the pulse width used for the test cycle To set the Range Resolution and Pulse Width 1 With
429. n ies a a A a 4 40 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual v OB KIM ances tithe heh eye heed ee eee 4 41 Cumulative LOSS CB c ccseeseeeeeesesecececeeceecueueueeeeesaueneaeseessseeeeeess 4 41 Pass Fail Threshold Siiri cede si centre veins i eae 4 42 Editing Events Overview 0 ccccceccce cece eeeee eee teaeseteeee seas eeeeaaeennaees 4 43 Adding an Event Aidian a p Se ih ered te eatin nities 4 43 Editing AAA E E A E AT 4 45 Moving am Event neess a anaE A EAE A A 4 46 Pasting am EVent e raene a Ar oa aas a n Aea 4 47 Deleting an EVENT ssirnurnn enori e TE a ea EE 4 49 Softkeys OTDR Standard Mode cccccccccsssesssecesseeeseneessaees 4 50 Softkey Levels iiini anier a aa aaa idae ke iini 4 50 Level ONG SOMKEYS iiaeia aieas n aliens aan ie a aE aaae ene 4 50 Level TWO SOPftKCYS nissnsriieiaisrii aaa ia iaai 4 52 Level Three SoftkeyS iatan inan aa aaaea ietab natti 4 53 Level Four SoftkeySiisrsiiipoeriiuiiiiipinitai aane iiiaae 4 54 CUrsOn SOFtKEYS iaeiiio aidien deep hands aau anand aa aAa aaua aaa R A 4 55 Shift Mode Softkeys ccccccecceeseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeesaeseaeesaeeeeeeees 4 55 Template Mode Softkeys cccccccceceeeeeceeceeeeeeeseeeeteeeeeeeeseeeeeees 4 56 Extension softkeys scccssscescdescenegagevsueesagedsbeetuaeguineceeagegedeeddedtneveneeeaevs 4 57 Selecting and Positioning CULSOMS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeaeeeeeaeeeenneees 4 57 Setting the Act
430. n of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copy righted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish
431. n press the Enter key The Enabled dialog appears 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired AutoSave Enabled status Off On or Verify 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the AutoSave Enabled status is set Note Setting the AutoSave Enabled status to On automatically sets and locks the Auto Filename Enabled status at the On setting About Screen See About Screen on page 3 26 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 29 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Trace Screen OTDR Standard The Trace screen appears when you start Standard OTDR mode The following figure show the Trace screen when an OTDR laser source firing as indicated by item 2 the Laser On icon OTDR Standard Press ESC to stop the test 2012 Jul 1 10 00 C 5 00h 80 5 Manual Test Off Real Time Off Wavelength i i Range 52 0 Pulse width Display From o 25 50 Origin A 0 0000 km 2 Pt Loss SaaS B 52 4877 km 30 049 WL 1550nm SM DR 100 1 km More gt gt A gt B 52 4877 km Refi i Aok Pw 4us HR AVG 25 60 Analysis Next Event Figure 4 10 Trace Screen with Laser On Indicator Trace graph Laser On icon Cursor distance information mM WO N e Loss mode Measurement and Reflectance Fiber test parameters 6 Softkeys Trace Graph See Trace Graph OTDR Standard
432. n press the Enter key The name of the selected folder appears below the Medium field If you are not saving to a specific folder skip step 3 and continue at step 4 4 Press Select f1 The AutoSave setups screen appears with the selected directory displayed in the AutoSave Directory field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Base Filename The Base Filename field provides a template for use when generating an auto filename You can enter a base filename of up to 30 characters with a three character file extension To set a Base Filename 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Base Filename and then press the Enter key The Filename dialog boxdialog box appears see Figure 5 7 below If no USB keyboard is connected refer to Renaming a File on page 3 32 to input the file name If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to use the new base file name or press the ESC key to close the Base Filename dialog box without changing the base file name 2014 Jan 26 15 31 Base Filename AUTO1310nm0001 S0R AUTO WLEN NUM Site prep Sector location name Lk iis Aco Sr Ee ees ak RHE eae CBE eee lia eC Kall o G e lt Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 5 7 Base Filename Screen File Na
433. n specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library
434. nal memory or to a USB memory stick Files can be sorted by type Name or Time Date in ascending or descending order To set the Sort type 1 At the completion of a Fault Locate test press the Save key The Save screen appears 2 Press Sort 3 The Sort By dialog appears 2012 Jul 1 10 00 File Name fauTos500002S0R l Medium Internal Memory 10 Files 1150 MB Free Save Trace Folder File Name gae By Date Time Name aj Header AUTO15500002 S0R Descending Date Time 12 11 22 11 48 AUTO16250001 S0R 12 41 22 11 47 AUTO16250000 S0R 12 41 22 11 37 ae AUTO13100000 S0R 12 11 22 11 37 AUTO15500001 50R 12 41 22 11 33 AUTO15500000 SOR 12 11 22 11 28 AUTO15500004 SOR 12 11 22 11 18 Woyceoider AUTO15500003 SOR 12 11 22 11 03 AUTO13100002 SOR 12 11 22 10 55 AUTO13100001 SOR 12 41 22 10 51 Delete More gt gt Selected File Size Figure 5 27 Sort By Dialog 3 Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the white arrow so that it is positioned to the left of the first selection in the desired pane of the dialog Sort or By 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desire setting within the pane 5 With the desired settings highlighted in both panes press the Enter key The dialog closes and the files are listed in the selected order MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Printing Fault Locate Data Files Fault Locate date files c
435. nd is red when the laser is on e The indicator reads Off and the background is black when the laser off e The background of the indicator pulsates changing from Red On to Black Off when blink mode is active Port Connection Indicator The Port Connection Indicator shows which port to use for the Visual Fault Locator 10 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 10 Visual Fault Locate VFL Mode Softkeys Light Source Off On f1 Press the Light Source Off softkey to start the Visual Fault Locator The red legend on the softkey changes to On and the Visual Fault Locator s laser starts firing as indicated by the Visual Fault Locator On Off indicator see item 1 in Figure 10 2 on page 10 2 Press the softkey again to turn off the laser The red legend changes to Off and the Visual Fault Locator On Off indicator shows that the laser is not firing Blink On Off f2 Press the Blink Off softkey to set the Visual Fault Locator to a 1 Hz modulated mode The red legend on the softkey changes to On and the background of the Visual Fault Locator On Off indicator pulsates changing from Red On to Black Off when blink mode is active Press the softkey again to turn off the blink mode Note Take care not to press too hard when inserting the APC connector as this may scratch the sides of the ferrule A WARNING NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the MT 9083
436. nd measure the peak level half amplitude as shown in the following figure then check that measured results are with the specifications Peak Level Pulse Width Figure 12 5 Example Peak Level Half Amplitude measurement 6 When measuring another pulse width continuously return to the OTDR Standard Trace screen and set the pulse width again the repeat measurement from step 3 above in the same manner MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 17 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Dynamic Range one way back scattered light dynamic range test Check that the dynamic range satisfies the specifications This test is performed for each wavelength and pulse width Background light should be injected for this measurement For example when the wavelength is 1650 nm and the pulse width is 20 us the background light of 19 dBm 1550 nm is injected Background light is created using the reference light source and optical variable attenuator Connect the devices as shown in the following figure Connection with no background light MT9083 Series SM Optical Fiber 60 km or GI Fiber 12 km Far End Grease for connection MT9083 Series SM Optical Fiber 20 km Remote End Grease for connection Optical Coupler Optical Variable Reference Attenuator Light Source Background light 19 dBm 1550 nm Optical Fiber Optical Fiber Figure 12 6 Dynamic Range Test Connection Diagram T
437. new settings are displayed in the red legend on the softkey Dial IOR This can be used to change the IOR in response to an event when a measurement result is present MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 73 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode To set the IOR with Dial IOR Press IOR BSC f2 The IOR BSC dialog appears see Figure 4 25 Press Dial IOR f1 Use the Right and Left to select digit Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to change the IOR 5 To confirm the change press Accept f1 To cancel press Cancel f2 mop p Note When the Wavelength is set to All IOR cannot be changed Setting the Loss Mode To set the Loss Mode 1 Press Loss Mode f3 The Loss Mode dialog appears Loss Mode 2 Pt Loss 2 Pt LSA dB km Loss dB Km LSA Figure 4 26 Loss Mode Dialog 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired loss mode For details on the various loss modes see Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements 3 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the red legend on the softkey changes to the selected loss mode The Loss Mode may be changed on the fly while either a Real Time or an averaging cycle is running by using the procedure above The test will restart using the new loss mode 4 74 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Shifting Trace Data The primary trace data c
438. ng compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessories and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containi
439. ng that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also compile or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must sup ply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete ma chine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 29 Appendix C Software License C 30 executable containing the modified Li
440. ngs for this parameter is 1 dB to 99 dB in 1 dB increments To set the Fiber End threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Fiber End Press Enter The Fiber End dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the fiber end threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Fiber End threshold is set Macro Bend Determines the Macro Bend detect value equal to or above which will be reported in the Events analysis Note Macro Bend detection requires a unit with at least two single mode operating wavelengths one at 1310 nm and a second at either 1550 nm or 1625 nm The range of settings for this parameter is 0 3 dB to 2 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Macro Bend threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Macro Bend Press Enter The Macro Bend dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the Macro Bend threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Macro Bend threshold is set Splitter Loss Determines the Splitter Loss value equal to or above which will be reported as Splitter event in the Events analysis MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 13 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode The range of settings f
441. nly available if an SM unit is fitted The Dead zone f1 key becomes unavailable if an MM unit is fitted e Ifthe range of the selected pulse width does not fall between 50 ns to 2000 ns the f1 key is grayed out and set to Standard HR 4 70 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Display From Three Display From modes are available for viewing the trace graph Display From A Display From B and Display From Origin e Press Display From f5 to toggle through the three modes The legend on the softkey changes to the current Display From mode Display From Origin Keeps the origin 0 distance and 0 dB in the upper left corner of the trace graph Display From A Displays the A cursor intercept with the trace data in the center of the trace graph view Display From B Displays the B cursor intercept with the trace data in the center of the trace graph view Setting the Average Time Average Count Specify the Average Time Average Count by either selecting one of the four pre set values or by entering the desired value in the field at the bottom of the dialog see Figure 4 24 on page 4 72 Note Average Count can only be accessed when the language for the MT9083 Series is set to Chinese See Language on page 3 10 for details on changing the current language selection Actual average time may be longer than the set average time depending on the resolution and distance
442. ntity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A 1 7 Larger Work means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License 1 8 License means this document 1 8 1 Licensable means having the right to grant to the maximum extent possible whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired any and all of the rights conveyed herein 1 9 Modifications means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications When Covered Code is released as a series of files a Modification is A Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or y 8 8 previous Modifications B Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications 1 10 Original Code means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code and which at the time ofits release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 17 Appendix C Software License 1 10 1 Patent Claims means any patent claim s now owned or hereafter acquired including without limitation method process and apparatus claims in any patent Licensable by grantor 1 11 Source Code m
443. o highlight Splitter Loss Press Enter The Splitter Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs If the Splitter Loss dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set the Splitter Loss threshold to None when it is currently set in dBs To set the Splitter Loss threshold to None ly 3 About Screen Highlight Splitter Loss and then press the Enter key The Splitter Loss dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None See Password Settings on page 3 15 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 19 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode OTDR Construction Setup Screen The OTDR Construction Setup screen appears when you start a Construction mode test OTDR Construction Setup 2012 Jul 1 10 00 9 00h 80 4 Base Filename ab_o G Filename NearFari6250ther 004 Test Direction A gt B Site A
444. o offset is executed Be sure to perform light shielding and execute zero offset before measurement Optical Power Loss Measurements The following procedure outlines how to measure optical power loss This procedure method consist of two parts a reference procedure and then the test procedure Reference Procedure 1 Power up the MT9083 Series and enter Power Meter mode 2 Connect the Optical Power Meter to the external light source using either a single patch cord or two patch cords and an inline connector 3 Power up the external light source 4 Make sure that the Optical Power Meter and the external light source are set to the same wavelength e On the MT9083 Series press Power Meter Wavelength f1 until the Power Meter Wavelength indicator displays the desired wavelength Note Pressing Power Meter Wavelength f1 on single wavelength MT9083 Series units will sound an error tone e Follow the instructions for the given external light source set it to the desired wavelength 5 Start the transmit mode for the external light source 6 Highlight the Reference field and paste the current Power reading as the reference See To paste the current Power Meter reading as a reference on page 9 10 for details The Loss reading indicates 0 0 dB and the Reference field displays the reference value for the current wavelength 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 for any additional wavelengths to be tested Note The Reference
445. o the opposite end of the fiber to be tested 4 Make sure that the Optical Light Source on Unit A and optional Power Meter on Unit B are set to the same wavelength 5 Press Light Source Off f1 on Unit A The red legend on the softkey changes to On 6 Onthe MT9083 Series designated as Unit B press Loss Table f6 The Loss Table screen appears see Figure 8 7 on page 8 9 7 Press Add f1 to add the current test data to the Loss Table 8 28 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all fibers are tested in the current direction Unit A transmitting Unit B receiving 9 Repeat steps 1 through 8 reversing the roles of the Unit A and Unit B making Unit B the transmitter Optical Light Source and Unit A the receiver optional Power Meter Note It is a good practice to save the Loss Table periodically for example every ten fibers as you store the loss readings to prevent loss of data in the event of a power failure You can replace the loss readings in a file if you need to retest a fiber at a later date See Editing the Loss Table on page 8 30 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 29 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Editing the Loss Table Each row in the table represents a tested fiber A Loss Table can contain up to a maximum of 999 rows The following edits can be made to a Loss Table e Adding test data to
446. ob to highlight the desired format Day Month Year Month Day Year Year Month Day Press the Enter key to save the selected format setting Auto Launch Auto Launch allows you to select a test application which will be automatically launched at start up To set the Auto Launch 1 Highlight Auto Launch and then press the Enter key 2 The Auto Launch dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired test application 3 Press the Enter key The MT9083 Series will automatically launch the selected test application at power up Printer There are printers supported at the current software release the BL 80RII and SD1 31 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 9 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 3 10 Paper Feed Setting the Paper feed to On will automatically advance the paper to the cutting position when a trace has finished printing To set the Paper feed 1 Highlight Paper feed and then press the Enter key 2 The Paper feed dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight either On or Off On The printer paper is automatically fed forward to the cutter after printout Off The printer paper is not fed forward to the cutter after P pap printout but is automatically fed forward just enough to prevent any overlap between images 3 Press the Enter key to save the selected Paper feed setting Note The print
447. ode e Allows high dynamic range measurements e Allows fast measurements e Can be used to test the path over each optical fiber split by the splitter included in the PON system To select the Dead zone mode in Wavelength All mode 1 With the OTDR Parameters screen displayed use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Range field or PW field for the for the first desired wavelength and then press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The Distance Range Resolution and Pulse width dialog appears see Figure 6 12 on page 6 33 Press Dead zone f1 and set the desired mode Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the newly selected Dead zone mode displays on the PW field Note e The Enhanced Range mode is only available if an SM unit is fitted The Dead zone f1 key becomes unavailable if an MM unit is fitted MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode e Ifthe range of the selected pulse width does not fall between 50 ns to 2000 ns the f1 key is grayed out and set to Standard HR OTDR Construction Parameters 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Go 9 00h 1310 1550 Dead zone i 7 Enhanced Range 0 5 km Range 100 km Range ER PW Distance Range Resolution R Num Avgs y Low Density Apply to All 1OR BSC 81 50 Range 0 5 km PW 3 ns HR Num amp vac 15 Ser Enhanced Range ER PON High Dynamic Range Standard HR High
448. ode 5 26 This area also contains scroll bars located at the top and left side of the trace graph which define the display range of the waveform Cursors The cursors see items 2 and 3 in Figure 5 13 on page 5 25 are the two vertical lines that extend from the top to the bottom of the trace graph The cursors allow you to extract power and distance information from the trace graph The active cursor is displayed in red and the inactive cursor is displayed in blue See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details on cursor use Horizontal Vertical Offset Trace data can be shifted horizontally or vertically by using the Shift Mode softkeys and the Rotary knob The distance offset horizontal and decibel offset vertical are displayed above the trace graph These values see item 4 in Figure 5 13 on page 5 25 in are only displayed when some type of shift is in use See Swap Overlay on page 5 58 for details on how to shift the trace Scale The vertical axis scale see item 6 in Figure 5 13 on page 5 25 is located on the left side of the trace graph and is expressed in dBs while the horizontal axis scale see item 5 in Figure 5 13 is located at the bottom of the trace graph and is expressed in the distance unit as set on the Preferences screen See Distance Display Units on page 5 4 for details dB Level Indicator The dB level indicator see item 7 in Figure 5 13 on page 5 25 denotes the interse
449. ody of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Library General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of pre serving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 31 Appendix C Software License C 32 NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT
450. of softkeys levels one two and three are available at all times while level four the editing function softkeys are only available when an Event Table is displayed Level One Softkeys Press f1 to start a new test using the currently set test parameters The red legend on the Manual Test softkey changes to On while the test is running Press f2 to start a Real Time test The red legend on the Real Time softkey changes to On while the test is running 4 50 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Press 3 to toggle through the available wavelengths The red legend on the softkey displays the current wavelength setting In addition dual tri and quad wavelength units also feature a Wavelength All setting See Setting the Source Wavelength to All on page 4 78 for details Note Pressing the Wavelength softkey on single wavelength units sounds an error tone Press f4 to set the Distance Range Pulse width and Resolution for the current test The red legends on the softkey display the current Distance Range and Pulse Width settings The red legends on the softkey also display the current Dead zone mode When Wavelength f3 is set to All f4 changes to the Test Parameters softkey Press f4 to display the Test Parameters screen See Setting the Test Parameters on page 4 78 for details Press 5 to set the Display From mode for viewing the trac
451. og appears 3 Highlight the desired setting ON Always displays Total Loss Cum Loss Wok kK OFF Depending on conditions Loss Cum Loss slot Note Total Loss Cum Loss cannot be displayed when is displayed for the Total e Anevent appeared before backscatter could be found after the launch reflection e An event exists 1 1 pulse widths after the launch backscatter e Fiber end cannot be detected 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Force Total Loss field 5 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Event Icon Movement Selects the direction of event icon movement when the encoder is turned To set the Event Icon Movement 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Event icon movement Press Enter The Event Icon Movement dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired setting Left to Right If the encoder is turned clockwise the event icons move from right to left If it is turned counterclockwise the event icons move from left to right Right to Left Opposite to Left to Right 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Event Icon Movement End Event for ORL Calculation Set whether to include reflection in Far End events or not when calculating the ORL To set the End Event for ORL Calculation 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to hig
452. olution Pulse width Low Density High Density Figure 4 22 Range Resolution Pulse Width Dialog 4 68 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 2 Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the white arrow to the desired list 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired setting within the selected list Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the desired settings are highlighted 5 Press the Enter key or the Rotary knob The dialog closes and the red legend on the Range Pulse Width softkey displays the newly selected Distance Range and Pulse Width The distance range resolution pulse width settings may be changed while a Real Time or Averaging cycle is running The test will restart using the new settings The distance range resolution pulse width settings vary depending on what model of MT9083 Series product you are using Selecting the Dead zone Mode The MT9083A2 B2 C2 have a Dead zone mode selection function The two modes available via this mode selection function are Standard mode and Enhanced Range mode The features of the two modes are described below Standard mode e Standard mode allows short dead zone measurements to be performed Enhanced Range mode e Allows high dynamic range measurements e Allows fast measurements e Can be used to test the path over each optical fiber split by the splitter included in the PON system Setting the Standard
453. om the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual C 11 Appendix C Software License C 12 Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume ofa storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you ca
454. ompletion of a Fault Locate test press the Save key The Save screen appears see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 2 Press More gt gt f6 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file 4 Press Copy f1 5 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected file 6 Press Paste f2 A message box stating Copying 1 1 along with the name of the file appears briefly MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Use the following procedure to copy multiple files in a directory To copy multiple files l oO E OY At the completion of a Fault Locate test press the Save key The Save screen appears see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to copy and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to copy Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the selected files ar
455. on Check Level Low HIGH Connection level is GOOD Press CONTINUE or Start when the best connection is made to perform a test or press CANCEL to abort Test Will Auto Advance in 2 Seconds Cancel Figure 6 27 Connection Check Medium MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 67 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode BAD connection When the connection check level is low the bar in the connection gauge is red and only extends a short distance from the LOW end of the gauge If the connection state is not improved even if the fiber is cleaned the fiber needs to be replaced OTDR Construction Connection Check 2013 Apr 24 13 14 g amp Continue Connection Check Level Low HIGH Connection level failed Fiber may be shorter than approx 48 meters 160 ft Clean all optical connectors Switch ends of patch cord Use another patch cord Cancel Figure 6 28 Connection Check Low To correct a low connection 1 Press Cancel f6 to abort the current test The Connect Fiber screen appears see Figure 6 17 on page 6 47 Note If the Number of Fibers field see Figure 6 7 on page 6 20 is set to 1 pressing Cancel f6 returns you to the OTDR Construction Setup screen 2 Clean all of the optical connectors 3 Press the Continue f1 once or twice depending on the setup conditions described in step 1 to re enter the Connect Check screen If the Connection Check is sti
456. on Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Overview OTDR Standard mode utilizes the advanced capabilities of the MT9083 Series to provide classic OTDR testing This mode provides an Event Table which can be used to perform auto analysis auto event detection of the measured results Tests can be performed either manually or automatically via the Auto Test feature Auto Test provides one button testing which automatically selects the range and pulse width and sets the resolution to high for the current fiber under test and then displaying the results Starting OTDR Standard Mode To start the OTDR function in Standard mode 1 Press the Top Menu key 2 Highlight OTDR Standard then press the Enter key The Trace screen appears by default when you start the OTDR Standard application OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 x x oo te 4 Manual Test Off 13 0 Real Time o 26 0 bs Wavelength 39 0 1310 Range Pulse width CE 0 5 km 3 ns HR z Display From 0 2 5 5 7 5 10km Origin 5 6757 km Splice Loss IOR 5 6757 km Ak kk RES More gt gt 0 0000 km Refi t AVG Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 4 1 OTDR Standard Mode Initial Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 1 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Setups OTDR Standard Mode Press the Setup key to display the setup information for OTDR Standard mode
457. on Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Test Results Screen OTDR Construction The OTDR Construction Test Results screen appears at the end of each test providing that Preview f3 is set to On on the Test in Progress screen see Figure 6 18 on page 6 49 OTDR Construction 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Co 09 00h 80 SG Reflect aB dB km Cum Loss uB 1 5 7763km E 0 208 sesk seese 0 222 1 281 MH 2 12 1502km ES 1 600 39 901 0 219 2 888 Open 3 32 2370km E 0 759 49 072 0 209 8 692 Summary 4 52 4770km i TH Fiber End 31 751 0 216 13 829 Accept Cancel Loss Mode 2 Pt Loss Display From i 75 100km Origin A 52 4770 km 1625 nm SM IOR 1 468500 B 52 4877 km 100 2 km RES 5 003m Cursor Event A gt B 0 0107 km 4us HR AVG 5120 bee Trace Prey Event Next Event Figure 6 19 Test Results screen with Summary Closed Event table Trace graph Cursor distance information A BW N e Loss mode Measurement and Reflection nN Fiber test parameters Softkeys Event Table In fiber analysis an event is considered to be a distinct deviation from normal fiber attenuation that may be introduced by a lossy connection microbend connector or splice a reflective connection connector or fiber break or the end of the fiber Only events that meet one or more of the pre set threshold criteria will be reported in the Event table see Thresholds on pages 6 11
458. on manual The fault is due to mishandling misuse or unauthorized modification or repair of the equipment by the customer The fault is due to severe usage clearly exceeding normal usage The fault is due to improper or insufficient maintenance by the customer The fault is due to natural disaster including fire wind flooding earthquake lightning strike or volcanic ash etc The fault is due to damage caused by acts of destruction including civil disturbance riot or war etc The fault is due to explosion accident or breakdown of any other machinery facility or plant etc The fault is due to use of non specified peripheral or applied equipment or parts or consumables etc The fault is due to use of a non specified power supply or in a non specified installation location The fault is due to use in unusual environments N The fault is due to activities or ingress of living organisms such as insects spiders fungus pollen or seeds MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Anritsu Corporation Contact In addition this warranty is valid only for the original equipment purchaser It is not transferable if the equipment is resold Anritsu Corporation shall assume no liability for injury or financial loss of the customer due to the use of or a failure to be able to use this equipment Note For the purpose of this Warranty unusual environments means use In places of direct sunlight In
459. onnector It is advisable to clean the ferrule end surface of the MT9083 Series optical connector periodically See Cleaning the MT9083 Series Connector Ferrule End Surface on page 13 1 for details Cleaning Optical Adapters It is advisable to clean the optical adapter before mounting it on the optical connector See Cleaning the Optical Adapter on page 13 3 for details Changing the Optical Adapter Z CAUTION MT9083 Series units equipped with angled polish APC optical connectors require angle polished optical adapters MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 17 Chapter 2 Overview To change an Optical Adapter 1 Open the cover on the desired measurement port 2 Lift up on the adapter s locking lever You will hear a click when the latch mechanism disengages 3 Slide the adapter out of the measurement port Slide the new adapter into the measurement port 5 Push down on the adapter s locking lever You will hear a click when the latch mechanism engages Connecting Fiber to a Measurement Port The measurement ports are used to connect fiber for OTDR OPM and OLS testing applications To connect fiber to a Measurement Port 1 Clean and connect a patch cord of known good quality to the desired measurement port See Figure 2 6 Clean the connector of the system to be tested Attach the free end of the patch cord to the connector of the system to be tested Cautions on Handling Optic
460. ons have been determined not to have been satisfied based on the performance test as described in this chapter Contact information can be found on the last page of the printed version of this manual and is available in a separate file on the CD version Make sure that you can provide the following details when requesting repairs e Device name and serial number The serial number is located on the back panel of the unit see item 2 in Figure 2 2 on page 2 8 e Description of the Failure condition e Name and contact information for the supervisor who checked the failure condition and or the name of the contact to inform when the repairs are completed ZA WARNING NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the MT9083 Series nor into the end of a cable connected to the MT9083 Series If laser radiation enters the eye there is a risk of injury There are risks from laser light when performing operations outside those noted in this manual Performance Test The following eight items are tested to check the performance of the MT9083 Series Item 6 is tested when Option 002 or 102 is installed 1 Optical output and wavelength of the OTDR Standard OTDR and Fault Locate testing 2 Pulse width 3 Dynamic range One way back scattered light dynamic range test 4 Distance measurement accuracy 5 Loss measurement accuracy linearity MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 1 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calib
461. ood practice to save the Loss Table periodically for example every ten fiber as you store the loss readings to prevent loss of data in the event of a power failure You can replace the loss readings in a file if you need to retest a fiber at a later date See Editing the Loss Table on page 9 15 for details 9 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Editing the Loss Table Each row in the table represents a tested fiber A Loss Table can contain up to a maximum of 999 rows The following edits can be made to a Loss Table e Adding test data to an existing Loss Table e Overwriting test data in an existing Loss Table e Deleting test data from a Loss Table e Deleting all test data from a Loss Table e Adding comments to a Loss Table Adding Test Data to an Existing Loss Table To add Test Data to an existing Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either current or recalled press Add f1 The current test data will be added at the end of the Loss Table Note Make sure that the external light source is active for the current trace If the external light source is not active ON a Loss value of dB along with a Power reading of Under is recorded for the current fiber test data number In addition if a Threshold value was set it will be recorded as Fail 2 Continue testing to populate the table with the additional fib
462. open the Text Entry dialog box 9 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Back f6 Press the Back softkey to return to the Loss Test Set screen Optical Power Meter Zero Offset To zero the power meter offset 1 With the unit set to Optical Power Meter mode press Set Zero f5 The Set Zero screen appears Power Meter 2012 Jul 1 10 00 C7 9 00h 80 Power Meter Power Wavelength 1550 nm Start Disconnect fiber and close protective cover then press the f1 key Reference Threshold a Anritsu 7 Cancel Figure 9 4 Set Zero screen 2 Disconnect the fiber if connected and close the measurement port cover to shield the port from incident light 3 Press Start f1 The message Zeroing Power Meter appears briefly and the unit returns to the Power Meter screen with a Power reading of Under MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 7 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 9 8 Note The following message Zero set failed please check protective cover is fully closed and try again may be displayed when executing zero offset without light shielding Press any key to clear the message from the screen make sure that the measurement port is closed and then execute zero offset again MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optic
463. operating time or the power on time Due consideration should be given to the life spans of these parts when performing continuous operation over an extended period These parts must be replaced at the customer s expense even if within the guaranteed period described in Warranty at the beginning of this manual For details on life span refer to the corresponding section in this manual Display backlight Refer to Appendix D Limited Life Span Parts xxiv MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Caution for Transportation Caution for Transportation This equipment uses the lithium ion battery 100 Wh or less per battery When transporting this equipment by air in a plane follow the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IATA DGR established by the International Air Transport Association IATA and instructions from each airline company When transporting this equipment by sea in a ship follow the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code IMDG CODE established by the International Maritime Organization IMO MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual XXV Crossed out Wheeled Bin Symbol Crossed out Wheeled Bin Symbol Equipment marked with the Crossed out Wheeled Bin Symbol complies with council directive 2002 96 EC the WEEE Directive in European Union For Products placed on the EU market after August 13 2005 please contact your local Anritsu representative at the end of the product s useful life to arrange
464. operly The extension of text file should be txt or ini Clearing Word Buttons New Folder Use the following procedure to set up a new folder when saving a file 3 40 To clear all the buttons registered execute Restore Defaults The File Name dialog box will be initialized With the desired results displayed on the screen press either the Save key when saving test data or the Print key when saving a screen capture 2 Select the desired medium in which the new folder will be located by highlighting the Medium field and toggling the Enter key to choose from Internal Memory or USB Memory Note The USB Memory selection is only available when a USB memory stick is connected to the MT9083 Series Press New Folder f4 the New Folder screen appears If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 4 to enter the name using the front panel keys Ifa USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Enter key to save the new folder to the selected medium or press the ESC key to cancel the New Folder process 2012 Jul 1 10 00 File Name AUTO13100001 SOR Medium Internal Memory 1 Files 1151 MB Free Small Letter Folder File Name MAX 30 Date Time a Capital Letter AUTO1310000 11
465. or above which will be reported in the Events analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 0 01 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Splice Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Splice Loss Press Enter The Splice Loss dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the splice loss threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Splice Loss threshold is set Reflectance Determines the lowest Reflectance value that will be reported by analysis Any event with a reflectance equal to or greater than the value in this parameter will be reported in Event analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 70 0 dB to 20 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Reflectance threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance Press Enter The Reflectance dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the reflectance threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Reflectance threshold is set MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Fiber End Determines the Fiber End value equal to or above which will be reported in the Events analysis The range of setti
466. or example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link a program with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Our method of protecting your rights has two steps 1 copyright the library and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library Also for each distributor s protection we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free library If the library is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses thus in effect transforming the program into proprietary software To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the
467. or loaded image available this button is disabled and reports can only be made from previously saved test results e Results in Folder Include all the VIP results in the selected folder When this button is selected a default folder name will appear on the screen and the Select Folder softkey will be enabled Highlight the Folder file press the Enter key and the Select Directory screen that allows you to select a different file folder Create a PDF file When all the desired settings are completed press Create PDF f5 to create a PDF file Or Press Fxit f6 or the ESC key to close the VIP Report Settings screen 11 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Working with VIP Image Files Saving VIP Images Images captured by the VIP can be saved as VIPI files or PNG files which can be recalled for viewing on the MT9083 Series Also recalled file can be analyzed on MT9083 Series 2012 Jul 1 10 00 File Name ipo el Medium Internal Memory 11 Files 1150 MB Free Save Folder File Name Date Time File Type vip_12 41 23_000 MIPI 4241931366 VP 11 17 png 12 11 23 13 56 11 16 png 12 11 23 13 56 ae 11 14 png 12 11 23 13 54 11 15 png 12 14 23 13 50 11 12 png 12 11 23 13 45 11 41 png 12 11 23 13 45 NOW Folder 11 9 png 12 11 23 13 44 11 10 png 12 11 23 13 44 11 8 png 12 11 23 13 43 Delete 1 10 png 12 11 23 13 36 More gt gt Selected
468. or select Other and then use the Numeric keypad to enter the desired IOR and BSC settings To set the IOR and BSC values 1 Press IOR BSC f5 The IOR BSC dialog appears IOR 1 300000 1 700000 Fiber Type P 1 467700 default BSC 90 00 40 00 78 50 default Figure 5 22 IOR BSC Dialog 2 Press Wavelength f1 to select the wavelength changing IOR BSC 3 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys to move the white arrow to the Fiber Type field if necessary and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired fiber type When the desired fiber type is highlighted press the Enter key or the Rotary knob Or If the fiber type is not listed select Other and then move the white arrow to the IOR and BSC fields Use the Numeric keypad to enter the desired values When the IOR and BSC values are entered press the Enter key or the Rotary knob Use the Numeric keypad to directly enter the desired value 4 The dialog box closes and the new settings are displayed in the red legend on the softkey MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 57 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Swap Overlay When the wavelength is set to 1310 1550 Macro Bend or 1310 1625 Macro Bend the event icons of these can be swapped on display To swap overlay 1 Press Swap Overlay f6 2 The event icons are swapped between 1310nm and the other wavelength 5 58 MT9083 Series A
469. or this parameter is 1 0 dB to 30 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Splitter Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Splitter Loss Press Enter The Splitter Loss dialog appears Go to Step 4 if the splitter loss is already at hand Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select Branch and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to select the number of branches Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select Splitter Loss and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the splitter loss threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Splitter Loss threshold is set Pass Fail Thresholds Parameters Events that exceed the Pass Fail Threshold parameters are highlighted in red in the Event Analysis table 6 14 The Pass Fail Thresholds parameters include Non Reflective Event Loss fusion Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical Reflectance Fiber Loss dB km Total Loss Splitter Loss MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Non Reflective Event Loss fusion This parameter highlights non reflective event losses such as fusion splices in the Events Analysis table The range of settings for this parameter is 0 10 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01dB increments To set the Non Reflective Event Loss threshold
470. or viewing the trace graph The red legend on the softkey displays the current display mode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Press 6 to advance to the Level Two softkeys Level Two Softkeys Press f2 to set the IOR Index of Refraction and BSC Backscatter Coefficient used for the current test The red legends display the current settings Note The IOR BSC softkey is dimmed when the Wavelength softkey is set to Wavelength All mode Press 3 to select the desired loss mode for the current test The red legend displays the currently selected loss mode Press 4 to access the Cursor softkeys See Level Four Softkeys on page 5 33 for details Press 5 to access the Shift mode softkeys See Shift Mode Softkeys on page 5 35 for details Press 6 to advance to the Level Three softkeys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 31 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 32 Level Three Softkeys Press f2 to toggle the status of the active cursor When the red legend reads Event turning the Rotary knob causes the active cursor to snap to the events on the trace When the red legend reads Free you can position the cursors anywhere on the trace grid Place Cursor A near an event and then press f3 to automatically zoom in on the event Press f4 to display the ORL value in the Loss Mode area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30
471. osoft Corporation in the United States and other countries MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Safety Symbols Safety Symbols To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction Anritsu Corporation uses the following safety symbols to indicate safety related information Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols BEFORE using the equipment Some or all of the following symbols may be used on all Anritsu equipment In addition there may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this manual Symbols used in manual A DANGER This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly Z WARNING This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly A CAUTION This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light to severe injury or loss related to equipment malfunction if proper precautions are not taken MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual iii For Safety Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manual The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide information about safety items and operation precautions Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment This indicates a p
472. oss Use Splice Loss mode to measure the optical power loss caused by connectors splices and couplers on a fiber optic cable Use the following figure in conjunction with the splice loss procedure to measure splice loss ey 5 Reflective Gainer LSA Cursor Position A Non Reflective Non Reflective LSA Cursor Gainer Position 4 Start of Splice 2 Y Intercept Splice Loss The Splice Loss is equal to the Y axis position at 1 less the Y axis position at 2 Cursor A should be placed at the start of the splice The Y Axis position 1 at the start of the splice will be determined by an LSA calculation using the interval set up to the left of Cursor A The Y Intercept point 2 is determined by an LSA calculation using the current data interval setup to the right of Cursor A and calculating the intercept back to Cursor A To perform a splice loss measurement 1 Select Display From Origin see Display From on page 4 71 2 Place Cursor A near the beginning of the splice where loss is to be measured See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 7 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements 3 Select Display From A 4 Expand the screen horizontally and vertically see Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 for more accurate cursor placement and place Cursor A at the beginning of the splice to be m
473. oston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License in stead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fe
474. otect Off Small Letter Administrator Setting Password Input same Password for the confirmation MAX 16 User Setting Password Password Lifesp Expiration Date Set the Administrator password Need to be set more than 8 characters Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 3 8 Input same Password for the confirmation dialog box 3 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Setting the User Password A valid User Password contains up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols If you execute the Restore Default the password field becomes blank This is the password used to login in as a User To set the Password 1 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight Password Note Password can be highlighted only when Protection with password is set to On 2 Press the Enter key to display the User Password dialog box Password Settings General Setting 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 9 00h 80 4 Password Protect On Small Letter Administrator Setting Password Password for User MAX 16 User Setting Capital Letter Expiration Date Set the User Password Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 3 9 User Password dialog box 3 Press OK f6 after making all desired entries or pre
475. ource On Off ceccceceececeeeeeeteeceeeeeeeesaaeeseeeteeeees 9 29 Fiber Identification Measurement c cccecceeseeeenceeeeeeeeeeeeaeteneeeeaeenaaes 9 30 Chapter 10 Visual Fault Locate VFL Mode csssccssseeeee 10 1 Accessing the Visual Fault LOCator ccccccecesseeeeseeeeecaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeeee 10 1 Visual Fault Locate Screen ElQMent cccccesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseaaeeeeneees 10 2 Visual Fault Locator On Off Indicator ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 10 2 Port CONNECTION INGICATON ce eeeeeeeee eaaa a 10 2 eton d ANEETA teamdoetolel ssc cacstovsd ceeamdcstacayseceDatetacce ds 10 3 Visible Fault Location risen a n e rage a 10 4 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 000 11 1 Video Inspection Probe VIP ccccesceseecseeeeneesneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenees 11 3 PODS TIPS Arnii rudnine aa ra Fede teva Dea A eee 11 3 Standard Tips si 4 rera Ter amat nian Aces 11 3 Universal TIPS misin pr iia aaa N ENEE EY 11 3 AE a NT o EEE ele E EAA AN A T 11 4 Attaching a Probe Tipinis tep iene atin lite A i 11 4 Probe Tips with Optics ccccceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeesnneeseeaeeeneaees 11 5 Connecting the VIP to the USB Converter ssssssseseesseeseresreere 11 6 Connecting the VIP to the MT9083 Series assesses 11 7 Accessing VIP Mode i is ccitin tii cuit cdiniis cin iceni crac aicugens 11 8 XVI MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual VIE Tese S
476. own on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to delete Press More gt gt f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 59 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Copying Files 5 60 8 Press Yes f1 to delete the selected files or press No 2 to cancel without deleting the files To delete all files in a directory or folder 1 WY GPS At the completion of a Fault Locate test press the Save key The Save screen appears see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the file to be deleted Press the Enter key to open the selected folder directory Press More f6 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off Press More f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete all files in the selected directory or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files Use the Save screen see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 to copy data files stored in the internal memory or on a USB memory stick You can copy a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To copy a file 1 At the c
477. p Overlays ninen i eA eS aie 5 58 Working with OTDR Trace Files 00 cccceeccee cece eeeceeeeeeeee seas eeeeaeeenaes 5 59 Deleting Fil S secose dieing havea ii epee ani i Reins 5 59 COPYING RIGS 2 22 EA A E EAT ETT 5 60 Saving Files With AutoSave sssssssssessesssiesssisrsissrisssirsssinssrnnssrnsnrnnertnnnt 5 62 Automatic File SaVC cece ceeecce cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseceeeeeeaaeeeeneeeeeaaaeeea 5 62 Verifying the AUtOSAVC ccccccceeeeeeeceeeceaeeeseecaaeeseneteneesenesteaeenaees 5 63 Saving Files Manually 0 ccesceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeee sage seeeeeeenaeeeeeaaeeea 5 65 Headers rs piee aaa etter aerate dae a eee 5 67 Sorting Filesan accce ae A AeA ee 5 70 Printing Fault Locate Data Files 0 c ccecceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeaes 5 71 Connecting the Printer c cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeseaeeseeaeeeeaas 5 71 Printing a Fault Locate Trace File cceeesseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaees 5 71 Saving Fault Locate Data as an Image File cceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 72 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode ccscscseseeseeeensseeneeees 6 1 Overview 58 coined ei ee ee een Gee ete 6 1 Starting OTDR Construction Mod ccccccscccecesssteeeeeeesneeeeeees 6 1 Setups OTDR Construction Mode 0 cccccccscceceessneeeeeessnteeeenees 6 2 Entering OTDR Construction Setups c sccceceeesteceeeessseeee
478. p the event icons between 1310 nm and 1550 or 1625 nm MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 29 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Softkey Levels Trace screen Trace screen has Level Three softkeys Softkey text indicates the softkey functions and may change with each keypress If the softkey text is dimmed the function is not available 5 30 Level One Softkeys Test Mode Auto 4 Real Time Wavelength 1550 El Test Parameters 0 5 km 3 ns HR Display From A i Press f1 to switch Auto Manual or FTTA of Average measurement mode The red legend on the softkey displays the current Test Mode setting Press f2 to start a Real Time test The red legend on the Real Time softkey changes to On while the test is running Press f3 to toggle through the available wavelengths The red legend on the softkey displays the current wavelength setting In addition dual tri and quad wavelength units also feature a Wavelength All setting See Setting the Source Wavelength to All on page 4 78 for details Note Pressing the Wavelength softkey on single wavelength units sounds an error tone When Wavelength f3 is set to All f4 changes to the Test Parameters softkey Press f4 to display the Test Parameters screen See Setting the Test Parameters on page 4 78 for details When Test Mode is set to FTTA Test Parameters are fixed values Press f5 to set the Display From mode f
479. pan Analysis Press Enter The A B Span Analysis dialog appears Highlight the desired setting Off Gives PASS FAIL judgment on all events On Gives PASS FAIL judgment only on the events within the span specified by Marker A and B However the last event specified by the marker is excluded from analysis If Marker A specifies the first event the last event specified by Marker B is excluded from analysis and vice versa Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the A B Span Analysis field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode AutoSave Press AutoSave f5 to access the AutoSave screen This screen provides access to the Auto Filename and AutoSave parameters AutoSave 2013 Oct 30 05 55 AutoSave on AutoSave Directory INTMEM Base Filename AUTO WLEN NUM Start Number 1310 1 AutoSave The number that auto increment will begin with Q oa Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 5 6 AutoSave Screen Auto Filename Parameters The Auto Filename parameters allow you to enter a base filename which is used to generate sequentially numbered filenames The Auto Filename parameters include Enabled AutoSave Directory Base Filename Start Number Enabled Auto Filename Set this field to On to automatically generate a filename when a save is performed or set the fi
480. pending on how many test wavelengths are currently being used and how many wavelengths are available on the MT 9083 Series in use MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode This area also contains scroll bars located at the top and left side of the trace graph which define the display range of the waveform Cursors The cursors see items 2 and 3 in Figure 6 22 on page 6 56 are the two vertical lines that extend from the top to the bottom of the trace graph The cursors allow you to extract power and distance information from the trace graph The active cursor is displayed in red and the inactive cursor is displayed in blue See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details on cursor use Scale The vertical axis scale see item 5 in Figure 6 22 on page 6 56 is located on the left side of the trace graph and is expressed in dBs while the horizontal axis scale see item 4 in Figure 6 22 on page 6 56 is located at the bottom of the trace graph and is expressed in the distance unit as set on the Preferences screen See Distance Display Units on page 6 3 for details dB Level Indicator The dB level indicator see item 6 in Figure 6 22 on page 6 56 denotes the intersection of the active cursor and the trace level Trace Overview Window The Trace Overview window see item 7 in Figure 6 22 on page 6 56 located in the lower left corner or the Trace graph show a thumbnail
481. peration Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Template File field and then press the Enter key The Load screen appears 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file 3 Select Load Template with Setup f1 the Load screen closes 4 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen Event Determination The setting made in the Event Determination control how the Template trace event are applied to the selected target trace To Set the Event Determination 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Template on the Event Determination field 2 Toggle the Enter key or the Rotary knob to select the desire mode Template or Merge 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen e If Template is selected all events are copied directly from the template trace and onto the collected trace e If Merge is selected the events in the template trace and the collected trace are correlated and merged Trace Priority The Trace Priority check box gives the target trace event location priority over correlated events from the template when Merge is selected If cleared non correlated template events are inserted into the target trace correlated template events replace the correlating target trace events and all other target trace events are left unchanged To S
482. ph MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 53 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode dB km This field displays the dB km between the selected event and the prior event Cumulative Loss dB This field displays the total loss Cum Loss dB up to the selected event expressed in dB Note The Total Loss Cum Loss dB display differs depending on the Force Total Loss setting See Preferences 2 2 on page 6 8 If set ON the result is displayed for all waveforms If set OFF is displayed if the measured waveform is abnormal Pass Fail Thresholds Events whose loss exceeds the Pass Fail Thresholds are highlighted in red in the Event Table If within the Pass Fail Thresholds only Total Loss Cum Loss dB is highlighted in green in the Event Table OTDR Construction 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Go 93 00h 80 8 No Dist km Type Loss aB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 1 5 7763km ka 0 208 kk kkk 0 222 1 281 2 12 1502km 1 600 39 901 0 219 2 888 Close 3 32 2370km 0 759 49 072 0 209 8 692 Summary 4 52 4770km ME Fiber End 31 751 0 216 dB Accept 0 0 L 13 0 SUMMARY g a 7 a i A Cancel 26 0 End Fault Distance 52 4770 km i 39 0 Prior Event 32 2370 km Loss Mode 13 829 dB 2 peL oss r Display From 0 25 50 75 100km Origin A 52 4770 km 2 Pt Loss SUMMARY PASS Total Events 4 5 e Cursor Be S24872 km 0 829 Fiber Length 52 4770 km Event A gt B 0 0107 km
483. proximate indication of the current battery power level Even if the remaining battery power indicated is greater than 1 the instrument may automatically power down depending on the condition of the battery pack System Setups Setup Press the Setup key to display the General screen which provides access to the general systems settings 3 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups General Screen Settings Use the General screen to set such default setup information as date time color theme and language The General screen also provide access to the Password Settings screen and About screen General 2012 Jul 1 10 00 mm 99 00h 80 J Local Time 10 00 General Time difference from UTC 0 0 Hours Date display Format Year Month Day Auto Launch None Password Printer BL 8ORII SD1 31 Sortings Paper feed On Color Theme Grayscale Language English USB Video Output Off Auto Backlight Off None Auto Power Off None Instrument Power Save mode High Used to modify date About Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 3 4 General Screen To select a setting on the General screen 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired General settings item 2 Press the Enter key or press the Rotary knob to display the dialog box for the selected settings item To cancel the selection press the ESC key to c
484. r diffused light can be visually checked by manually bending the fiber It is possible to determine whether there is a break point on the optical fiber by checking the diffusing light The Visual Fault Locator enables checking for break points when no fiber identification device ID tester is available Note that the further the distance from the light source the harder it is to check the visible light Accessing the Visual Fault Locator To start the Visual Fault Locator Press the Top Menu key The Top Menu screen appears 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Visual Fault Locate then press the Enter key The Visual Fault Locate screen appears Visual Fault Locate 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 99 00h 80 4 Light Source off Off ea Tam ra 2 E o o Figure 10 1 Visual Fault Locate Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 10 1 Chapter 10 Visual Fault Locate VFL Mode Visual Fault Locate Screen Elements The Visual Fault Locate screen is comprised of the elements flagged in the following figure Light Source On O Een cE Anritsu n ES S m Figure 10 2 Visual Fault Locator On Off indicator 1 Visual Fault Locator On Off indicator 2 Port connection indicator 3 Softkeys Visual Fault Locator On Off Indicator Displays the current status of the Visual Fault Locator laser e The indicator reads On and the backgrou
485. r a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived fr
486. r the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired event number setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 5 Press Enter again to close the dialog and save the current setting The event tables shows the distance information of dummy fiber OTDR 0 0 0 0 00 g 9 00 80 No Dist km Type Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 1 0 0000km 1 799 40 572 Ek kkk 0 000 2 20 0909km 0 770 49 979 0 200 5 816 Open 3 40 3351km ME Fiber End 32 948 0 206 10 749 Summary ap Horiz Shift 12 1526 km Vert Shift 0 000 dB Accept 13 0 i 4 4 Cancel a a Loss Mode Fy 2 Pt Loss 1 e L fuMWhL Display From A 50 25 0 25 50km 2 Pt Loss 10 751 Refl 40 577 Analysis A 0 0000 km B 40 3351 km A gt B 40 3351 km Trace Total Events 3 Fiber Length 40 3354 km Cursor Total Loss 10 749 dB Eren Prev Event Next Event Figure 6 5 Auto Patch Screen Use the following procedure to set Auto Patch cord Removal to None when it is currently set in event number To set the Auto Patch cord Removal to None 1 Highlight Auto patch cord and then press Enter The Auto Patch cord Removal dialog appears displaying the current event number setting 2 Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 3 Press Enter The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Note The Auto Patch cord Removal feature works only with patch cords that are a
487. r the dialog will display the number of minutes for the current Auto Backlight Off setting If the Auto Backlight dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the minutes setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob or the Numeric keypad to set the desired time period from 1 to 99 minutes Press the Enter key The Auto Backlight Off setting is now set to the desired interval and the display backlight will turn off if no keys are pressed before the time interval ends Use the following procedure to set Auto Backlight Off to None when it is currently set for a time interval To set Auto Backlight Off to None l 3 4 Highlight Auto Backlight Off on the General screen and then press the Enter key The Auto Backlight Off dialog appears displaying the currently set time interval Press None f1 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The Auto Backlight Off setting is now set to None Auto Power Off The Auto Power Off setting shuts down the MT9083 Series when the unit is inactive for a set period of time Note Auto Power Off does not function in Optical Power Meter mode or Light Source mode To set a time period for the Auto Power Off 1 Highlight Auto Power Off on the General screen and then press the Enter key The Auto Power Off dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that t
488. ration 6 Optical output and wavelength of the visible light source VLD Option 002 or 102 7 Optical output and wavelength of the optical light source OLS for fiber identification 8 Measurement accuracy of the optical power meter OPM Clean the optical connector before testing Test steps in this chapter are described based on conditions where the power is On and the MT9083 Series is activated Rated Values for Each Item Unless otherwise specified the following rated values are guaranteed at a temperature of 25 5 C Table 12 1 MT9083A2 specifications 1310 25nm Opt 050 055 to 059 063 073 Temperature 25 C 1550 25nm Opt 051 to 059 063 068 073 Pulse width lps 1645 to 1655nm Opt 052 054 055 100ns for Opt 063 1625 25nm Opt 057 to 059 061 MMF 850 30nm Opt 063 to 065 1300 30nm Opt 063 064 Pulse Width ns 3 10 20 50 100 200 Opt055 057 073 063 500 1000 2000 4000 10000 20000 12 2 SMF 3 10 20 50 100 200 Opt 063 MME 500 1000 2000 4000 850 nm Does not support 1000 2000 4000 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 1 MT9083A2 specifications Cont d Dynamic Range dB S N 1 2 Opt055 37 5 36 33 5 dB 1 31 1 55 1 65 pm 3 Opt057 36 34 5 31 5 dB 1 31 1 55 1 625 pm _ Pulse width 20 ps Distance range 100 Opt 063 28 27 dB MME 0 85 1 3 pm 3 km 38 36 5 dB SMF 1 31 1 55 pm Average time 180 sec Opt
489. ration Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 2 MT9083B2 specifications Pulse Width ns Measurement Accuracy Loss Measurement Accuracy Linearity 1310 25 nm Opt 053 055 056 057 058 Temperature 25 C 063 Pulse width 1ps 1490 25 nm Opt 056 058 100 ns for Opt 063 MMF 1550 25 nm Opt 053 055 056 057 058 1645 to 1655 nm Opt 055 1625 25 nm Opt 057 058 850 30 nm Opt 063 1300 30 nm Opt 063 3 10 20 50 100 200 Opt 053 055 056 500 1000 2000 4000 10000 20000 057 058 Opt 063 SMF 3 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 4000 Opt 063 MMF 850 nm Does not support 1000 2000 4000 41 40dB 1 31 1 55um 25 C 41 40 34dB 1 31 1 55 1 65um gt Pulser 20 as Distance range 100 41 40 40dB 1 31 1 49 1 55pm km 39 38 37dB 1 31 1 55 1 625pm es time 180 41 40 40 39dB 1 31 1 49 1 55 1 625pm 28 27dB 0 85 1 3ym 41 40dB 1 31 1 55pm 1 m 3 measurement distance 10 marker resolution Note that this does not include optical fiber refraction index IOR based uncertainty 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is greater MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 5 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Table 12 2 MT9083B2 specifications Cont d Fiber Identification CW 25 C SM fiber Light Source length 2 m Light Source Output 5 dBm 1 5 dB 1310 30 nm Opt 053 055 056 057 058 063 1490 30 nm Opt 056 058 1550 30 nm Opt 053
490. rd key Home Top Menu hard key USB Ethernet converter Use a USB Ethernet converter conforming to USB 1 1 Note Not all commercially available USB Ethernet converter work with this port e VIP Video Inspection Probe option Video fiber microscope used to inspect fiber optic terminations Basic Notes on Use 2 24 CAUTION Connector cover A connector cover is installed on each of the connectors to prevent dust Do not remove these connector covers except when connecting a cable to the connectors Condensation Condensation may occur on the inside surface of the MT9083 Series when the MT9083 Series is carried into a room high temperature from an outdoor location low temperature etc If this occurs dry the MT9083 Series thoroughly before turning on the power MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview e Temperature range Use the MT9083 Series within the operating temperature range 10 to 50 C Excluding Opt004 005 007and 002 and storage temperature range 20 to 60 C If the MT9083 Series is placed in a car or other enclosed space for a long time the ambient temperature may exceed the specified range resulting in malfunction of the MT9083 Series e Safety Do not use any AC adapter or battery pack other than the one supplied Otherwise the MT9083 Series may be damaged due to nonconformity with the specifications e Laser Never look directly into the ca
491. re 5 12 on page 5 23 displays the Wavelength WL Distance Range DR Pulsewidth PW Index of Refraction IOR Resolution RES and Averaging mode AVG set for the current test The Test Progress bar indicates the current averaging status See item 5 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 gt Note The Fiber Test Parameters area is replaced by the Event Summary area when the Event Summary selection is set to On on the Preferences screen see Figure 5 3 on page 5 4 The Event Summary area displays the Total Events Fiber Length and Total Loss of the current fiber under test MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 27 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Softkeys Fiber Visualizer Mode Fiber Visualizer screen and Trace screen has six softkeys accessed via the f1 f6 keys on the right side of the LCD screen and four softkeys accessed via the F1 F4 keys on the lower side of the LCD Screen see Figure 2 1 on page 2 1 Softkey text indicates the softkey functions and may change with each keypress Softkey Levels Fiber Visualizer screen Fiber Visualizer screen has only Level One softkeys Softkey text indicates the softkey functions and may change with each keypress If the softkey text is dimmed the function is not available Press f1 to advance the test from the Connection Check Continue No te The softkey is displayed only when Connection Check is being executed Press 6 to cancel the current data collection C
492. re specific tips for each of the common types of bulkhead adapters These tips allow inspection of the fiber surface on the opposite side of the bulkhead i e inside hardware devices or on the back side of patch panels FBPT FC FBPT ST FBPT SC FC tip ST tip SC tip Universal Tips The two universal tips are primarily used for inspecting patch cords The 1 25 mm tip is compatible with 1 25 mm ferrules as used in LC and MU type connector while the 2 5 mm tip is compatible with 2 5 mm ferrules as used in FC ST and SC style connectors These tips allow the probe to work with either male connector ends or inspect through female bulkhead adapters MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 3 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option FBPT U12M FBPT U25M Universal 1 25 mm tip Universal 2 5 mm tip VIP Setup The steps outlined in the following sections prepare the VIP for use e Attaching a Probe Tip or Attaching a Probe Tip with Optics e Connecting the Probe to the USB Converter e Connecting the VIP to the MT9083 Series Attaching a Probe Tip Use the following procedure to attach a probe tip to the VIP To attach a Probe tip 1 Remove the dust cap see item 1 in Figure 11 2 on page 11 3 Or Ifa probe tip is already attached loosen the front retaining nut see item 2 in Figure 11 3 until it slides freely on the Barrel assembly see item 3 in Figure 11 3 1 Probe tip 1 25 mm Universal 2
493. re than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
494. re to setup a new folder in which to save the image file See New Folder on page 3 40 for details 8 Press File Type f2 to toggle through the file type 9 Press Save Image f1 to save the image file or press ESC to cancel the file save MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 73 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 5 74 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Overview Construction mode simplifies and automates the testing required when installing fiber Construction mode is used when many fibers in a cable need to be tested and documented before deployment Starting OTDR Construction Mode To start the OTDR function in Construction mode 1 Press the Top Menu key 2 Highlight OTDR Construction then press the Enter key The OTDR Construction Setup screen appears see Figure 6 1 below OTDR Construction Setup 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GS 99 00h 80 SG Store Files At sme Base Filename ab_o Conania Filename NearFar16250ther 001 Test Direction A gt B B gt A Test O Parameters Site A Near Site B Far Other Other Header Wavelengths Options J 1310 Connection Check pa 1550 Automode 1625 File Save Verify Macrobend Number of Fibers 1 Start Number 1 Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 1 OTDR Constructio
495. rectory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the files from the selected directory folder are pasted to their new location Loading a Loss Table from Mass Storage Use the following procedure to load a Loss Table from mass storage files saved to the MT9083 Series internal memory or to a USB memory stick 1 Press the File key The Load screen appears see Figure 8 14 below 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Medium Internal Memory 3 Files 950 MB Free Folder File Name Date Time Load Table A NEWO003 cSYV 12 04 19 13 17 NEW002 CSY 12 04 19 13 17 NEWOO01 CSY 12 04 19 13 14 New Folder Delete More gt gt v Selected File Size 586 Figure 8 14 Load screen Loss Test Set mode 2 Highlight the desired File Name in the File Name table 3 Press Load Table f1 The Loss Table screen appears with the selected Loss Table displayed MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 39 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Printing Loss Tables Loss Tables can be printed via the optional BL 80RII printer Note The printed output from the MT9083 Series consists of a screen shot Only the details currently displayed on the LCD less the softkeys are printed Make sure that the desired details are displayed before printing Connecting the Printer Connect the MT9083 Series to the BL 80RII printer using a USB printer conversion cable as shown below in Figure 8 15 36 pin male s
496. reen appears Select the desired medium in which the new folder will be located by highlighting the Medium field and toggling the Enter key to choose from Internal Memory or USB Memory Note The USB Memory selection is only available when a USB memory stick is connected to the MT9083 Series Press New Folder f4 the New Folder screen appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the New Folder name field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the New Folder name field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the New Folder name field Use the f1 f4 softkeys for the following e Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters e Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters e Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available e Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name With the desired character highlighted in the character matrix and the text cursor placed in the desired position press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the New Folder name field Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in New Folder name field When all of the desired characters are entered press O
497. reported as Splitter event in the Events analysis The range of settings for this parameter is 1 0 dB to 30 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 17 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 18 To set the Splitter Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Splitter Loss Press Enter The Splitter Loss dialog appears Go to Step 4 if the splitter loss is already at hand Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select Branch and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to select the number of branches Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select Splitter Loss and then use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the splitter loss threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Splitter Loss threshold is set MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Pass Fail Thresholds Parameters Events that exceed the Pass Fail Threshold parameters are highlighted in red in the Event Analysis table The Pass Fail Thresholds parameters include Non Reflective Event Loss fusion Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical Reflectance Fiber Loss dB km Total Loss Splitter Loss Non Reflective Event Loss fusion This parameter highlights non reflective event losses such as fusion splices in the Even
498. resent Hour Minute Second Wavelength Wave length used for measurement 5 66 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Headers Headers hold valuable information about the trace files which may save a considerable amount of time when recalling traces for comparison The header does not require repopulating each time a new trace is collected Information entered on the Header screen is retained until such a time as the header requires editing To access and edit the Header 1 At the completion of a test press the Save key The Save screen appears see Figure 5 24 on page 5 65 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired file name if necessary 3 Press Header f2 the Header screen appears see Figure 5 25 on page 5 67 e To edit or enter header information continue at step 4 e To close the Header continue at step 10 2012 Jul 1 10 00 gt 99 00h 80 SF Unit Header Customer File Header Data Flag OT Cable ID Fiber ID lt AUTO gt Cable Code Start Location Terminal Location Operator Comment Used to input the fiber ID Number of characters must be less than 30 Exit Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 5 25 Header Screen Note When Auto Filename is enabled on the AutoSave screen see Figure 5 6 on page 5 15 the Fiber ID field of the Header screen is auto populated starting w
499. reshold i Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance Press Enter The Reflectance dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs If the Reflectance dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set Reflectance to None when it is currently set in dBs To set Reflectance threshold to None 1 3 Highlight Reflectance and then press the Enter key The Reflectance dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Fiber Loss dB km This parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the dB km loss exceeds the value set The range of settings for this parameter is 0 01 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Fiber Loss dB km threshold 1 5 Use the Up and Down Arro
500. resholds f4 to NONE See Thresholds on page 4 15 4 22 PASS is displayed in Event Summary when all of the Pass Fail Thresholds pass 4 42 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Editing Events Overview There are times when it is desirable to edit analysis events Some examples are e Changing analysis results to reflect more accurate manual measurements e Inserting manually located events where analysis located a Grouped event The following editing softkeys are only available when an Event Table is displayed e Add Event f1 e Edit Event f2 e Delete Event f3 Adding an Event To add an event 1 Make sure that the current trace displays an Event Table 2 Set Cursor A as the active red cursor and position it at the location for the new event see Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 Note If the cursor snaps to the events on the trace when you turn the Rotary knob toggle the More gt gt softkey f6 until the legend on the f2 softkey reads Cursor and then toggle f2 so that the red legend on the softkey reads Free You can now position the cursor as needed Press More gt gt f6 once again to return to the editing softkeys 3 Press Add Event f1 the New Event dialog appears MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 43 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 44 80 4 OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Go 9 00
501. rms of its contents and Anritsu Corporation hereafter Anritsu hereby grants you the right to use this Software with the Anritsu specified equipment hereafter Equipment for the purposes set out in this EULA Grant of License and Limitations Regardless of whether this Software was purchased from or provided free of charge by Anritsu you agree not to rent lease lend or otherwise distribute this Software to third parties and further agree not to disassemble recompile reverse engineer modify or create derivative works of this Software You may make one copy of this Software for backup purposes only You are not permitted to reverse engineer this software This EULA allows you to install one copy of this Software on one piece of Equipment Disclaimers To the extent not prohibited by law in no event shall Anritsu be liable for personal injury or any incidental special indirect or consequential damages whatsoever including without limitation damages for loss of profits loss of data business interruption or any other commercial damages or losses arising out of or related to your use or inability to use this Software MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Limitation of Liability If a fault bug is discovered in this Software preventing operation as described in the operation manual or specifications whether or not the customer uses this software as described in the manual Anritsu shall
502. rnal memory or on a USB memory stick You can copy a single file multiple files or all of the files in the current directory To copy a file 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen or the Load screen 2 Press More gt gt f6 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired trace file 4 Press Copy f1 5 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected file 6 Press Paste f2 A message box stating Copy 1 1 along with the name of the file appears briefly Use the following procedure to copy multiple files in a directory To copy multiple files 1 CN yo Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen or the Load screen Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to copy and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to copy Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message
503. roduce modify display perform sublicense and distribute the Original Code or portions thereof with or without Modifications and or as part of a Larger Work and b under Patents Claims infringed by the making using or selling of Original Code to make have made use practice sell and offer for sale and or otherwise dispose of the Original Code or portions thereof c the licenses granted in this Section 2 1 a and b are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License d Notwithstanding Section 2 1 b above no patent license is granted 1 for code that You delete from the Original Code 2 separate from the Original Code or 3 for infringements caused by i the modification of the Original Code or ii the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices 2 2 Contributor Grant Subject to third party intellectual property claims each Contributor hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license a under intellectual property rights other than patent or trademark Licensable by Contributor to use reproduce modify display perform sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor or portions thereof either on an un C 18 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License modified basis with other Modifications as Covered Code and or as part of a Larger Work and b un
504. rohibited operation The prohibited operation is indicated symbolically in or near the barred circle This indicates an obligatory safety precaution The obligatory operation is indicated symbolically in or near the circle This indicates a warning or caution The contents are indicated symbolically in or near the triangle This indicates a note The contents are described in the IOO box Ko These indicate that the marked part should be recycled uS For Safety Z WARNING e ALWAYS refer to the Operation Manual when working near locations at which the alert mark shown on the left is attached If the advice in the Operation Manual is not followed there is a risk of personal injury or reduced equipment performance The alert mark shown on the left may also be used with other marks and descriptions to indicate other dangers gt iv MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual For Safety e Overvoltage Category This instrument complies with overvoltage category II defined in IEC 61010 DO NOT connect this instrument to the power supply of overvoltage category III or IV e Laser radiation warning e NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the equipment nor into the end of a cable connected to the equipment There is a risk of injury if laser radiation enters the eye e The Laser Safety label is attached to the equipment for safety use as indicated in Laser Radiation Markings on page xiii Electric Shock e
505. rom the optional Power Meter port Z CAUTION Regardless of the method used one or two patch cord do not disconnect the patch cord from the external light source The coupled level of the light source may change when the patch cord is reconnected Attach the free end of the patch cord connected to the external light source to one end of the fiber to be tested Using a second patch cord connect the MT9083 Series optional Power Meter to the other end of the fiber to be tested 4 EMS or M F see the following note 2 Patch cords 3 Fiber under test FUT MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Note EMS Equilibrium Mode Simulator multimode fiber M F Mode Filter singlemode fiber Use of either an EMS or M F while not necessary in most cases is however recommended by the TIA Telecommunications Industry Association EMS and M F are not included with the MT9083 Series 4 Make sure that the Power Meter and external light source are set to the same wavelength 5 Start the transmit mode for the external light source Allow 5 minutes for the light source to stabilize 6 On the MT9083 Series press Loss Table 6 The Loss Table screen appears see Figure 8 7 on page 8 9 Press Add f1 to add the current test data to the Loss Table 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all fibers for the current Loss Table are tested Note It is a good practice to save t
506. rom the ACCESS master while it is being accessed e The memory card may be damaged by static electric charges This instrument is designed for an industrial environment In a residential environment this instrument may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Exposure to corrosive gases such as hydrogen sulfide sulfurous acid and hydrogen chloride will cause faults and failures Note that some organic solvents release corrosive gases MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual xvii Equipment Certificate Equipment Certificate Anritsu Corporation certifies that this equipment was tested before shipment using calibrated measuring instruments with direct traceability to public testing organizations recognized by national research laboratories including the National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology and the National Institute of Information and Communications Technology and was found to meet the published specifications Anritsu Warranty Anritsu Corporation will repair this equipment free of charge if a malfunction occurs within one year after shipment due to a manufacturing fault However software fixes will be made in accordance with the separate Software End User License Agreement Moreover Anritsu Corporation will deem this warranty is void when xviii The fault is outside the scope of the warranty conditions separately described in the operati
507. row keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Total Loss 2 Press Enter The Total Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs 3 If the Total Loss dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 5 Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set the Total Loss threshold to None when it is currently set in dBs To set the Total Loss threshold to None 1 Highlight Total Loss and then press the Enter key The Total Loss dialog appears displaying the current dB setting 2 Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Splitter Loss This Parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the splitter loss exceeds the Auto Detect threshold plus value set The range of settings for this parameter is 0 1 dB to 20 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode To set the Splitter Loss threshold 1 5 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob t
508. rview window MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Trace Waveform The Trace Waveform or Trace is the downward sloping line going from left to right that connects the data points collected during a test See item 1 in Figure 4 11 Up to four traces can be displayed simultaneously a primary trace and up to three overlay traces This area also contains scroll bars located at the top and left side of the trace graph which define the display range of the waveform Cursors The cursors see items 2 and 3 in Figure 4 11 on page 4 32 are the two vertical lines that extend from the top to the bottom of the trace graph The cursors allow you to extract power and distance information from the trace graph The active cursor is displayed in red and the inactive cursor is displayed in blue See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details on cursor use Horizontal Vertical Offset The primary trace data can be shifted horizontally or vertically by using the Shift Mode softkeys and the Rotary knob The distance offset horizontal and decibel offset vertical are displayed above the trace graph These values see item 4 Figure 4 11 on page 4 32 in are only displayed when some type of shift is in use See Shifting Trace Data on page 4 75 for details on how to shift the primary trace Scale The vertical axis scale see item 6 in Figure 4 11 on page 4 32 is located on t
509. rwise the loss value is reported as a negative quantity called a gainer To perform a 2 Point Loss measurement 1 2 Select Display From Origin see Display From on page 4 71 Place Cursor B at the end of the fiber See Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 for details Select Display From B Expand the screen horizontally and vertically for more accurate cursor placement See Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 4 58 for details Place Cursor B at the beginning of the reflective end of the fiber and read the total fiber length from the highlighted Cursor B location in the Cursor Distance area Select Display From Origin Place Cursor A just to the right of the diffusion tail if one exists after the beginning of the fiber Select Display From A Expand the screen horizontally and vertically for more accurate cursor placement Move Cursor A to the end of the diffusion tail Set the Loss Mode to 2 Pt Loss See Setting the Loss Mode on page 4 74 for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 5 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements 12 The 2 Pt Loss reading appears the Loss Mode Measurement and dB km Loss The dB km Loss measurement uses a data point at Cursor A and a data point at Cursor B to calculate the change in dB Y Axis between the two points This is divided by the distance between the two Cursors to calculate the Loss Distance measurement
510. s ACCESS Master Operation Manual c 3 Appendix C Software License c 4 Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2
511. s Enter to change the value Figure 11 16 VIP Report Settings Screen Headers Headers hold valuable information about the VIP Report files You don t need to fill the header each time a new VIP image is analyzed Information entered on the VIP Report Settings screen is retained until such a time as the header requires editing Header consists of the following fields e Customer This field allows you to enter a customer name e Location This field allows you to enter a location such as an address or city Operator This field allows you to enter an operator name Notes This filed allows you to enter any notes that may be desired concerning the specific job Use the following procedure to access and edit the header on the VIP Report Settings screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 17 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option To access and edit the Header 1 Press Report f5 on the VIP screen to display the VIP Report Settings screen 2 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the desired field Customer Location Operator Notes Then press the Enter key to display the Text Entry dialog box see Figure 2 1 5 When all the desired characters are entered press OK f6 to return to the VIP Report Settings screen Repeat Step 2 until all desired text entry fields on the VIP Report Settings screen are edited Press Exit f6 to close the VIP Report Settings screen and return to the VI
512. s are billed for time and materials Call our Technical Support Center for further information Anritsu offers a performance verification service that extensively tests this product and documents its performance All test equipment used in the verification process is traceable to NIST or NPL standards and is calibrated annually Anritsu recommends that you have your unit calibrated annually at our factory MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual About this Manual The operation manuals for the MT9083 Series ACCESS Master hereafter referred to as MT9083 Series or this equipment are comprised of the operation manual for the MT9083 Series main frame This operation manual describes the operations for the MT9083 Series ACCESS Master To understand characteristic functions of the MT9083 Series ACCESS Master carefully read Chapter 2 Overview Operations for the MT9083 Series ACCESS Master main frame are described MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Quick User s Guide A printed quick user s guide that describes basic operation Operation manuals for MT9083 Series MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Remote Control Operation Manual Operations for the Remote control function are described MX900021A Remote Screen Software Operation Manual The software operation is explained by displaying the main unit operation screen on a PC MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Table of Contents E EE O
513. s captured by the VIP can be analyzed on the MT9083 Series Set Probe Model Tip Type and Test Profile to analyze correctly VIP Test Settings 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Probe Model G0293A Tip Type FBET U12M Test Profile SM UPC gt 45 Test Settings Use Up Down arrow keys to select the probe model Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 11 9 VIP Test Settings Screen To set the Probe Model 1 Press Settings f4 on the VIP screen to display the VIP Test Settings screen 2 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the Probe Model 3 Press the Enter key to display the Probe Model dialog box 4 Highlight the desired Probe Model setting 545VIP G0293A or G0306A 5 Press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Probe Model field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 9 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 11 10 To set the Tip Type 1 Press Settings f4 on the VIP screen to display the VIP Test Settings screen 2 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the Tip Type 3 Press the Enter key to display the Tip Type dialog box 4 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight the desired Tip Type setting in the list 5 Press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Tip Type field To set the Test Profile 1 Press Settin
514. s dialog closes e The event flag on the trace is moved to the new position which is reflected in the Event table Note An event that has been moved is flagged with an before its event number in the Event table Note The original trace and event table can be retrieved as long as you have not saved the edited trace Press More gt gt f6 until f1 reads Analyze and then press f1 to re run the analysis 4 48 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Deleting an Event The most common application for deleting an event is when a point is erroneously judged as a fault point due to noise in the trace To Delete an event 1 Make sure that the current trace displays an Event Table 2 Position the active cursor at the event to be deleted Note Toggle More gt gt f6 until the legend on the f2 softkey reads Cursor and then toggle f2 so that the red legend on the softkey reads Event Turning the Rotary knob will cause the active cursor to snap to the events on the trace Press More gt gt f6 once again to return to the editing softkeys 3 Press Delete Event f3 a warning message appears on the screen see the following figure 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Ge 9 00h 80 J OTDR Standard Dist km 8439km Cum Loss dB dB km Reflect dB k kkk Loss dB 0 152 2 12 1526km 1 812 40 495 0 201 1 274 3 32 2436km 0 780 49 960 Yes 4
515. s in the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment area e None The template and target trace event locations will be used as is without Distance Helix Factor Adjustment e Snap to Template End All template event locations will be converted to proportional relative to target end target event locations prior to correlation For example if a template event is located at a distance which is 43 21 from the template end event location then the location will be temporarily converted to a distance 43 21 from the target trace end event After correlation all events will be converted to proportional template end locations and stored in the target trace MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 43 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 44 e Snap to Trace End All template event locations will be converted to proportional relative to target end target event locations prior to correlation and left as is after correlation To Set the Distance Helix Factor 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the desired option None Snap to Template End or Snap to Trace End on the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment field Toggle the Enter key or the Rotary knob to select the desire option 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen Note The Snap to options should only be used if all traces have correct fiber end events Detailed explanation of the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment function
516. s it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the selected files are pasted to their new location Use the following procedure to copy all of the files in a directory folder To copy all files in a directory or folder 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 4 39 on page 4 100 or the Load screen see Figure 4 35 on page 4 90 Select the desired folder directory in which contains the files to be copied Press the Down Arrow key and highlight the first file in the selected directory folder if not already highlighted Press More f6 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off 6 Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files 8 Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the files from the selected directory folder are pasted to their new location Saving Files with AutoSave AutoSave automatically saves trace data at the completion of data collection Note The MT9083 Series maintains the pat
517. s not displayed or the event does not exist this button is invalid displayed in gray 6 60 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode OTDR Construction Mode Testing The following section details how to run an OTDR Construction mode test Running an OTDR Construction Test Construction mode simplifies and automates the testing required when installing fiber Construction mode is used when many fibers in a cable need to be tested and documented before deployment To run a Construction mode test 1 Power up the MT9083 Series if necessary 2 Highlight OTDR Construction on the Top Menu screen and then press the Enter key The OTDR Construction Setup screen appears OTDR Construction Setup 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Ga 69 00h 80 SG Store Files At EE E _ E EEE E_ EEE Base Filename ab_o onanie Filename NearFari6250ther 001 Test Direction A gt B B gt A Test O Parameters Site A Near Site B Far Other Other Header Wavelengths Options J 1310 J Connection check eae v 1550 Automode x 1625 File Save Verify Macrobend Number of Fibers 1 Start Number 1 Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 6 23 OTDR Construction Setup screen 3 Make the desired settings on the OTDR Construction Setup screen See OTDR Construction Setup Screen on pages
518. s parameter is 0 01 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01 dB increments To set the Fiber Loss dB km threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Fiber Loss dB km 2 Press Enter The Fiber Loss dB km dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 21 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 22 5 is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs If the Fiber Loss dB km dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set the Fiber Loss dB km threshold to None when it is currently set in dBs To set the Fiber Loss dB km threshold to None 1 3 Highlight Fiber Loss dB km and then press the Enter key The Fiber Loss dB km dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Total Loss This Parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the Total loss Cum Loss dB exceeds the value se
519. s the softkey f1 f5 that corresponds to the desired settings category MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Note Thet hresholds cannot be changed on Setup screen Press Thresholds F3 on the Fiber Visualizer screen to change the thresholds General Setups Press General f1 to access the General setups screen if not already displayed The General setups pertain to general setting for the MT9083 Series and are detailed in General Screen Settings on pages 3 7 3 15 2012 Jul 1 10 00 BD 39 00h 80 4 Local Time 10 00 Time difference from UTC 0 0 Hours mencrat Date display Format Year Month Day Auto Launch None Preferences Printer BL 8ORII SD1 31 2 Paper feed On Color Theme Grayscale digit Language English USB Video Output Off Auto Backlight Off None ULSETEEE Auto Power Off None Instrument Power Save mode _ High Z MOSAIG Used to modify date About Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 5 2 General Setups Screen Fiber Visualizer Mode Preferences 1 2 Press Preferences 1 2 f2 to access the Preferences 1 2 screen Figure 5 3 on page 5 4 and set the status for the following Distance display Units Connection Check Active Fiber Check Auto Analysis Auto Scale Event Summary MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 3 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode e Reflectance Calculation e ORL C
520. screen see Figure 8 3 on page 8 3 as well as the current optical Loss reading If the Reference value is set to None the screen displays the Power reading instead of the Loss reading Loss Table Light Source settings area Power Meter settings area Loss table Softkeys The Loss Table occupies the lower half of the Loss Test Set Loss Table screen The table is scrollable by using either the Rotary knob or the Up and Down Arrow keys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Each row in the table represents a tested fiber A Loss Table can contain up to a maximum of 999 rows and presents the following details No Number of the fiber tested e WL Wavelength set for the Power Meter Loss Current loss value Power Current optical power measurement value Threshold Pass Fail status as determined by the current Threshold value e Comment Comments entered by the operator Loss Table Softkeys The following softkeys are available on the Loss Table screen Add f1 Press the Add softkey to add the current test results to the Loss Table Overwrite f2 Press the Overwrite softkey to overwrite the highlighted row in the Loss Table with the results from the current test Delete 3 Press the Delete softkey to delete the test results of currently highlight row Delete All f4 Press the Delete All softkey to clear all test results from
521. settings for this parameter is 1 dB to 99 dB in 1 dB increments MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode To set the Fiber End threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Fiber End 2 Press Enter The Fiber End dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the fiber end threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Fiber End threshold is set Macro Bend Determines the Macro Bend detect value equal to or above which will be reported in the Events analysis Note Macro Bend detection is only available when in Wavelength All test mode Note Macro Bend detection requires a unit with at least two single mode operating wavelengths one at 1310 nm and a second at either 1550 nm or 1625 nm The range of settings for this parameter is 0 3 dB to 2 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Macro Bend threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Macro Bend Press Enter The Macro Bend dialog appears 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment decrement the fiber end threshold setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 4 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the new Macro Bend threshold is set Splitter Loss Determines the Splitter Loss value equal to or above which will be
522. shing File access save read copy delete etc is in progress The firmware is being updated Currently connected to a personal computer MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 13 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Instrument Power Save Mode When an OTDR measurement is completed and a successive measurement is not performed within a set period of time the MT9083 Series enters a standby status when an Instrument Power Save mode is active Note The Instrument Power Save mode setting only applies to OTDR test modes All other test applications and screens such as the Top Menu screen when not currently in use are already in standby status to save power regardless of this setting To set the Instrument Power Save mode 1 Highlight Instrument Power Save mode on the General screen and then press the Enter key 2 The Instrument Power Save mode dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight one of the following settings High Activates the standby mode when successive OTDR recommended measurements are not performed within approximately 10 seconds after the current measurement has completed Low Activates the standby mode when successive OTDR measurements are not performed within approximately 180 seconds after the current measurement has completed Off Does not activate the standby mode after the completion of an OTDR measurement 3 Press the Enter ke
523. sing the lid Laptop computer Turning on the screen saver function Turning on the battery power saving function Laptop computer For how to turn off the functions refer to the operation manual that came with your computer MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual xxiii Notes On Export Management Notes On Export Management This product and its manuals may require an Export License Approval by the Government of the product s country of origin for re export from your country Before re exporting the product or manuals please contact us to confirm whether they are export controlled items or not When you dispose of export controlled items the products manuals need to be broken shredded so as not to be unlawfully used for military purpose Disposal Procedure The product that you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery The battery is recyclable At the end of its useful life under various state and local laws it may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper disposal Reuse Parts Anritsu group promotes recycling activities in order to reuse available resources and save energy This product may use recycled parts mechanical components that conform to Anritsu s quality standards Limited Life Span Parts The life span of certain parts used in this instrument is determined by the
524. sion value of the vertical grid scale by a factor of two e Press the Left Arrow key Each press increases the distance division value on the horizontal grid scale by a factor of two An error tone sounds when you reach the full expand contract value for either axils Display From Three Display From modes are available for viewing the trace graph Display From A Display From B and Display From Origin e Press Display From f5 to toggle through the three modes The legend on the softkey changes to the current Display From mode Display From Origin eo Keeps the origin 0 distance and 0 dB in the upper left corner of the trace graph MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 65 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Display From A Displays the A cursor intercept with the trace data in the center of the trace graph view Display From B Displays the B cursor intercept with the trace data in the center of the trace graph view Note The Display From softkey f5 is only active when the legend on f1 reads Open Summary Setting the Loss Mode You can change the Loss Mode in the OTDR Construction application at the end of a test providing the Preview is set to On on the Test in Progress screen see Figure 6 18 on page 6 49 To set the Loss Mode 1 Press Loss Mode f4 The Loss Mode dialog appears Loss Mode 2 Pt Loss 2 Pt LSA dB km Loss dB Km LSA 2 Pt dB Km ORL Figure
525. sired test parameters have been set press Manual Test f1 to start the test This starts an averaged scan at the lowest wavelength using the parameters as set in steps 2 through 5 When the test completes Event analysis is run if Auto Analysis is enabled and the trace is saved if AutoSave is enabled The trace is placed into an Overlay position and the next wavelength starts and updates the Primary trace position This process continues until all traces have be collected The Trace screen at the end of the test will appear as shown in Figure 4 29 Note The number of Overlay traces displayed is depended on the number of wavelengths available for testing MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 83 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode OTDR Standard AUTO16250000 Dist km 8172km 12 1553km 32 2370km SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB kk kkk 0 222 39 868 0 219 49 057 0 211 A 7 5601km B 52 4821 km A gt B 44 9221 km IOR 1 468500 RES 5 003m AVG 11776 WL 1625 nm SM DR 100 1km 11 910 PW 4us HR Refl H Analysis 4 84 Figure 4 29 Wavelength All Trace Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Trace Overlay Management The MT9083 Series can display up to four traces in the Trace grid one primary trace and up to three overlay traces The Trace Overlay management function softkeys are only available
526. sly for a long period of time Display backlight Cold cathode tubes are used as the backlight of the MT9083 Series display LCD Luminance deteriorates as lighting time advances The lifetime of the backlight is between 15 000 and 20 000 hours When replacing the backlight the entire display device should be replaced because they are joined Contact your local Anritsu Service office or the Technical Support Center see page xxx for details on replacing the display device MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual D 1 Appendix D Limited Life Span Parts D 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual
527. sly saved traces See Displaying Trace Files on page 4 90 for details n z 2 Note The File key is only active at the Top Menu screen and in the OTDR Standard application Setup Setup key Press this key to access the General setups at the Top Menu level and the various Application setups when in a Test Application mode Note The Setup key is not active for some Test Applications such as Optical Power Meter Light Source and Visual Fault Locate 2 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual History Print Numeric Keypad xt 23 Setup History Print VLD Softkeys 6606090 80 Chapter 2 Overview History key This key is not active as of the current software release Print key Press this key to access the Print functions See Printing Trace Files on page 4 105 for details The Numeric keypad can be used for the following e Entering numeric values in the various System and Test Application menus Press the BS key when you need to backspace Each press backspaces the text cursor one character space e As short cut keys to select the desired character groups when in the various Save screen functions e When not being used for dialog input keys 1 through 7 also have dedicated functions See Dedicated Function Keys on page 2 2 for details The MT9083 Series have six softkeys on the front panel located to the right of the LCD screen and numbered
528. so that the red legend on the softkey reads On and continue at step 9 If you do not want to review the Trace and Event Table toggle Preview 3 so that the red legend on the softkey reads Off and continue at step 11 10 At the conclusion of the data collection and analysis the OTDR Construction Summary screen appears see Figure 6 24 on page 6 63 6 62 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode OTDR Construction 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Go 39 00h 80 8 Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB D 5 7763km 0 208 kk Kk 12 1502km 1 600 39 901 0 219 2 888 Close 32 2370km 0 759 49 072 0 209 8 692 Summary 52 4770km BME Fiber End 31 751 0 216 13 829 3s 0o f Total Loss ji SUMMARY End Fault Distance 52 4770 km Prior Event 32 2370 km Loss Mode 2 Pt Loss 13 829 dB Display From A 22 0701 km 2 Pt Loss WL 1625nmSM IOR 1 468500 B 38 0388 km 4 106 DR 100 4 km RES 5 003m Cursor A gt B 15 9687 km Refl 4 duik PW 4us HR AVG 5120 Erang Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 6 24 OTDR Construction Summary screen Press Close Summary f1 to view the Trace graph 11 Press Accept f2 to save the trace and advance to the next test 12 If File Save Verify is selected on the OTDR Construction Setup screen see Figure 6 23 on page 6 61 the Save scr
529. splay Mode After Analysis field Preferences 2 2 Press Preferences 2 2 3 to access the Preferences 2 2 screen and set the status for the following Auto Patch cord Removal Grid Display Force Total Loss Event Icon Movement End Event for ORL Calculation Span Calculation A B Span Analysis Note The following settings are used only on the Fiber Visualizer Event Icon Movement End Event for ORL Calculation Span Calculation A B Span Analysis MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 9 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 10 Preferences 2 2 2013 Oct 30 04 14 Noe id Grid Display Dotted Force Total Loss Off Fiber Visualizer Event Icon Movement Left to Right End Event for ORL Calculation OMIT Event Table Span Calculation Span Length A B Span Analysis Off a sir Used to automatically shift out patch cords after analysis is complete WARNING This function may not work with certain patch cord lengths Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 4 4 Preferences 2 2 Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Auto Patch cord Removal Specify the event number to treat as dummy fiber The range of settings for this parameter is 1 to 9 in 1 increments To set the Auto Patch cord Removal 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Patch cord Removal 2 Press En
530. splayed in the ORL Calculation field Trace Overview When set to On a small overview of the trace is displayed in the lower left portion of the Trace graph To activate the Trace Overview 1 3 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Trace Overview Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set Real Time Averages Use the Real Time Averages setting to set the amount of averages used in a real time scan To set the Real Time Averages Ls Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Real Time Averages Press Enter The Real Time Averages dialog appears Highlight the desired setting Low provides fast real time updates with a lower dynamic range High provides slower real time updates with a higher dynamic range Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Real Time Averages field Real Time Attenuation Select the attenuation method used during real time scans To set the Real Time Attenuation Ls Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Real Time Attenuation 2 Press Enter The Real Time Attenuation dialog appears 5 8 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode 3 Highlight the desired setting Auto Attenuation Real Time attenuation is automatically selected
531. splays an Event Table 2 Set Cursor A as the active red cursor and position it at the desired event see Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 Note Toggle More gt gt f6 until the legend on the f2 softkey reads Cursor and then toggle f2 so that the red legend on the softkey reads Event Turning the Rotary knob will cause the active cursor to snap to the events on the trace Press More gt gt f6 once again to return to the editing softkeys 3 Position Cursor A at the location for the new event Note If the cursor snaps to the events on the trace when you turn the Rotary knob toggle the More gt gt softkey f6 until the legend on the f2 softkey MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 47 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode reads Cursor and then toggle f2 so that the red legend on the softkey reads Free You can now position the cursor as needed Press More gt gt f6 once again to return to the editing softkeys 4 Press Edit Event f2 the Edit Event dialog appears Note The Edit Event softkey is only active in Splice Loss mode Pressing Edit Event f2 when in any test mode other than Splice Loss displays the following message Cannot edit event Loss mode must be set to splice loss 5 Press Paste f3 The Distance field in the Edit Event dialog changes to reflect the position of the active cursor 6 Press OK f1 the following happens e The Edit Event
532. spose of the battery pack correctly Do not discard the battery pack in the garbage or burn it If you do so fire or explosion may occur Do not use any battery pack other than the one supplied Similarly do not use the supplied battery pack for any other device Measurement Ports 2 16 The measurement ports on the MT9083 Series are located on the top panel of the unit see items 6 and 7 in Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 Depending on the model of the MT9083 Series there are either one or two measurement ports The measurement port to which a fiber is connected depends on the test application and the wavelength to be measured The MT 9083 Series can also be equipped with a optional Visual Fault Locator accessed via the VLD port MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview Optical Connector and Adapter The optical connector is an interface to the measurement ports OTDR OPM OLS ports which accepts adapters for FC SC ST and DIN fiber connector types Others connector adapter types may be available contact Anritsu for details The following are some of the optical connector adapters currently available for the MT 9083 Series UNIV FC UNIV SC UNIV ST Note An FC APC adapter is also available The UNIV AFC is distinguished by the location of the key alignment slot which is on the left side of the adapter Note The UNIV SC can be used with both UPC SC and APC SC style connectors Cleaning the Optical C
533. ss dB field and then use the Numeric keypad see item 2 in Figure 2 1 on page 2 1 to enter the desired loss for the new event Toggle Change f5 to change the value of the loss setting from negative to positive e Select Reflect dB and then use the Numeric keypad see item 2 in Figure 2 1 on page 2 1 to enter the desired reflectance value for the new event Toggle Change f5 to change the value of the Reflectance setting from negative to positive Note The Reflect dB field is dimmed when the Event Type is set to Non Reflective e Move the highlight to the Saturated check box and then press the Enter key to select the check box The new event will be flagged with an S after it s Reflectance value in the Event table to denote it as a saturated event when you complete step 5 Note The Saturated check box is dimmed when the Event Type is set to Non Reflective 5 Press OK f1 the following happens e The New Events dialog closes e The new event is flagged on the trace display e The new event is added to the Event table Note An event which as been added to a trace is flagged with an before its event number in the Event table to signify that it was manually added Note The original trace and event table can be retrieved even if you have saved the edited trace Press More gt gt f6 until fl reads Analyze and then press f1 to re run the analysis The trace and it s Ev
534. ss ESC key to cancel Enter the password again to confirm it 5 Press OK f6 and you can now user the new User Password Note Unless you are the User you must enter the Administrator Password to change a User Password MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 21 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Password Lifespan Set the Password Lifespan for the user password You can set a value from 1 day to 200 days or set the password not to expire gt Note The unit will shut down automatically if running at the time the Duration of use Password Lifespan expires Regardless of when you set the Password Lifespan the day count is updated at 0 00 of each day To set the Password Lifespan 1 Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob to highlight Password Lifespan 2 Press the Enter key to display the Password Lifespan dialog box Password Settings 2012 Jul 1 10 00 General Setting Password Protect On Unlimited Administrator Setting Password Password Lifespan User Setting Password Password Lifespan Expiration Date Unlimited Set the Password Lifespan Choose Unlimited in the case without limitation Press the Up Down keys or use numeric entry keys to change the value Figure 3 10 Password Lifespan dialog box 3 Depending on the current setting the dialog will indicate Unlimited indicating no Password Lifespan is set or the number of
535. ss the Enter key The Number of Fibers dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Numeric keypad to enter the desired number of fibers up to 9999 4 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the number set is displayed in the Number of Fibers field and the autonumber section of the filename is set to the number of digits used MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Start Number Options Enter the number of the first fiber to be tested in the Start Number field The number entered is also displayed in the autonumber section of Filename field To set the Start Number 1 Highlight the Start Number field Press the Enter key The Start Number dialog appears Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Numeric keypad to enter the desired start number Leading 0 zeros will be automatically added for numbers of less than 4 digits 4 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the number set is displayed in both the Start Number field and the autonumber section of the filename The Options field consists of check boxes use to activate the following features e Connection Check Automode e File Save Verify e Macro Bend Connection Check Select the Connection Check check box to have Construction mode perform a Connection Check each time a new fiber is connected for testing See Connection Check on page 6 67 for complete details Note Selecting the Connection Check in th
536. ssary use the Rotary knob to position the cursor closer to the event Press More gt gt f6 to access the Level Two softkeys Press Cursors f4 to access the Cursor softkeys Press Move LSA Off f2 The softkey legend changes to Move LSA On and the a marker on the left LSA interval changes from X to W a larger X with a diamond superimposed on it Press the Rotary knob or the Enter key until the desired LSA interval icon changes from X to X and then turn the Rotary knob until the YE is centered on linear backscatter Make sure that the LSA interval icon is clear of any near by event Repeat step 10 selecting the other marker if necessary Repeat steps 2 through 10 to adjust the other LSA interval if necessary Press Exit f6 The Cursor softkeys close and the Level Two softkeys appear The dB km LSA Loss measurement finds the LSA 2 Point Loss see 2 Point LSA on page 7 10 for details and divides it by the distance between the two cursors LSA 2 Point L Loss Distance dB km gt 24 omt oss Distance Between Cursor A and Cursor B To perform a dB km LSA loss measurement WEES Oe a Position the cursors at the desired locations on the trace Select Display From Origin see Display From on page 4 71 Press More gt gt f6 to access the Level Two softkeys Press Loss Mode f3 and set the loss mode to dB km LSA Display from each cursor and expand the scre
537. step 4 Press New Folder f4 to create a new folder for the file save See New Folder on page 3 40 for details e Select a different folder for the file save by highlighting the desired folder name folder names are displayed in parentheses above the list of filenames and then pressing Enter 4 Press Select f1 The Select Directory screen closes and the OTDR Construction Setup screen reappears Base Filename The Base Filename field displays the filename template which includes placeholder characters for Site A Site B Wavelength and Fiber Number See the following table for details Placeholder Filename Characters Elements es Fiber Number A CAUTION You may edit the order of the base filename placeholders and add additional text to the base filename not to exceed 28 characters DO NOT delete or change any of the placeholder characters Doing so will break the link to their base filename element MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 21 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 22 To edit the Base Filename 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Base Filename field and then press the Enter key The Base Filename screen appears If no USB keyboard is connected follow the instructions from step 2 to enter the name using the front panel keys If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired charact
538. t The range of settings for this parameter is 0 1 dB to 60 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Total Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Total Loss Press Enter The Total Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs If the Total Loss dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Use the following procedure to set the Total Loss threshold to None when it is currently set in dBs To set the Total Loss threshold to None 1 2 3 Highlight Total Loss and then press the Enter key The Total Loss dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Splitter Loss This Parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the splitter loss exceeds the Auto Detect threshold plus value set The range of settings for this parameter is 0 1 dB
539. t dB dB km Wavelength nm Total Loss dB ORL dB Cancel NTE Fiber Visualizer Thresholds Figure 5 16 Connection Check screen 5 The Selecting Test Parameters screen is displayed briefly followed by the Test In Progress screen 6 When Fault Locate test has finished the test results are displayed in Fiber Visualizer Main screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 49 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Fiber Visualizer Apr 1411 18 g WL 1310nmsmM i DR 5km i PW 100ns ER AVG 60 Sec stare m 42039km Test Mode Events 3 Za Marker A 0 0000 km 2 0001 Wavelength 1310 dB Test Parameters 0 5 km 3 ns HR Reflect dB dB km ae see 0 652 1OR BSC start 13 441 B Fiber End 1 467700 78 50 Wavelength nm 1310 Pass Fail p Total Loss dB 21 224 3 FAIL Swap ORL dB 35 441 Fiber Visualizer Thresholds Figure 5 17 Fiber Visualizer Main screen 7 Press Trace F2 to view the trace and further analyze the results if desired See Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements for detail on further analyzing a trace 8 Connect the next fiber to be tested and then press the Start key to continue 5 50 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Connection Check When the Connection Check is set to On
540. t is currently set in event number To set the Auto Patch cord Removal to None 1 Highlight Auto patch cord and then press the Enter key The Auto Patch cord Removal dialog appears displaying the current event number setting 2 Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 3 Press Enter The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Note The Auto Patch cord Removal feature works only with patch cords that are at least 40 m 120 ft and 40 data points longer than the pulse width Grid Display Select the format for the grid lines on the trace screen To set the Grid Display 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Grid Display 2 Press Enter The Grid Display dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired setting Dotted A dotted line grid is used for trace display Solid A solid line grid is used for trace display 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Grid Display field Force Total Loss Select the display settings for Total Loss Cum Loss dB To set the Force Total Loss 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Force Total Loss 2 Press Enter The Force Total Loss dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired setting ON Always displays Total Loss Cum Loss OFF Depending on conditions Loss Cum Loss slot is displayed for the Total 4 12 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual
541. t least 40 m 120 ft and 40 data points longer than the pulse width MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 9 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode Grid Display Select the format for the grid lines on the trace screen To set the Grid Display 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Grid Display Press Enter The Grid Display dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired setting Dotted A dotted line grid is used for trace display Solid A solid line grid is used for trace display 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Grid Display field Force Total Loss Select the display settings for Total Loss Cum Loss dB To set the Force Total Loss 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Force Total Loss 2 Press Enter The Force Total Loss dialog appears 3 Highlight the desired setting ON Always displays Total Loss Cum Loss Wok kK OFF Depending on conditions Loss Cum Loss slot Note Total Loss Cum Loss cannot be displayed when is displayed for the Total e Anevent appeared before backscatter could be found after the launch reflection e An event exists 1 1 pulse widths after the launch backscatter e Fiber end cannot be detected 4 Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Force Total Loss field Event Icon Movement in Fiber Visualizer This setting function appli
542. t 063 MMF Loss measurement 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB whichever is greater accuracy linearity MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 9 Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common Cont d tem __Speafieations Remarks measurement accuracy 058 073 SME 063 Distance measurement 1 m 3 x measured distance x 10 marker accuracy resolution Distance range 0 5 1 2 5 5 10 25 50 100 200 300 km Opt 053 055 056 057 IOR 1 500000 058 073 SME063 0 5 1 2 5 5 10 25 50 100 km Opt 063 MMF Marker resolution 0 05 to 400 m Opt 053 055 056 057 IOR 1 500000 058 073 SME063 0 05 to 200 m Opt 063 MMF Sampling resolution 0 05 to 60 m Opt 053 055 056 057 IOR 1 500000 058 073 SME063 0 05 to 20 m Opt 063 MMF Number of sampling Normal 5001 Either value is points High density 15001 20001 or 25001 automatically selected Very high density 100001 or 150001 depending on the distance range Only normal mode and high density mode can be selected in MMF 0 13 0 33 0 65 1 3 3 25 6 5 13 dB div Eo IOR settings 1 300000 to 1 700000 0 000001 steps o C Connection check Check whether or not the fiber is connected correctly to the OTDR measurement port Active fiber check Checks the currently attached fiber under test to detect whether the fiber is carrying traffic 40 dBm or more wavelength 1 55 pm before firing the OTDR laser source Active fiber check does not apply for t
543. t for ORL Calculation ccccccccccccsccecescecsseseesseuseeeeeesesseeseees 6 11 Event Table Span Calculation cccecccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeee 6 11 A B Span Analysis ccccceccceeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeneeeetaaeeeeeaeeetaas 6 11 TAPES OLAS i csc cain n eaa A a seus sitet Geaeaid aE AEE 6 11 Auto Detect ParaMete ss ccccccccccescececeseeceesseceeaeeeseeseeesneseeeaneeeaes 6 11 Splice LOSS iioii ee Haase end Gees 6 12 Reflectance oo eee cececcecsccsceseceseuseeeesececseeuseseueuseuseeusesuenseceaeeuueuseuaeeseeeas 6 12 Fiber End ea a e an e aa a a re aei aapea sled 6 13 METERNE ao REEE E E a T 6 13 Splitter LOSS ae eaa atin we erie 6 13 Pass Fail Thresholds Parameters s ssssesssseeeeeeeeeeeseseseneeeeeeeeaea 6 14 Non Reflective Event Loss fusion cccececcsesseceeceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseenes 6 15 Reflective Event Loss connector Mechanical sssr 6 15 Reflectance wie frie cte cient cee ie Te aoe 6 16 Fiber LOSS AB KM ccccccccccecscececeeeeceeeeeeeseeesseseeeeseseceeeeeeeuenseeeeeananaea 6 17 Total LOSS Ar aa a A tev dieaetiteseaserdluss tabla re 6 18 Toan Ie Ee E A Ae E T 6 18 ADOUt Screenin N a a a a a i 6 19 OTDR Construction Setup Screen cccccccceeeeeceeeeseeeteeeeeeeseaees 6 20 Store Files Atai a a Nid ea r Coeaediaees 6 20 eA EAE a E EA EO E E 6 21 Filename nar a A e dudes dveradeuddedv 6 23 Filename ElQMent cccccceeceececeeeceesce
544. t of the event Press the Rotary knob once to select the right marker qd on the right LSA interval Turn the Rotary knob clockwise until the Splice Loss reading stabilizes Press Exit f6 the Cursor softkeys close and the Level Two softkeys return Setting LSA Defaults To reset the LSA cursors to the factory default setting 1 With the Cursor softkeys displayed press Default LSA 3 2 Press Exit f6 the Cursor softkeys close and the Level Two softkeys return Note This function is not available for the OTDR Construction application at the current software release 2 Point LSA The Least Squares Approximation LSA 2 Point Loss measurement uses an LSA technique to calculate the best Y intercept values based on the current cursor positions Intervals directly to the right of Cursor A and left of Cursor B will be used to calculate the intercept values The length of the LSA intervals is user selectable The default value is approximately 400 meters The ends of the intervals are displayed as X marks as shown in the following figure 7 10 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements OTDR Standard AUTO15500009 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 GD 9 00h 80 3 OL Average Time 15 Sec 13 0 4 ah 1oR BSC 1 468200 26 0 p a A 4 81 50 c A Loss Mode 39 0 x 2 PtLSA 52 0 z I Cursors ire ant 0 25 50 75 100km A 0 6452km 2 PtLSA WL 1550 nm SM IOR 1 46
545. t screen Light Source Off On f1 Press the Light Source Off softkey to start the optical light source The red legend on the softkey as well as the legend in the Light Source Wavelength indicator see item 2 in Figure 8 4 on page 8 4 change to On In addition the background of the Light Source Wavelength indicator changes from black to red Light Source Wavelength f2 Press the Light Source Wavelength softkey to scroll through the available wavelengths for the MT9083 Series Optical Light Source Check the Light Source Wavelength indicator see item 1 in Figure 8 4 on page 8 4 for the currently selected wavelength PNote This softkey also toggles the Power Meter Wavelength selection field when the selected Light Source wavelength matches one of the calibrated Power Meter wavelengths MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 8 7 Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Power Meter Wavelength f3 Press the Power Meter Wavelength softkey to scroll through the calibrated wavelengths for the optional Power Meter Modulation f4 Press the Modulation softkey to scroll through the modulation rates for Loss Test Set The red legend on the softkey displays the current modulation rate The four modulation rates are as follow e CW Continuous Wave e 270 Hz e 61kHz e 2kHz Set Zero f5 Press the Set Zero softkey to adjust the optical power meter offset Loss Table f6 Press the Loss Table softkey
546. t shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License 12 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS As between Initial Developer and the Contributors each party is responsible for claims and damages arising directly or indirectly out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability 13 MULTIPLE LICENSED CODE Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as Multiple Licensed Multiple Licensed means that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses if any specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A EXHIBIT A Mozilla Public License The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1 1 the License you may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www mozilla org MPL Software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS basis WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License The Original Code is The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Portions created
547. t step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to delete Press More gt gt f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete the selected files or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files Use the following procedure to delete all of the files in a directory or folder MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 25 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option 11 26 To delete all files in a directory or folder 1 Wy ges Oo BS Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen or the Load screen Select the desired folder directory in which contains the file to be deleted Press the Down Arrow key to open the selected folder directory Press More f6 Press Select All f4 A bullet appears before each filename Note If the Select All softkey f4 is dimmed toggle f3 so that the legend on the softkey reads Multi Select Off Press More f6 Press Delete f5 The following message appears Are you sure you want to delete the current selection Press Yes f1 to delete all files in the selected directory or press No f2 to cancel without deleting the files MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Copying Files Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Use either the Save screen or the Load screen to copy data files stored in the inte
548. t the desired option None Snap to Template End or Snap to Trace End on the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment field 2 Toggle the Enter key or the Rotary knob to select the desire option 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen Note The Snap to options should only be used if all traces have correct fiber end events Detailed explanation of the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment function The following explanation assumes the Template Settings screen settings other than the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment options are as follows e Event Determination Merge e Trace Priority OFF e Distance 30 e Absolute Distance 1 km MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 65 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Next assuming the Template trace and Target trace event locations are as follows Target trace t _ _ _ _ ___ __ __9 __ _ event locations 15 30 45 Template trace _ __ __ _ event locations 10 20 40 The following describes the corrections performed when each option is selected for the example shown above e If None is selected 1 The event locations for the Target trace and Template trace events remain unchanged and correlation is performed without using the Distance Helix Factor Adjustment function Target trace 3 _ _0 _0 __ _ _ __ _ event locations 10 15 20 30 40 after correlation IfSnap to Template End is selected 1 Ea
549. t the file name If a USB keyboard is connected you can modify the name directly from the keyboard When all of the desired characters are entered press the Enter key to use the new base filename or press the ESC key to close the Base Filename dialog box without changing the base filename 2014 Jan 26 15 31 Base Filename AUTO1310nm0001 SOR AUTO WLEN NUM Site BES Sector location name iy ice i eee A CA i ee a ae ee ee ee eee A ee ee lia alll lt Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 4 8 Base Filename Base Filename dialog box MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode In OTDR Standard Mode the items below are displayed for MACRO Table 4 1 MACRO Buttons Character strings to insert Number 4 digit serial number starting with the number in the Number field yy mm dd Digits to represent Year Month Day Digits to represent Hour Minute Second Wavelength Wavelength used for measurement Start Number Use this field to establish a start number for the auto increment section of the Base Filename You can set a start number for each test wavelength available on the MT9083 Series in use or apply the same start number to all wavelengths The range of setting for the Start Number is from 1 to 9999 set in increments of 1 Note The wavelength listed in parentheses after the text Start Number will vary with the current
550. t the firmware file APM and copy it to the MT9083 Series Internal Memory 4 Disconnect the USB cable Using USB Memory Stick 1 Copy the firmware file APM to the USB Memory Stick connected to the PC 2 Remove the USB Memory Stick from the PC as advised and insert the stick to the MT9083 Series Updating Firmware Data 1 2 3 4 Press the Setup key on the MT9083 Series Press About f6 The About screen appears Press the Enter key the Update Firmware dialog appears Locate the APM file in the Internal Memory and press the Enter key Information about the APM file is displayed Press f1 to begin the update Wait for the update to complete Do not power off the MT9083 Series The unit will restart automatically when the update is complete MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 27 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Restore Defaults The Restore Defaults button on the About tab restores factory defaults for all OTDR applications for the following setup screens Preferences Thresholds and AutoSave Note e General setups are not affected by the Restore Defaults function e Password Settings are restored factory defaults if you execute the Restore Defaults e The access log file is deleted if you execute the Restore Defaults To restore the default settings for the OTDR test applications 1 Press the Setup key Press About f6 3 Highlight Restore Defaults and then press the Enter
551. table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not de rived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary
552. tandard AUTO15500010 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 CS 99 00h 80 4 Cursors 13 0 7 Unlocked Move LSA Off 16 25 ef X a Default LSA 19 5 4 F x 22 75 z P T T F PEI 12 13 km A 12 1457 km Splice Loss WL 1550nmSM IOR 1 468200 B 52 4877 km 1 784 DR 100 4 km RES 5 003m A gt B 40 3421 km Refl 40 537 PW 4us HR AVG 5120 Next Event Prev Event Trace To modify the loss intervals Set the Loss Mode to Splice Loss Move Cursor A to the start of the desired event see the figure above Toggle Display From f5 to Display from A Expand the trace around Cursor A using the Right and Up Arrow keys Use the Rotary knob to place Cursor A at the beginning of the splice Press More gt gt f6 and then press Cursors f5 The Cursor softkeys appear 7 Press Move LSA Off f2 The softkey legend changes to Move LSA On and the a marker on the left LSA interval changes from X to W a larger X with a diamond superimposed on it GN RS ee MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 9 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements Note 10 11 Adjust the left LSA interval h only if part of it falls within the preceding event Press the Rotary knob twice to change the left marker c on the right LSA interval from X to and then rotate the Rotary knob clockwise until the X is centered on linear backscatter to the righ
553. ted the events in the template trace and the collected trace are correlated and merged MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Trace Priority The Trace Priority check box gives the target trace event location priority over correlated events from the template when Merge is selected If cleared non correlated template events are inserted into the target trace correlated template events replace the correlating target trace events and all other target trace events are left unchanged To Set the Trace Priority 1 Use the Left Right Up Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the Trace Priority field 2 Toggle the Enter key to select or clear the check box for the trace priority 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Template Setting screen e Ifthe Trace Priority check box is cleared non correlated template events are inserted into the target trace correlated template events replace the correlating target trace events and all other target trace events are left unchanged e If the Trace Priority check box is selected only non correlated template events are inserted into the target trace all other events are left unchanged Note Correlation of events is determined by the correlation window which is based on the Distance and Absolute Distance settings If more than one target trace Event falls within the correlation window of a template event the closest event is considered correlated
554. ted waveform Fresnel reflection IOR 1 500000 Pulse width 3 ns Return loss 40 dB Temperature 25 C A 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix A Specifications MT9083C2 ACCESS Master MT9083C2 ACCESS Master Composition e Option 053 SMF 1 31 1 55 pm OTDR e Option 057 SMF 1 31 1 55 1 625 pm OTDR Dynamic range Opt 053 1 31 1 55 um Temperature 25 C S N 1 45 45 dB 20 ps Distance range 100 Typ 46 46 dB 25 C km 25 25 dB 100 ns Averaging time 180 sec Opt 057 1 31 1 55 1 625 um 45 45 43 dB 20 ps Typ 46 46 44 dB 25 C 25 25 23 dB 100 ns Dead zone Temperature 25 C Back scattered light Deviation 0 5 dB 1 Enhanced Range mode IOR 1 500000 Opt 053 057 1 31 um lt 6 0 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 55 pm lt 6 5 m Return loss 40 dB 1 625 pm lt 7 0 m Opt 057 only 1 31 um lt 3 8 m Pulse width 10 ns 1 55 pm lt 4 3 m Return loss 55 dB 1 625 pm lt 4 8 m Opt 057 only Dead zone lt 1 0 m Typ 0 8 m The width for 1 5 dB Fresnel reflection lower than the peak IOR 1 500000 value of the reflected waveform Pulse width 3 ns Return loss 40 dB Temperature 25 C MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual A 7 Appendix A Specifications MT9083A2 B2 C2 ACCESS Master Common Composition e Option 002 102 Visible LD Only one can be Option 004 104 204 selected from three SMF Optical Power Meter optional porr mietet e
555. ter The Auto Patch cord Removal dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no Auto Patch cord Removal currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the Auto Patch cord Removal 3 Ifthe Auto Patch cord Removal dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the event number setting mode 4 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired event number setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad 5 Press Enter again to close the dialog and save the current setting The event tables shows the distance information of dummy fiber OTDR Standard 2012 Jul 4 10 00 GD 99 00h 80 Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 0 0000km Ee 1 802 40 492 sek k 0 000 2 20 0909km 0 782 49 958 0 200 5 821 3 40 3351km ME Fiber End 32 404 0 204 10 743 Analyze dB Horiz Shift 12 1526 km Vert Shift 0 000 dB EY 0 0 4 4 Auto Zoom 13 0 off 26 0 4 Calc ORL 39 0 25 A 0 0000 km B 52 4877 km A gt B 52 4877 km Total Events Fiber Length Total Loss 40 3351 km 10 743 dB Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 4 5 Auto Patch Screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 11 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Use the following procedure to set Auto Patch cord Removal to None when i
556. test wavelength setting See Setting the Source Wavelength on page 4 68 for details To set the Start Number 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Start Number and then press the Enter key The Start Number dialog appears MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 27 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Start Number 1310 1 9999 Apply to All Wavelengths Yes No Figure 4 9 Start Number Dialog Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the Start number Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select either Yes or No in the Apply to All Wavelengths field Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the start number for the current test wavelength or for all wavelengths depending on the selection made in step 3 is set Enabled AutoSave This parameter sets the status for the AutoSave function Select from the following setting Off No AutoSave is performed after the measurement is complete On AutoSave is performed after the measurement is complete Verify The Save screen appears after the measurement is complete so you can verify the Auto Filename To select the AutoSave Enabled status 4 28 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Enabled in the AutoSave field and the
557. th to 1310 nm See Setting the Source Wavelength on page 4 68 b Range Pulse width f4 and set the Pulse Width to 100 ns See Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width on page 4 68 Press More f6 to display the Level Two softkeys then press Loss Mode 3 and set the loss mode to 2 Pt LSA See Setting the Loss Mode on page 4 74 Press More f6 twice to return to the Level One softkeys and then press Test f1 to start the measurement Measure the loss Lx for each 3 km at 1310 nm up to approximately 30 km then calculate the average loss Laye_m for these Perform for each fiber when there are fibers connected at this time Calculate the difference Lgiff n between loss L and average loss cere ya Check that the difference Lgiff_n is less than 0 1 dB MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Measuring from L4 to Le Measuring from Lg to Ly Disabled Not Reap euiote Connector Connection Part Lo Lay wannaly 4 Lio Ly Note L7 and L8 cannot be measured because a connector connection part step exists in the target period Figure 12 11 Example When a Fiber 20 km x 2 is connected Measuring L to L6 Lave_1 L1 L2 L3 L4 Ls Le 6 Laiff 1 Ly Lave_1 Lait 2 Lo Lie pees Lait 6 Le Lave_1 Measuring Lg to Ly Lave_2 Lo Lio Lii Fyrst L amp 9 1 Laif 9 Lo Lave_2 Laif 10 L10 Lave_
558. the Loss Table Comment f5 Press the Comment softkey to open the Text Entry dialog box Back f6 Press the Back softkey to return to the Loss Test Set screen 8 10 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode Setting Loss Test Set Measurement Parameters Setting the Light Source Wavelength Note This procedure only applies when using the MT9083 Series light source To set the Light Source wavelength e Press Light Source Wavelength f2 Each key press toggles to the next light source wavelength The current wavelength is indicated by the Light Source Wavelength indicator see item 1 in Figure 8 4 on page 8 4 This softkey also toggles the Power Meter Wavelength selection field when the selected Light Source wavelength matches one of the calibrated Power Meter wavelengths See item 1 in Figure 8 5 on page 8 4 for the location of the indicator Single wavelength units will sound an error tone when Light Source Wavelength f2 is pressed Setting the Power Meter Wavelength The MT9083 Series optional Power Meter is calibrated at the following wavelengths e 850 nm 1300 nm 1310 nm 1383 nm 1490 nm 1550 nm 1625 nm 1650 nm These wavelengths only available on units equipped with Option 007 To set the Power Meter wavelength e Press Power Meter Wavelength f3 Each key press toggles to the next power meter wavelength The current wavelength
559. the desired cursor MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 35 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Precise Positioning of the Active Cursor To precisely position the cursor Select the desired cursor see Setting the Active Cursor above 2 Press Display From f5 and select the desired display from setting Display From A or Display From B depending on which is cursor is currently selected as the active cursor 3 Use the Left Right Up and Down Arrow keys to zoom up the desired amount See Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract on page 5 36 for details 4 Turn the Rotary knob to position the active cursor until the desired cursor distance is displayed in the Cursor Distance Information area see item 3 in Figure 5 12 on page 5 23 Locking and Unlocking Cursors To lock the cursors 1 Set Cursor B as the active cursor 2 Press Cursors f4 the Cursor softkeys appear 3 Toggle Cursors f1 until the red legend on the softkey reads Locked When the cursors are locked the distance between the cursors remains fixed To unlock the cursors Press Cursors f4 the Cursor softkeys appear 2 Press Cursors Locked f1 the red legend on the softkey changes to Unlocked 3 Press Exit f6 to close the Cursor softkeys and return to the Level Two softkeys Horizontal and Vertical Expand and Contract Use the Horizontal Vertical expand to expand a section of the trace when e Positioning t
560. the file name Registration of Word Buttons The buttons can be added to display in the File Name dialog box 1 Edit the button name and group name in text file and save in the USB memory stick Connect the USB memory stick to ACCESS Master 3 Press Load f2 to display the file selection screen Select the created test file and press the Enter key Text file contents Buttons Text file contents Tohoku Tohoku Mode OTDR Aomori Iwate Akita Miyagi Yamagata Fukushima Yamagata Figure 3 21 File Format for Word Button Registration e Put the group name in brackets The group name can be written in two lines and is used as new line character Example Tohoku Japan Note When language is set to Chinese Simplified is displayed as MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 3 39 Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Specify Mode to select application to display buttons OTDR or VIP can be set for Mode Then write the characters to display on the buttons Up to 10 mixed characters of alphabets numbers and symbols can be registered for button display However the characters below are not usable for a file name g 2 D 9999999999999 99 999999 ee 3 gt gt 8 gt 39 3 5 Up to 20 groups up to 25 words each can be registered Characters of different languages can be displayed for group names However if the language is changed the characters are not displayed pr
561. the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to ad dress new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are in compatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Soft ware Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software
562. the selected file Press Paste f2 A message box stating Copy 1 1 along with the name of the file appears briefly Use the following procedure to copy multiple files in a directory MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 23 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 9 24 To copy multiple files i po NAY Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying either the Save screen see Figure 9 8 on page 9 20 or the Load screen see Figure 9 9 on page 9 25 Press More f6 Press Multi Select Off f3 The red legend on the softkey changes to On Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight the first file to copy and then press the Enter key A bullet appears before the selected file name and the total size of the selected files is shown on the bottom Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the files you want to copy Press Copy f1 Select the desired folder directory in which to paste the selected files Press Paste f2 A message box appears displaying the count for each copied file as it is being pasted to the new directory folder as well as its filename The message box closes when all of the selected files are pasted to their new location Use the following procedure to copy all of the files in a directory folder To copy all files in a directory or folder 1 Press the Save key or the File key if not already displaying eit
563. the unit as well as USB ports for uploading and downloading files The DC power connection is also located on the top panel along with LED indicators for the Battery Changing and External Power status Figure 2 3 provides an example of a typical unit s top panel Note The configuration of the top panel will vary depending on the optics and options installed in a given unit Figure 2 3 MT 9083 Series Top Panel OPM Optical Power Meter port Battery Charging indicator External Power indicator External power DC Power Connection VLD port Visual Fault Locate port Measurement port 2 Measurement port 1 USB port down USB port up 09 AN WBN BR NH MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview AC Charger Adapter The MT9083 Series include an AC charger adapter as standard equipment The battery pack requires 5 hours to fully charge The unit may be operated while recharging the battery pack but doing so may result in less than a full recharge of the battery AC Power Operation Use the following procedure to operate the MT9083 Series on AC power To run the unit on the AC Charger Adapter 1 2 3 4 Attach the jack from the AC charger adapter to the DC input located on the top connector panel of the MT9083 Series see Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 Attach the AC line cord to the receptacle on the AC charger adapter Insert the plug from the AC line cord into an AC outlet Press the
564. thernet Converter USB1 1 2 0 support 10 100 BASE T USB Hub USB1 1 2 0 support 2 ports or more ull Required for USB memory Note Anritsu does not guarantee the performance of USB Ethernet converters that are not supplied by Anritsu 14 2 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Preparation Cable connection Connect the Ethernet cable to the USB connector of the main unit via USB Ethernet converter scene nn USB Ethernet converter f Ethernet cable Figure 14 2 Ethernet Cable Connection MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 14 3 Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Network Setup on Main Unit To prepare the unit for connection to the network and remote control it is necessary to establish a proper network address and password for the unit Once the unit is powered on and the Top Menu is displayed perform the following steps 1 Connect the USB end of the USB to Ethernet adapter to the USB type A port of the MT9083 The Remote Setup screen displays gt Note If the Ethernet adapter is plugged and de plugged too frequently USB port may stop working If this is the case turn off the power of MT9083 once and turn back on Remote Setup 2012 Jul 1 10 00 IP Address 192 168 1 2 IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway None SCPI Port Number 2288 Remote GUI Password Remote GUI Port Number 80 Used to set the IP Address Press the Up Down
565. tical expand to expand a section of the trace when e Positioning the cursors for a test e Adjusting the LSA intervals To expand an area 1 Position the desired cursor A or B to the approximate position 2 Toggle Display From f5 to the desired mode Display From A or Display From B depending on the cursor selected in step 1 3 Press the Up Arrow key Each press decreases the dB division value of the vertical grid scale by a factor of two Press the Right Arrow key Each press decreases the distance division value on the horizontal grid scale by a factor of two To contract an area e Press the Down Arrow key Each press increases the dB division value of the vertical grid scale by a factor of two 4 58 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode e Press the Left Arrow key Each press increases the distance division value on the horizontal grid scale by a factor of two Note An error tone sounds when you reach the full expand contract value for either axis MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 59 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Template Mode Template mode is a function to display event information by generating a predefined event table and mapping the collected trace onto the event conditions in this event table Template soft key layer To Enter the Template soft key layer 1 Make sure that the current trace displays an Event table 2 Toggle More gt gt
566. tion System Setups About Screen The About screen displays the following information pertaining to the MT9083 Series currently being used e System Information Manufacturer Model Serial Number Hardware Version Software Version UNITROM Version To access the About screen 1 Press the Setup key if you are not currently in setups 2 Press About f6 the About screen appears see Figure 3 13 on page 3 26 3 Press the Enter key to update the firmware see Updating Firmware on page 3 27 for details OR Press the ESC key to close the About screen 2012 Jul 1 10 00 a 9 00h_ 80 5 System Information Manufacturer Anritsu Model MT9083 2 057 General Serial Number Hardware Version 0 pesa Version 1 03 Password UNITROM Version 1 01 Settings FPGA Version 1 00 ommna A Restore Defaults Erase Internal Memory About Press Enter to update firmware or ESC to exit Figure 3 13 About Screen 3 26 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Updating Firmware A CAUTION Always use the AC Charge Adapter to power the MT9083 Series when performing a firmware update Use the following procedure to update the MT9083 Series firmware Loading Firmware Data Using USB Cable 1 Connect the MT9083 Series to a USB port on the PC via the provided USB cable 2 A mass storage window should open if not open it via Windows Explorer 3 Selec
567. tively unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either i agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reason able royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant or ii withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant If within 60 days of notice a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2 1 and or 2 2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above b any software hardware or device other than such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent then any rights granted to You by such MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License Participant under Sections 2 1 b and 2 2 b are revoked effective as of the date You first made used sold distributed or had made Modifications made by that Participant 8 3 If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved such as by license or settlement prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections 2 1 or 2 2 shall be
568. tly set threshold value which is used to determines the Pass Fail status of the Loss reading as displayed in the Loss Table see item 5 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 Threshold values can be entered for each of the power meter s calibrated wavelengths MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 9 3 Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS 9 4 Loss Reading The Loss reading item 6 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 displays the optical power loss value When the reference value is set to None is displayed as a Loss reading requires that a reference value is set When a reference value is set the optical power loss is obtained as follows Optical power loss Reference Optical power measurement In addition when a reference value other than None is set in the Reference Field item 4 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 the background color of the Loss reading changes according to the Pass Fail status established by the value in the Threshold field see item 5 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 Readings that pass have a black background while readings that fail have a red background Port Connection Indicator The measurement port varies according to the optical wavelength of the light to be injected Item 7 in Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 the Port Connection indicator displays the port to be used when testing Note If the optional power meter is present the access port is chang
569. to 1655 nm Peak value 1650 nm 15 dBm or less Oua output Pulse width 1 ps Pulse width 1 ps Wavelength range of 20 dB less than peak value pe e 1 65 Pulse width 20 ps KAE Distance range 100 km nae Pow Dr Average time 180 seconds 1 m 3 x measurement distance x 10 marker resolution 0 05 dB dB or 0 1 dB Whichever is greater Light Source output 5 1 5 dBm 1310 230 nm 1550 nm 1550 30 nm 1650 nm 1650 5 nm Indicative a Dynamic range S N 1 Distance measurement accuracy Loss measurement accuracy Linearity aslsiz Sls Se lss Gi an Slo jel EE Sl S Ss sts s a a ala silolo ayala L 5 amp B 5 5 da 3 l E Q x Q K MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 37 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration OPM Measurement 6 5 1550 nm CW accuracy 20 dBm VLD Center wavelength 650 nm 15 nm Optical output power 0 3 dBm Note 1 OLS Optical light source for fiber identification OPM Optical power meter VLD Visible laser diode 2 Note that the measurement port varies according to the measurement wavelength 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 0 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 25 C When Option 002 installed OPM Option Option 007 5 10 dBm 1310 1550 nm CW 10 dBm 850 nm CW 25 C 12 38 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration MT9083B2 Option 056 C Testien Specification Results
570. to 20 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Splitter Loss threshold 1 5 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Splitter Loss Press Enter The Splitter Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs If the Splitter Loss dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set the Splitter Loss threshold to None when it is currently set in dBs To set the Splitter Loss threshold to None lL Highlight Splitter Loss and then press the Enter key The Splitter Loss dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 23 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode AutoSave Press AutoSave f5 to access the AutoSave screen This screen provides access to the Auto Filename and AutoSave parameters 2013 Oct 30 05 55 AutoSave AutoSave Directory INTMEM Base Filename AUTO WLEN NUM
571. to a Break the distance from a known point to a break in the fiber Fiber Length Measurement To measure the total length of a fiber 1 Select Display From Origin see Display From on page 4 71 2 Place Cursor A at the end of the test fiber box pulse suppressor if one is used or at 0 0000 km as shown in the following figure LAUNCH CORD FIBER UNDER TEST OTDR dp dp A B Distance MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 7 1 Chapter 7 OTDR Mode Measurements 3 Select Display From A 4 Use the Right and Up Arrow keys to expand the screen horizontally and vertically around Cursor A for more accurate cursor placement 5 Use the Rotary knob to place Cursor A on linear backscatter just prior to the left side of the reflective or non reflective event as shown in the following figure Non Reflective Reflective Cursor 6 Place Cursor B at the end of the fiber see figure in step 2 Select Display From B 8 Use the Right and Up Arrow keys to expand the screen horizontally and vertically around Cursor B for more accurate cursor placement 9 Use the Rotary knob to place Cursor B on linear backscatter just prior to the left side of the reflective or non reflective event see figure in step 5 10 Read the fiber length as the A gt B distance in the Cursor Distance information area see item 3 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 Note If Cursor A was set to 0 0000 km then the A B distance will be th
572. to advance to the Loss Table screen Loss Table Screen The Loss Table screen consists of four main areas as flagged in the following figure Press Loss Table f6 on the Loss Test Set screen see Figure 8 3 on page 8 3 to display the Loss Table screen 8 8 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Loss Test Set Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 2012 Jul 1 10 00 9 00h 80 Light Source Wavelength 1310 nm On Modulation cw Add Power Meter Loss SS asuaan m 8 62dB Overwrite Modulation cw 8 62 dB Reference 15 00 dBm S I e i No WL Loss Power Threshold Comment penu 001 1550nm 8 67dB 6 33dBm 4 002 1550nm 8 67qB 6 33dBm 003 1550nm 8 67dB 6 33dBm Delete All 004 1550nm 8 674B 6 33dBm 005 1550nm 8 32dB 6 68dBm 006 1550nm 5 760B 9 240Bm Comment 007 1550nm 5 81dB 9 19dBm 008 1550nm 5 124B 9 88dBm 009 1550nm 2 494B 12 51dBm 010 1550nm 8 69dB 6 31dBm Back Figure 8 7 Loss Test Set Loss Table screen mM WO N fF Light Source Settings Area The Light Source Settings area displays the wavelength and modulation settings made on the Loss Test Set screen see Figure 8 3 on page 8 3 as well as the current operating status of the Light Source On or Off Power Meter Settings Area The Power Meter Settings area displays the wavelength selection modulation setting and Reference value established on the Loss Test Set
573. to change the value Acceptable values are 1 through 65535 Note If the default port number for HTTP is changed the new port number must be specified in the URL that is entered into the Web browser to start the Remote Control client See Connection on page 14 10 for details To accept changes made to Remote Setup parameters 1 Once all fields have been entered press the Accept f1 key to record the new settings The Remote Setup screen will close and the Top Menu will be shown 2 A network icon will appear at the top of the screen to indicate that remote control communication is active To disable the network connection once the communication is established press Disable Remote f2 key The network icon will disappear Note Upon pressing the Accept f1 key note that any existing network connection will be dropped so the network connection can be re configured to use the new settings If the Remote Client is used to change the network configuration on the Remote Setup screen upon pressing the Accept f1 key its connection will be dropped and the Remote Client will no longer be able to communicate with the Remote Unit In this case it is necessary to re enter the URL in the Web browser using the new IP Address and port if not 80 to obtain a new client connection 14 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Network Setup on PC Follow the steps below to connect the main unit and
574. to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For soft ware which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY AP PLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EI THER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLI CABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIB UTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF TH
575. to return to the Level One softkeys 4 54 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Cursor Softkeys The Cursor softkeys are accessed from the Level Two softkeys by pressing Cursors 4 Toggle f1 so that the red legend on the softkey reads Locked The distance between Cursor A and Cursor B will remain fixed when Cursor B is moved See Locking and Unlocking Cursors on page 4 58 for details Press f2 to toggle the state of the LSA loss intervals When the red legend on the softkey reads On you can adjust the length of the LSA loss intervals Note The Move LSA softkey is only active in the following loss modes Splice Loss 2pt LSA and dB km LSA Press f3 to return the LSA loss intervals to their default settings Note The Default LSA softkey is only active when in the following loss modes Splice Loss 2Pt LSA and dB km LSA Press f6 to close the Cursor softkeys and return to the Level Two softkeys Shift Mode Softkeys The Shift Mode softkeys are accessed from the Level Two softkeys by pressing Shift f5 Toggle f1 to set the Shift Mode Horizontal or Vertical MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 55 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Press f2 to reset the horizontal shift to 0 zero Press 3 to reset the vertical shift to 0 zero Press 6 to close the Shift Mode softkeys and return to the Level Two softkeys Template Mode Softke
576. to start the measurement 12 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 5 Align the active cursor with the rising point of the fiber far end Fresnel return see Selecting and Positioning Cursors on page 4 57 then press the Right Arrow key until the horizontal axis scale is set to 0 005 km div 6 Accurately align the active cursor with the Fresnel return rising point see the following figure then read the absolute distance Check that this value satisfies the specifications Fresnel Return Figure 12 9 Cursor Placement for Distance Measurement Accuracy Test MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 12 21 Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Loss Measurement Accuracy Linearity Perform a vertical axis i e level measurement accuracy test 12 22 Connect the devices as shown in the following figure MT9083 Series SM Optical Fiber 60 km or GI Fiber 12 km Grease for connection Figure 12 10 Loss Measurement Accuracy Linearity Test Connection Diagram Only one wavelength is tested even if the device has multiple wavelengths This section shows the measurement procedure at 1310 nm Test Procedure ile At the Top Menu screen select OTDR Standard and then press the Enter key the OTDR Standard Trace screen appears With the Level One softkeys displayed press the following softkeys a Wavelength f3 and set the waveleng
577. torage 2 Avoid storing in locations with high temperatures above 60 C low temperatures below 20 C or in humidity above 85 3 Avoid storing in locations where there is direct sunlight or in dusty locations 13 4 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 13 Maintenance 4 Avoid storing in locations where water droplets are adhering or where exposed to active gases 5 Avoid storing in locations that may oxidize the MT9083 Series or in locations with severe vibrations 6 Remove the battery pack from the MT9083 Series and store separately Recommended Storage Conditions It is recommended to store the MT9083 Series in the following conditions as well as to satisfy the general notes described above 1 Temperature 5 to 30 C 2 Humidity 40 to 75 3 Locations where there is little daily temperature or humidity changes MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 13 5 Chapter 13 Maintenance Transporting Use the original shipping materials or an approved optional transit case when repacking the MT9083 Series for transport Repack according to the following procedure when the original shipping materials or a transit case are not available To repack the MT9083 Series for transport Clean the MT 9083 Series with a soft dry cloth 2 Make sure that all port covers and fasteners are securely in place 3 Place the MT9083 Series in a polyester bag Make sure that the bag is large enough to s
578. tput on page 3 11 for details A CAUTION Before disconnecting the USB cable between the MT9083 Series and the personal computer be sure to prepare the computer so that the hardware can be removed Otherwise the internal memory may be damaged 2 22 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview USB Down Port This port is used to connect a USB memory USB memory stick a printer a keyboard or the VIP Video Inspection Probe option to the MT 9083 Series USB memory Use a USB memory stick conforming to USB 1 1 Note Not all commercially available USB memory work with this port A CAUTION A mark during access is displayed on screen when recalling saving copying or deleting folders and or files Do not remove USB memory while accessing it USB memory or files may be damaged e USB printer conversion cable Use a USB printer conversion cable conforming to USB 1 1 Note Not all commercially available USB printer conversion cables work with this port e USB keyboard Use a USB keyboard conforming to USB 1 1 Use a 104 key Windows keyboard Use a QWERTY keyboard Note Not all commercially available USB keyboard work with this port The table below shows the mapping between the keys in the front panel and the keys on the USB keyboard F1 F6 f1 f6 hard keys F9 F12 F1 F4 hard keys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 23 Chapter 2 Overview ESC Enter Spacebar Start ha
579. try field 5 With the text cursor positioned at the desired location press the Enter key to enter the character selected highlighted in the text entry field Use the numeric keypad to enter numbers into the text entry field 6 When all the desired characters are entered press OK f6 if you want to use the new Header or press the ESC key if you want to cancel the new Header and close the Text Entry screen 7 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 until all desired text entry fields on the VIP Report Settings screen are edited Include Analysis Results This check box sets the status of the Include Analysis Results function Select either of the followings e Clear the check box Analysis Results are not included in a report e Select the check box Analysis Results are included in a report Include Analysis Details This check box sets the status of the Auto File Name function Select either of the followings e Clear the check box Analysis Details are not included in a report e Select the check box Analysis Details are included in a report MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 11 19 Chapter 11 Video Inspection Probe VIP Option Current Results Only Results in Folder This option button switches setting which analysis result to be included in a report Select either of the followings e Current Results Only Include only the results of the current analysis in a report Note If there is no captured
580. ts Analysis table The range of settings for this parameter is 0 10 dB to 9 99 dB in 0 01dB increments To set the Non Reflective Event Loss threshold 1 5 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Non Reflective Event Loss Press Enter The Non Reflective Event Loss dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs If the Non Reflective Event Loss dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set Non Reflective Event Loss to None when it is currently set in dBs To set Non Reflective Event Loss threshold to None MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 19 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 20 1 Highlight Non Reflective Event Loss and then press the Enter key The Non Reflective Event Loss dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Reflective Event Loss connector mechanical This p
581. ts that are not close together or close in to the OTDR Manual When set to Manual the reported reflectance is based on the positions of both cursors A and B The Manual setting is most useful for reflective events that are close together or close in to the OTDR To set the Reflectance Calculation type 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Reflectance Calculation Press Enter The Reflectance Calculation dialog appears Highlight the desired Reflectance Calculation setting Off Auto or Manual Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Reflectance Calculation field ORL Calculation Set the starting point for ORL Optical Return Loss measurements see ORL Optical Return Loss on page 7 15 for details Select from the following A Cursor the measurement is calculated relative to the A Cursor Origin the measurement is calculated relative to the Origin of the trace Full Trace the measurement is calculated relative to the entire trace To set the ORL Calculation type 1 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight ORL Calculation Press Enter The ORL Calculation dialog appears MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 5 7 Chapter 5 Fiber Visualizer Mode Highlight the desired ORL Calculation setting A Cursor Origin or Full Trace Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is di
582. ty support indemnity or liability terms You offer 3 6 Distribution of Executable Versions You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3 1 3 5 have been met for that Covered Code and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License including a MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3 2 The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients rights relating to the Covered Code You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice which may contain terms different from this License provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient s rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this License If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or
583. u 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selected unit is set Connection Check The Connection Check function confirms whether or not the fiber is connected correctly to the OTDR measurement port To set the Connection Check 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Connection Check 2 Press Enter and then select either On or Off from the dialog MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 3 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the selection is set Active Fiber Check The Active Fiber Check performs a live fiber check on the currently attached fiber under test to detect whether the fiber is carrying traffic before firing any OTDR laser sources e If no traffic is detected the test proceeds normally e If traffic is detected a warning message appears on the screen and the test is aborted To set the Active Fiber Check 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Active Fiber Check 2 Press Enter and then select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The dialog closes and the selection is set Note The Active Fiber Check feature does not apply for the following options Opt 063 0 85 1 3 pm MMF only Auto Analysis When set to On OTDR trace analysis is automatically performed at the completion of data collection for the current fiber under test To set Auto Analysis 1 Use the Up and Do
584. u by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice That s all there is to it MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Appendix C Software License 3 MPL MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 1 1 Definitions 1 0 1 Commercial Use means distribution or other wise making the Covered Code available to a third party 1 1 Contributor means each entity that creates or con tributes to the creation of Modifications 1 2 Contributor Version means the combination of the Original Code prior Modifications used by a Contributor and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor 1 3 Covered Code means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications in each case including portions thereof 1 4 Electronic Distribution Mechanism means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data 1 5 Executable means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code 1 6 Initial Developer means the individual or e
585. um Internal Memory 3Files 954MB Free Save Table Folder _ File Name Date Time A NEWOO03 CSV 12 04 19 13 17 NEWOO2 cSY 12 04 19 13 17 NEWOO01 CSY 12 04 19 13 14 Sort New Folder Delete More gt gt Selected File Size Figure 9 8 Save screen Power Meter mode 2 Press the Enter key The Text Entry dialogbox appears See Renaming a File on page 3 32 for details 3 When you have finished editing the file name the Save screen appears with the edited name highlighted in the File Name field 4 Choose any or all of the following functions if desired or continue at step 5 e Highlight the Medium field and then press the Enter key to toggle through the available selections e Press Sort f3 and then select the method by which the file names are displayed See Sorting Files on page 9 21 for details 9 20 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS e Press New Folder f4 to create a new folder for the file save See New Folder on page 3 40 for details 5 Press Save Table f1 To overwrite the current Loss Table 1 With a Loss Table displayed either the current table after having been saved or a recalled table press the Save key 2 Press Save Table f1 The following message appears File exists already Do you want to overwrite it e Press Yes f1 if you want to overwrite the file
586. uously repeat steps 8 9 and 10 14 When you have finished making all of the desired measurements return to the Preferences screen and set Continuous Pulse Emission to Off Pulse Width Check that the pulse width of the output light of the OTDR satisfies the specifications This test is performed for each wavelength Connect the devices as shown in the following figure MT9083 Series Optical Variable Attenuator Waveform Monitor Oscilloscope Optical Fiber Optical Fiber Figure 12 4 Pulse Width Test Connection Diagram Test Procedure 1 At the Top Menu screen select OTDR Standard and then press the Enter key the OTDR Standard Trace screen appears 12 16 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration 2 With the Level One softkeys displayed press the following softkeys a Wavelength f3 and set the desired wavelength See Setting the Source Wavelength on page 4 68 b Range Pulse width f4 and set the desired distance range and pulse width See Setting the Range Resolution and Pulse Width on page 4 68 3 Press Real Time Off f2 to start real time mode The red legend on the softkey changes to On 4 Adjust the oscilloscope amplitude and time base scale to display the waveform in the oscilloscope Adjust the optical variable attenuator to prevent the waveform monitor from being saturated at this time 5 Observe the oscilloscope waveform a
587. ur eyes rinse them with clean running water and seek medical help If the liquid gets on your skin or clothes wash it off carefully and thoroughly MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual vii Laser Safety Laser Safety Class 1 1M and 3R indicate the danger degree of the laser radiation specified below according to IEC 60825 1 2007 Class 1 Lasers that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing Class 1M Lasers emitting in the wavelength range from 302 5 to 4000 nm that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation but may be hazardous if the user employs optics within the beam Two conditions apply a for diverging beams if the user views the laser output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm or b for collimated beams if the user views the laser output with certain optical instruments for example telescopes and binoculars Class 3R Lasers that emit in the wavelength range from 302 5 to 10 nm where direct intrabeam viewing is potentially hazardous but the risk is lower than for Class 3B lasers CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Z WARNING The laser in this equipment is classified as Class 1 1M or 3R according to the IEC
588. uses the active cursor to snap to the events on the trace When the red legend reads Free you can position the cursors anywhere on the trace grid Place Cursor A near an event and then press f3 to automatically zoom in on the event Press f4 to display the ORL value in the Loss Mode area see item 4 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 Note This softkey is only active when the loss mode is set to ORL Press f5 to toggle the Analysis function On and Off The Event Table for the current trace is displayed when the red legend on the softkey reads On and the table is hidden when the legend reads Off Press 6 to advance to the Level Four softkeys ifthe current trace displays an Event Table If the currently displayed trace does not include an Event Table press 6 to return to the Level One softkeys MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 53 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Level Four Softkeys The Level Four softkeys provide trace editing functions and are only available when the current trace displays an Event Table Press f1 to add a new event to the current event table Note The Add Event softkey is only active in Splice Loss mode Press f2 to edit an event in the current event table Note The Edit Event softkey is only active in Splice Loss mode Press 3 to delete an event from the current event table Press 4 to enter the Template Mode softkeys layer Press 6
589. ut and Wavelength of OTDR Check whether the optical output and center wavelength equivalent to the peak pulse level of the OTDR satisfy the specification Connect the devices as shown in the following figure MT9083 Series Optical Variable Attenuator Optical Spectrum Analyzer Optical Optical Fiber Fiber Optical Power Meter Figure 12 1 Optical Output and Wavelength of OTDR Test Connection Diagram Test Procedure 1 At the Top Menu screen select OTDR Standard and then press the Enter key the OTDR Standard Trace screen appears Press the Setup key and then press Preferences f2 Enter the following number using the Numeric keypad 9083 The legend on softkey f5 appears reading Performance Test 4 Press Performance Test f5 The Performance Test screen appears Note The Performance Test screen is only used during the Optical Output and Wavelength test and is only available in OTDR Standard mode 12 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 12 Performance Test and Calibration Performance Test 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Continuous Pulse Emission Performance Test If on continuous pulse emission will be performed when pressing the Test f1 key in Standard OTDR NOTE This is only for instrument testing purposes Press the Up Down keys to move cursor press Enter to change the value Figure 12 2 Performance Test screen 5 Press the Enter key the Continuous Pulse Emiss
590. ve screenshot 2014 Jan 26 18 08 File Name image0001 PNG image NUM Site location name Keyboard Number S Selected File Size Figure 3 20 Text Entry dialog box 2 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll the highlight from row to row including the File Name field Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to move the highlight within the selected row or to move the text cursor in the base File Name field when the field is highlighted Or Use the Rotary knob to navigate through each character in the character matrix as well as wrapping the highlight to the File Name field 3 Use the fl f4 softkeys for the following Press Small Letter f1 to change the character matrix to lower case letters Press Capital Letter f2 to change the character matrix to upper case letters Press Symbols f3 to change the character matrix to display the symbols available Press Space f4 to insert a blank space in the file name MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups 4 With the desired character highlighted in the character matrix and the text cursor placed in the desired position press the Enter key to enter the selected character in the file name Use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers in the file name 5 When all of the desired characters are entered press OK f6 to use the new file name or press ESC to close the Text Entry dialog box without changing
591. ver 6 Click OK on the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box Connection 1 Open a web browser on your PC 2 In the address bar enter the IP address you set for the Access Master In this example enter http 192 168 1 2 3 The following screen will appear when connection is established When a message indicates no network in found ensure that no problem exists for cable connection network setting at PC and the main unit 14 10 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Control button Enter IP address here Login button AccnxxNextar Remote Winiows Internet Explorer REE 4 Enter the password set at the main unit and then click Login 5 Press Control and the unit s panel screen displays ACCESS Master Top Menu 2012 May 10 09 56 g 6 A network icon EE appears on the upper right of the screen indicating that unit is now control via Remote GUI MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 14 11 Chapter 14 Remote GUI Function Operation Panel operation Just as you use the panel button on the actual main unit you can click the buttons of Remote GUI on screen Available keys for Remote GUI mode turns red when you move the cursor over it oo Figure 14 5 Available Hard Key Display A click on the rotary know moves the marker or cursor The speed with which the cursor and marker moves is determined by the
592. w key to move the cursor in a text box to the right e OTDR mode Horizontally expands a portion of the trace for closer examination Moves the cursor in a text box to the right Up Arrow key e General Setups Press the Up Arrow key to move to the next higher item in a pop up menu e OTDR mode Vertically expands a portion of the trace for closer examination Moves to the next higher item in a pop up menu e Loss Test Set mode Move the highlight to the next higher row in the Loss Table MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 2 5 Chapter 2 Overview Down Arrow key e General Setups Press the Down Arrow key to move to the next lower item in a pop up menu e OTDR mode Vertically contracts a portion of the trace for wider examination Moves to the next lower item in a pop up menu e Loss Test Set mode Move the highlight to the next lower row in the Loss Table Enter Key The Enter key is used for the following Setups General and Application specific e Press the Enter key to open the currently highlighted menu selection e Press the Enter key when in a pop up menu to save any changes made and close the menu OTDR mode e Press the Enter key to toggle the active cursor 2 6 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 2 Overview Start Key Press the Start key when in OTDR mode and Fiber Visualizer mode and VIP mode to start a one
593. w keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Fiber Loss dB km Press Enter The Fiber Loss dB km dialog appears Depending on the current setting the dialog will either state None indicating that there is no threshold currently set or the dialog displays the current setting for the threshold in dBs If the Fiber Loss dB km dialog displays None press the Up or Down Arrow key to change it to the dB setting mode Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to increment or decrement the desired dB setting Or enter it directly with the Numeric keypad Press the Enter key again to close the dialog and save the current setting Use the following procedure to set the Fiber Loss dB km threshold to None when it is currently set in dBs To set the Fiber Loss dB km threshold to None MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 6 17 Chapter 6 OTDR Construction Mode 6 18 1 Highlight Fiber Loss dB km and then press the Enter key The Fiber Loss dB km dialog appears displaying the current dB setting Press None f1 the dialog changes to None 3 Press the Enter key The dialog closes and the parameter is set to None Total Loss This Parameter highlights events in the Event Analysis table when the Total loss Cum Loss dB exceeds the value set The range of settings for this parameter is 0 1 dB to 60 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments To set the Total Loss threshold 1 Use the Up and Down Ar
594. wavelength if necessary Make sure that the modulation mode is set to CW by checking the red legend on the Modulation f4 softkey Toggle the softkey until the red legend reads CW if necessary Press Light Source Off f1 to activate the unit s light source Highlight the Reference field and paste the current Power reading as the reference See To paste the current Power Meter reading as a reference on page 8 14 for details The Loss reading indicates 0 00 dB and the Reference field displays the reference value for the current wavelength Make note of the reading in the Reference field The reference values are manually entered into the MT9083 Series unit at the opposite end in the next procedure see Modifying the Stored Reference for details MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 8 Loss Test Set Mode 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 for any additional wavelengths to be tested Note The Reference value s just stored are retained on power down of the MT9083 Series Modifying the Stored Reference The stored reference values in Unit A need to be input into Unit B and the stored reference values in Unit B need to be input into Unit A 1 To input the Reference Value s noted on the opposite MT9083 Series unit press Light Source Wavelength f2 and select the wavelength to modify 2 Enter the reference from the opposite MT9083 Series by following the steps outlined in To direct enter a Power
595. when the Trace grid contains a trace in the primary trace position and at least one overlay trace OTDR Standard AUTO16250000 SOR 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Gp 9 00h_ 80 A Dist km Loss dB Reflect dB dB km Cum Loss dB 5 8172km B 0 205 kk kkk 1 291 2 12 1553km EJ 1 560 39 868 0 219 2 886 3 32 2370km EUS 0 743 49 057 0 211 8 687 4 52 4821km kM Fiber End 31 708 0 216 13 798 0 20 km 2 Pt Loss WL 1625 nm SM IOR 1 468500 11 910 DR 100 1km RES 5 003 m Refi e Pw 4us HR AVG 11776 A 7 5601 km B 52 4821 km A gt B 44 9221 km More gt gt Trace Analysis Prev Event Next Event Figure 4 30 Trace Screen with Trace Overlay Softkeys Trace Overlay Functions The Trace Overlay functions include e Drop Overlay e Swap Overlay e Hide Show Overlay e Align Overlays Depending on the Trace Overlay function selected the function will either operate on all currently displayed Overlay traces Align Overlays and Hide Show Overlays or on a single user selected overlay trace Drop Overlay and Swap Overlay Drop Overlay Use the following procedure to drop remove a currently displayed Overlay trace MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 85 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode To Drop an Overlay trace 1 When the Trace screen has a Primary trace and one or more Overlay traces displayed press Drop Overlay f1 the Drop Overlay dialog appears
596. with fiber identification equipment fiber identifiers The light source can be set to output at the following modulation rates CW continuous wave 270 Hz 1 kHz or 2 kHz Light Source On Wavelength 1310 sara tty E Figure 1 8 Optical Light Source Screen For further details on Optical Light Source testing see Chapter 9 Optical Power Meter OPM amp Optical Light Source OLS Z WARNING NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the MT 9083 Series nor into the end of a cable connected to the MT9083 Series If laser radiation enters the eye there is a risk of injury MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 1 9 Chapter 1 Quick Start Visual Fault Locate VFL Option The Visual Fault Locate VFL option provides a visual method of fiber and fault identification The VFL works by means of a red laser diode which is visible to the human eye Bends and or breaks in the fiber under test are identified by the visible red glow at the event This provides a method of locating faults within the OTDR dead zone as well as a means of fiber identification Visual Fault Locate 2012 Jul 1 10 00 Light Source On On Anritsu _ ee Figure 1 9 Visual Fault Locate Screen For further details on Visual Fault Locate testing see Chapter 10 Visual Fault Locate VFL Mode Z WARNING NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the MT 9083 Series nor into the end of a c
597. wn Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Analysis Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set Note Auto Analysis is not available in Real Time test mode MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 5 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode 4 6 Auto Scale When set to On Auto Scale provides a trace display that utilizes the maximum amount of horizontal scale for optimum trace viewing To activate Auto Scale 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Auto Scale 2 Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set Event Summary When the Event Summary selection is set to On the Fiber Test Parameters area see item 5 in Figure 4 10 on page 4 30 of the Trace screen is replaced by the Event Summary area listing the Total Events Fiber Length and Total Loss of the current fiber under test To set the Event Summary status 1 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Event Summary 2 Press Enter and select either On or Off from the dialog 3 Press Enter again The menu closes and the selection is set Reflectance Calculation Reflectance is the ratio of reflected power to incident power displayed in dB see Reflectance Measurements on page 7 17 for details The MT9083 Series has three settings for Refl
598. y The Instrument Power Save mode is now set to the desired setting When starting an OTDR test with the Instrument Power Save mode active there is a delay of about one second while the MT9083 Series comes out of standby mode 3 14 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 3 General Operation System Setups Password Settings Use the Password Settings screen to set the following items e General Setting Password Protect e Administrator Setting Password e User Setting Password Password Lifespan Models in the MT9083 Series can be set to allow use only at specific user authorization levels i e set to block access at the Administrator level There are two authorization levels Administrator and User Rights assigned to each authorization level are different Table 3 1 Command by command access restrictions S v Change the Password Protection setting Change the Administrator Password Change the User Password Change the Password Lifespan Password expiration date Record logs automatically Update the firmware Change the Date Change the Local Time Perform a Restore Default Measure OTDR Power Meter OLTS IP Use remote GUI a ae Ce a a a a Tota O a EE a a oe ee a eee ee ee E ai eee eS AE 2 ee ee E Cobe Tt re is ae ee ee a a a ae ee Ee ane a ee ee ae Cia aie Ia Configure to accept SCPI commands With Password Protect ON MT
599. ynamic range Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Real Time Averages field Real Time Attenuation Select the attenuation method used during real time scans To set the Real Time Attenuation 1 4 8 Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Real Time Attenuation Press Enter The Real Time Attenuation dialog appears Highlight the desired setting Auto Attenuation Real Time attenuation is automatically selected Around selected cursor Attenuation is optimized in real time to show the backscatter around the selected active cursor Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Real Time Attenuation field MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Display Mode After Analysis The Display Mode After Analysis setting is used to set the post analysis display mode To set the Display Mode After Analysis Le Use the Up and Down Arrow keys or the Rotary knob to highlight Display Mode After Analysis Press Enter The Display Mode After Analysis dialog appears Highlight the desired setting End Break The display mode focuses on the end break event Full Trace The full trace is displayed in Display from Origin mode Current The display mode and cursor positions remain unchanged Press Enter The dialog closes and the selected setting is displayed in the Di
600. ys The Template Mode softkeys are accessed from the Level Four softkeys by pressing Shift f4 4 56 Press f1 to apply the template to the current primary trace manually Note This softkey is only enabled when a template is present Press f2 to create a template from the current primary trace and enable template mode The template trace is drawn in purple Press f3 to clear the template trace and de activate template mode Note This softkey is only enabled when a template is present Press 4 to open the Template Settings screen MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Press 6 to close the Template Mode softkeys and return to the Level Four softkeys Extension softkeys a Press F1 when the Analysis screen is displayed displays only the waveform on the screen Press F2 when only the waveform is displayed on the screen Analysis selects the event just before the selected one Srv Event Press F3 when the Analysis screen is displayed selects the event just after the selected event R Press F4 when the Analysis screen is displayed selects the event ext Event just after the selected event Note When the Analysis screen is not displayed or the event does not exist this button is invalid displayed in gray Selecting and Positioning Cursors The active cursor is displayed as a red vertical line in the Trace graph Setting the Active Cursor To toggle t
601. ysis status field reads On 6 Press the ESC key to close Setups and return to the OTDR Standard mode Note Auto Analysis is not available in Real Time test mode To analyze a trace when Auto Analysis is not active 4 76 MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode e When the data collection for the current trace concludes press Analysis f5 The red legend on the softkey changes from Off to On anda populated Event Table is displayed above the trace graph Note Ifthe legend on f5 does not read Analysis press the More gt gt softkey f6 until the Level Three softkeys are displayed MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual 4 77 Chapter 4 OTDR Standard Mode Wavelength All Mode Wavelength All mode provides multiple wavelength testing for all singlemode or all multimode wavelengths available for the given MT9083 Series with trace overlay and macro bend detect features Note e Mixed singlemode multimode testing is not supported Wavelength All Test Parameters 4 78 The following section outlines setting the test parameters when in Wavelength All mode Setting the Source Wavelength to All To set the source wavelength to All e Press Wavelength f3 to toggle through the source wavelengths until the red legend on the softkey reads All Setting the Test Parameters When the Wavelength softkey f3 is set to All the f4 softkey legen

MT9083 Series ACCESS Master Operation Manual ANRITSU

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents